Q2 (16 Marks)
Cargo & Tankers 🔥 Repeated 4x
With reference to the carriage and pumping of liquefied gas cargo:
(a) Sketch a suitable pumping system labeling the component parts
(b) State:
(i) Why submerged hydraulically driven pumps are not used
(ii) How overheating of pump drive shaft bearings is avoided;
(c) State now the risk of fire and explosion in cargo tanks is obviated both in the loaded and discharged condition.
Appeared In: Jan 2025 - 1 Sep 2023 Feb 2023 Jan 2017
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(ii) Overheating of the pump drive shaft bearings is prevented by using the shaft housing (which also acts as a cargo riser) to cool and lubricate the bearings.
- Continuous boil-off gas reliquefaction
- Relief valves to release excess pressure
- Inert gas blanketing of the cargo hold; and
- If cargo hold is considered as secondary barrier, then if primary barrier/ cargo tank leaks then the flammable gas should not get oxygen to from an explosive mixture. So cargo hold is inverted.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q4 (16 Marks)
Auxiliary Machinery 🔥 Repeated 2x
(a) Explain the necessity of intercoolers on a multi-stage compressor. What attention is required to keep them safe and in good working order? Sketch and describe an intercooler suitable for a 2400 kPa compressor and state the materials used.
(b) What attention is needed before opening up for inspection? What faults are likely to develop in an air compressor and how are they remedied.
Appeared In: Mar 2021 Jan 2017
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- Compressing air generates heat, and intercoolers reduce the temperature of air before it enters the next stage, protecting components from heat damage.
- Cooler air requires less work for compression in subsequent stages, improving overall efficiency.
- By lowering operating temperatures, intercoolers reduce thermal stresses on components, enhancing durability.
- Cooling condenses moisture in the air, preventing water accumulation in downstream equipment.
To Keep Intercoolers safe and in good working condition:
- Ensure a continuous supply of cooling water.
- Regularly clean the intercooler to maintain efficient heat exchange.
- Drain accumulated oil and water frequently.
- Verify that the intercooler drain line is clear.
- Inspect and maintain the bursting disc to prevent failure under excessive pressure.
The sketch depicts a multi-tubular intercooler suitable for a 2400 kPa compressor. It uses a shell-and-tube design. The compressor's high-pressure air flows through numerous small-diameter copper tubes, maximizing the surface area for heat exchange. Cooling water circulates around the tubes in a cast iron jacket, absorbing the heat from the compressed air. A copper or brass bursting disc serves as a safety pressure relief device.
Materials Used:
- Body: Cast iron (provides strength and corrosion resistance)
- Tubes: Copper (excellent thermal conductivity)
- Bursting Disc: Copper/Brass/Steel (depending on pressure requirements)
- Ensure the electrical circuit is switched off and tagged with "Men at Work."
- Fully drain the compressor, intercoolers, and air receivers to release residual pressure.
- Verify that the discharge valve is not leaking air into the system.
- Remove dirt and debris from around the compressor to prevent contamination during inspection.
- Allow the compressor to cool if it has been in operation to prevent burns or thermal stresses.
- Wear appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE), including safety glasses, gloves etc, depending on the conditions.
Likely faults and remedy:
The most effective way to prevent faults and ensure long-term reliability is through a rigorous preventative maintenance schedule (PMS) – including regular inspections, cleaning, component replacements, and lubrication as per the manufacturer's recommendations.
Maintenance Recommendations:
- Overhaul suction and discharge valves every 1000 hours.
- Replace air filters every 500 hours.
- Inspect and test relief valves every 4000 hours.
- Check IR for motor windings every 2000 hours.
- Change lubricating oil every 2500 hours.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q1 (16 Marks)
Control & Instrumentation 🔥 Repeated 7x
Describe with a sketch a pneumatic relay and show how feedback can be achieved when such a relay is used in conjunction with a flapper mechanism.
Appeared In: Mar 2025 Sep 2023 Oct 2020 Oct 2018 Aug 2018 Jul 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The pneumatic relay operates on the principle of a nozzle-flapper arrangement. Air supply pressure acts on a diaphragm located below a spring. A rod and plug, connected to the diaphragm, control the flow of output air through a nozzle. A flapper is positioned near the nozzle.
Operation:
- An input signal (which can be a change in pressure or displacement of the flapper) affects the flapper's position.
- Flapper movement changes the distance between the flapper and the nozzle. A decrease in distance (flapper closer to the nozzle) restricts the output airflow. Conversely, an increase in distance increases output airflow. This is the direct action of the relay.
- Changes in the output air flow alter the back pressure at the nozzle.
- Increased nozzle back pressure pushes the diaphragm downwards, compressing the spring and further reducing the output airflow. Decreased nozzle back pressure allows the spring to push the diaphragm upwards, increasing output airflow.
- A portion of the output air is fed back through a line connected to a bellows and a feedback-adjusting spring (as shown in the sketch). This feedback pressure acts against the diaphragm, opposing the effect of the input signal. The bellows and spring arrangement allow the system to fine-tune the feedback strength. This negative feedback stabilises the system and increases the control range, preventing excessive overshoot or oscillation. The feedback mechanism subtracts from the effective input pressure, acting as a negative feedback loop.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q2 (16 Marks)
Steering & Deck Machinery 🔥 Repeated 10x
Sketch and describe a "fail safe steering gear" suitable for use on a tanker of more than 100,000 T dwt. Explain the sequence of events that take place when an oil leak takes place in one of the hydraulic pipe lines.
Appeared In: Oct 2024 Dec 2023 Aug 2023 Jul 2023 Mar 2023 Feb 2021 Feb 2019 Oct 2018 Aug 2018 Jul 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
According to SOLAS chapter - 2, part 1, regulation 29.16, every tanker of more than 10,000 GT shall comply with the following:
- The main steering capability due to a single failure in any part of one of the power actuating systems shall be regained in not more than 45 seconds.
- The main steering shall comprise at least two identical power actuating systems, each capable of meeting the requirements. Loss of fluid from one system shall be capable of being detected, and the defective system shall automatically get isolated so that the other system shall remain fully operational
Considering the above regulatory requirements, given below is a “Fail Safe steering gear” suitable for use on a tanker of more than 100,000 T DWT.
Shown in the diagram is a “Fail safe steering gear” having two independent power actuating systems that can
- Work simultaneously in normal operation, meeting the requirement OR
- Work independently and meet the requirement
- In the event of loss of fluid from any one system, it can be detected and isolated automatically so that the other system can remain fully operational.
Working:
- The system incorporates two sets of electric-driven pumps. Both main and auxiliary pumps are on the same shaft. The main pump shown in the diagram is a variable delivery pump
- The variable delivery pump takes suction from the tank and supplies hydraulic oil to the ram cylinders. The oil flow of the pump is determined by the pump actuating lever
- The movement of the pump actuating lever is controlled by the rudder angle order given by the bridge with the help of a bi-directional control valve
- A two-way shock relief valve is fitted between the two cylinders to release the pressure from one side of the cylinder to the other side in case of pressure increase in one of the cylinders due to heavy seas
- By-pass valves are also fitted between two cylinders, which are normally shut during operation. When one system is stopped, there is a pressure drop, as the auxiliary pump has also stopped this opens the by-pass valves, thus removing the hydraulic lock of the ram operation.
- Auto isolation valves in the system are there to isolate one system in case of any failure.
Sequence of events during hydraulic oil leak:
Case 1: Consider an oil leak from any pipe for cylinders 1 and 2 with the No. 1 pump running:
- No. 1 tank level will come down to L1, and it will sound an alarm on the bridge and in ECR
- When the tank level further drops to L2, i.e. low-low level, the no. 1 pump stops.
- Stopping the No. 1 pump also stops the attached auxiliary pump. So the line pressure drops, due to which the normally closed by-pass valves ‘X’ and ‘Y’ open.
- Simultaneously, the auto isolation valves ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’ will be operated by an electric signal. A, B and C are normally open valves. The electric signal will close them. So, systems 1 and 2 will be completely separated. Thus, the defective system, I.e. system 1, is isolated.
- Along with the operation of the auto isolation valves, the No. 2 pump will start automatically. The attached auxiliary pump will act on the by-pass valve ‘Y’ and close it. This enables cylinders 3 and 4 to be in normal operation.
- It should also be noted that since system 1 is completely isolated, there is no oil pressure to operate the bypass valve. So the by-pass valves remain open, thereby removing the hydraulic lock for the ram movement in cylinders 1 and 2
Case 2: Consider an oil leakage from any pipe of cylinders 3 and 4 with the No. 1 pump running:
Points 1, 2 and 3 are the same as case 1
- Simultaneously, the auto isolation valves ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’ will be operated by an electric signal. This will shut the normally open valves A, B and C. Thus, systems 1 and 2 will be completely separated
- Along with the operation of auto isolation valves, the No. 2 pump will start automatically. The attached auxiliary pump will act on the by-pass valve ‘Y’ and close. So, cylinders 3 and 4 will come into normal operation.
- Now, since the leak is between the pipe of cylinders 3 and 4, the level of the no. 2 tank will drop to L1 and give an alarm.
- The level will further drop to L2, but the pump will not stop and changeover to ensure that the leak is from the pipe of cylinders 3 and 4
- When the no. 2 tank level drops to L3, the no. 2 pump stops and the no. 1 pump starts to operate the steering using cylinders 1 and 2
- Starting the no. 1 pump will ensure that the by-pass valve ‘X’ is shut, and stopping the no. 2 pump will ensure that the by-pass valve ‘Y’ is open
This ensures the operation of the steering Gear with the defective system fully isolated.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (16 Marks)
Steering & Deck Machinery 🔥 Repeated 7x
With respect to Windlass and Deck Machinery:
(a) Describe the principle of a coil-operated brake suitable for winches and other deck machinery.
(b) Explain with suitable sketches how the windlass is relieved of strain when riding at anchor.
Appeared In: Jan 2024 Sep 2023 Mar 2021 Jan 2021 Dec 2018 Nov 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
A coil-operated brake for winches and deck machinery is designed to automatically adjust the braking force in response to changes in the load on the mooring line. This system ensures the correct force is applied between the brake band and the winch drum at all times.
The core principle is that when an additional load is applied to the mooring line, the line stretches, which in turn loosens the tightening mechanism. This loosening action automatically causes the brake to apply the correct force, maintaining constant tension. This has the significant advantage of being a self-adjusting system, meaning that once it's set, there's no need for a crew member to periodically re-apply the recommended torque. The brake is typically released using a hydraulic lever.
When a vessel is riding at anchor, a mechanism is used to lock the anchor chain and relieve the windlass of the strain. This is crucial for preventing damage to the windlass and ensuring the anchor is securely held.
A Cable stopper, often a pawl of a rod, is engaged with a link of the anchor chain. The pawl acts as a stop, preventing the chain from moving. All the weight and force from the anchor and the vessel's movement are then transferred to this locking device and the ship's structure, effectively relieving the windlass of any strain.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q1 (16 Marks)
Steering & Deck Machinery 🔥 Repeated 7x
With respect to Windlass and Deck Machinery:
(a) Describe the principle of a coil-operated brake suitable for winches and other deck machinery.
(b) Explain with suitable sketches how the windlass is relieved of strain when riding at anchor.
Appeared In: Jan 2024 Sep 2023 Mar 2021 Jan 2021 Dec 2018 Nov 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
A coil-operated brake for winches and deck machinery is designed to automatically adjust the braking force in response to changes in the load on the mooring line. This system ensures the correct force is applied between the brake band and the winch drum at all times.
The core principle is that when an additional load is applied to the mooring line, the line stretches, which in turn loosens the tightening mechanism. This loosening action automatically causes the brake to apply the correct force, maintaining constant tension. This has the significant advantage of being a self-adjusting system, meaning that once it's set, there's no need for a crew member to periodically re-apply the recommended torque. The brake is typically released using a hydraulic lever.
When a vessel is riding at anchor, a mechanism is used to lock the anchor chain and relieve the windlass of the strain. This is crucial for preventing damage to the windlass and ensuring the anchor is securely held.
A Cable stopper, often a pawl of a rod, is engaged with a link of the anchor chain. The pawl acts as a stop, preventing the chain from moving. All the weight and force from the anchor and the vessel's movement are then transferred to this locking device and the ship's structure, effectively relieving the windlass of any strain.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q2 (16 Marks)
Auxiliary Machinery 🔥 Repeated 6x
Sketch and describe the operation of a four-ram electro-hydraulic steering gear system. Indicate and explain the valve positions for the operation of the system when one pump is isolated and the unit is operating on Iwo rams only.
Appeared In: Apr 2024 Oct 2020 Mar 2020 Jan 2020 Sep 2019 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
According to SOLAS chapter - 2, part 1, regulation 29.16, every tanker of more than 10,000 GT shall comply with the following:
- The main steering capability due to a single failure in any part of one of the power actuating systems shall be regained in not more than 45 seconds.
- The main steering shall comprise at least two identical power actuating systems, each capable of meeting the requirements. Loss of fluid from one system shall be capable of being detected, and the defective system shall automatically get isolated so that the other system shall remain fully operational
Considering the above regulatory requirements, given below is a “Fail Safe steering gear” suitable for use on a tanker of more than 100,000 T DWT.
Shown in the diagram is a “Fail safe steering gear” having two independent power actuating systems that can
- Work simultaneously in normal operation, meeting the requirement OR
- Work independently and meet the requirement
- In the event of loss of fluid from any one system, it can be detected and isolated automatically so that the other system can remain fully operational.
Working:
- The system incorporates two sets of electric-driven pumps. Both main and auxiliary pumps are on the same shaft. The main pump shown in the diagram is a variable delivery pump
- The variable delivery pump takes suction from the tank and supplies hydraulic oil to the ram cylinders. The oil flow of the pump is determined by the pump actuating lever
- The movement of the pump actuating lever is controlled by the rudder angle order given by the bridge with the help of a bi-directional control valve
- A two-way shock relief valve is fitted between the two cylinders to release the pressure from one side of the cylinder to the other side in case of pressure increase in one of the cylinders due to heavy seas
- By-pass valves are also fitted between two cylinders, which are normally shut during operation. When one system is stopped, there is a pressure drop, as the auxiliary pump has also stopped this opens the by-pass valves, thus removing the hydraulic lock of the ram operation.
- Auto isolation valves in the system are there to isolate one system in case of any failure.
Case 1: Consider an oil leak from any pipe for cylinders 1 and 2 with the No. 1 pump running:
- No. 1 tank level will come down to L1, and it will sound an alarm on the bridge and in ECR
- When the tank level further drops to L2, i.e. low-low level, the no. 1 pump stops.
- Stopping the No. 1 pump also stops the attached auxiliary pump. So the line pressure drops, due to which the normally closed by-pass valves ‘X’ and ‘Y’ open.
- Simultaneously, the auto isolation valves ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’ will be operated by an electric signal. A, B and C are normally open valves. The electric signal will close them. So, systems 1 and 2 will be completely separated. Thus, the defective system, I.e. system 1, is isolated.
- Along with the operation of the auto isolation valves, the No. 2 pump will start automatically. The attached auxiliary pump will act on the by-pass valve ‘Y’ and close it. This enables cylinders 3 and 4 to be in normal operation.
- It should also be noted that since system 1 is completely isolated, there is no oil pressure to operate the bypass valve. So the by-pass valves remain open, thereby removing the hydraulic lock for the ram movement in cylinders 1 and 2
Case 2: Consider an oil leakage from any pipe of cylinders 3 and 4 with the No. 1 pump running:
Points 1, 2 and 3 are the same as case 1
- Simultaneously, the auto isolation valves ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’ will be operated by an electric signal. This will shut the normally open valves A, B and C. Thus, systems 1 and 2 will be completely separated
- Along with the operation of auto isolation valves, the No. 2 pump will start automatically. The attached auxiliary pump will act on the by-pass valve ‘Y’ and close. So, cylinders 3 and 4 will come into normal operation.
- Now, since the leak is between the pipe of cylinders 3 and 4, the level of the no. 2 tank will drop to L1 and give an alarm.
- The level will further drop to L2, but the pump will not stop and changeover to ensure that the leak is from the pipe of cylinders 3 and 4
- When the no. 2 tank level drops to L3, the no. 2 pump stops and the no. 1 pump starts to operate the steering using cylinders 1 and 2
- Starting the no. 1 pump will ensure that the by-pass valve ‘X’ is shut, and stopping the no. 2 pump will ensure that the by-pass valve ‘Y’ is open
This ensures the operation of the steering Gear with the defective system fully isolated.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q6 (16 Marks)
Cargo & Tankers 🔥 Repeated 3x
Sketch and describe a system for oil monitoring of bilge and tanker ballast discharges. What inputs are recorded? Explain the difficulties encountered with the efficient operation of the oil monitoring system.
Appeared In: Sep 2019 Jan 2019 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The oil monitoring system for bilge and tanker ballast discharges ensures that the oil content in discharged water complies with regulatory standards. Below is a description of its general arrangement:
- Water from the discharge line is sampled before reaching the overboard discharge valve.
- The sample is directed to the PPM monitor, which measures the oil content in parts per million (PPM).
- The oil content value from the PPM monitor is sent to a comparator, which compares it to a preset allowable limit.
- If the oil content is within the allowable limit, the overboard valve opens automatically to discharge the water. If the oil content exceeds the set limit, the overboard valve is shut, and the water is redirected to the slop tank.
The PPM monitor works on the principle of scattered light. Light reflected or scattered by oil particles is measured using a photocell. The intensity of scattered light decreases with increasing oil content. This signal is then analysed and sent to the comparator.
The system records the following data:
- Oil content reading (in ppm)
- Ship's speed
- Oily water discharge rate
- Date and time
- Ship's position
Difficulties encountered with efficient operation:
- Response Delay in Sampling Pipe: The delay in transporting water samples from the discharge line to the PPM monitor can result in inaccurate or untimely readings.
- Clogged Sampling Pipe: Accumulation of debris or oil residues can obstruct the sampling pipe, leading to erratic or incorrect readings.
- Sealing and Cleaning of Optical Windows: The optical components of the PPM monitor, such as the scattered light window, require regular cleaning and maintenance. Dirty or poorly sealed optical windows can cause inaccurate measurements or system malfunction.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q7 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting 🔥 Repeated 14x
Sketch a sealing arrangement for an oil lubricated stern tube. Identify the common forms of seal failure. State how oil loss due to seal failure can be restricted whilst on passage? What is the material used for sealing rings and propeller shaft liner?
Appeared In: Dec 2024 Apr 2024 Aug 2023 Jun 2023 Feb 2021 Oct 2020 Mar 2020 Jan 2020 Dec 2019 Sep 2019 Jun 2019 Feb 2019 Oct 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Common forms of seal failure in a stern tube
- Loss of elasticity in seal material – Nitrile rubber seals may lose their elastic properties over time, reducing their sealing effectiveness.
- Surface damage to chrome liner – Grooving or scoring of the chrome liner can impair sealing surfaces, leading to leakage.
- Excessive shaft vibration – Heavy vibration of the propeller shaft can cause uneven wear and seal deformation.
- Insufficient cooling – Inadequate cooling can cause rubber sealing elements to harden and eventually fail.
- Exceeding running hour limits – Operating beyond the manufacturer’s recommended service life increases the risk of seal failure.
- Deterioration of oil quality – Contaminated or degraded oil reduces lubrication and protection, accelerating seal wear.
- Incorrect header tank level adjustment – Failure to adjust the header tank according to vessel draft can cause oil loss, leading to inadequate lubrication and seal damage.
Restricting oil loss due to seal failure whilst on passage
- Use of high-viscosity oil – Recharge the system with a thicker oil to reduce leakage rate through damaged seals.
- Temporary oil supply arrangement –
- Disconnect the existing oil supply line.
- Connect a 45-gallon drum supported by a block and tackle arrangement.
- Adjust the drum height to vary the oil head pressure, matching it to the surrounding water pressure and minimizing leakage.
- Fresh water introduction – Supply fresh water to the gravity tank to emulsify with any leaked oil. The resulting emulsion helps coagulate around the damaged seal area while the oil is circulated to maintain lubrication and sealing.
Materials for Sealing Rings and Propeller Shaft Liner:
- Sealing Rings: Nitrile rubber (NBR) is a commonly used material for stern tube sealing rings due to its good oil resistance, elasticity, and relatively low cost.
- Shaft Liner: Chrome-plated steel is a common material for stern tube liners. The chrome plating provides a hard, smooth, and corrosion-resistant surface, minimizing wear and improving the life of the sealing rings.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q1 (16 Marks)
Boilers & Steam 🔥 Repeated 7x
Sketch and describe a boiler water level controller of the float operated type. State the reasons for having this mechanism on the boiler and using the controller and boiler for analogy explain the following terms:
(a) Detecting element
(b) Servo motor
(c) Desired value
Appeared In: Nov 2024 Nov 2023 Feb 2021 Sep 2018 Jul 2018 Feb 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Boiler Water Level Controller – Float Operated Type
A simple float-operated water level controller consists of:
- A float chamber connected to the boiler steam drum by two lines — one for steam and one for water.
- A float inside the chamber, which rises and falls with changes in water level.
- A mechanical linkage or rod attached to the float, which extends to an electric sensor unit mounted above the chamber.
Working Principle:
- As the float moves up or down, it shifts a contactor along a variable resistance track or magnetic switches.
- This movement changes the electrical output signal, which is sent to a square-root converter.
- The converter transforms the electrical signal into a proportional pneumatic signal.
- The pneumatic signal acts on the diaphragm of the feed water control valve actuator, modulating feed flow to maintain the set water level.
Reasons for Using a Float-Operated Type
- Reliability: Unlike constant/variable head leg systems, there is no need to maintain a filled reference column.
- Simplified Installation: Electrical sensing eliminates the need for long impulse tubes for remote indication.
- Ease of Maintenance: The electric sensor unit can be easily replaced without dismantling the float chamber.
- Lower Cost: Fewer mechanical parts and no head leg piping reduce installation and maintenance expenses.
Explanation of Terms (Analogy with Controller and Boiler)
: In this system, the float is the detecting element. It directly senses the water level, which is the controlled variable, and its movement provides a signal that represents the current state of the system.
: The square root converter and the feedwater controller collectively act as the servo motor. They are the mechanisms that receive the signal from the detecting element and perform the physical action (opening or closing the feedwater valve) to correct the water level.
: The set point is the desired value. This is a fixed input to the square root converter (or a comparator) that represents the ideal water level that the system aims to maintain. The controller continuously works to match the actual water level to this desired value.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q4 (16 Marks)
Steering & Deck Machinery 🔥 Repeated 6x
(a) Describe with the aid of sketches where necessary a vane type stering gear, showing how the weight of the rudder and stock are carried and the arrangement that allow for wear down
(b) State how the vanes described in (a) are secured and the method of sealing the edges.
fe State how, if necessary the steering gear is locked for rudder maintenance
Appeared In: Dec 2025 Oct 2025 Mar 2025 Sep 2023 Apr 2023 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- The rotor is fitted to the tapered rudder stock. The rudder stock carries the weight of the rudder, supported by a rudder carrier bearing.
- The stator is fixed to the ship’s structure, forming a rigid support.
- The fixed vanes are evenly spaced inside the stator bore, while the rotating vanes are equally spaced on the rotor.
- These vanes form two sets of pressure chambers in the annular space between the rotor and stator. Hydraulic fluid is supplied at pressure to one set of chambers, causing the rotor and rudder to rotate in the required direction based on the steering order from the wheelhouse.
- The weight of the rudder and rudder stock is carried by the rudder carrier bearing, which is mounted on steel chocks supported by thicker deck plating to ensure stability and handle the load.
- There is a vertical clearance between the stator flange and the anchor bracket to allow for rudder "jump" (vertical movement).
- Another clearance exists between the top of the anchor bracket and the stator flange to accommodate for rudder wear down or rudder drop over time. The total clearance provided is around 38 mm, allowing the system to absorb wear and vertical movement without affecting performance.
- The fixed and rotary vanes are made from modular cast iron and are secured to the rotor and stator using high-tensile steel dowel pins and cap screws to maintain strength and prevent detachment under stress. A key is fitted along the length of the rotary vanes to provide additional reinforcement and ensure the strength of the rotor.
- The sealing of the vanes is achieved using sealing strips made of cast iron. These strips are fitted into grooves along the edges of the vanes. The sealing strips are backed by elastically loaded synthetic rubber, which provides a tight seal by pressing against the faces of both the fixed and rotating vanes. This arrangement prevents hydraulic fluid leakage.
- Hydraulic Locking: This involves closing the manual isolating valves provided for each cylinder (in ram-type systems) or each vane chamber (in vane-type systems). This prevents hydraulic fluid flow, thus immobilizing the rudder.
- Mechanical Locking: Three methods are available:
- A spanner is fitted to the rudder stock head nut and secured to the ship's structure, directly preventing rudder movement.
- If provided, tow gigs are fitted between the crosshead and cylinder base, mechanically locking the steering mechanism
- (Assuming a braking system is integrated into the design) Engaging the brake will prevent any movement of the rudder.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q9 (16 Marks)
Materials & Testing 🔥 Repeated 8x
(a) Sketch a section through a keyless sleeeved propeller.
(b) (i) State the advantages of using a keyless sleeved propeller.
(ii) State with reasons, which metal sleeve should be made for contact with the forged mild steel tail shaft.
(c) State the material used to bond the sleeve to the propeller and the general thickness of the bonding material
Appeared In: Jan 2026 Jun 2024 Dec 2023 Oct 2023 Mar 2019 Jan 2019 Sep 2018 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- Keyless design avoids stress concentration caused by keys and keyways.
- Stresses are evenly distributed across the internal surface of the propeller boss
- The absence of a keyway increases the friction available for torque transmission.
- The design prevents overstressing or permanent damage to the propeller hub during operation.
- The keyless arrangement simplifies the propeller and shaft interface, making it easier to manufacture and maintain.
- With a coefficient of friction of 0.28, it minimizes the likelihood of propeller slippage.
- Its expansion rates are similar to those of steel, reducing the risk of misalignment or loosening during temperature variations.
- Pearlitic cast iron exhibits excellent resistance to fretting, which is important for prolonged and reliable operation.
- High-strength epoxy Araldite filling is used to bond the sleeve to the propeller securely.
- The bonding material is applied with a thickness of approximately 1 mm, ensuring adequate adhesion and durability.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q1 (16 Marks)
Boilers & Steam 🔥 Repeated 7x
Sketch and describe a boiler water level controller of the float operated type. State the reasons for having this mechanism on the boiler and using the controller and boiler for analogy explain the following terms.
(a) Detecting element
(b) Servo motor
(c) Desired value
Appeared In: Nov 2024 Nov 2023 Feb 2021 Sep 2018 Jul 2018 Feb 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Boiler Water Level Controller – Float Operated Type
A simple float-operated water level controller consists of:
- A float chamber connected to the boiler steam drum by two lines — one for steam and one for water.
- A float inside the chamber, which rises and falls with changes in water level.
- A mechanical linkage or rod attached to the float, which extends to an electric sensor unit mounted above the chamber.
Working Principle:
- As the float moves up or down, it shifts a contactor along a variable resistance track or magnetic switches.
- This movement changes the electrical output signal, which is sent to a square-root converter.
- The converter transforms the electrical signal into a proportional pneumatic signal.
- The pneumatic signal acts on the diaphragm of the feed water control valve actuator, modulating feed flow to maintain the set water level.
Reasons for Using a Float-Operated Type
- Reliability: Unlike constant/variable head leg systems, there is no need to maintain a filled reference column.
- Simplified Installation: Electrical sensing eliminates the need for long impulse tubes for remote indication.
- Ease of Maintenance: The electric sensor unit can be easily replaced without dismantling the float chamber.
- Lower Cost: Fewer mechanical parts and no head leg piping reduce installation and maintenance expenses.
Explanation of Terms (Analogy with Controller and Boiler)
: In this system, the float is the detecting element. It directly senses the water level, which is the controlled variable, and its movement provides a signal that represents the current state of the system.
: The square root converter and the feedwater controller collectively act as the servo motor. They are the mechanisms that receive the signal from the detecting element and perform the physical action (opening or closing the feedwater valve) to correct the water level.
: The set point is the desired value. This is a fixed input to the square root converter (or a comparator) that represents the ideal water level that the system aims to maintain. The controller continuously works to match the actual water level to this desired value.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q5 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting 🔥 Repeated 11x
With regards to main transmission shaft flange coupling arrangements.
(a) Sketch a hollow type coupling bolt and the hydraulic head/nut and loading rod which are used to fit it
(b) Describe how the bolt is fitted
(c) State the advantage of the hollow coupling bolt as compared to the traditional type of coupling bolt
Appeared In: Aug 2026 Jul 2025 Apr 2024 Mar 2024 Jun 2023 Feb 2021 Jan 2021 Mar 2020 Jun 2019 Jul 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- A bolt with a diameter slightly larger than the flange coupling bore diameter (D + 0.00025D) is selected.
- A push rod (loading rod) is inserted into the hollow coupling bolt, and a hydraulic head is attached.
- Hydraulic oil pressure of approximately 30,000 N/m² is applied, causing the bolt to stretch (approximately 0.021mm) and temporarily reduce its diameter by 0.00025D. This allows easy insertion of the bolt into the flange bore.
- The bolt is placed inside the bore by hand, and the nut is tightened and nipped up using a spanner.
- The hydraulic pressure is then released, allowing the bolt to expand and create a secure interference fit within the bore. This generates a tensile stress of approximately 15.5 tons/m², ensuring a firm grip.
- After fitting, the hydraulic assembly (items A, B, and C) is removed, and a protective plastic cap is placed over the bolt head.
- The hollow bolt design allows precise control of the bolt load, ensuring optimal tightening and load distribution.
- Diametrical re-expansion after hydraulic pressure release ensures a strong interference fit of the shank within the flange bore, reducing the risk of loosening.
- Hollow coupling bolts are easier to remove for inspection and maintenance, significantly reducing dismantling and fitting time.
- Unlike traditional bolts, hollow coupling bolts minimize wear on the bore, eliminating the need for frequent re-machining.
- Replacement of hollow coupling bolts is less frequent, reducing operational downtime and maintenance costs.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q6 (16 Marks)
Control & Instrumentation 🔥 Repeated 7x
Describe with a sketch a pneumatic relay and show how feed back can be achieved when such a relay is used in conjunction with a flapper mechanism.
Appeared In: Mar 2025 Sep 2023 Oct 2020 Oct 2018 Aug 2018 Jul 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The pneumatic relay operates on the principle of a nozzle-flapper arrangement. Air supply pressure acts on a diaphragm located below a spring. A rod and plug, connected to the diaphragm, control the flow of output air through a nozzle. A flapper is positioned near the nozzle.
Operation:
- An input signal (which can be a change in pressure or displacement of the flapper) affects the flapper's position.
- Flapper movement changes the distance between the flapper and the nozzle. A decrease in distance (flapper closer to the nozzle) restricts the output airflow. Conversely, an increase in distance increases output airflow. This is the direct action of the relay.
- Changes in the output air flow alter the back pressure at the nozzle.
- Increased nozzle back pressure pushes the diaphragm downwards, compressing the spring and further reducing the output airflow. Decreased nozzle back pressure allows the spring to push the diaphragm upwards, increasing output airflow.
- A portion of the output air is fed back through a line connected to a bellows and a feedback-adjusting spring (as shown in the sketch). This feedback pressure acts against the diaphragm, opposing the effect of the input signal. The bellows and spring arrangement allow the system to fine-tune the feedback strength. This negative feedback stabilises the system and increases the control range, preventing excessive overshoot or oscillation. The feedback mechanism subtracts from the effective input pressure, acting as a negative feedback loop.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q9 (16 Marks)
General 🔥 Repeated 12x
Reverse osmosis is the modern alternative for shipboard production of drinking water.
(a) Describe using simple diagrams if necessary, the principle of reverse osmosis.
(b) (i) Sketch a line diagram showing a single pass system for producing fresh water from sea water.
(ii) Describe such a system.
Appeared In: Jan 2018 Jul 2025 Jan 2023 Mar 2021 Oct 2019 Aug 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Nov 2018 Oct 2018 Jul 2018 Aug 2025
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Osmosis is the natural flow of solvent (water) from a dilute solution to a more concentrated one across a semi-permeable membrane, which stops the dissolved salts but allows water molecules to pass. In a sea water container the pure water would migrate into the sea water, diluting it and building up a hydrostatic head equal to the osmotic pressure of the sea water.
Reverse osmosis simply reverses this natural flow. A pressure greater than the osmotic pressure is applied to the concentrated side (sea water) by a high-pressure pump. This forces water molecules through the semi-permeable membrane in the opposite direction, i.e. out of the sea water and away from the salt, leaving fresh water on the low-pressure side. The applied pressure is typically 40-70 bar for sea water, well above the natural osmotic pressure of roughly 25-28 bar. The membrane passes water but retains the dissolved salts, minerals, bacteria and colloidal matter, so the permeate (product water) is either potable or can be polished. The concentrated brine is discharged overboard.
Components in series:
Sea water feed -> feed/sea water pump and strainer -> multi-media/dual media filter -> cartridge filter(s) -> high-pressure booster pump -> membrane pressure vessel (spiral wound RO membranes in series/parallel) -> two outlets: permeate (fresh water) to product/storage tank and brine/concentrate to a flow control valve and overboard. A dosing/metering pump adds anti-scalant and chlorine/bisulphite. A product meter and conductivity/TDS monitor on the permeate line.
Sea water is first strained and filtered through dual-media and cartridge filters to remove suspended solids, sand and organic matter that would foul or block the membranes. Anti-scalant is dosed to prevent carbonate and sulphate scale precipitating on the membrane surface. The filtered water is pressurised to 50-70 bar by the high-pressure pump and fed into the membrane pressure vessels.
In the pressure vessel the sea water is split by the spiral-wound semi-permeable membranes into two streams. The permeate, which passes through the membrane, flows to the centre collecting tube and out to the product tank; this is the drinking water. The concentrate (brine), which has not passed through the membrane, leaves the vessel and its flow is regulated by a back-pressure/concentrate control valve, which also sets the operating pressure and the recovery ratio. In a single-pass system the permeate quality is normally sufficient at moderate salinity; the conductivity cell monitors and diverts poor product to bilge or recirculates. Anti-scalant dosing, membrane cleaning and regular filter backwashing maintain output and protect the membranes.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q2 (16 Marks)
Boilers & Steam 🔥 Repeated 7x
Sketch and describe a boiler water level controller of the float operrated type. State the reasons for having this mechanism on the boiler and using the controller and boiler for analogy explain the following terns:
(a) Detecting element
(b) Servo motor
(c) Desired value
Appeared In: Nov 2024 Nov 2023 Feb 2021 Sep 2018 Jul 2018 Feb 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Boiler Water Level Controller – Float Operated Type
A simple float-operated water level controller consists of:
- A float chamber connected to the boiler steam drum by two lines — one for steam and one for water.
- A float inside the chamber, which rises and falls with changes in water level.
- A mechanical linkage or rod attached to the float, which extends to an electric sensor unit mounted above the chamber.
Working Principle:
- As the float moves up or down, it shifts a contactor along a variable resistance track or magnetic switches.
- This movement changes the electrical output signal, which is sent to a square-root converter.
- The converter transforms the electrical signal into a proportional pneumatic signal.
- The pneumatic signal acts on the diaphragm of the feed water control valve actuator, modulating feed flow to maintain the set water level.
Reasons for Using a Float-Operated Type
- Reliability: Unlike constant/variable head leg systems, there is no need to maintain a filled reference column.
- Simplified Installation: Electrical sensing eliminates the need for long impulse tubes for remote indication.
- Ease of Maintenance: The electric sensor unit can be easily replaced without dismantling the float chamber.
- Lower Cost: Fewer mechanical parts and no head leg piping reduce installation and maintenance expenses.
Explanation of Terms (Analogy with Controller and Boiler)
: In this system, the float is the detecting element. It directly senses the water level, which is the controlled variable, and its movement provides a signal that represents the current state of the system.
: The square root converter and the feedwater controller collectively act as the servo motor. They are the mechanisms that receive the signal from the detecting element and perform the physical action (opening or closing the feedwater valve) to correct the water level.
: The set point is the desired value. This is a fixed input to the square root converter (or a comparator) that represents the ideal water level that the system aims to maintain. The controller continuously works to match the actual water level to this desired value.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q4 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting 🔥 Repeated 11x
With regards to main transmission shaft flange coupling arrangements:
(a) Sketch a hollow type coupling bolt and the hydraulic head/nut and loading rod which are used to fit it
(b) Describe how the bolt is fitted.
(c) State the advantage of the hollow coupling bolt as compared to the traditional type of coupling bolt.
Appeared In: Aug 2026 Jul 2025 Apr 2024 Mar 2024 Jun 2023 Feb 2021 Jan 2021 Mar 2020 Jun 2019 Jul 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- A bolt with a diameter slightly larger than the flange coupling bore diameter (D + 0.00025D) is selected.
- A push rod (loading rod) is inserted into the hollow coupling bolt, and a hydraulic head is attached.
- Hydraulic oil pressure of approximately 30,000 N/m² is applied, causing the bolt to stretch (approximately 0.021mm) and temporarily reduce its diameter by 0.00025D. This allows easy insertion of the bolt into the flange bore.
- The bolt is placed inside the bore by hand, and the nut is tightened and nipped up using a spanner.
- The hydraulic pressure is then released, allowing the bolt to expand and create a secure interference fit within the bore. This generates a tensile stress of approximately 15.5 tons/m², ensuring a firm grip.
- After fitting, the hydraulic assembly (items A, B, and C) is removed, and a protective plastic cap is placed over the bolt head.
- The hollow bolt design allows precise control of the bolt load, ensuring optimal tightening and load distribution.
- Diametrical re-expansion after hydraulic pressure release ensures a strong interference fit of the shank within the flange bore, reducing the risk of loosening.
- Hollow coupling bolts are easier to remove for inspection and maintenance, significantly reducing dismantling and fitting time.
- Unlike traditional bolts, hollow coupling bolts minimize wear on the bore, eliminating the need for frequent re-machining.
- Replacement of hollow coupling bolts is less frequent, reducing operational downtime and maintenance costs.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q6 (16 Marks)
Steering & Deck Machinery 🔥 Repeated 10x
Sketch and describe a "fail-safe steering gear" suitable for use on a tanker of more than 100,000 T dwt. Explain the sequence of events that take place when an oil leak takes place in one of the hydraulic pipe lines
Appeared In: Oct 2024 Dec 2023 Aug 2023 Jul 2023 Mar 2023 Feb 2021 Feb 2019 Oct 2018 Aug 2018 Jul 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
According to SOLAS chapter - 2, part 1, regulation 29.16, every tanker of more than 10,000 GT shall comply with the following:
- The main steering capability due to a single failure in any part of one of the power actuating systems shall be regained in not more than 45 seconds.
- The main steering shall comprise at least two identical power actuating systems, each capable of meeting the requirements. Loss of fluid from one system shall be capable of being detected, and the defective system shall automatically get isolated so that the other system shall remain fully operational
Considering the above regulatory requirements, given below is a “Fail Safe steering gear” suitable for use on a tanker of more than 100,000 T DWT.
Shown in the diagram is a “Fail safe steering gear” having two independent power actuating systems that can
- Work simultaneously in normal operation, meeting the requirement OR
- Work independently and meet the requirement
- In the event of loss of fluid from any one system, it can be detected and isolated automatically so that the other system can remain fully operational.
Working:
- The system incorporates two sets of electric-driven pumps. Both main and auxiliary pumps are on the same shaft. The main pump shown in the diagram is a variable delivery pump
- The variable delivery pump takes suction from the tank and supplies hydraulic oil to the ram cylinders. The oil flow of the pump is determined by the pump actuating lever
- The movement of the pump actuating lever is controlled by the rudder angle order given by the bridge with the help of a bi-directional control valve
- A two-way shock relief valve is fitted between the two cylinders to release the pressure from one side of the cylinder to the other side in case of pressure increase in one of the cylinders due to heavy seas
- By-pass valves are also fitted between two cylinders, which are normally shut during operation. When one system is stopped, there is a pressure drop, as the auxiliary pump has also stopped this opens the by-pass valves, thus removing the hydraulic lock of the ram operation.
- Auto isolation valves in the system are there to isolate one system in case of any failure.
Sequence of events during hydraulic oil leak:
Case 1: Consider an oil leak from any pipe for cylinders 1 and 2 with the No. 1 pump running:
- No. 1 tank level will come down to L1, and it will sound an alarm on the bridge and in ECR
- When the tank level further drops to L2, i.e. low-low level, the no. 1 pump stops.
- Stopping the No. 1 pump also stops the attached auxiliary pump. So the line pressure drops, due to which the normally closed by-pass valves ‘X’ and ‘Y’ open.
- Simultaneously, the auto isolation valves ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’ will be operated by an electric signal. A, B and C are normally open valves. The electric signal will close them. So, systems 1 and 2 will be completely separated. Thus, the defective system, I.e. system 1, is isolated.
- Along with the operation of the auto isolation valves, the No. 2 pump will start automatically. The attached auxiliary pump will act on the by-pass valve ‘Y’ and close it. This enables cylinders 3 and 4 to be in normal operation.
- It should also be noted that since system 1 is completely isolated, there is no oil pressure to operate the bypass valve. So the by-pass valves remain open, thereby removing the hydraulic lock for the ram movement in cylinders 1 and 2
Case 2: Consider an oil leakage from any pipe of cylinders 3 and 4 with the No. 1 pump running:
Points 1, 2 and 3 are the same as case 1
- Simultaneously, the auto isolation valves ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’ will be operated by an electric signal. This will shut the normally open valves A, B and C. Thus, systems 1 and 2 will be completely separated
- Along with the operation of auto isolation valves, the No. 2 pump will start automatically. The attached auxiliary pump will act on the by-pass valve ‘Y’ and close. So, cylinders 3 and 4 will come into normal operation.
- Now, since the leak is between the pipe of cylinders 3 and 4, the level of the no. 2 tank will drop to L1 and give an alarm.
- The level will further drop to L2, but the pump will not stop and changeover to ensure that the leak is from the pipe of cylinders 3 and 4
- When the no. 2 tank level drops to L3, the no. 2 pump stops and the no. 1 pump starts to operate the steering using cylinders 1 and 2
- Starting the no. 1 pump will ensure that the by-pass valve ‘X’ is shut, and stopping the no. 2 pump will ensure that the by-pass valve ‘Y’ is open
This ensures the operation of the steering Gear with the defective system fully isolated.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q7 (16 Marks)
Control & Instrumentation 🔥 Repeated 7x
Describe with a sketch a pneumatic relay and show how feedback can be achieved when such a relay is used in conjunction with a flapper mechanism.
Appeared In: Mar 2025 Sep 2023 Oct 2020 Oct 2018 Aug 2018 Jul 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The pneumatic relay operates on the principle of a nozzle-flapper arrangement. Air supply pressure acts on a diaphragm located below a spring. A rod and plug, connected to the diaphragm, control the flow of output air through a nozzle. A flapper is positioned near the nozzle.
Operation:
- An input signal (which can be a change in pressure or displacement of the flapper) affects the flapper's position.
- Flapper movement changes the distance between the flapper and the nozzle. A decrease in distance (flapper closer to the nozzle) restricts the output airflow. Conversely, an increase in distance increases output airflow. This is the direct action of the relay.
- Changes in the output air flow alter the back pressure at the nozzle.
- Increased nozzle back pressure pushes the diaphragm downwards, compressing the spring and further reducing the output airflow. Decreased nozzle back pressure allows the spring to push the diaphragm upwards, increasing output airflow.
- A portion of the output air is fed back through a line connected to a bellows and a feedback-adjusting spring (as shown in the sketch). This feedback pressure acts against the diaphragm, opposing the effect of the input signal. The bellows and spring arrangement allow the system to fine-tune the feedback strength. This negative feedback stabilises the system and increases the control range, preventing excessive overshoot or oscillation. The feedback mechanism subtracts from the effective input pressure, acting as a negative feedback loop.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q8 (16 Marks)
General 🔥 Repeated 12x
Reverse osmosis is the modem alternative for shipboard production of drinking water.
(a) Describe using simple diagrams if necessary, the principle of reverse osmosis.
(b) (i) Sketch a line diagram showing a single pass system for producing fresh water from sea water.
(i) Describe such a system.
Appeared In: Jan 2018 Jul 2025 Jan 2023 Mar 2021 Oct 2019 Aug 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Nov 2018 Oct 2018 Jul 2018 Aug 2025
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Reverse osmosis (RO) is a process that purifies water by forcing it through a semi-permeable membrane. In this process, high pressure is applied to a solution with a high concentration of dissolved solids, such as saltwater, on one side of the membrane. This pressure overcomes the natural osmotic pressure, causing the pure water molecules to pass through the membrane while leaving behind the larger salt ions and other impurities. The membrane acts as a selective barrier, allowing only the water to pass, while the concentrated brine solution is discarded. For large-scale production, a large membrane surface area and a strong pump capable of generating high pressures are necessary.
1. Pretreatment Stage
Pretreatment is essential to protect the R.O. membranes from fouling and scaling.
- Scaling: Caused by soluble salts such as calcium carbonate and calcium sulphate depositing on the membrane.
- Fouling: Caused by micro-organisms, metal oxides, and colloidal particles coating the membrane surface.
Pretreatment methods include:
- Mechanical filtration: Multiple filter stages in series, e.g.:
- Sand filters
- Multi-layer filters
- Microfilters (<10 ppm particle size)
- Chemical treatment:
- Coagulants for fine particle removal
- Biocides to kill micro-organisms
- Acid dosing to neutralize calcium salts and prevent scale formation
A pump takes suction from the sea chest through a coarse filter, delivering water at about 6 bar through the pretreatment system.
2. High-Pressure Stage
- A high-pressure piston pump raises the feed water pressure to above 50 bar.
- This pressurized water enters the semi-permeable membrane modules.
3. Separation Process
- Due to the pressure difference between the concentrated brine side and the permeate side, water molecules pass through the membrane.
- Dissolved salts, organics, and microbes are rejected.
Outputs:
- Permeate (Fresh Water): Low-salt content water used for drinking and domestic purposes.
- Brine (Concentrated Reject): Discharged overboard (OVBD).
4. Post-Treatment
The fresh water (permeate) is further treated to make it suitable for shipboard use:
- Hardness adjustment (to prevent excessive softness)
- pH correction (maintained around 8 for taste and corrosion control)
- Chlorination (for disinfection)
Note: If pH rises too high, chlorine’s effectiveness against micro-organisms is reduced.
Flow Summary:
Sea Water → Coarse Filter → Pretreatment Filters & Chemicals → High-Pressure Pump → R.O. Membranes →
→ Permeate (Fresh Water) → Post-treatment → Ship’s Fresh Water System
→ Brine (Reject Water) → Overboard
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q2 (16 Marks)
Boilers & Steam 🔥 Repeated 2x
Sketch a high-lift safety valve lid and seat detailing their special features. Describe how such a valve is overhauled and any clearances that should be measured and noted.
Appeared In: Dec 2024 Mar 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Special Features of Valve Lid and Seat:
- The seat's design deflects escaping steam towards the valve lid's lip, boosting the valve's lift. This increases the efficiency of steam release.
- The pressure of escaping steam acting on a piston provides extra lift to the valve. This helps in a faster, more complete opening.
- A loose pin secures the valve lid, allowing for thermal expansion without stress.
Overhauling the Boiler Safety Valve:
Safety:
- Carry out a Toolbox meeting, Risk assessment and Permit to work.
- Ensure that the internal pressure of the boiler is fully relieved before attempting to remove the safety valve. Wear appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE), including safety glasses, to protect against residual fluid splashes.
Disassembly Steps:
- Remove the seal and pull out the split pin.
- Detach the fork lever.
- Loosen the set screw and remove the cap.
- Remove the spindle lock nut and adjusting screws from the spring cover (make a mark on the position of the adjusting screw and spring cover for easy reassembly).
- Take off the spring cover.
- Remove the nut connecting the yoke with the body, then lift the block composed of the yoke, upper spring, and lower spring carrier along with the spring.
- Pull out the spindle.
- Remove the disc.
- Loosen the screw and remove the valve seat.
Checks:
- Inspect the valve seat and disc for damage; lap if necessary.
- Check the sliding surface of the floating piston for dirt and foreign materials, cleaning thoroughly.
- Assess the condition of the spindle for trueness.
- Inspect the body for rust and corrosion.
- Examine the spring for cracks and measure its free length.
- Verify the working of the easing gear.
- Ensure the drain line is clear.
- Conduct non-destructive testing of components as needed.
- Check the condition of the blowdown ring and the compression ring neck bush.
Clearances to be measured:
- Measure the clearance between the valve lip and the seat lip.
- Clearances between spindle and cap nut
- Measure the clearance between the cotter pin and the groove in the spindle.
- Check the clearances between the floating piston and the spindle
- Check the lift after assembly. It should be more than D/16 for high lift safety valve
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q4 (16 Marks)
Auxiliary Machinery
With regards to steering control system, explain following with the aid of suitable diagram.
(a) Safematic concept.
(b) The flow reversal of main hydraulic pump and advantages
(c) The flow volume variation of hydraulic pump and method to achieve
(d) Hunting lever functioning.
Appeared In: Mar 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(a) Safematic Concept
The Safematic system is an automatic safety arrangement provided in steering gear hydraulic systems to detect and isolate hydraulic oil leakage, thereby preventing complete loss of steering capability.
Need for Safematic
In the event of:
- Burst hydraulic pipe
- Failure of seals or fittings
There is a risk of rapid oil loss, which could otherwise result in total steering failure and loss of vessel maneuverability.
Working Principle
- Sensors continuously monitor the oil level in the hydraulic expansion tanks.
- If a sudden drop in oil level is detected, indicating a leakage:
- The Safematic system automatically divides the hydraulic system into two independent circuits.
- The leaking circuit is identified and isolated.
Result
- The faulty side is shut down.
- The remaining healthy pump and actuator continue to operate.
- At least 50% steering capability is retained, ensuring compliance with SOLAS safety requirements.
(b) Flow Reversal of Main Hydraulic Pump
Modern steering gears employ bi-directional variable delivery pumps, such as:
- Swash plate pump
- Hele-Shaw pump
Instead of using directional control valves, rudder direction is changed by reversing the hydraulic oil flow directly at the pump.
Method of Flow Reversal
- Changing the tilt direction of the swash plate reverses the piston stroke.
- This reverses oil flow to either side of the steering ram, causing the rudder to move port or starboard.
Advantages
- Smooth Operation
- Eliminates sudden shocks caused by opening and closing heavy directional valves.
- Higher Efficiency
- Reduces pressure losses associated with complex valve manifolds and piping.
- Simplicity and Reliability
- Removes directional control valves, which are common failure points.
- Better Control Response
- Direct pump control provides faster and more accurate rudder movement.
(c) Flow Volume Variation of Hydraulic Pump
The speed of rudder movement depends on the volume of hydraulic oil delivered to the steering ram.
Method to Achieve Flow Variation
Flow variation is achieved by altering the swash plate angle in a variable delivery pump.
Operating Conditions
- Neutral Position
- Swash plate is vertical (zero angle).
- Pistons rotate but do not stroke.
- No oil flow → Rudder remains stationary.
- Maximum Flow
- Swash plate is tilted to a larger angle (θ).
- Piston stroke length increases.
- Maximum oil displacement occurs, producing maximum rudder speed.
- Variable Flow
- Intermediate swash plate angles provide proportional oil flow.
- Enables smooth acceleration and deceleration of the rudder.
Benefit
- Provides soft starts and stops
- Prevents mechanical stress
- Enhances steering accuracy and comfort
(d) Hunting Lever Functioning
The hunting lever is a mechanical feedback mechanism that:
- Prevents rudder overshoot
- Ensures the rudder stops exactly at the commanded angle
Functioning
Input Signal
- When the bridge wheel or telemotor is operated:
- One end of the hunting lever is displaced.
- This moves the pump control rod, initiating oil delivery.
Feedback Mechanism
- As the rudder moves:
- Its actual position is mechanically fed back to the other end of the hunting lever.
Hunting Action
- Rudder movement pulls the lever in the opposite direction.
- When the commanded angle is reached:
- The hunting lever returns the pump control rod to neutral (zero delivery).
- Oil flow stops and the rudder holds position.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q8 (16 Marks)
General 🔥 Repeated 2x
With reference to oil water separators:
(a) Describes with the aid of a sketch, the working of such a separator.
(b) Explain the consequence if the interface detector position is incorrect.
(c) Enumerate the various possibilities by which oil water interface can be described.
Appeared In: Mar 2018 Dec 2024
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The oily bilge is drawn into the separator by the automatic self-priming pump. The pump is located on the outlet of the separate to prevent the formation of a mechanical emulsion. As the oily bilge water enters the separator, it flows upwards through the matrix plate pack towards the top of the separator. Some oil separates immediately due to the reduced flow velocity and the difference in specific gravity between oil and water. Oil droplets impinge on the surface of the matrix plate pack and begin the coalescing process. The oil droplets coalesce until they become large enough to detach from the corrugated plates and gravitate to the top of the separator. Smaller oil droplets that escape the matrix plate pack are removed by the polishing pack. After the separated oil accumulates to a predetermined level, the oil sensor initiates the oil discharge and cleaning cycle by stopping the pump, closing the water discharge valve and opening the clean water inlet valve. This allows clean sea or fresh water to cleanse the matrix plate pack and flow upward in the reverse direction, washing the polishing pack and displacing the accumulated oil. The outlet of the Oily Water Separator is directed by a 3-way valve either to the overboard or to the storage tank. The valve is controlled by a 15ppm monitor, which allows overboard discharge if oil content is below 15 ppm and stops discharge if oil content is exceeded.
- Probe Too Low: The sensor might not detect the actual oil level. This can lead to the frequent opening of the water discharge valve, allowing water to escape into the oil outlet, contaminating the separated oil.
- Probe Too High: The oil discharge valve will open late, reducing the separation efficiency. This is because the oil and water will mix more thoroughly before the valve opens, leading to a less effective separation of the two liquids.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q2 (16 Marks)
Steering & Deck Machinery 🔥 Repeated 7x
With respect to Windlass and Deck Machinery:
(a) Describe the principle of a coil-operated brake suitable for winches and other deck machinery.
(b) Explain with suitable sketches how the windlass is relieved of strain when riding at anchor.
Appeared In: Jan 2024 Sep 2023 Mar 2021 Jan 2021 Dec 2018 Nov 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
A coil-operated brake for winches and deck machinery is designed to automatically adjust the braking force in response to changes in the load on the mooring line. This system ensures the correct force is applied between the brake band and the winch drum at all times.
The core principle is that when an additional load is applied to the mooring line, the line stretches, which in turn loosens the tightening mechanism. This loosening action automatically causes the brake to apply the correct force, maintaining constant tension. This has the significant advantage of being a self-adjusting system, meaning that once it's set, there's no need for a crew member to periodically re-apply the recommended torque. The brake is typically released using a hydraulic lever.
When a vessel is riding at anchor, a mechanism is used to lock the anchor chain and relieve the windlass of the strain. This is crucial for preventing damage to the windlass and ensuring the anchor is securely held.
A Cable stopper, often a pawl of a rod, is engaged with a link of the anchor chain. The pawl acts as a stop, preventing the chain from moving. All the weight and force from the anchor and the vessel's movement are then transferred to this locking device and the ship's structure, effectively relieving the windlass of any strain.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q8 (16 Marks)
General 🔥 Repeated 12x
Reverse osmosis is the modern alternative for shipboard production of drinking water.
(a) Describe using simple diagrams if necessary, the principle of reverse osmosis.
(b) (i) Sketch a line diagram showing a single pass system for producing fresh water from sea water.
(i) Describe such a system.
Appeared In: Jan 2018 Jul 2025 Jan 2023 Mar 2021 Oct 2019 Aug 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Nov 2018 Oct 2018 Jul 2018 Aug 2025
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Reverse osmosis (RO) is a process that purifies water by forcing it through a semi-permeable membrane. In this process, high pressure is applied to a solution with a high concentration of dissolved solids, such as saltwater, on one side of the membrane. This pressure overcomes the natural osmotic pressure, causing the pure water molecules to pass through the membrane while leaving behind the larger salt ions and other impurities. The membrane acts as a selective barrier, allowing only the water to pass, while the concentrated brine solution is discarded. For large-scale production, a large membrane surface area and a strong pump capable of generating high pressures are necessary.
1. Pretreatment Stage
Pretreatment is essential to protect the R.O. membranes from fouling and scaling.
- Scaling: Caused by soluble salts such as calcium carbonate and calcium sulphate depositing on the membrane.
- Fouling: Caused by micro-organisms, metal oxides, and colloidal particles coating the membrane surface.
Pretreatment methods include:
- Mechanical filtration: Multiple filter stages in series, e.g.:
- Sand filters
- Multi-layer filters
- Microfilters (<10 ppm particle size)
- Chemical treatment:
- Coagulants for fine particle removal
- Biocides to kill micro-organisms
- Acid dosing to neutralize calcium salts and prevent scale formation
A pump takes suction from the sea chest through a coarse filter, delivering water at about 6 bar through the pretreatment system.
2. High-Pressure Stage
- A high-pressure piston pump raises the feed water pressure to above 50 bar.
- This pressurized water enters the semi-permeable membrane modules.
3. Separation Process
- Due to the pressure difference between the concentrated brine side and the permeate side, water molecules pass through the membrane.
- Dissolved salts, organics, and microbes are rejected.
Outputs:
- Permeate (Fresh Water): Low-salt content water used for drinking and domestic purposes.
- Brine (Concentrated Reject): Discharged overboard (OVBD).
4. Post-Treatment
The fresh water (permeate) is further treated to make it suitable for shipboard use:
- Hardness adjustment (to prevent excessive softness)
- pH correction (maintained around 8 for taste and corrosion control)
- Chlorination (for disinfection)
Note: If pH rises too high, chlorine’s effectiveness against micro-organisms is reduced.
Flow Summary:
Sea Water → Coarse Filter → Pretreatment Filters & Chemicals → High-Pressure Pump → R.O. Membranes →
→ Permeate (Fresh Water) → Post-treatment → Ship’s Fresh Water System
→ Brine (Reject Water) → Overboard
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q1 (16 Marks)
Steering & Deck Machinery 🔥 Repeated 10x
Sketch and describe a "fail safe steering gear" suitable for use on a tanker of more than 100,000 T dwt. Explain the sequence of events that take place when an oil leak takes place in one of the hydraulic pipe lines.
Appeared In: Oct 2024 Dec 2023 Aug 2023 Jul 2023 Mar 2023 Feb 2021 Feb 2019 Oct 2018 Aug 2018 Jul 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
According to SOLAS chapter - 2, part 1, regulation 29.16, every tanker of more than 10,000 GT shall comply with the following:
- The main steering capability due to a single failure in any part of one of the power actuating systems shall be regained in not more than 45 seconds.
- The main steering shall comprise at least two identical power actuating systems, each capable of meeting the requirements. Loss of fluid from one system shall be capable of being detected, and the defective system shall automatically get isolated so that the other system shall remain fully operational
Considering the above regulatory requirements, given below is a “Fail Safe steering gear” suitable for use on a tanker of more than 100,000 T DWT.
Shown in the diagram is a “Fail safe steering gear” having two independent power actuating systems that can
- Work simultaneously in normal operation, meeting the requirement OR
- Work independently and meet the requirement
- In the event of loss of fluid from any one system, it can be detected and isolated automatically so that the other system can remain fully operational.
Working:
- The system incorporates two sets of electric-driven pumps. Both main and auxiliary pumps are on the same shaft. The main pump shown in the diagram is a variable delivery pump
- The variable delivery pump takes suction from the tank and supplies hydraulic oil to the ram cylinders. The oil flow of the pump is determined by the pump actuating lever
- The movement of the pump actuating lever is controlled by the rudder angle order given by the bridge with the help of a bi-directional control valve
- A two-way shock relief valve is fitted between the two cylinders to release the pressure from one side of the cylinder to the other side in case of pressure increase in one of the cylinders due to heavy seas
- By-pass valves are also fitted between two cylinders, which are normally shut during operation. When one system is stopped, there is a pressure drop, as the auxiliary pump has also stopped this opens the by-pass valves, thus removing the hydraulic lock of the ram operation.
- Auto isolation valves in the system are there to isolate one system in case of any failure.
Sequence of events during hydraulic oil leak:
Case 1: Consider an oil leak from any pipe for cylinders 1 and 2 with the No. 1 pump running:
- No. 1 tank level will come down to L1, and it will sound an alarm on the bridge and in ECR
- When the tank level further drops to L2, i.e. low-low level, the no. 1 pump stops.
- Stopping the No. 1 pump also stops the attached auxiliary pump. So the line pressure drops, due to which the normally closed by-pass valves ‘X’ and ‘Y’ open.
- Simultaneously, the auto isolation valves ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’ will be operated by an electric signal. A, B and C are normally open valves. The electric signal will close them. So, systems 1 and 2 will be completely separated. Thus, the defective system, I.e. system 1, is isolated.
- Along with the operation of the auto isolation valves, the No. 2 pump will start automatically. The attached auxiliary pump will act on the by-pass valve ‘Y’ and close it. This enables cylinders 3 and 4 to be in normal operation.
- It should also be noted that since system 1 is completely isolated, there is no oil pressure to operate the bypass valve. So the by-pass valves remain open, thereby removing the hydraulic lock for the ram movement in cylinders 1 and 2
Case 2: Consider an oil leakage from any pipe of cylinders 3 and 4 with the No. 1 pump running:
Points 1, 2 and 3 are the same as case 1
- Simultaneously, the auto isolation valves ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’ will be operated by an electric signal. This will shut the normally open valves A, B and C. Thus, systems 1 and 2 will be completely separated
- Along with the operation of auto isolation valves, the No. 2 pump will start automatically. The attached auxiliary pump will act on the by-pass valve ‘Y’ and close. So, cylinders 3 and 4 will come into normal operation.
- Now, since the leak is between the pipe of cylinders 3 and 4, the level of the no. 2 tank will drop to L1 and give an alarm.
- The level will further drop to L2, but the pump will not stop and changeover to ensure that the leak is from the pipe of cylinders 3 and 4
- When the no. 2 tank level drops to L3, the no. 2 pump stops and the no. 1 pump starts to operate the steering using cylinders 1 and 2
- Starting the no. 1 pump will ensure that the by-pass valve ‘X’ is shut, and stopping the no. 2 pump will ensure that the by-pass valve ‘Y’ is open
This ensures the operation of the steering Gear with the defective system fully isolated.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q2 (16 Marks)
General 🔥 Repeated 12x
With reference to Vacuum Sewage Systems:
(i) Sketch & Describe a Vacuum sewage system.
(ii) State the advantage of Vacuum sewage system.
(iii) State the different causes of dropping vacuum.
Appeared In: Aug 2025 Apr 2024 Mar 2020 Jan 2020 Oct 2019 Sep 2019 Aug 2019 Jun 2019 Mar 2019 Jan 2019 Oct 2018 Sep 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(b) Advantages of a Vacuum Sewage System:
- The vacuum sewage system uses 85–90% less water for flushing compared to conventional systems, requiring very little flushing water.
- Toilets can be positioned more flexibly, including below the level of the holding tank, which is not feasible with gravity-fed systems.
- The system uses smaller diameter piping, reducing material and space requirements.
- The reduced water usage contributes to overall water conservation, making the system environmentally friendly.
- If the pump is pumping foam instead of liquid, this will be evident due to severe vibration. Add water to the tank and try again. If adding water does not help, reduce the level of foam by pouring antifoam agent into the tank (1 cup per 2 cubic metres of foam and sewage).
- Check that shut-off valves are fully open and not clogged.
- If the direction of rotation of the pump is wrong, change wiring accordingly.
- Close the valves that isolate the collecting unit from the piping system and start the pump again. If vacuum now builds up, there must be a leak in the piping system.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q4 (16 Marks)
General 🔥 Repeated 10x
Reverse osmosis is the modern alternative for shipboard production of drinking water:
(a) Describe using simple diagrams if necessary, the principle of reverse osmosis.
(b) Sketch and describe a single pass system for producing fresh water from sea water
Appeared In: Jul 2025 Jan 2023 Mar 2021 Oct 2019 Aug 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Nov 2018 Oct 2018 Jul 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Reverse osmosis (RO) is a process that purifies water by forcing it through a semi-permeable membrane. In this process, high pressure is applied to a solution with a high concentration of dissolved solids, such as saltwater, on one side of the membrane. This pressure overcomes the natural osmotic pressure, causing the pure water molecules to pass through the membrane while leaving behind the larger salt ions and other impurities. The membrane acts as a selective barrier, allowing only the water to pass, while the concentrated brine solution is discarded. For large-scale production, a large membrane surface area and a strong pump capable of generating high pressures are necessary.
1. Pretreatment Stage
Pretreatment is essential to protect the R.O. membranes from fouling and scaling.
- Scaling: Caused by soluble salts such as calcium carbonate and calcium sulphate depositing on the membrane.
- Fouling: Caused by micro-organisms, metal oxides, and colloidal particles coating the membrane surface.
Pretreatment methods include:
- Mechanical filtration: Multiple filter stages in series, e.g.:
- Sand filters
- Multi-layer filters
- Microfilters (<10 ppm particle size)
- Chemical treatment:
- Coagulants for fine particle removal
- Biocides to kill micro-organisms
- Acid dosing to neutralize calcium salts and prevent scale formation
A pump takes suction from the sea chest through a coarse filter, delivering water at about 6 bar through the pretreatment system.
2. High-Pressure Stage
- A high-pressure piston pump raises the feed water pressure to above 50 bar.
- This pressurized water enters the semi-permeable membrane modules.
3. Separation Process
- Due to the pressure difference between the concentrated brine side and the permeate side, water molecules pass through the membrane.
- Dissolved salts, organics, and microbes are rejected.
Outputs:
- Permeate (Fresh Water): Low-salt content water used for drinking and domestic purposes.
- Brine (Concentrated Reject): Discharged overboard (OVBD).
4. Post-Treatment
The fresh water (permeate) is further treated to make it suitable for shipboard use:
- Hardness adjustment (to prevent excessive softness)
- pH correction (maintained around 8 for taste and corrosion control)
- Chlorination (for disinfection)
Note: If pH rises too high, chlorine’s effectiveness against micro-organisms is reduced.
Flow Summary:
Sea Water → Coarse Filter → Pretreatment Filters & Chemicals → High-Pressure Pump → R.O. Membranes →
→ Permeate (Fresh Water) → Post-treatment → Ship’s Fresh Water System
→ Brine (Reject Water) → Overboard
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q5 (16 Marks)
Control & Instrumentation 🔥 Repeated 7x
Describe with a sketch a pneumatic relay and show how feedback can be achieved when such a relay is used in conjunction with a flapper mechanism.
Appeared In: Mar 2025 Sep 2023 Oct 2020 Oct 2018 Aug 2018 Jul 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The pneumatic relay operates on the principle of a nozzle-flapper arrangement. Air supply pressure acts on a diaphragm located below a spring. A rod and plug, connected to the diaphragm, control the flow of output air through a nozzle. A flapper is positioned near the nozzle.
Operation:
- An input signal (which can be a change in pressure or displacement of the flapper) affects the flapper's position.
- Flapper movement changes the distance between the flapper and the nozzle. A decrease in distance (flapper closer to the nozzle) restricts the output airflow. Conversely, an increase in distance increases output airflow. This is the direct action of the relay.
- Changes in the output air flow alter the back pressure at the nozzle.
- Increased nozzle back pressure pushes the diaphragm downwards, compressing the spring and further reducing the output airflow. Decreased nozzle back pressure allows the spring to push the diaphragm upwards, increasing output airflow.
- A portion of the output air is fed back through a line connected to a bellows and a feedback-adjusting spring (as shown in the sketch). This feedback pressure acts against the diaphragm, opposing the effect of the input signal. The bellows and spring arrangement allow the system to fine-tune the feedback strength. This negative feedback stabilises the system and increases the control range, preventing excessive overshoot or oscillation. The feedback mechanism subtracts from the effective input pressure, acting as a negative feedback loop.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q7 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting
Explain in detail the advantages and disadvantages of controllable pitch propellers. With suitable single-line diagrams, explain the "Combinator Control" for CPP.
Appeared In: Oct 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Advantages of controllable pitch propellers (CPP)
- Ship is manoeuvred and reversed by changing blade pitch while the engine runs continuously at constant (or optimum) speed and direction, giving instant astern capability without stopping or reversing the engine.
- Full power is available ahead and astern; crash manoeuvring and quick response are better, valuable in ferries, tugs, trawlers and naval vessels.
- Engine can be kept at optimum efficiency, reducing specific fuel consumption and wear; fuel saving applies over a range of loads.
- The main engine can be run at constant rpm, simplifying speed control; with combinator control both pitch and rpm are set together.
- Better manoeuvrability at low speeds; can hold a slow bollard pull or zero-speed positioning by feathering pitch.
- Allows a free-running or two-stroke engine to be used with a CPP, and permits reverse power without reversing gear.
- Remote and bridge control is simplified, and manoeuvring can be operated by a single combined lever.
Disadvantages
- Greater initial cost and more complex hub with moving blade mechanism, pitch servo cylinder and control system.
- The hub is larger, increasing boss/pod diameter and creating hydrodynamic drag, and making blade sealing more difficult.
- More maintenance: blade seals, pitch mechanism, hydraulic cylinder and servo system require careful attention; seals can leak.
- Slightly lower propeller efficiency at design condition than a fixed pitch propeller with optimally matched blades.
- If hydraulic pitch control fails, pitch may default (or stay), requiring emergency locking arrangements.
- Pitch control adds interlock and safety complexity to the machinery control system.
Combinator control for CPP
A single-line diagram shows: bridge combinator lever -> electronic RPM/pitch follower/control unit -> engine governor signal (fuel pump rack / engine speed) and CPP pitch servo control -> servo amplifier -> electro-hydraulic pitch control block -> hydraulic pump -> pitch setting cylinder in propeller hub -> feedback transducer returning actual pitch.
In combinator control the one lever sets BOTH engine speed (rpm) and propeller pitch together on a pre-programmed relationship. The control unit compares demanded lever position with computed rpm/pitch set points and, through followers, positions both the engine speed governor and the pitch servo. The programme is chosen so that for a given lever position the combination of rpm and pitch gives the ship the best thrust and economy without overloading the engine, matching the engine's optimum propeller curve. Feedback from actual rpm and actual pitch is fed back so the servo balances the demand; when the lever is in the astern region pitch is taken to negative without altering engine direction. An overriding feature permits operation with fixed pitch or with rpm/pitch set independently should the combinator programme fail.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q9 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting 🔥 Repeated 14x
Sketch a sealing arrangement for an oil lubricated stern tube. Identify the common forms of seal failure. State how oil loss due to seal failure can be restricted whilst on passage? What is the material used for sealing rings and propeller shaft liner?
Appeared In: Dec 2024 Apr 2024 Aug 2023 Jun 2023 Feb 2021 Oct 2020 Mar 2020 Jan 2020 Dec 2019 Sep 2019 Jun 2019 Feb 2019 Oct 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Common forms of seal failure in a stern tube
- Loss of elasticity in seal material – Nitrile rubber seals may lose their elastic properties over time, reducing their sealing effectiveness.
- Surface damage to chrome liner – Grooving or scoring of the chrome liner can impair sealing surfaces, leading to leakage.
- Excessive shaft vibration – Heavy vibration of the propeller shaft can cause uneven wear and seal deformation.
- Insufficient cooling – Inadequate cooling can cause rubber sealing elements to harden and eventually fail.
- Exceeding running hour limits – Operating beyond the manufacturer’s recommended service life increases the risk of seal failure.
- Deterioration of oil quality – Contaminated or degraded oil reduces lubrication and protection, accelerating seal wear.
- Incorrect header tank level adjustment – Failure to adjust the header tank according to vessel draft can cause oil loss, leading to inadequate lubrication and seal damage.
Restricting oil loss due to seal failure whilst on passage
- Use of high-viscosity oil – Recharge the system with a thicker oil to reduce leakage rate through damaged seals.
- Temporary oil supply arrangement –
- Disconnect the existing oil supply line.
- Connect a 45-gallon drum supported by a block and tackle arrangement.
- Adjust the drum height to vary the oil head pressure, matching it to the surrounding water pressure and minimizing leakage.
- Fresh water introduction – Supply fresh water to the gravity tank to emulsify with any leaked oil. The resulting emulsion helps coagulate around the damaged seal area while the oil is circulated to maintain lubrication and sealing.
Materials for Sealing Rings and Propeller Shaft Liner:
- Sealing Rings: Nitrile rubber (NBR) is a commonly used material for stern tube sealing rings due to its good oil resistance, elasticity, and relatively low cost.
- Shaft Liner: Chrome-plated steel is a common material for stern tube liners. The chrome plating provides a hard, smooth, and corrosion-resistant surface, minimizing wear and improving the life of the sealing rings.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q2 (16 Marks)
Boilers & Steam 🔥 Repeated 7x
Sketch and describe a boiler water level controller of the float operated type. State the reasons for having this mechanism on the boiler and using the controller and boiler for analogy explain the following terms.
(a) Detecting element
(b) Servo motor
(c) Desired value
Appeared In: Nov 2024 Nov 2023 Feb 2021 Sep 2018 Jul 2018 Feb 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Boiler Water Level Controller – Float Operated Type
A simple float-operated water level controller consists of:
- A float chamber connected to the boiler steam drum by two lines — one for steam and one for water.
- A float inside the chamber, which rises and falls with changes in water level.
- A mechanical linkage or rod attached to the float, which extends to an electric sensor unit mounted above the chamber.
Working Principle:
- As the float moves up or down, it shifts a contactor along a variable resistance track or magnetic switches.
- This movement changes the electrical output signal, which is sent to a square-root converter.
- The converter transforms the electrical signal into a proportional pneumatic signal.
- The pneumatic signal acts on the diaphragm of the feed water control valve actuator, modulating feed flow to maintain the set water level.
Reasons for Using a Float-Operated Type
- Reliability: Unlike constant/variable head leg systems, there is no need to maintain a filled reference column.
- Simplified Installation: Electrical sensing eliminates the need for long impulse tubes for remote indication.
- Ease of Maintenance: The electric sensor unit can be easily replaced without dismantling the float chamber.
- Lower Cost: Fewer mechanical parts and no head leg piping reduce installation and maintenance expenses.
Explanation of Terms (Analogy with Controller and Boiler)
: In this system, the float is the detecting element. It directly senses the water level, which is the controlled variable, and its movement provides a signal that represents the current state of the system.
: The square root converter and the feedwater controller collectively act as the servo motor. They are the mechanisms that receive the signal from the detecting element and perform the physical action (opening or closing the feedwater valve) to correct the water level.
: The set point is the desired value. This is a fixed input to the square root converter (or a comparator) that represents the ideal water level that the system aims to maintain. The controller continuously works to match the actual water level to this desired value.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q7 (16 Marks)
Materials & Testing 🔥 Repeated 8x
With reference to Keyless Propellers:
(a) Sketch a section through a keyless sleeved propeller.
(b) State the advantages of using a keyless sleeved propeller.
(c) State with reasons, which metal sleeve, should be made for contact with the forged mild steel tail shaft.
(d) State the material uses to bond the sleeve to the propeller and the general thickness of the bonding material.
Appeared In: Jan 2026 Jun 2024 Dec 2023 Oct 2023 Mar 2019 Jan 2019 Sep 2018 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- Keyless design avoids stress concentration caused by keys and keyways.
- Stresses are evenly distributed across the internal surface of the propeller boss
- The absence of a keyway increases the friction available for torque transmission.
- The design prevents overstressing or permanent damage to the propeller hub during operation.
- The keyless arrangement simplifies the propeller and shaft interface, making it easier to manufacture and maintain.
- With a coefficient of friction of 0.28, it minimizes the likelihood of propeller slippage.
- Its expansion rates are similar to those of steel, reducing the risk of misalignment or loosening during temperature variations.
- Pearlitic cast iron exhibits excellent resistance to fretting, which is important for prolonged and reliable operation.
- High-strength epoxy Araldite filling is used to bond the sleeve to the propeller securely.
- The bonding material is applied with a thickness of approximately 1 mm, ensuring adequate adhesion and durability.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q8 (16 Marks)
General 🔥 Repeated 12x
With reference to Vacuum Sewage Systems:
(i) Sketch & Describe a Vacuum sewage system.
(ii) State the advantage of Vacuum sewage system.
(iii) State the different causes of dropping vacuum.
Appeared In: Aug 2025 Apr 2024 Mar 2020 Jan 2020 Oct 2019 Sep 2019 Aug 2019 Jun 2019 Mar 2019 Jan 2019 Oct 2018 Sep 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(b) Advantages of a Vacuum Sewage System:
- The vacuum sewage system uses 85–90% less water for flushing compared to conventional systems, requiring very little flushing water.
- Toilets can be positioned more flexibly, including below the level of the holding tank, which is not feasible with gravity-fed systems.
- The system uses smaller diameter piping, reducing material and space requirements.
- The reduced water usage contributes to overall water conservation, making the system environmentally friendly.
- If the pump is pumping foam instead of liquid, this will be evident due to severe vibration. Add water to the tank and try again. If adding water does not help, reduce the level of foam by pouring antifoam agent into the tank (1 cup per 2 cubic metres of foam and sewage).
- Check that shut-off valves are fully open and not clogged.
- If the direction of rotation of the pump is wrong, change wiring accordingly.
- Close the valves that isolate the collecting unit from the piping system and start the pump again. If vacuum now builds up, there must be a leak in the piping system.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q1 (16 Marks)
Refrigeration & Air Conditioning 🔥 Repeated 3x
Sketch and describe the refrigeration system of a container carrying bananas only. How does the controlled atmosphere of the container extend the green life and shelf life of bananas? How is the airflow system designed?
Appeared In: Dec 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Refrigeration system and controlled atmosphere of a banana container.
Sketch and description of the reefer container system
A line diagram shows: an integral/ (or clip-on) refrigeration unit at one end with a refrigerant circuit composed of compressor, condenser (air-cooled with fans), expansion valve and evaporator coil, arranged in a closed vapour-compression loop. The refrigerant (e.g. R-134a or R-404A/R-407C) is compressed, condensed rejecting heat, expanded through the TEV and evaporates in the evaporator cooling the airstream. An air circulation system forces cooled air through the cargo: a thermo-controlled fan delivers air, and floor T-bar ducts/vents distribute it; the air flows up through the banana boxes/stow, returns through the ceiling, and is drawn back over the evaporator coils. A thermostat or temperature sensor controls compressor cycling to hold the set point, usually 13-14 C for bananas in the green/ripening state, with the heater available to hold temperature if ambient is low. Some units use two-speed fans and a ventilation/flushing damper to draw in outside air and expel ethylene.
Controlled atmosphere (CA) - how it extends green life and shelf life
Bananas are a climacteric fruit that produce ethylene gas as a ripening trigger. In a CA container the atmosphere is modified by reducing oxygen (commonly down to about 2-5%) and/or enriching carbon dioxide, and by controlling ethylene. Lowering oxygen slows the climacteric respiration of the fruit, reduces metabolic heat and the rate of ethylene-driven ripening, so the fruit stays green and firm for longer and shelf life is extended. Exposing the cargo to low oxygen and/or removing ethylene retards colour change and softening, and reduces over-ripening and spoilage in transit, so bananas can be shipped green and ripen to a controlled stage at the destination. The CA system monitors O2/CO2/ethylene, uses a nitrogen generator or flush/semipermeable membranes to maintain the low O2, adds a small measured ethylene (optional) and scrubs CO2 as required; a ventilation phase flushes the space before discharge.
How the airflow is designed
The airflow is designed for efficient cooling and uniform temperature:
- Air is drawn over the evaporator by the unit fans and discharged through the floor T-bar (bottom-air delivery) so it flows longitudinally under the cargo.
- Banana boxes are double-vented and stacked so that air rises through vertical vent channels between the boxes (with air circulation space left between each box/stack), reaches the ceiling and returns to the return-air duct/evaporator.
- The stow is arranged to leave clear air lanes; cartons are arranged to allow the air to pass around every box, avoiding blockages.
- Return air is sensed so the unit controls on return-air temperature, and the fans provide sufficient air changes per hour to remove heat of respiration.
- Even air distribution, correct dunnage and stowage pattern, and adequate spacing at the unit end are critical to avoid hot spots and condensation.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (16 Marks)
Steering & Deck Machinery
Describe with the aid of sketches where necessary a vane type steering gear showing how the weight of the rudder and stock are carried and the arrangement that allow for wear down.
Appeared In: Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
A vane-type steering gear uses a rotor and stator mechanism where the vanes create hydraulic chambers to control the movement of the rudder.
- The rotor is fitted to the tapered rudder stock. The rudder stock carries the weight of the rudder, supported by a rudder carrier bearing.
- The stator is fixed to the ship’s structure, forming a rigid support.
- The fixed vanes are evenly spaced inside the stator bore, while the rotating vanes are equally spaced on the rotor.
- These vanes form two sets of pressure chambers in the annular space between the rotor and stator. Hydraulic fluid is supplied at pressure to one set of chambers, causing the rotor and rudder to rotate in the required direction based on the steering order from the wheelhouse.
- The weight of the rudder and rudder stock is carried by the rudder carrier bearing, which is mounted on steel chocks supported by thicker deck plating to ensure stability and handle the load.
- There is a vertical clearance between the stator flange and the anchor bracket to allow for rudder "jump" (vertical movement).
- Another clearance exists between the top of the anchor bracket and the stator flange to accommodate for rudder wear down or rudder drop over time. The total clearance provided is around 38 mm, allowing the system to absorb wear and vertical movement without affecting performance.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q5 (16 Marks)
General 🔥 Repeated 12x
Reverse osmosis is the modern alternative for shipboard production of drinking water.
(a) Describe using simple diagrams if necessary, the principle of reverse osmosis.
(b) Sketch a line diagram showing a single pass system for producing fresh water from seawater and describe the system.
Appeared In: Jan 2018 Jul 2025 Jan 2023 Mar 2021 Oct 2019 Aug 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Nov 2018 Oct 2018 Jul 2018 Aug 2025
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Reverse osmosis (RO) is a process that purifies water by forcing it through a semi-permeable membrane. In this process, high pressure is applied to a solution with a high concentration of dissolved solids, such as saltwater, on one side of the membrane. This pressure overcomes the natural osmotic pressure, causing the pure water molecules to pass through the membrane while leaving behind the larger salt ions and other impurities. The membrane acts as a selective barrier, allowing only the water to pass, while the concentrated brine solution is discarded. For large-scale production, a large membrane surface area and a strong pump capable of generating high pressures are necessary.
1. Pretreatment Stage
Pretreatment is essential to protect the R.O. membranes from fouling and scaling.
- Scaling: Caused by soluble salts such as calcium carbonate and calcium sulphate depositing on the membrane.
- Fouling: Caused by micro-organisms, metal oxides, and colloidal particles coating the membrane surface.
Pretreatment methods include:
- Mechanical filtration: Multiple filter stages in series, e.g.:
- Sand filters
- Multi-layer filters
- Microfilters (<10 ppm particle size)
- Chemical treatment:
- Coagulants for fine particle removal
- Biocides to kill micro-organisms
- Acid dosing to neutralize calcium salts and prevent scale formation
A pump takes suction from the sea chest through a coarse filter, delivering water at about 6 bar through the pretreatment system.
2. High-Pressure Stage
- A high-pressure piston pump raises the feed water pressure to above 50 bar.
- This pressurized water enters the semi-permeable membrane modules.
3. Separation Process
- Due to the pressure difference between the concentrated brine side and the permeate side, water molecules pass through the membrane.
- Dissolved salts, organics, and microbes are rejected.
Outputs:
- Permeate (Fresh Water): Low-salt content water used for drinking and domestic purposes.
- Brine (Concentrated Reject): Discharged overboard (OVBD).
4. Post-Treatment
The fresh water (permeate) is further treated to make it suitable for shipboard use:
- Hardness adjustment (to prevent excessive softness)
- pH correction (maintained around 8 for taste and corrosion control)
- Chlorination (for disinfection)
Note: If pH rises too high, chlorine’s effectiveness against micro-organisms is reduced.
Flow Summary:
Sea Water → Coarse Filter → Pretreatment Filters & Chemicals → High-Pressure Pump → R.O. Membranes →
→ Permeate (Fresh Water) → Post-treatment → Ship’s Fresh Water System
→ Brine (Reject Water) → Overboard
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q6 (16 Marks)
Auxiliary Machinery 🔥 Repeated 6x
With reference to Gear pumps used for lubricating oil transfer
(a) Sketch and describe a gear type pump indicating the flow of fluid
(b) State the materials that gear type pump components may be manufactured from
(c) Specify THREE applications that are suitable for the employment of gear type pumps
Appeared In: Aug 2025 Jul 2025 Oct 2019 Aug 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(a) Gear Type Pump
A gear pump is a positive displacement rotary pump. It commonly has two meshing spur gears inside a close-fitting casing. One gear is driven by the shaft and the other is an idler gear.
Operation
As the gears rotate, the teeth unmesh at the inlet side. This creates a low-pressure area, so lubricating oil enters the pump casing.
The oil is trapped in the spaces between the gear teeth and casing. It is carried around the outside of the gears from inlet to outlet.
At the outlet side, the gear teeth mesh again. This reduces the space available and forces the oil out through the discharge port.
Oil does not pass through the centre between the gears because the meshing teeth form a seal. Since a fixed volume is delivered each revolution, the gear pump is a positive displacement pump. A relief valve is therefore required to prevent excessive pressure if the discharge is blocked.
(b) Materials for Gear Pump Components
- Casing/body: Cast iron, cast steel, bronze, or aluminium alloy for small pumps.
- Gears: Hardened steel, alloy steel, stainless steel, bronze, or cast iron.
- Shafts: Carbon steel, alloy steel, or stainless steel.
- Bearings/bushes: Bronze, white metal, phosphor bronze, or ball/roller bearings.
- Seals: Mechanical seal, gland packing, nitrile/Viton oil seals.
- Relief valve parts: Steel or stainless steel spring and valve components.
For lubricating oil pumps, cast iron casing with hardened steel gears and steel shafts is common.
(c) Suitable Applications of Gear Pumps
- Lubricating oil transfer and circulation
Gear pumps are suitable because lubricating oil is clean, viscous, and has good lubricating properties. The pump gives steady positive flow.
- Fuel oil transfer and booster service
They are used for diesel oil and heavy fuel oil transfer because they handle viscous liquids well and can produce moderate to high pressure.
- Hydraulic oil systems
Gear pumps are used in hydraulic power packs and control systems because they give positive delivery and compact construction.
Other suitable uses include:
- Sludge oil transfer
- Bilge oily water transfer, where liquid is not too contaminated
- Boiler fuel oil supply
- Steering gear auxiliary hydraulic systems
- Cargo oil stripping for suitable viscous liquids
Gear pumps are not suitable for liquids containing hard abrasive solids because close clearances between gears and casing can wear quickly.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q7 (16 Marks)
Refrigeration & Air Conditioning 🔥 Repeated 6x
With Reference to Air conditioning System onboard your vessel
(a) Sketch and describe a high pressure cut out in a refrigeration system.
(b) The refrigeration compressor has stopped due to operation of the h.p. cutout, explain
(i) The possible causes.
(ii) How these causes would be found and possible remedies
(c) What steps are taken if the compressor "short-cycle" on low pressure cut-out?
Appeared In: Jul 2026 Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2024 Jul 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- Dirty condenser
- Overcharge of refrigerant
- Condenser coolant failure
- Clogged filter drier
- Malfunctioning expansion valve
- Faulty pressure switch
(ii)
- Dirty condenser - Visual inspection of condenser, clean the condenser
- Overcharge of refrigerant - check the refrigerant level in sight glass, reduce the refrigerant charge.
- Condenser coolant failure - check in/out pressures, clean the condenser.
- Clogged filter drier - visual inspection of drier, change the drier
- Malfunctioning expansion valve - inspect expansion valve, repair or replace the valve
- Faulty pressure switch - inspect the switch, repair or replace the pressure switch
- To provide sufficient suction pressure control difference according to the system loading and frequency of room inspection
- Refrigerant charges should be adequate, the system should be without leaks. The suction line filter is to be kept clean with no obstruction in suction line.
- The leaky solenoid valve is to be replaced. The evaporator coil is to be defrosted regularly and ensure the inner surface is clean.
- Piston rings, cylinder liner, discharge valve, by-pass valve and safety valve are to be maintained in good condition. Compressor capacity is to be selected according to the system requirement and nature of loading.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q8 (16 Marks)
Cargo & Tankers 🔥 Repeated 7x
With reference to Flue gas Inert gas system
(a) Sketch a line diagram showing a typical Inert Gas System used for inerting the cargo tanks of oil tankers, labeling the component parts.
(b) Describe the system.
(c) State what oxygen content you would expect in the flue gases if good combustion is achieved
Appeared In: Dec 2019 Apr 2019 Mar 2019 Jan 2020 Oct 2019 Sep 2019 Aug 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- Exhaust gases source: The inert gas source is taken from exhaust uptakes of the boiler as it contains flue gases in it.
- Inert gas isolating valve: It serves as the supply valve from uptake to the rest of the system, isolating both systems when not in use.
- Scrubbing tower: Flue gas enters the scrub tower from the bottom and passes through a series of water spray and baffle plates to cool, clean, and moist the gases. The SO2 level decreases up to 90%, and gas becomes clear of soot.
- Demister: Normally made of polypropylene, it is used to absorb moisture and water from the treated flue gas.
- Gas Blower: Normally, two types of fan blowers are used: a steam-driven turbine blower for I.G. operation and an electrically driven blower for topping-up purposes.
- I.G pressure regulating valve: The pressure within the tanks varies with the properties of oil and atmospheric conditions. To control this variation and to avoid overheating of the blower fan, a pressure regulator valve is attached after blower discharge, which re-circulates the excess gas back to the scrubbing tower.
- Deck seal: The purpose of the deck seal is to stop the gases to return back which are coming from the blower to the cargo tanks. Normally wet type deck seals are used. A demister is fitted to absorb the moisture carried away by the gases.
- Mechanical non-return valve: It is an additional non-return mechanical device in line with the deck seal.
- Deck isolating valve: The engine room system can be isolated fully with the deck system with the help of this valve.
- Pressure Vacuum (PV) breaker: The PV breaker helps in controlling the over or under-pressurization of cargo tanks. The PV breaker vent is fitted with a flame trap to prevent fire from igniting when loading or discharging operation is going on when in port.
- Cargo tank isolating valves: A vessel has several cargo holds, and each hold is provided with an isolating valve. The valve controls the flow of inert gas to hold and is operated only by a responsible officer in the vessel.
- Mast riser: The mast riser is used to maintain a positive pressure of inert gas at the time of loading of cargo, and during the loading time, it is kept open to avoid pressurisation of the cargo tank.
Working procedure:
- Boiler uptake gases are drawn to the scrubber unit via flue gas isolating valve(s).
- In the scrubber unit, the gas is cooled, cleaned and dried before being supplied into the tanks.
- Motor-driven inert gas blowers supply the treated gas from the scrubber tower to the tanks. They are mounted on rubber vibration absorbers and isolated from the piping by rubber expansion bellows.
- Regulation of gas quantity delivered to the deck is taken care of by the gas control valves, and the deck pressure is managed by the pressure controller. If the deck pressure is lower than the set point, the output signal will be raised to open the valve more, and vice versa. If the deck pressure is lower than the set point, these valves will then work in cooperation to keep both the deck pressure/blower pressure at their respective set point without starving or overfeeding the circuit.
- Entering the deck line, the gas passes through the deck water seal, which also acts as a non-return valve, automatically preventing the back-flow of explosive gases from the cargo tanks.
- After the deck seal, the inert gas relief is mounted to balance the built-up deck water seal pressure when the system is shut down. In case of a failure of both the deck seal and the non-return valve, the relief valve will vent the gases flowing from the cargo tank into the atmosphere
- The oxygen analyser, which is fitted after the blower separates the “production” and “distribution” components of the plant and analyses the oxygen content of the gas, if it is more than 8%, it alarms and shutdowns the plant
Alternate sketch of IG system.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q9 (16 Marks)
Boilers & Steam 🔥 Repeated 4x
With reference to auxiliary boiler safety valves
(a) Describe, with the aid of a sketch. the safety valves for an auxiliary boiler.
(b) Identity, with reasons, the parts that require particularly close attention during overhaul
(c) Describe how the safety valves are reset after an overhaul
Appeared In: Aug 2025 Oct 2019 Aug 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Overhauling and Setting of Boiler Safety Valves
Boiler safety valves are critical protective devices designed to automatically release excess steam pressure and prevent boiler overpressure. Most auxiliary boilers are fitted with full-lift or pop-type double spring safety valves, which open rapidly and fully once the set pressure is reached, ensuring effective pressure relief.
A typical boiler safety valve consists of the following main components:
- Valve and Seat: Usually made of high-grade materials such as stainless steel or Monel metal to resist erosion (wire drawing) caused by high-velocity steam.
- Compression Springs: Helical springs that hold the valve tightly closed against steam pressure until the set pressure is reached.
- Valve Lip / Shroud (Waste Steam Piston): A specially designed projection that increases the effective area when the valve begins to lift, producing a rapid “pop” action and ensuring full opening.
- Spindle and Guides: Maintain alignment and ensure smooth vertical movement of the valve.
- Waste Steam Pipe: A large-diameter pipe that safely discharges steam to the atmosphere.
- Easing Gear: A mechanical arrangement that allows manual lifting of the valve for testing or emergency purposes.
- Drain Arrangement: Prevents accumulation of condensate in the valve body, which could otherwise affect operation.
- Isolation and Removal: Isolate the boiler, ensure zero pressure, and remove the safety valve carefully from its seating.
- Dismantling: Mark all parts for correct reassembly. Carefully dismantle the valve, including removal of springs, spindle, and valve disc.
- Cleaning: Clean all components thoroughly to remove deposits, scale, and corrosion products.
- Inspection of Components: Each component must be examined for wear, damage, or distortion (details given below).
- Repair and Refurbishment: Carry out necessary repairs such as lapping of valve and seat, replacement of worn parts, or renewal of springs if required.
- Reassembly: Reassemble the valve carefully, ensuring correct alignment and clearances. Avoid over-tightening or misalignment during assembly.
Parts Requiring Close Attention During Overhaul
- Valve and Seat Surfaces: These must be perfectly smooth and free from pitting, scale, or wire drawing. They should be lapped to a fine finish to ensure a steam-tight seal and prevent leakage or “simmering.”
- Springs: Check for cracks, corrosion, and loss of elasticity (permanent set). Defective springs will affect the lifting pressure and proper reseating of the valve.
- Spindle and Guides: Ensure the spindle is straight and moves freely. Guides should be clean and free from deposits, as any restriction may cause sticking or improper operation.
- Lip/Shroud Clearance: The clearance between the valve lip and seat ring is critical for correct “pop” action. Incorrect clearance may result in delayed opening or poor reseating.
- Drain Passage: Ensure that drain holes are clear. Blockage can allow condensate to accumulate, which may interfere with valve operation and cause corrosion.
After overhaul, safety valves must be reset and tested, usually in the presence of a classification society surveyor.
- Preparation: Ensure that the boiler pressure gauge is calibrated and accurate. One safety valve is temporarily gagged (held closed) while the other is being set.
- Raising Boiler Pressure: Gradually raise the boiler pressure up to the Maximum Allowable Working Pressure (MAWP).
- Adjustment of Set Pressure: Adjust the compression of the spring using the adjusting nut until the valve lifts (“pops”) at the required pressure.
- For boilers with two valves, typically one is set at the working pressure and the other slightly higher (e.g., about 3% above), as per class or manufacturer requirements.
- Verification of Operation: Allow the valve to lift and reseat several times to confirm consistent operation. Check the blowdown, which is the difference between opening and closing pressure, typically around 3–5% of the set pressure.
- Accumulation Test (if required): With the main steam stop valve closed and boiler firing at full capacity, verify that the pressure does not rise more than 10% above MAWP, ensuring adequate relieving capacity.
- Sealing and Locking: Once the correct setting is confirmed, fit locking arrangements such as split collars or distance pieces. Apply a lead seal to prevent unauthorized adjustment.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (16 Marks)
Refrigeration & Air Conditioning 🔥 Repeated 5x
With Respect to Container ship:
(a) Sketch and describe a ship's indirect refrigeration system arranged for cooling containers showed in stacks in the hold.
(b) State the advantages of the system described in (a) compared with containers with their own refrigeration self-contained units.
Appeared In: Aug 2025 Feb 2021 Jan 2020 Aug 2019 Jan 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- Eliminating the need for individual refrigeration units within each container significantly increases the ship's cargo capacity.
- A centralized system simplifies maintenance procedures. Instead of numerous individual units requiring servicing, the focus is on a single, larger plant, resulting in reduced maintenance costs and downtime.
- Centralized systems, with their optimized design and variable speed components, are typically more energy-efficient than a large number of independent units operating simultaneously.
- The centralized control and monitoring offer better overall temperature regulation, minimizing the risk of temperature fluctuations that can damage sensitive goods.
- A centralized system uses less gas as compared to a multitude of individual units, resulting in a more environmentally friendly operation.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q4 (16 Marks)
General 🔥 Repeated 12x
With reference to Vacuum Sewage Systems:
(a) Sketch & Describe a Vacuum sewage system.
(b) State the advantage of Vacuum sewage system.
(c) State the different causes of dropping vacuum.
Appeared In: Aug 2025 Apr 2024 Mar 2020 Jan 2020 Oct 2019 Sep 2019 Aug 2019 Jun 2019 Mar 2019 Jan 2019 Oct 2018 Sep 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(b) Advantages of a Vacuum Sewage System:
- The vacuum sewage system uses 85–90% less water for flushing compared to conventional systems, requiring very little flushing water.
- Toilets can be positioned more flexibly, including below the level of the holding tank, which is not feasible with gravity-fed systems.
- The system uses smaller diameter piping, reducing material and space requirements.
- The reduced water usage contributes to overall water conservation, making the system environmentally friendly.
- If the pump is pumping foam instead of liquid, this will be evident due to severe vibration. Add water to the tank and try again. If adding water does not help, reduce the level of foam by pouring antifoam agent into the tank (1 cup per 2 cubic metres of foam and sewage).
- Check that shut-off valves are fully open and not clogged.
- If the direction of rotation of the pump is wrong, change wiring accordingly.
- Close the valves that isolate the collecting unit from the piping system and start the pump again. If vacuum now builds up, there must be a leak in the piping system.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q5 (16 Marks)
General 🔥 Repeated 12x
Reverse osmosis is the modern alternative for shipboard production of drinking water.
(a) Describe using simple diagrams if necessary, the principle of reverse osmosis.
(b) Sketch a line diagram showing a single pass system for producing fresh water from seawater and describe the system.
Appeared In: Jan 2018 Jul 2025 Jan 2023 Mar 2021 Oct 2019 Aug 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Nov 2018 Oct 2018 Jul 2018 Aug 2025
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Reverse osmosis (RO) is a process that purifies water by forcing it through a semi-permeable membrane. In this process, high pressure is applied to a solution with a high concentration of dissolved solids, such as saltwater, on one side of the membrane. This pressure overcomes the natural osmotic pressure, causing the pure water molecules to pass through the membrane while leaving behind the larger salt ions and other impurities. The membrane acts as a selective barrier, allowing only the water to pass, while the concentrated brine solution is discarded. For large-scale production, a large membrane surface area and a strong pump capable of generating high pressures are necessary.
1. Pretreatment Stage
Pretreatment is essential to protect the R.O. membranes from fouling and scaling.
- Scaling: Caused by soluble salts such as calcium carbonate and calcium sulphate depositing on the membrane.
- Fouling: Caused by micro-organisms, metal oxides, and colloidal particles coating the membrane surface.
Pretreatment methods include:
- Mechanical filtration: Multiple filter stages in series, e.g.:
- Sand filters
- Multi-layer filters
- Microfilters (<10 ppm particle size)
- Chemical treatment:
- Coagulants for fine particle removal
- Biocides to kill micro-organisms
- Acid dosing to neutralize calcium salts and prevent scale formation
A pump takes suction from the sea chest through a coarse filter, delivering water at about 6 bar through the pretreatment system.
2. High-Pressure Stage
- A high-pressure piston pump raises the feed water pressure to above 50 bar.
- This pressurized water enters the semi-permeable membrane modules.
3. Separation Process
- Due to the pressure difference between the concentrated brine side and the permeate side, water molecules pass through the membrane.
- Dissolved salts, organics, and microbes are rejected.
Outputs:
- Permeate (Fresh Water): Low-salt content water used for drinking and domestic purposes.
- Brine (Concentrated Reject): Discharged overboard (OVBD).
4. Post-Treatment
The fresh water (permeate) is further treated to make it suitable for shipboard use:
- Hardness adjustment (to prevent excessive softness)
- pH correction (maintained around 8 for taste and corrosion control)
- Chlorination (for disinfection)
Note: If pH rises too high, chlorine’s effectiveness against micro-organisms is reduced.
Flow Summary:
Sea Water → Coarse Filter → Pretreatment Filters & Chemicals → High-Pressure Pump → R.O. Membranes →
→ Permeate (Fresh Water) → Post-treatment → Ship’s Fresh Water System
→ Brine (Reject Water) → Overboard
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q7 (16 Marks)
Cargo & Tankers 🔥 Repeated 5x
With reference to Flue gas Inert gas system:
(a) Sketch a line diagram showing a typical Inert Gas System used for inerting the cargo tanks of oil tankers; Describe the system after labeling the important component parts.
(b) State what oxygen content you would expect in the flue gases if good combustion is achieved.
Appeared In: Jan 2020 Oct 2019 Sep 2019 Aug 2019 Aug 2025
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The following components are used in a typical inert gas system in oil tankers:
- Exhaust gases source: The inert gas source is taken from exhaust uptakes of the boiler as it contains flue gases in it.
- Inert gas isolating valve: It serves as the supply valve from uptake to the rest of the system, isolating both systems when not in use.
- Scrubbing tower: Flue gas enters the scrub tower from the bottom and passes through a series of water spray and baffle plates to cool, clean, and moist the gases. The SO2 level decreases up to 90%, and gas becomes clear of soot.
- Demister: Normally made of polypropylene, it is used to absorb moisture and water from the treated flue gas.
- Gas Blower: Normally, two types of fan blowers are used: a steam-driven turbine blower for I.G. operation and an electrically driven blower for topping-up purposes.
- I.G pressure regulating valve: The pressure within the tanks varies with the properties of oil and atmospheric conditions. To control this variation and to avoid overheating of the blower fan, a pressure regulator valve is attached after blower discharge, which re-circulates the excess gas back to the scrubbing tower.
- Deck seal: The purpose of the deck seal is to stop the gases to return back which are coming from the blower to the cargo tanks. Normally wet type deck seals are used. A demister is fitted to absorb the moisture carried away by the gases.
- Mechanical non-return valve: It is an additional non-return mechanical device in line with the deck seal.
- Deck isolating valve: The engine room system can be isolated fully with the deck system with the help of this valve.
- Pressure Vacuum (PV) breaker: The PV breaker helps in controlling the over or under-pressurization of cargo tanks. The PV breaker vent is fitted with a flame trap to prevent fire from igniting when loading or discharging operation is going on when in port.
- Cargo tank isolating valves: A vessel has several cargo holds, and each hold is provided with an isolating valve. The valve controls the flow of inert gas to hold and is operated only by a responsible officer in the vessel.
- Mast riser: The mast riser is used to maintain a positive pressure of inert gas at the time of loading of cargo, and during the loading time, it is kept open to avoid pressurisation of the cargo tank.
Working procedure:
- Boiler uptake gases are drawn to the scrubber unit via flue gas isolating valve(s).
- In the scrubber unit, the gas is cooled, cleaned and dried before being supplied into the tanks.
- Motor-driven inert gas blowers supply the treated gas from the scrubber tower to the tanks. They are mounted on rubber vibration absorbers and isolated from the piping by rubber expansion bellows.
- Regulation of gas quantity delivered to the deck is taken care of by the gas control valves, and the deck pressure is managed by the pressure controller. If the deck pressure is lower than the set point, the output signal will be raised to open the valve more, and vice versa. If the deck pressure is lower than the set point, these valves will then work in cooperation to keep both the deck pressure/blower pressure at their respective set point without starving or overfeeding the circuit.
- Entering the deck line, the gas passes through the deck water seal, which also acts as a non-return valve, automatically preventing the back-flow of explosive gases from the cargo tanks.
- After the deck seal, the inert gas relief is mounted to balance the built-up deck water seal pressure when the system is shut down. In case of a failure of both the deck seal and the non-return valve, the relief valve will vent the gases flowing from the cargo tank into the atmosphere
- The oxygen analyser, which is fitted after the blower separates the “production” and “distribution” components of the plant and analyses the oxygen content of the gas, if it is more than 8%, it alarms and shutdowns the plant
Alternate sketch of IG system.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q8 (16 Marks)
Auxiliary Machinery 🔥 Repeated 6x
With Reference to Gear pumps used for lubricating oil transfer:
(a) Sketch and describe a gear type pump indicating the flow of fluid.
(b) State the materials that gear type pump components may be manufactured from.
(c) Specify THREE applications that are suitable for the employment of geat type pumps.
Appeared In: Aug 2025 Jul 2025 Oct 2019 Aug 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(a) Gear Type Pump
A gear pump is a positive displacement rotary pump. It commonly has two meshing spur gears inside a close-fitting casing. One gear is driven by the shaft and the other is an idler gear.
Operation
As the gears rotate, the teeth unmesh at the inlet side. This creates a low-pressure area, so lubricating oil enters the pump casing.
The oil is trapped in the spaces between the gear teeth and casing. It is carried around the outside of the gears from inlet to outlet.
At the outlet side, the gear teeth mesh again. This reduces the space available and forces the oil out through the discharge port.
Oil does not pass through the centre between the gears because the meshing teeth form a seal. Since a fixed volume is delivered each revolution, the gear pump is a positive displacement pump. A relief valve is therefore required to prevent excessive pressure if the discharge is blocked.
(b) Materials for Gear Pump Components
- Casing/body: Cast iron, cast steel, bronze, or aluminium alloy for small pumps.
- Gears: Hardened steel, alloy steel, stainless steel, bronze, or cast iron.
- Shafts: Carbon steel, alloy steel, or stainless steel.
- Bearings/bushes: Bronze, white metal, phosphor bronze, or ball/roller bearings.
- Seals: Mechanical seal, gland packing, nitrile/Viton oil seals.
- Relief valve parts: Steel or stainless steel spring and valve components.
For lubricating oil pumps, cast iron casing with hardened steel gears and steel shafts is common.
(c) Suitable Applications of Gear Pumps
- Lubricating oil transfer and circulation
Gear pumps are suitable because lubricating oil is clean, viscous, and has good lubricating properties. The pump gives steady positive flow.
- Fuel oil transfer and booster service
They are used for diesel oil and heavy fuel oil transfer because they handle viscous liquids well and can produce moderate to high pressure.
- Hydraulic oil systems
Gear pumps are used in hydraulic power packs and control systems because they give positive delivery and compact construction.
Other suitable uses include:
- Sludge oil transfer
- Bilge oily water transfer, where liquid is not too contaminated
- Boiler fuel oil supply
- Steering gear auxiliary hydraulic systems
- Cargo oil stripping for suitable viscous liquids
Gear pumps are not suitable for liquids containing hard abrasive solids because close clearances between gears and casing can wear quickly.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q9 (16 Marks)
Boilers & Steam 🔥 Repeated 4x
With reference to auxiliary boiler safety valves:
(a) Describe, with the aid of a sketch, the safety valves for an auxiliary boiler.
(b) Identify, with reasons, the parts that require particularly close attention during overhaul
(c) Describe how the safety valves are reset after an overhaul.
Appeared In: Aug 2025 Oct 2019 Aug 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Overhauling and Setting of Boiler Safety Valves
Boiler safety valves are critical protective devices designed to automatically release excess steam pressure and prevent boiler overpressure. Most auxiliary boilers are fitted with full-lift or pop-type double spring safety valves, which open rapidly and fully once the set pressure is reached, ensuring effective pressure relief.
A typical boiler safety valve consists of the following main components:
- Valve and Seat: Usually made of high-grade materials such as stainless steel or Monel metal to resist erosion (wire drawing) caused by high-velocity steam.
- Compression Springs: Helical springs that hold the valve tightly closed against steam pressure until the set pressure is reached.
- Valve Lip / Shroud (Waste Steam Piston): A specially designed projection that increases the effective area when the valve begins to lift, producing a rapid “pop” action and ensuring full opening.
- Spindle and Guides: Maintain alignment and ensure smooth vertical movement of the valve.
- Waste Steam Pipe: A large-diameter pipe that safely discharges steam to the atmosphere.
- Easing Gear: A mechanical arrangement that allows manual lifting of the valve for testing or emergency purposes.
- Drain Arrangement: Prevents accumulation of condensate in the valve body, which could otherwise affect operation.
- Isolation and Removal: Isolate the boiler, ensure zero pressure, and remove the safety valve carefully from its seating.
- Dismantling: Mark all parts for correct reassembly. Carefully dismantle the valve, including removal of springs, spindle, and valve disc.
- Cleaning: Clean all components thoroughly to remove deposits, scale, and corrosion products.
- Inspection of Components: Each component must be examined for wear, damage, or distortion (details given below).
- Repair and Refurbishment: Carry out necessary repairs such as lapping of valve and seat, replacement of worn parts, or renewal of springs if required.
- Reassembly: Reassemble the valve carefully, ensuring correct alignment and clearances. Avoid over-tightening or misalignment during assembly.
Parts Requiring Close Attention During Overhaul
- Valve and Seat Surfaces: These must be perfectly smooth and free from pitting, scale, or wire drawing. They should be lapped to a fine finish to ensure a steam-tight seal and prevent leakage or “simmering.”
- Springs: Check for cracks, corrosion, and loss of elasticity (permanent set). Defective springs will affect the lifting pressure and proper reseating of the valve.
- Spindle and Guides: Ensure the spindle is straight and moves freely. Guides should be clean and free from deposits, as any restriction may cause sticking or improper operation.
- Lip/Shroud Clearance: The clearance between the valve lip and seat ring is critical for correct “pop” action. Incorrect clearance may result in delayed opening or poor reseating.
- Drain Passage: Ensure that drain holes are clear. Blockage can allow condensate to accumulate, which may interfere with valve operation and cause corrosion.
After overhaul, safety valves must be reset and tested, usually in the presence of a classification society surveyor.
- Preparation: Ensure that the boiler pressure gauge is calibrated and accurate. One safety valve is temporarily gagged (held closed) while the other is being set.
- Raising Boiler Pressure: Gradually raise the boiler pressure up to the Maximum Allowable Working Pressure (MAWP).
- Adjustment of Set Pressure: Adjust the compression of the spring using the adjusting nut until the valve lifts (“pops”) at the required pressure.
- For boilers with two valves, typically one is set at the working pressure and the other slightly higher (e.g., about 3% above), as per class or manufacturer requirements.
- Verification of Operation: Allow the valve to lift and reseat several times to confirm consistent operation. Check the blowdown, which is the difference between opening and closing pressure, typically around 3–5% of the set pressure.
- Accumulation Test (if required): With the main steam stop valve closed and boiler firing at full capacity, verify that the pressure does not rise more than 10% above MAWP, ensuring adequate relieving capacity.
- Sealing and Locking: Once the correct setting is confirmed, fit locking arrangements such as split collars or distance pieces. Apply a lead seal to prevent unauthorized adjustment.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q7 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting 🔥 Repeated 14x
Sketch a sealing arrangement for an oil lubricated stern tube. Identify the common forms of seal failure. State how oil loss due to seal failure can be restricted whilst on passage? What is the material used for sealing rings and propeller shaft liner?
Appeared In: Dec 2024 Apr 2024 Aug 2023 Jun 2023 Feb 2021 Oct 2020 Mar 2020 Jan 2020 Dec 2019 Sep 2019 Jun 2019 Feb 2019 Oct 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Common forms of seal failure in a stern tube
- Loss of elasticity in seal material – Nitrile rubber seals may lose their elastic properties over time, reducing their sealing effectiveness.
- Surface damage to chrome liner – Grooving or scoring of the chrome liner can impair sealing surfaces, leading to leakage.
- Excessive shaft vibration – Heavy vibration of the propeller shaft can cause uneven wear and seal deformation.
- Insufficient cooling – Inadequate cooling can cause rubber sealing elements to harden and eventually fail.
- Exceeding running hour limits – Operating beyond the manufacturer’s recommended service life increases the risk of seal failure.
- Deterioration of oil quality – Contaminated or degraded oil reduces lubrication and protection, accelerating seal wear.
- Incorrect header tank level adjustment – Failure to adjust the header tank according to vessel draft can cause oil loss, leading to inadequate lubrication and seal damage.
Restricting oil loss due to seal failure whilst on passage
- Use of high-viscosity oil – Recharge the system with a thicker oil to reduce leakage rate through damaged seals.
- Temporary oil supply arrangement –
- Disconnect the existing oil supply line.
- Connect a 45-gallon drum supported by a block and tackle arrangement.
- Adjust the drum height to vary the oil head pressure, matching it to the surrounding water pressure and minimizing leakage.
- Fresh water introduction – Supply fresh water to the gravity tank to emulsify with any leaked oil. The resulting emulsion helps coagulate around the damaged seal area while the oil is circulated to maintain lubrication and sealing.
Materials for Sealing Rings and Propeller Shaft Liner:
- Sealing Rings: Nitrile rubber (NBR) is a commonly used material for stern tube sealing rings due to its good oil resistance, elasticity, and relatively low cost.
- Shaft Liner: Chrome-plated steel is a common material for stern tube liners. The chrome plating provides a hard, smooth, and corrosion-resistant surface, minimizing wear and improving the life of the sealing rings.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q8 (16 Marks)
Cargo & Tankers 🔥 Repeated 7x
With reference to Flue gas Inert gas system:
(a) Sketch a line diagram showing a typical Inert Gas System used for inerting the cargo tanks of oil tankers, labeling the component parts.
(b) Describe the system.
(c) State what oxygen content you would expect in the flue gases if good combustion is achieved.
Appeared In: Dec 2019 Apr 2019 Mar 2019 Jan 2020 Oct 2019 Sep 2019 Aug 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- Exhaust gases source: The inert gas source is taken from exhaust uptakes of the boiler as it contains flue gases in it.
- Inert gas isolating valve: It serves as the supply valve from uptake to the rest of the system, isolating both systems when not in use.
- Scrubbing tower: Flue gas enters the scrub tower from the bottom and passes through a series of water spray and baffle plates to cool, clean, and moist the gases. The SO2 level decreases up to 90%, and gas becomes clear of soot.
- Demister: Normally made of polypropylene, it is used to absorb moisture and water from the treated flue gas.
- Gas Blower: Normally, two types of fan blowers are used: a steam-driven turbine blower for I.G. operation and an electrically driven blower for topping-up purposes.
- I.G pressure regulating valve: The pressure within the tanks varies with the properties of oil and atmospheric conditions. To control this variation and to avoid overheating of the blower fan, a pressure regulator valve is attached after blower discharge, which re-circulates the excess gas back to the scrubbing tower.
- Deck seal: The purpose of the deck seal is to stop the gases to return back which are coming from the blower to the cargo tanks. Normally wet type deck seals are used. A demister is fitted to absorb the moisture carried away by the gases.
- Mechanical non-return valve: It is an additional non-return mechanical device in line with the deck seal.
- Deck isolating valve: The engine room system can be isolated fully with the deck system with the help of this valve.
- Pressure Vacuum (PV) breaker: The PV breaker helps in controlling the over or under-pressurization of cargo tanks. The PV breaker vent is fitted with a flame trap to prevent fire from igniting when loading or discharging operation is going on when in port.
- Cargo tank isolating valves: A vessel has several cargo holds, and each hold is provided with an isolating valve. The valve controls the flow of inert gas to hold and is operated only by a responsible officer in the vessel.
- Mast riser: The mast riser is used to maintain a positive pressure of inert gas at the time of loading of cargo, and during the loading time, it is kept open to avoid pressurisation of the cargo tank.
Working procedure:
- Boiler uptake gases are drawn to the scrubber unit via flue gas isolating valve(s).
- In the scrubber unit, the gas is cooled, cleaned and dried before being supplied into the tanks.
- Motor-driven inert gas blowers supply the treated gas from the scrubber tower to the tanks. They are mounted on rubber vibration absorbers and isolated from the piping by rubber expansion bellows.
- Regulation of gas quantity delivered to the deck is taken care of by the gas control valves, and the deck pressure is managed by the pressure controller. If the deck pressure is lower than the set point, the output signal will be raised to open the valve more, and vice versa. If the deck pressure is lower than the set point, these valves will then work in cooperation to keep both the deck pressure/blower pressure at their respective set point without starving or overfeeding the circuit.
- Entering the deck line, the gas passes through the deck water seal, which also acts as a non-return valve, automatically preventing the back-flow of explosive gases from the cargo tanks.
- After the deck seal, the inert gas relief is mounted to balance the built-up deck water seal pressure when the system is shut down. In case of a failure of both the deck seal and the non-return valve, the relief valve will vent the gases flowing from the cargo tank into the atmosphere
- The oxygen analyser, which is fitted after the blower separates the “production” and “distribution” components of the plant and analyses the oxygen content of the gas, if it is more than 8%, it alarms and shutdowns the plant
Alternate sketch of IG system.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q9 (16 Marks)
Refrigeration & Air Conditioning 🔥 Repeated 3x
Sketch and describe the refrigeration system of a container carrying bananas only. How does the controlled atmosphere of the container extend the green life and shelf life of bananas? How is the airflow system designed?
Appeared In: Dec 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Refrigeration system and controlled atmosphere of a banana container.
Sketch and description of the reefer container system
A line diagram shows: an integral/ (or clip-on) refrigeration unit at one end with a refrigerant circuit composed of compressor, condenser (air-cooled with fans), expansion valve and evaporator coil, arranged in a closed vapour-compression loop. The refrigerant (e.g. R-134a or R-404A/R-407C) is compressed, condensed rejecting heat, expanded through the TEV and evaporates in the evaporator cooling the airstream. An air circulation system forces cooled air through the cargo: a thermo-controlled fan delivers air, and floor T-bar ducts/vents distribute it; the air flows up through the banana boxes/stow, returns through the ceiling, and is drawn back over the evaporator coils. A thermostat or temperature sensor controls compressor cycling to hold the set point, usually 13-14 C for bananas in the green/ripening state, with the heater available to hold temperature if ambient is low. Some units use two-speed fans and a ventilation/flushing damper to draw in outside air and expel ethylene.
Controlled atmosphere (CA) - how it extends green life and shelf life
Bananas are a climacteric fruit that produce ethylene gas as a ripening trigger. In a CA container the atmosphere is modified by reducing oxygen (commonly down to about 2-5%) and/or enriching carbon dioxide, and by controlling ethylene. Lowering oxygen slows the climacteric respiration of the fruit, reduces metabolic heat and the rate of ethylene-driven ripening, so the fruit stays green and firm for longer and shelf life is extended. Exposing the cargo to low oxygen and/or removing ethylene retards colour change and softening, and reduces over-ripening and spoilage in transit, so bananas can be shipped green and ripen to a controlled stage at the destination. The CA system monitors O2/CO2/ethylene, uses a nitrogen generator or flush/semipermeable membranes to maintain the low O2, adds a small measured ethylene (optional) and scrubs CO2 as required; a ventilation phase flushes the space before discharge.
How the airflow is designed
The airflow is designed for efficient cooling and uniform temperature:
- Air is drawn over the evaporator by the unit fans and discharged through the floor T-bar (bottom-air delivery) so it flows longitudinally under the cargo.
- Banana boxes are double-vented and stacked so that air rises through vertical vent channels between the boxes (with air circulation space left between each box/stack), reaches the ceiling and returns to the return-air duct/evaporator.
- The stow is arranged to leave clear air lanes; cartons are arranged to allow the air to pass around every box, avoiding blockages.
- Return air is sensed so the unit controls on return-air temperature, and the fans provide sufficient air changes per hour to remove heat of respiration.
- Even air distribution, correct dunnage and stowage pattern, and adequate spacing at the unit end are critical to avoid hot spots and condensation.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q4 (16 Marks)
Steering & Deck Machinery 🔥 Repeated 10x
Sketch and describe a "fail-safe steering gear" suitable for use on a tanker of more than 100,000 T dwt. Explain the sequence of events that take place when an oil leak takes place in one of the hydraulic pipe lines
Appeared In: Oct 2024 Dec 2023 Aug 2023 Jul 2023 Mar 2023 Feb 2021 Feb 2019 Oct 2018 Aug 2018 Jul 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
According to SOLAS chapter - 2, part 1, regulation 29.16, every tanker of more than 10,000 GT shall comply with the following:
- The main steering capability due to a single failure in any part of one of the power actuating systems shall be regained in not more than 45 seconds.
- The main steering shall comprise at least two identical power actuating systems, each capable of meeting the requirements. Loss of fluid from one system shall be capable of being detected, and the defective system shall automatically get isolated so that the other system shall remain fully operational
Considering the above regulatory requirements, given below is a “Fail Safe steering gear” suitable for use on a tanker of more than 100,000 T DWT.
Shown in the diagram is a “Fail safe steering gear” having two independent power actuating systems that can
- Work simultaneously in normal operation, meeting the requirement OR
- Work independently and meet the requirement
- In the event of loss of fluid from any one system, it can be detected and isolated automatically so that the other system can remain fully operational.
Working:
- The system incorporates two sets of electric-driven pumps. Both main and auxiliary pumps are on the same shaft. The main pump shown in the diagram is a variable delivery pump
- The variable delivery pump takes suction from the tank and supplies hydraulic oil to the ram cylinders. The oil flow of the pump is determined by the pump actuating lever
- The movement of the pump actuating lever is controlled by the rudder angle order given by the bridge with the help of a bi-directional control valve
- A two-way shock relief valve is fitted between the two cylinders to release the pressure from one side of the cylinder to the other side in case of pressure increase in one of the cylinders due to heavy seas
- By-pass valves are also fitted between two cylinders, which are normally shut during operation. When one system is stopped, there is a pressure drop, as the auxiliary pump has also stopped this opens the by-pass valves, thus removing the hydraulic lock of the ram operation.
- Auto isolation valves in the system are there to isolate one system in case of any failure.
Sequence of events during hydraulic oil leak:
Case 1: Consider an oil leak from any pipe for cylinders 1 and 2 with the No. 1 pump running:
- No. 1 tank level will come down to L1, and it will sound an alarm on the bridge and in ECR
- When the tank level further drops to L2, i.e. low-low level, the no. 1 pump stops.
- Stopping the No. 1 pump also stops the attached auxiliary pump. So the line pressure drops, due to which the normally closed by-pass valves ‘X’ and ‘Y’ open.
- Simultaneously, the auto isolation valves ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’ will be operated by an electric signal. A, B and C are normally open valves. The electric signal will close them. So, systems 1 and 2 will be completely separated. Thus, the defective system, I.e. system 1, is isolated.
- Along with the operation of the auto isolation valves, the No. 2 pump will start automatically. The attached auxiliary pump will act on the by-pass valve ‘Y’ and close it. This enables cylinders 3 and 4 to be in normal operation.
- It should also be noted that since system 1 is completely isolated, there is no oil pressure to operate the bypass valve. So the by-pass valves remain open, thereby removing the hydraulic lock for the ram movement in cylinders 1 and 2
Case 2: Consider an oil leakage from any pipe of cylinders 3 and 4 with the No. 1 pump running:
Points 1, 2 and 3 are the same as case 1
- Simultaneously, the auto isolation valves ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’ will be operated by an electric signal. This will shut the normally open valves A, B and C. Thus, systems 1 and 2 will be completely separated
- Along with the operation of auto isolation valves, the No. 2 pump will start automatically. The attached auxiliary pump will act on the by-pass valve ‘Y’ and close. So, cylinders 3 and 4 will come into normal operation.
- Now, since the leak is between the pipe of cylinders 3 and 4, the level of the no. 2 tank will drop to L1 and give an alarm.
- The level will further drop to L2, but the pump will not stop and changeover to ensure that the leak is from the pipe of cylinders 3 and 4
- When the no. 2 tank level drops to L3, the no. 2 pump stops and the no. 1 pump starts to operate the steering using cylinders 1 and 2
- Starting the no. 1 pump will ensure that the by-pass valve ‘X’ is shut, and stopping the no. 2 pump will ensure that the by-pass valve ‘Y’ is open
This ensures the operation of the steering Gear with the defective system fully isolated.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q9 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting 🔥 Repeated 14x
Sketch a sealing arrangement for an oil lubricated stern tube. Identify the common forms of seal failure. State how oil loss due to seal failure can be restricted whilst on passage? What is the material used for sealing rings and propeller shaft liner?
Appeared In: Dec 2024 Apr 2024 Aug 2023 Jun 2023 Feb 2021 Oct 2020 Mar 2020 Jan 2020 Dec 2019 Sep 2019 Jun 2019 Feb 2019 Oct 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Common forms of seal failure in a stern tube
- Loss of elasticity in seal material – Nitrile rubber seals may lose their elastic properties over time, reducing their sealing effectiveness.
- Surface damage to chrome liner – Grooving or scoring of the chrome liner can impair sealing surfaces, leading to leakage.
- Excessive shaft vibration – Heavy vibration of the propeller shaft can cause uneven wear and seal deformation.
- Insufficient cooling – Inadequate cooling can cause rubber sealing elements to harden and eventually fail.
- Exceeding running hour limits – Operating beyond the manufacturer’s recommended service life increases the risk of seal failure.
- Deterioration of oil quality – Contaminated or degraded oil reduces lubrication and protection, accelerating seal wear.
- Incorrect header tank level adjustment – Failure to adjust the header tank according to vessel draft can cause oil loss, leading to inadequate lubrication and seal damage.
Restricting oil loss due to seal failure whilst on passage
- Use of high-viscosity oil – Recharge the system with a thicker oil to reduce leakage rate through damaged seals.
- Temporary oil supply arrangement –
- Disconnect the existing oil supply line.
- Connect a 45-gallon drum supported by a block and tackle arrangement.
- Adjust the drum height to vary the oil head pressure, matching it to the surrounding water pressure and minimizing leakage.
- Fresh water introduction – Supply fresh water to the gravity tank to emulsify with any leaked oil. The resulting emulsion helps coagulate around the damaged seal area while the oil is circulated to maintain lubrication and sealing.
Materials for Sealing Rings and Propeller Shaft Liner:
- Sealing Rings: Nitrile rubber (NBR) is a commonly used material for stern tube sealing rings due to its good oil resistance, elasticity, and relatively low cost.
- Shaft Liner: Chrome-plated steel is a common material for stern tube liners. The chrome plating provides a hard, smooth, and corrosion-resistant surface, minimizing wear and improving the life of the sealing rings.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (16 Marks)
Cargo & Tankers 🔥 Repeated 3x
Sketch and describe a system for oil monitoring of bilge and tanker ballast discharges. What inputs are recorded? Explain the difficulties encountered with the efficient operation of the oil monitoring system.
Appeared In: Sep 2019 Jan 2019 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The oil monitoring system for bilge and tanker ballast discharges ensures that the oil content in discharged water complies with regulatory standards. Below is a description of its general arrangement:
- Water from the discharge line is sampled before reaching the overboard discharge valve.
- The sample is directed to the PPM monitor, which measures the oil content in parts per million (PPM).
- The oil content value from the PPM monitor is sent to a comparator, which compares it to a preset allowable limit.
- If the oil content is within the allowable limit, the overboard valve opens automatically to discharge the water. If the oil content exceeds the set limit, the overboard valve is shut, and the water is redirected to the slop tank.
The PPM monitor works on the principle of scattered light. Light reflected or scattered by oil particles is measured using a photocell. The intensity of scattered light decreases with increasing oil content. This signal is then analysed and sent to the comparator.
The system records the following data:
- Oil content reading (in ppm)
- Ship's speed
- Oily water discharge rate
- Date and time
- Ship's position
Difficulties encountered with efficient operation:
- Response Delay in Sampling Pipe: The delay in transporting water samples from the discharge line to the PPM monitor can result in inaccurate or untimely readings.
- Clogged Sampling Pipe: Accumulation of debris or oil residues can obstruct the sampling pipe, leading to erratic or incorrect readings.
- Sealing and Cleaning of Optical Windows: The optical components of the PPM monitor, such as the scattered light window, require regular cleaning and maintenance. Dirty or poorly sealed optical windows can cause inaccurate measurements or system malfunction.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q7 (16 Marks)
General 🔥 Repeated 12x
With reference to Vacuum Sewage Systems:
(i) Sketch & Describe a Vacuum sewage system.
(ii) State the advantage of Vacuum sewage system.
(iii) State the different causes of dropping vacuum.
Appeared In: Aug 2025 Apr 2024 Mar 2020 Jan 2020 Oct 2019 Sep 2019 Aug 2019 Jun 2019 Mar 2019 Jan 2019 Oct 2018 Sep 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(b) Advantages of a Vacuum Sewage System:
- The vacuum sewage system uses 85–90% less water for flushing compared to conventional systems, requiring very little flushing water.
- Toilets can be positioned more flexibly, including below the level of the holding tank, which is not feasible with gravity-fed systems.
- The system uses smaller diameter piping, reducing material and space requirements.
- The reduced water usage contributes to overall water conservation, making the system environmentally friendly.
- If the pump is pumping foam instead of liquid, this will be evident due to severe vibration. Add water to the tank and try again. If adding water does not help, reduce the level of foam by pouring antifoam agent into the tank (1 cup per 2 cubic metres of foam and sewage).
- Check that shut-off valves are fully open and not clogged.
- If the direction of rotation of the pump is wrong, change wiring accordingly.
- Close the valves that isolate the collecting unit from the piping system and start the pump again. If vacuum now builds up, there must be a leak in the piping system.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q8 (16 Marks)
Refrigeration & Air Conditioning 🔥 Repeated 6x
With Respect to Container ship:
(i) Sketch a ship's indirect refrigeration system arranged for cooling containers showed in stacks in the hold.
(ii) Describe the refrigeration system sketched in (a).
(iii) State the advantages of the system described in (a) compared with containers with their own refrigeration self-contained units.
Appeared In: Aug 2025 Feb 2021 Jan 2020 Aug 2019 Jan 2019 Nov 2022
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- Eliminating the need for individual refrigeration units within each container significantly increases the ship's cargo capacity.
- A centralized system simplifies maintenance procedures. Instead of numerous individual units requiring servicing, the focus is on a single, larger plant, resulting in reduced maintenance costs and downtime.
- Centralized systems, with their optimized design and variable speed components, are typically more energy-efficient than a large number of independent units operating simultaneously.
- The centralized control and monitoring offer better overall temperature regulation, minimizing the risk of temperature fluctuations that can damage sensitive goods.
- A centralized system uses less gas as compared to a multitude of individual units, resulting in a more environmentally friendly operation.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q9 (16 Marks)
Materials & Testing 🔥 Repeated 8x
With reference to Keyless Propellers:
(a) Sketch a section through a keyless sleeved propeller.
(b) State the advantages of using a keyless sleeved propeller.
(c) State with reasons, which metal sleeve, should be made for contact with the forged mild steel tail shaft.
(d) State the material uses to bond the sleeve to the propeller and the general thickness of the bonding material.
Appeared In: Jan 2026 Jun 2024 Dec 2023 Oct 2023 Mar 2019 Jan 2019 Sep 2018 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- Keyless design avoids stress concentration caused by keys and keyways.
- Stresses are evenly distributed across the internal surface of the propeller boss
- The absence of a keyway increases the friction available for torque transmission.
- The design prevents overstressing or permanent damage to the propeller hub during operation.
- The keyless arrangement simplifies the propeller and shaft interface, making it easier to manufacture and maintain.
- With a coefficient of friction of 0.28, it minimizes the likelihood of propeller slippage.
- Its expansion rates are similar to those of steel, reducing the risk of misalignment or loosening during temperature variations.
- Pearlitic cast iron exhibits excellent resistance to fretting, which is important for prolonged and reliable operation.
- High-strength epoxy Araldite filling is used to bond the sleeve to the propeller securely.
- The bonding material is applied with a thickness of approximately 1 mm, ensuring adequate adhesion and durability.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q2 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting 🔥 Repeated 5x
With respect to Energy efficient running of ships:
(a) Sketch and Explain the optimization of propeller hull interface flow devices and improvement of propulsion efficiency.
(b) Sketch and Explain the optimization of Auxiliary machinery using VFDs.
Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jan 2026 Jun 2024 Nov 2023 Jul 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Energy-Efficient Running of Ships
The propulsion efficiency of a ship does not depend only on the propeller design. The flow of water approaching and leaving the propeller is equally important. Unfavourable inflow, uneven velocity distribution, vortex formation and rotational energy in the propeller slipstream result in energy losses, even when the propeller itself is well designed.
To reduce these hydrodynamic losses, Energy Saving Devices (ESDs) are fitted around the propeller–hull interface. These devices guide, straighten or deflect the water flow so that the propeller can convert more of the available engine power into useful thrust.
ESDs are particularly useful for existing ships, where replacing the complete propulsion system may not be technically or economically practical. Depending on the type of device and the ship's operating profile, they can provide a measurable improvement in propulsion efficiency and reduction in fuel consumption.
Common devices include:
1. Propeller Nozzle
A propeller nozzle is an annular hydrodynamic structure fitted around the propeller. It guides and directs the water flow through the propeller and improves the inflow conditions.
The shape and position of the nozzle help convert a greater portion of the propeller-generated impulse into useful axial thrust.
The benefit is particularly significant at low ship speeds and high propeller loading, where an open propeller is comparatively less efficient.
Advantages:
- Increased thrust at low speed and heavy load.
- Improved propeller efficiency.
- Useful during manoeuvring and operation against currents.
- Particularly suitable for tugs, dredgers and workboats.
- Provides better handling and working capability in laden conditions.
2. Guiding Fins / Stators
Guiding fins, also called stators, are generally fitted ahead of the propeller. They modify the incoming water flow by aligning and redistributing it, reducing swirl and making the velocity distribution over the propeller disc more uniform.
As a result, water reaches the propeller blades at more favourable angles of attack, improving the hydrodynamic performance of the propeller.
Advantages:
- More uniform water inflow.
- More even loading of propeller blades.
- Better utilisation of available shaft power.
- Reduced local blade overloading.
- Reduced vibration and pressure pulses.
- Reduced possibility of cavitation.
- Lower fuel consumption.
- Reduced stress and wear on the propeller, shaft line and bearings.
3. Propeller Boss Cap Fins (PBCF)
Behind a conventional propeller hub, a concentrated rotating flow called a hub vortex is normally formed. This vortex contains kinetic energy that does not contribute to useful propulsion and is therefore lost as vortex energy and turbulence in the propeller wake.
The hub vortex may also cause:
- Additional energy losses.
- Increased turbulence in the wake.
- Pressure pulses and vibration.
- Adverse interaction with the rudder and other stern components.
Propeller Boss Cap Fins (PBCF) are fitted to the propeller boss cap to reduce the strength of the hub vortex. By recovering part of the rotational energy and improving the flow leaving the propeller, they can increase propulsion efficiency and reduce energy losses.
Variable Frequency Drives (VFDs) are used to control the speed of electric motors driving auxiliary machinery such as centrifugal pumps, fans, blowers and compressors.
In conventional systems, an electric motor often runs at a constant speed, while the required flow or pressure is controlled using valves, dampers or bypass arrangements. This wastes energy because the motor continues to operate at full speed even when the actual demand is low.
With a VFD, the frequency and voltage supplied to the motor are varied according to the required load. Therefore, the motor speed can be adjusted to match the actual demand of the auxiliary machinery.
Working Principle
AC supply → VFD → Variable-frequency/variable-speed motor → Auxiliary machinery
The VFD changes the frequency supplied to the motor:
Frequency ↓ → Motor speed ↓ → Flow ↓ → Power consumption ↓
When demand increases:
Frequency ↑ → Motor speed ↑ → Flow ↑ → Power consumption ↑
For centrifugal pumps and fans, the affinity laws show that:
- Flow ∝ Speed
- Pressure/Head ∝ Speed²
- Power ∝ Speed³
Therefore, even a small reduction in motor speed can produce a large reduction in power consumption.
Applications on Ships
VFDs can be used for:
- Sea-water and fresh-water cooling pumps.
- Boiler feed-water and circulation pumps.
- Ventilation and engine-room fans.
- Air-conditioning and chilled-water pumps.
- Fuel and oil circulation systems, where applicable.
- Other variable-load auxiliary machinery.
Advantages of VFDs
- Reduced electrical power consumption by matching motor speed to actual demand.
- Reduced fuel consumption, because less electrical power is generated by the ship's generators.
- Better control of flow and pressure without excessive throttling or bypassing.
- Reduced mechanical wear due to smooth starting and stopping.
- Reduced starting current and mechanical shock.
- Improved operating efficiency during part-load conditions.
- Reduced running hours/load on diesel generators, helping optimise generator operation.
- Overall improvement in the ship's energy efficiency and operating cost.
Example
Consider a cooling-water pump operating at full speed when only 70% flow is required. Instead of keeping the pump at full speed and throttling the discharge valve, the VFD reduces the motor speed to approximately the required level.
Because pump power varies approximately with the cube of speed, a reduction in speed can result in a significant reduction in electrical power consumption.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (16 Marks)
Refrigeration & Air Conditioning 🔥 Repeated 3x
Sketch and describe the refrigeration system of a container carrying bananas only. How does the controlled atmosphere of the container extend the green life and shelf life of bananas? How is the airflow system designed?
Appeared In: Dec 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Refrigeration system and controlled atmosphere of a banana container.
Sketch and description of the reefer container system
A line diagram shows: an integral/ (or clip-on) refrigeration unit at one end with a refrigerant circuit composed of compressor, condenser (air-cooled with fans), expansion valve and evaporator coil, arranged in a closed vapour-compression loop. The refrigerant (e.g. R-134a or R-404A/R-407C) is compressed, condensed rejecting heat, expanded through the TEV and evaporates in the evaporator cooling the airstream. An air circulation system forces cooled air through the cargo: a thermo-controlled fan delivers air, and floor T-bar ducts/vents distribute it; the air flows up through the banana boxes/stow, returns through the ceiling, and is drawn back over the evaporator coils. A thermostat or temperature sensor controls compressor cycling to hold the set point, usually 13-14 C for bananas in the green/ripening state, with the heater available to hold temperature if ambient is low. Some units use two-speed fans and a ventilation/flushing damper to draw in outside air and expel ethylene.
Controlled atmosphere (CA) - how it extends green life and shelf life
Bananas are a climacteric fruit that produce ethylene gas as a ripening trigger. In a CA container the atmosphere is modified by reducing oxygen (commonly down to about 2-5%) and/or enriching carbon dioxide, and by controlling ethylene. Lowering oxygen slows the climacteric respiration of the fruit, reduces metabolic heat and the rate of ethylene-driven ripening, so the fruit stays green and firm for longer and shelf life is extended. Exposing the cargo to low oxygen and/or removing ethylene retards colour change and softening, and reduces over-ripening and spoilage in transit, so bananas can be shipped green and ripen to a controlled stage at the destination. The CA system monitors O2/CO2/ethylene, uses a nitrogen generator or flush/semipermeable membranes to maintain the low O2, adds a small measured ethylene (optional) and scrubs CO2 as required; a ventilation phase flushes the space before discharge.
How the airflow is designed
The airflow is designed for efficient cooling and uniform temperature:
- Air is drawn over the evaporator by the unit fans and discharged through the floor T-bar (bottom-air delivery) so it flows longitudinally under the cargo.
- Banana boxes are double-vented and stacked so that air rises through vertical vent channels between the boxes (with air circulation space left between each box/stack), reaches the ceiling and returns to the return-air duct/evaporator.
- The stow is arranged to leave clear air lanes; cartons are arranged to allow the air to pass around every box, avoiding blockages.
- Return air is sensed so the unit controls on return-air temperature, and the fans provide sufficient air changes per hour to remove heat of respiration.
- Even air distribution, correct dunnage and stowage pattern, and adequate spacing at the unit end are critical to avoid hot spots and condensation.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q4 (16 Marks)
Auxiliary Machinery 🔥 Repeated 6x
With Reference to Gear pumps used for lubricating oil transfer:
(a) Sketch and describe a gear type pump indicating the flow of fluid.
(b) State the materials that gear type pump components may be manufactured from.
(c) Specify THREE applications that are suitable for the employment of gea type pumps.
Appeared In: Aug 2025 Jul 2025 Oct 2019 Aug 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(a) Gear Type Pump
A gear pump is a positive displacement rotary pump. It commonly has two meshing spur gears inside a close-fitting casing. One gear is driven by the shaft and the other is an idler gear.
Operation
As the gears rotate, the teeth unmesh at the inlet side. This creates a low-pressure area, so lubricating oil enters the pump casing.
The oil is trapped in the spaces between the gear teeth and casing. It is carried around the outside of the gears from inlet to outlet.
At the outlet side, the gear teeth mesh again. This reduces the space available and forces the oil out through the discharge port.
Oil does not pass through the centre between the gears because the meshing teeth form a seal. Since a fixed volume is delivered each revolution, the gear pump is a positive displacement pump. A relief valve is therefore required to prevent excessive pressure if the discharge is blocked.
(b) Materials for Gear Pump Components
- Casing/body: Cast iron, cast steel, bronze, or aluminium alloy for small pumps.
- Gears: Hardened steel, alloy steel, stainless steel, bronze, or cast iron.
- Shafts: Carbon steel, alloy steel, or stainless steel.
- Bearings/bushes: Bronze, white metal, phosphor bronze, or ball/roller bearings.
- Seals: Mechanical seal, gland packing, nitrile/Viton oil seals.
- Relief valve parts: Steel or stainless steel spring and valve components.
For lubricating oil pumps, cast iron casing with hardened steel gears and steel shafts is common.
(c) Suitable Applications of Gear Pumps
- Lubricating oil transfer and circulation
Gear pumps are suitable because lubricating oil is clean, viscous, and has good lubricating properties. The pump gives steady positive flow.
- Fuel oil transfer and booster service
They are used for diesel oil and heavy fuel oil transfer because they handle viscous liquids well and can produce moderate to high pressure.
- Hydraulic oil systems
Gear pumps are used in hydraulic power packs and control systems because they give positive delivery and compact construction.
Other suitable uses include:
- Sludge oil transfer
- Bilge oily water transfer, where liquid is not too contaminated
- Boiler fuel oil supply
- Steering gear auxiliary hydraulic systems
- Cargo oil stripping for suitable viscous liquids
Gear pumps are not suitable for liquids containing hard abrasive solids because close clearances between gears and casing can wear quickly.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q6 (16 Marks)
General 🔥 Repeated 10x
Reverse osmosis is the modern alternative for shipboard production of drinking water:
(a) Describe using simple diagrams if necessary, the principle of reverse osmosis.
(b) Sketch and describe a single pass system for producing fresh water from sea water
Appeared In: Jul 2025 Jan 2023 Mar 2021 Oct 2019 Aug 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Nov 2018 Oct 2018 Jul 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Reverse osmosis (RO) is a process that purifies water by forcing it through a semi-permeable membrane. In this process, high pressure is applied to a solution with a high concentration of dissolved solids, such as saltwater, on one side of the membrane. This pressure overcomes the natural osmotic pressure, causing the pure water molecules to pass through the membrane while leaving behind the larger salt ions and other impurities. The membrane acts as a selective barrier, allowing only the water to pass, while the concentrated brine solution is discarded. For large-scale production, a large membrane surface area and a strong pump capable of generating high pressures are necessary.
1. Pretreatment Stage
Pretreatment is essential to protect the R.O. membranes from fouling and scaling.
- Scaling: Caused by soluble salts such as calcium carbonate and calcium sulphate depositing on the membrane.
- Fouling: Caused by micro-organisms, metal oxides, and colloidal particles coating the membrane surface.
Pretreatment methods include:
- Mechanical filtration: Multiple filter stages in series, e.g.:
- Sand filters
- Multi-layer filters
- Microfilters (<10 ppm particle size)
- Chemical treatment:
- Coagulants for fine particle removal
- Biocides to kill micro-organisms
- Acid dosing to neutralize calcium salts and prevent scale formation
A pump takes suction from the sea chest through a coarse filter, delivering water at about 6 bar through the pretreatment system.
2. High-Pressure Stage
- A high-pressure piston pump raises the feed water pressure to above 50 bar.
- This pressurized water enters the semi-permeable membrane modules.
3. Separation Process
- Due to the pressure difference between the concentrated brine side and the permeate side, water molecules pass through the membrane.
- Dissolved salts, organics, and microbes are rejected.
Outputs:
- Permeate (Fresh Water): Low-salt content water used for drinking and domestic purposes.
- Brine (Concentrated Reject): Discharged overboard (OVBD).
4. Post-Treatment
The fresh water (permeate) is further treated to make it suitable for shipboard use:
- Hardness adjustment (to prevent excessive softness)
- pH correction (maintained around 8 for taste and corrosion control)
- Chlorination (for disinfection)
Note: If pH rises too high, chlorine’s effectiveness against micro-organisms is reduced.
Flow Summary:
Sea Water → Coarse Filter → Pretreatment Filters & Chemicals → High-Pressure Pump → R.O. Membranes →
→ Permeate (Fresh Water) → Post-treatment → Ship’s Fresh Water System
→ Brine (Reject Water) → Overboard
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q8 (16 Marks)
Auxiliary Machinery 🔥 Repeated 6x
With Reference to Air- conditioning System onboard your vessel:
(a) Sketch and describe a high pressure cut-out in a refrigeration system.
(b) The refrigeration compressor has stopped due to operation of the h.p. cut-out. Explain
(i) The possible causes.
(ii) How these causes would be found and possible remedies.
(c) What steps are taken if the compressor "short-cycle" on low pressure cut-out?
Appeared In: Jul 2026 Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2024 Jul 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- Dirty condenser
- Overcharge of refrigerant
- Condenser coolant failure
- Clogged filter drier
- Malfunctioning expansion valve
- Faulty pressure switch
(ii)
- Dirty condenser - Visual inspection of condenser, clean the condenser
- Overcharge of refrigerant - check the refrigerant level in sight glass, reduce the refrigerant charge.
- Condenser coolant failure - check in/out pressures, clean the condenser.
- Clogged filter drier - visual inspection of drier, change the drier
- Malfunctioning expansion valve - inspect expansion valve, repair or replace the valve
- Faulty pressure switch - inspect the switch, repair or replace the pressure switch
- To provide sufficient suction pressure control difference according to the system loading and frequency of room inspection
- Refrigerant charges should be adequate, the system should be without leaks. The suction line filter is to be kept clean with no obstruction in suction line.
- The leaky solenoid valve is to be replaced. The evaporator coil is to be defrosted regularly and ensure the inner surface is clean.
- Piston rings, cylinder liner, discharge valve, by-pass valve and safety valve are to be maintained in good condition. Compressor capacity is to be selected according to the system requirement and nature of loading.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q9 (16 Marks)
Cargo & Tankers 🔥 Repeated 3x
With reference to Inert gas generator fitted on Gas carriers:
(a) Sketch a line diagram showing a typical 'Inert Gas generator' used for inerting in gas carriers, labeling the component parts.
(b) Describe the system.
(c) State the function of a chiller used in this type of inert gas generator.
Appeared In: Aug 2024 Jun 2023 Jul 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Components in line: fuel/air inlets -> combustion blower (forced draught) -> burner and combustion chamber/boiler fired by diesel or gas -> exhaust gas -> inert gas cooler/quench -> water separator / scrubber unit (sea water washing) -> demister (mist eliminator) -> refrigeration chiller (inert gas cooler/dryer) -> activated charcoal / desulphurisation or final filters -> inert gas discharge blower -> distribution header and valves -> to cargo tank (vent/ purge / pressure control). A gas analyser (O2/CO2 content) and dew-point monitor are on the discharge line, with a discharge overboard/by-pass line and deck water seal.
An inert gas generator produces inert gas specifically for gas carriers, where the inerting medium must be of very low oxygen (typ. less than 1-2% O2 for gas tank inerting) and low hydrocarbon residue, often hot, dry and clean so it does not contaminate or condense in the tanks. Air is drawn by a blower and mixed with fuel (marine diesel or the cargo/gaseous fuel) and burnt in a pressurised combustion chamber so that essentially all oxygen is consumed. The hot combustion products (mainly nitrogen, carbon dioxide and water vapour) then pass to a cooling/scrubbing tower where they are cooled and washed by sea water, which removes particulate soot, sulphur and soluble gases and drops the temperature. A demister removes entrained water droplets. The gas then passes through a refrigeration chiller/cooler which dries it by condensing out water vapour, giving a low dew point so that no liquid water or ice can form in the tanks. Final polishing (activated carbon for odour/removal) may be added. The inert gas is delivered by the discharge blower to a distribution header; from there it passes through the deck water seal and dry lines into the cargo tanks, where it is used to inert, purge, pressurise and (with the pump) vapour-free the tanks. Continuous O2 and dew-point analysis confirms the gas is within specification; if the oxygen is too high the gas is automatically diverted overboard.
The chiller (refrigeration cooler) cools the inert gas below its dew point so that the moisture condenses out, producing dry gas of low dew point (commonly below -40 C or a set low value). This prevents: (1) formation of liquid water, ice or hydrates in the cold cargo tanks, which could block valves, cause corrosion or contaminate and give erroneous readings; (2) water vapour that would otherwise be carried into the tanks. The chiller therefore ensures the inert gas delivered to the tanks is dry, protecting the cargo and equipment and maintaining tank atmosphere integrity.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q4 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting 🔥 Repeated 11x
With regards to main transmission shaft flange coupling arrangements:
(a) Sketch a hollow type coupling bolt and the hydraulic head/nut and loading rod which are used to fit it
(b) Describe how the bolt is fitted
(c) State the advantage of the hollow coupling bolt as compared to the traditional type of coupling bolt
Appeared In: Aug 2026 Jul 2025 Apr 2024 Mar 2024 Jun 2023 Feb 2021 Jan 2021 Mar 2020 Jun 2019 Jul 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- A bolt with a diameter slightly larger than the flange coupling bore diameter (D + 0.00025D) is selected.
- A push rod (loading rod) is inserted into the hollow coupling bolt, and a hydraulic head is attached.
- Hydraulic oil pressure of approximately 30,000 N/m² is applied, causing the bolt to stretch (approximately 0.021mm) and temporarily reduce its diameter by 0.00025D. This allows easy insertion of the bolt into the flange bore.
- The bolt is placed inside the bore by hand, and the nut is tightened and nipped up using a spanner.
- The hydraulic pressure is then released, allowing the bolt to expand and create a secure interference fit within the bore. This generates a tensile stress of approximately 15.5 tons/m², ensuring a firm grip.
- After fitting, the hydraulic assembly (items A, B, and C) is removed, and a protective plastic cap is placed over the bolt head.
- The hollow bolt design allows precise control of the bolt load, ensuring optimal tightening and load distribution.
- Diametrical re-expansion after hydraulic pressure release ensures a strong interference fit of the shank within the flange bore, reducing the risk of loosening.
- Hollow coupling bolts are easier to remove for inspection and maintenance, significantly reducing dismantling and fitting time.
- Unlike traditional bolts, hollow coupling bolts minimize wear on the bore, eliminating the need for frequent re-machining.
- Replacement of hollow coupling bolts is less frequent, reducing operational downtime and maintenance costs.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q6 (16 Marks)
General 🔥 Repeated 12x
With reference to Vacuum Sewage Systems:
(a) Sketch & Describe a Vacuum sewage system.
(b) State the advantage of Vacuum sewage system.
(c) State the different causes of dropping vacuum.
Appeared In: Aug 2025 Apr 2024 Mar 2020 Jan 2020 Oct 2019 Sep 2019 Aug 2019 Jun 2019 Mar 2019 Jan 2019 Oct 2018 Sep 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(b) Advantages of a Vacuum Sewage System:
- The vacuum sewage system uses 85–90% less water for flushing compared to conventional systems, requiring very little flushing water.
- Toilets can be positioned more flexibly, including below the level of the holding tank, which is not feasible with gravity-fed systems.
- The system uses smaller diameter piping, reducing material and space requirements.
- The reduced water usage contributes to overall water conservation, making the system environmentally friendly.
- If the pump is pumping foam instead of liquid, this will be evident due to severe vibration. Add water to the tank and try again. If adding water does not help, reduce the level of foam by pouring antifoam agent into the tank (1 cup per 2 cubic metres of foam and sewage).
- Check that shut-off valves are fully open and not clogged.
- If the direction of rotation of the pump is wrong, change wiring accordingly.
- Close the valves that isolate the collecting unit from the piping system and start the pump again. If vacuum now builds up, there must be a leak in the piping system.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q8 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting 🔥 Repeated 14x
Sketch a sealing arrangement for an oil lubricated stern tube. Identify the common forms of seal failure. State how oil loss due to seal failure can be restricted whilst on passage? What is the material used for sealing rings and propeller shaft liner?
Appeared In: Dec 2024 Apr 2024 Aug 2023 Jun 2023 Feb 2021 Oct 2020 Mar 2020 Jan 2020 Dec 2019 Sep 2019 Jun 2019 Feb 2019 Oct 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Common forms of seal failure in a stern tube
- Loss of elasticity in seal material – Nitrile rubber seals may lose their elastic properties over time, reducing their sealing effectiveness.
- Surface damage to chrome liner – Grooving or scoring of the chrome liner can impair sealing surfaces, leading to leakage.
- Excessive shaft vibration – Heavy vibration of the propeller shaft can cause uneven wear and seal deformation.
- Insufficient cooling – Inadequate cooling can cause rubber sealing elements to harden and eventually fail.
- Exceeding running hour limits – Operating beyond the manufacturer’s recommended service life increases the risk of seal failure.
- Deterioration of oil quality – Contaminated or degraded oil reduces lubrication and protection, accelerating seal wear.
- Incorrect header tank level adjustment – Failure to adjust the header tank according to vessel draft can cause oil loss, leading to inadequate lubrication and seal damage.
Restricting oil loss due to seal failure whilst on passage
- Use of high-viscosity oil – Recharge the system with a thicker oil to reduce leakage rate through damaged seals.
- Temporary oil supply arrangement –
- Disconnect the existing oil supply line.
- Connect a 45-gallon drum supported by a block and tackle arrangement.
- Adjust the drum height to vary the oil head pressure, matching it to the surrounding water pressure and minimizing leakage.
- Fresh water introduction – Supply fresh water to the gravity tank to emulsify with any leaked oil. The resulting emulsion helps coagulate around the damaged seal area while the oil is circulated to maintain lubrication and sealing.
Materials for Sealing Rings and Propeller Shaft Liner:
- Sealing Rings: Nitrile rubber (NBR) is a commonly used material for stern tube sealing rings due to its good oil resistance, elasticity, and relatively low cost.
- Shaft Liner: Chrome-plated steel is a common material for stern tube liners. The chrome plating provides a hard, smooth, and corrosion-resistant surface, minimizing wear and improving the life of the sealing rings.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q2 (16 Marks)
Cargo & Tankers 🔥 Repeated 7x
With reference to Flue gas Inert gas system:
(a) Sketch a line diagram showing a typical 'Inert Gas System' used for inerting the cargo tanks of oil tankers, labeling the component parts.
(b) Describe the system.
(c) State what oxygen content you would expect in the flue gases if good combustion is achieved.
Appeared In: Dec 2019 Apr 2019 Mar 2019 Jan 2020 Oct 2019 Sep 2019 Aug 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- Exhaust gases source: The inert gas source is taken from exhaust uptakes of the boiler as it contains flue gases in it.
- Inert gas isolating valve: It serves as the supply valve from uptake to the rest of the system, isolating both systems when not in use.
- Scrubbing tower: Flue gas enters the scrub tower from the bottom and passes through a series of water spray and baffle plates to cool, clean, and moist the gases. The SO2 level decreases up to 90%, and gas becomes clear of soot.
- Demister: Normally made of polypropylene, it is used to absorb moisture and water from the treated flue gas.
- Gas Blower: Normally, two types of fan blowers are used: a steam-driven turbine blower for I.G. operation and an electrically driven blower for topping-up purposes.
- I.G pressure regulating valve: The pressure within the tanks varies with the properties of oil and atmospheric conditions. To control this variation and to avoid overheating of the blower fan, a pressure regulator valve is attached after blower discharge, which re-circulates the excess gas back to the scrubbing tower.
- Deck seal: The purpose of the deck seal is to stop the gases to return back which are coming from the blower to the cargo tanks. Normally wet type deck seals are used. A demister is fitted to absorb the moisture carried away by the gases.
- Mechanical non-return valve: It is an additional non-return mechanical device in line with the deck seal.
- Deck isolating valve: The engine room system can be isolated fully with the deck system with the help of this valve.
- Pressure Vacuum (PV) breaker: The PV breaker helps in controlling the over or under-pressurization of cargo tanks. The PV breaker vent is fitted with a flame trap to prevent fire from igniting when loading or discharging operation is going on when in port.
- Cargo tank isolating valves: A vessel has several cargo holds, and each hold is provided with an isolating valve. The valve controls the flow of inert gas to hold and is operated only by a responsible officer in the vessel.
- Mast riser: The mast riser is used to maintain a positive pressure of inert gas at the time of loading of cargo, and during the loading time, it is kept open to avoid pressurisation of the cargo tank.
Working procedure:
- Boiler uptake gases are drawn to the scrubber unit via flue gas isolating valve(s).
- In the scrubber unit, the gas is cooled, cleaned and dried before being supplied into the tanks.
- Motor-driven inert gas blowers supply the treated gas from the scrubber tower to the tanks. They are mounted on rubber vibration absorbers and isolated from the piping by rubber expansion bellows.
- Regulation of gas quantity delivered to the deck is taken care of by the gas control valves, and the deck pressure is managed by the pressure controller. If the deck pressure is lower than the set point, the output signal will be raised to open the valve more, and vice versa. If the deck pressure is lower than the set point, these valves will then work in cooperation to keep both the deck pressure/blower pressure at their respective set point without starving or overfeeding the circuit.
- Entering the deck line, the gas passes through the deck water seal, which also acts as a non-return valve, automatically preventing the back-flow of explosive gases from the cargo tanks.
- After the deck seal, the inert gas relief is mounted to balance the built-up deck water seal pressure when the system is shut down. In case of a failure of both the deck seal and the non-return valve, the relief valve will vent the gases flowing from the cargo tank into the atmosphere
- The oxygen analyser, which is fitted after the blower separates the “production” and “distribution” components of the plant and analyses the oxygen content of the gas, if it is more than 8%, it alarms and shutdowns the plant
Alternate sketch of IG system.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q7 (16 Marks)
Materials & Testing 🔥 Repeated 8x
With reference to Keyless Propellers:
(a) Sketch a section through a keyless sleeved propeller.
(b) State the advantages of using a keyless sleeved propeller.
(c) State with reasons, which metal sleeve, should be made for contact with the forged mild steel tail shaft.
(d) State the material used to bond the sleeve to the propeller and the general thickness of the bonding material.
Appeared In: Jan 2026 Jun 2024 Dec 2023 Oct 2023 Mar 2019 Jan 2019 Sep 2018 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- Keyless design avoids stress concentration caused by keys and keyways.
- Stresses are evenly distributed across the internal surface of the propeller boss
- The absence of a keyway increases the friction available for torque transmission.
- The design prevents overstressing or permanent damage to the propeller hub during operation.
- The keyless arrangement simplifies the propeller and shaft interface, making it easier to manufacture and maintain.
- With a coefficient of friction of 0.28, it minimizes the likelihood of propeller slippage.
- Its expansion rates are similar to those of steel, reducing the risk of misalignment or loosening during temperature variations.
- Pearlitic cast iron exhibits excellent resistance to fretting, which is important for prolonged and reliable operation.
- High-strength epoxy Araldite filling is used to bond the sleeve to the propeller securely.
- The bonding material is applied with a thickness of approximately 1 mm, ensuring adequate adhesion and durability.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q8 (16 Marks)
General 🔥 Repeated 12x
With reference to Vacuum Sewage Systems:
(a) Sketch & Describe a Vacuum sewage system.
(b) State the advantage of Vacuum sewage system.
(c) State the different causes of dropping vacuum.
Appeared In: Aug 2025 Apr 2024 Mar 2020 Jan 2020 Oct 2019 Sep 2019 Aug 2019 Jun 2019 Mar 2019 Jan 2019 Oct 2018 Sep 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(b) Advantages of a Vacuum Sewage System:
- The vacuum sewage system uses 85–90% less water for flushing compared to conventional systems, requiring very little flushing water.
- Toilets can be positioned more flexibly, including below the level of the holding tank, which is not feasible with gravity-fed systems.
- The system uses smaller diameter piping, reducing material and space requirements.
- The reduced water usage contributes to overall water conservation, making the system environmentally friendly.
- If the pump is pumping foam instead of liquid, this will be evident due to severe vibration. Add water to the tank and try again. If adding water does not help, reduce the level of foam by pouring antifoam agent into the tank (1 cup per 2 cubic metres of foam and sewage).
- Check that shut-off valves are fully open and not clogged.
- If the direction of rotation of the pump is wrong, change wiring accordingly.
- Close the valves that isolate the collecting unit from the piping system and start the pump again. If vacuum now builds up, there must be a leak in the piping system.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q1 (16 Marks)
General 🔥 Repeated 12x
With reference to Vacuum Sewage Systems:
(a) Sketch & Describe a Vacuum sewage system.
(b) State the advantage of Vacuum sewage system.
(c) State the different causes of dropping vacuum.
Appeared In: Aug 2025 Apr 2024 Mar 2020 Jan 2020 Oct 2019 Sep 2019 Aug 2019 Jun 2019 Mar 2019 Jan 2019 Oct 2018 Sep 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(b) Advantages of a Vacuum Sewage System:
- The vacuum sewage system uses 85–90% less water for flushing compared to conventional systems, requiring very little flushing water.
- Toilets can be positioned more flexibly, including below the level of the holding tank, which is not feasible with gravity-fed systems.
- The system uses smaller diameter piping, reducing material and space requirements.
- The reduced water usage contributes to overall water conservation, making the system environmentally friendly.
- If the pump is pumping foam instead of liquid, this will be evident due to severe vibration. Add water to the tank and try again. If adding water does not help, reduce the level of foam by pouring antifoam agent into the tank (1 cup per 2 cubic metres of foam and sewage).
- Check that shut-off valves are fully open and not clogged.
- If the direction of rotation of the pump is wrong, change wiring accordingly.
- Close the valves that isolate the collecting unit from the piping system and start the pump again. If vacuum now builds up, there must be a leak in the piping system.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q4 (16 Marks)
General 🔥 Repeated 12x
Reverse osmosis is the modern alternative for shipboard production of drinking water.
(a) Describe using simple diagrams if necessary, the principle of reverse osmosis
(b) Sketch a line diagram showing a single pass system for producing fresh water from seawater and describe the system.
Appeared In: Jan 2018 Jul 2025 Jan 2023 Mar 2021 Oct 2019 Aug 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Nov 2018 Oct 2018 Jul 2018 Aug 2025
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Reverse osmosis (RO) is a process that purifies water by forcing it through a semi-permeable membrane. In this process, high pressure is applied to a solution with a high concentration of dissolved solids, such as saltwater, on one side of the membrane. This pressure overcomes the natural osmotic pressure, causing the pure water molecules to pass through the membrane while leaving behind the larger salt ions and other impurities. The membrane acts as a selective barrier, allowing only the water to pass, while the concentrated brine solution is discarded. For large-scale production, a large membrane surface area and a strong pump capable of generating high pressures are necessary.
1. Pretreatment Stage
Pretreatment is essential to protect the R.O. membranes from fouling and scaling.
- Scaling: Caused by soluble salts such as calcium carbonate and calcium sulphate depositing on the membrane.
- Fouling: Caused by micro-organisms, metal oxides, and colloidal particles coating the membrane surface.
Pretreatment methods include:
- Mechanical filtration: Multiple filter stages in series, e.g.:
- Sand filters
- Multi-layer filters
- Microfilters (<10 ppm particle size)
- Chemical treatment:
- Coagulants for fine particle removal
- Biocides to kill micro-organisms
- Acid dosing to neutralize calcium salts and prevent scale formation
A pump takes suction from the sea chest through a coarse filter, delivering water at about 6 bar through the pretreatment system.
2. High-Pressure Stage
- A high-pressure piston pump raises the feed water pressure to above 50 bar.
- This pressurized water enters the semi-permeable membrane modules.
3. Separation Process
- Due to the pressure difference between the concentrated brine side and the permeate side, water molecules pass through the membrane.
- Dissolved salts, organics, and microbes are rejected.
Outputs:
- Permeate (Fresh Water): Low-salt content water used for drinking and domestic purposes.
- Brine (Concentrated Reject): Discharged overboard (OVBD).
4. Post-Treatment
The fresh water (permeate) is further treated to make it suitable for shipboard use:
- Hardness adjustment (to prevent excessive softness)
- pH correction (maintained around 8 for taste and corrosion control)
- Chlorination (for disinfection)
Note: If pH rises too high, chlorine’s effectiveness against micro-organisms is reduced.
Flow Summary:
Sea Water → Coarse Filter → Pretreatment Filters & Chemicals → High-Pressure Pump → R.O. Membranes →
→ Permeate (Fresh Water) → Post-treatment → Ship’s Fresh Water System
→ Brine (Reject Water) → Overboard
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q5 (16 Marks)
Cargo & Tankers
With Respect to Gas Carriers, Sketch and describe a ship's reliquefaction system for conditioning and reliquefaction of liquefied cargoes like propane and butane.
Appeared In: Oct 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Sketch of a reliquefaction system for LPG (propane/butane) carriers
A single-line diagram shows the cargo boil-off vapour being drawn from the tank vapour space and led to a reliquefaction plant, typical of a cascade or two-stage compressor cycle. In a single-stage direct cycle used for butane/propane, the vapour is compressed by a compressor (often driven through a clutch from a diesel engine), then cooled and condensed in a condenser (sea-water or air cooled), then returned as liquid to the cargo tank. For propane a cascade or an indirect (regenerative) two-stage system may be used because of its higher pressure and lower critical temperature: the propane vapour is compressed in a two-stage compressor with intercooling, condensed by a separate refrigerant (e.g. R-22/Dichlorodifluoromethane) cascade circuit, or cooled below its condensation temperature using a chiller.
Description of the system
Liquefied gases such as propane and butane are carried at their boiling temperatures under pressure (fully refrigerated or semi-pressurised). Heat leaking into the tanks evaporates some liquid cargo, producing boil-off vapour. If this vapour is not controlled, tank pressure rises. The reliquefaction system takes this vapour from the tank vapour space, compresses it (raising pressure and temperature), cools and condenses it back to a liquid, and returns the liquid to the tank, so there is no net loss of cargo and the tank pressure/temperature are held at set point.
The main components are:
- Cargo/boil-off compressor (often reciprocating, single or two-stage), with inlet filter and knockout pots.
- Condenser: heat exchanger, sea water or refrigerant cooled, where compressed vapour condenses to liquid.
- Expansion and liquid return: condensed liquid is returned via an expansion valve and sub-cooling arrangement to the tank, or to a holding tank.
- Cascade refrigerant circuit (for propane): a closed refrigeration loop (condensing unit = compressor, condenser, expansion valve, evaporator) where the evaporator acts as the condenser's cooling source, enabling condensation below achievable sea-water temperature.
- Control: pressure and temperature control maintains tank set point; the compressor capacity is modulated and the plant cycles on tank pressure.
The system may be operated in a "direct" mode (vapour from tank compressed and recondensed) or an "indirect/regenerative" cascade mode (a high-pressure refrigerant transfers heat). Sub-cooling improves efficiency and prevents flashing in the tank.
Note for the exam: describe the chosen cycle clearly, mention compressor, condenser, expansion and return, and explain the need for cascade for propane.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q7 (16 Marks)
Boilers & Steam 🔥 Repeated 4x
With reference to auxiliary boiler safety valves:
(a) Describe, with the aid of a sketch, the safety valves for an auxiliary boiler
(b) Identify, with reasons, the parts that require particularly close attention during overhaul
(c) Describe how the safety valves are reset after an overhaul
Appeared In: Aug 2025 Oct 2019 Aug 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Overhauling and Setting of Boiler Safety Valves
Boiler safety valves are critical protective devices designed to automatically release excess steam pressure and prevent boiler overpressure. Most auxiliary boilers are fitted with full-lift or pop-type double spring safety valves, which open rapidly and fully once the set pressure is reached, ensuring effective pressure relief.
A typical boiler safety valve consists of the following main components:
- Valve and Seat: Usually made of high-grade materials such as stainless steel or Monel metal to resist erosion (wire drawing) caused by high-velocity steam.
- Compression Springs: Helical springs that hold the valve tightly closed against steam pressure until the set pressure is reached.
- Valve Lip / Shroud (Waste Steam Piston): A specially designed projection that increases the effective area when the valve begins to lift, producing a rapid “pop” action and ensuring full opening.
- Spindle and Guides: Maintain alignment and ensure smooth vertical movement of the valve.
- Waste Steam Pipe: A large-diameter pipe that safely discharges steam to the atmosphere.
- Easing Gear: A mechanical arrangement that allows manual lifting of the valve for testing or emergency purposes.
- Drain Arrangement: Prevents accumulation of condensate in the valve body, which could otherwise affect operation.
- Isolation and Removal: Isolate the boiler, ensure zero pressure, and remove the safety valve carefully from its seating.
- Dismantling: Mark all parts for correct reassembly. Carefully dismantle the valve, including removal of springs, spindle, and valve disc.
- Cleaning: Clean all components thoroughly to remove deposits, scale, and corrosion products.
- Inspection of Components: Each component must be examined for wear, damage, or distortion (details given below).
- Repair and Refurbishment: Carry out necessary repairs such as lapping of valve and seat, replacement of worn parts, or renewal of springs if required.
- Reassembly: Reassemble the valve carefully, ensuring correct alignment and clearances. Avoid over-tightening or misalignment during assembly.
Parts Requiring Close Attention During Overhaul
- Valve and Seat Surfaces: These must be perfectly smooth and free from pitting, scale, or wire drawing. They should be lapped to a fine finish to ensure a steam-tight seal and prevent leakage or “simmering.”
- Springs: Check for cracks, corrosion, and loss of elasticity (permanent set). Defective springs will affect the lifting pressure and proper reseating of the valve.
- Spindle and Guides: Ensure the spindle is straight and moves freely. Guides should be clean and free from deposits, as any restriction may cause sticking or improper operation.
- Lip/Shroud Clearance: The clearance between the valve lip and seat ring is critical for correct “pop” action. Incorrect clearance may result in delayed opening or poor reseating.
- Drain Passage: Ensure that drain holes are clear. Blockage can allow condensate to accumulate, which may interfere with valve operation and cause corrosion.
After overhaul, safety valves must be reset and tested, usually in the presence of a classification society surveyor.
- Preparation: Ensure that the boiler pressure gauge is calibrated and accurate. One safety valve is temporarily gagged (held closed) while the other is being set.
- Raising Boiler Pressure: Gradually raise the boiler pressure up to the Maximum Allowable Working Pressure (MAWP).
- Adjustment of Set Pressure: Adjust the compression of the spring using the adjusting nut until the valve lifts (“pops”) at the required pressure.
- For boilers with two valves, typically one is set at the working pressure and the other slightly higher (e.g., about 3% above), as per class or manufacturer requirements.
- Verification of Operation: Allow the valve to lift and reseat several times to confirm consistent operation. Check the blowdown, which is the difference between opening and closing pressure, typically around 3–5% of the set pressure.
- Accumulation Test (if required): With the main steam stop valve closed and boiler firing at full capacity, verify that the pressure does not rise more than 10% above MAWP, ensuring adequate relieving capacity.
- Sealing and Locking: Once the correct setting is confirmed, fit locking arrangements such as split collars or distance pieces. Apply a lead seal to prevent unauthorized adjustment.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q8 (16 Marks)
Auxiliary Machinery 🔥 Repeated 6x
With Reference to Gear pumps used for lubricating oil transfer:
(a) Sketch and describe a gear type pump indicating the flow of fluid.
(b) State the materials that gear type pump components may be manufactured from.
(c) Specify THREE applications that are suitable for the employment of gear type pumps.
Appeared In: Aug 2025 Jul 2025 Oct 2019 Aug 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(a) Gear Type Pump
A gear pump is a positive displacement rotary pump. It commonly has two meshing spur gears inside a close-fitting casing. One gear is driven by the shaft and the other is an idler gear.
Operation
As the gears rotate, the teeth unmesh at the inlet side. This creates a low-pressure area, so lubricating oil enters the pump casing.
The oil is trapped in the spaces between the gear teeth and casing. It is carried around the outside of the gears from inlet to outlet.
At the outlet side, the gear teeth mesh again. This reduces the space available and forces the oil out through the discharge port.
Oil does not pass through the centre between the gears because the meshing teeth form a seal. Since a fixed volume is delivered each revolution, the gear pump is a positive displacement pump. A relief valve is therefore required to prevent excessive pressure if the discharge is blocked.
(b) Materials for Gear Pump Components
- Casing/body: Cast iron, cast steel, bronze, or aluminium alloy for small pumps.
- Gears: Hardened steel, alloy steel, stainless steel, bronze, or cast iron.
- Shafts: Carbon steel, alloy steel, or stainless steel.
- Bearings/bushes: Bronze, white metal, phosphor bronze, or ball/roller bearings.
- Seals: Mechanical seal, gland packing, nitrile/Viton oil seals.
- Relief valve parts: Steel or stainless steel spring and valve components.
For lubricating oil pumps, cast iron casing with hardened steel gears and steel shafts is common.
(c) Suitable Applications of Gear Pumps
- Lubricating oil transfer and circulation
Gear pumps are suitable because lubricating oil is clean, viscous, and has good lubricating properties. The pump gives steady positive flow.
- Fuel oil transfer and booster service
They are used for diesel oil and heavy fuel oil transfer because they handle viscous liquids well and can produce moderate to high pressure.
- Hydraulic oil systems
Gear pumps are used in hydraulic power packs and control systems because they give positive delivery and compact construction.
Other suitable uses include:
- Sludge oil transfer
- Bilge oily water transfer, where liquid is not too contaminated
- Boiler fuel oil supply
- Steering gear auxiliary hydraulic systems
- Cargo oil stripping for suitable viscous liquids
Gear pumps are not suitable for liquids containing hard abrasive solids because close clearances between gears and casing can wear quickly.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q9 (16 Marks)
Cargo & Tankers 🔥 Repeated 5x
With reference to Flue gas Inert gas system:
(a) Sketch a line diagram showing a typical Inert Gas System used for inerting the cargo tanks of oil tankers; Describe the system after labeling the important component parts.
(b) State what oxygen content you would expect in the flue gases if good combustion is achieved.
Appeared In: Jan 2020 Oct 2019 Sep 2019 Aug 2019 Aug 2025
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The following components are used in a typical inert gas system in oil tankers:
- Exhaust gases source: The inert gas source is taken from exhaust uptakes of the boiler as it contains flue gases in it.
- Inert gas isolating valve: It serves as the supply valve from uptake to the rest of the system, isolating both systems when not in use.
- Scrubbing tower: Flue gas enters the scrub tower from the bottom and passes through a series of water spray and baffle plates to cool, clean, and moist the gases. The SO2 level decreases up to 90%, and gas becomes clear of soot.
- Demister: Normally made of polypropylene, it is used to absorb moisture and water from the treated flue gas.
- Gas Blower: Normally, two types of fan blowers are used: a steam-driven turbine blower for I.G. operation and an electrically driven blower for topping-up purposes.
- I.G pressure regulating valve: The pressure within the tanks varies with the properties of oil and atmospheric conditions. To control this variation and to avoid overheating of the blower fan, a pressure regulator valve is attached after blower discharge, which re-circulates the excess gas back to the scrubbing tower.
- Deck seal: The purpose of the deck seal is to stop the gases to return back which are coming from the blower to the cargo tanks. Normally wet type deck seals are used. A demister is fitted to absorb the moisture carried away by the gases.
- Mechanical non-return valve: It is an additional non-return mechanical device in line with the deck seal.
- Deck isolating valve: The engine room system can be isolated fully with the deck system with the help of this valve.
- Pressure Vacuum (PV) breaker: The PV breaker helps in controlling the over or under-pressurization of cargo tanks. The PV breaker vent is fitted with a flame trap to prevent fire from igniting when loading or discharging operation is going on when in port.
- Cargo tank isolating valves: A vessel has several cargo holds, and each hold is provided with an isolating valve. The valve controls the flow of inert gas to hold and is operated only by a responsible officer in the vessel.
- Mast riser: The mast riser is used to maintain a positive pressure of inert gas at the time of loading of cargo, and during the loading time, it is kept open to avoid pressurisation of the cargo tank.
Working procedure:
- Boiler uptake gases are drawn to the scrubber unit via flue gas isolating valve(s).
- In the scrubber unit, the gas is cooled, cleaned and dried before being supplied into the tanks.
- Motor-driven inert gas blowers supply the treated gas from the scrubber tower to the tanks. They are mounted on rubber vibration absorbers and isolated from the piping by rubber expansion bellows.
- Regulation of gas quantity delivered to the deck is taken care of by the gas control valves, and the deck pressure is managed by the pressure controller. If the deck pressure is lower than the set point, the output signal will be raised to open the valve more, and vice versa. If the deck pressure is lower than the set point, these valves will then work in cooperation to keep both the deck pressure/blower pressure at their respective set point without starving or overfeeding the circuit.
- Entering the deck line, the gas passes through the deck water seal, which also acts as a non-return valve, automatically preventing the back-flow of explosive gases from the cargo tanks.
- After the deck seal, the inert gas relief is mounted to balance the built-up deck water seal pressure when the system is shut down. In case of a failure of both the deck seal and the non-return valve, the relief valve will vent the gases flowing from the cargo tank into the atmosphere
- The oxygen analyser, which is fitted after the blower separates the “production” and “distribution” components of the plant and analyses the oxygen content of the gas, if it is more than 8%, it alarms and shutdowns the plant
Alternate sketch of IG system.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q1 (16 Marks)
Cargo & Tankers 🔥 Repeated 7x
With reference to Flue gas Inert gas system:
(a) Sketch and describe using a line diagram showing a typical 'Inert Gas System' used for inerting the cargo tanks of oil tankers, labeling the component parts.
(b) State what oxygen content you would expect in the flue gases if good combustion is achieved.
Appeared In: Dec 2019 Apr 2019 Mar 2019 Jan 2020 Oct 2019 Sep 2019 Aug 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The following components are used in a typical inert gas system in oil tankers:
- Exhaust gases source: The inert gas source is taken from exhaust uptakes of the boiler as it contains flue gases in it.
- Inert gas isolating valve: It serves as the supply valve from uptake to the rest of the system, isolating both systems when not in use.
- Scrubbing tower: Flue gas enters the scrub tower from the bottom and passes through a series of water spray and baffle plates to cool, clean, and moist the gases. The SO2 level decreases up to 90%, and gas becomes clear of soot.
- Demister: Normally made of polypropylene, it is used to absorb moisture and water from the treated flue gas.
- Gas Blower: Normally, two types of fan blowers are used: a steam-driven turbine blower for I.G. operation and an electrically driven blower for topping-up purposes.
- I.G pressure regulating valve: The pressure within the tanks varies with the properties of oil and atmospheric conditions. To control this variation and to avoid overheating of the blower fan, a pressure regulator valve is attached after blower discharge, which re-circulates the excess gas back to the scrubbing tower.
- Deck seal: The purpose of the deck seal is to stop the gases to return back which are coming from the blower to the cargo tanks. Normally wet type deck seals are used. A demister is fitted to absorb the moisture carried away by the gases.
- Mechanical non-return valve: It is an additional non-return mechanical device in line with the deck seal.
- Deck isolating valve: The engine room system can be isolated fully with the deck system with the help of this valve.
- Pressure Vacuum (PV) breaker: The PV breaker helps in controlling the over or under-pressurization of cargo tanks. The PV breaker vent is fitted with a flame trap to prevent fire from igniting when loading or discharging operation is going on when in port.
- Cargo tank isolating valves: A vessel has several cargo holds, and each hold is provided with an isolating valve. The valve controls the flow of inert gas to hold and is operated only by a responsible officer in the vessel.
- Mast riser: The mast riser is used to maintain a positive pressure of inert gas at the time of loading of cargo, and during the loading time, it is kept open to avoid pressurisation of the cargo tank.
Working procedure:
- Boiler uptake gases are drawn to the scrubber unit via flue gas isolating valve(s).
- In the scrubber unit, the gas is cooled, cleaned and dried before being supplied into the tanks.
- Motor-driven inert gas blowers supply the treated gas from the scrubber tower to the tanks. They are mounted on rubber vibration absorbers and isolated from the piping by rubber expansion bellows.
- Regulation of gas quantity delivered to the deck is taken care of by the gas control valves, and the deck pressure is managed by the pressure controller. If the deck pressure is lower than the set point, the output signal will be raised to open the valve more, and vice versa. If the deck pressure is lower than the set point, these valves will then work in cooperation to keep both the deck pressure/blower pressure at their respective set point without starving or overfeeding the circuit.
- Entering the deck line, the gas passes through the deck water seal, which also acts as a non-return valve, automatically preventing the back-flow of explosive gases from the cargo tanks.
- After the deck seal, the inert gas relief is mounted to balance the built-up deck water seal pressure when the system is shut down. In case of a failure of both the deck seal and the non-return valve, the relief valve will vent the gases flowing from the cargo tank into the atmosphere
- The oxygen analyser, which is fitted after the blower separates the “production” and “distribution” components of the plant and analyses the oxygen content of the gas, if it is more than 8%, it alarms and shutdowns the plant
Alternate sketch of IG system.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q2 (16 Marks)
Auxiliary Machinery 🔥 Repeated 6x
Sketch and describe the operation of a four-ram electro-hydraulic steering gear system. Indicate and explain the valve positions for the operation of the system when one pump is isolated and the unit is operating on two rams only
Appeared In: Apr 2024 Oct 2020 Mar 2020 Jan 2020 Sep 2019 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
According to SOLAS chapter - 2, part 1, regulation 29.16, every tanker of more than 10,000 GT shall comply with the following:
- The main steering capability due to a single failure in any part of one of the power actuating systems shall be regained in not more than 45 seconds.
- The main steering shall comprise at least two identical power actuating systems, each capable of meeting the requirements. Loss of fluid from one system shall be capable of being detected, and the defective system shall automatically get isolated so that the other system shall remain fully operational
Considering the above regulatory requirements, given below is a “Fail Safe steering gear” suitable for use on a tanker of more than 100,000 T DWT.
Shown in the diagram is a “Fail safe steering gear” having two independent power actuating systems that can
- Work simultaneously in normal operation, meeting the requirement OR
- Work independently and meet the requirement
- In the event of loss of fluid from any one system, it can be detected and isolated automatically so that the other system can remain fully operational.
Working:
- The system incorporates two sets of electric-driven pumps. Both main and auxiliary pumps are on the same shaft. The main pump shown in the diagram is a variable delivery pump
- The variable delivery pump takes suction from the tank and supplies hydraulic oil to the ram cylinders. The oil flow of the pump is determined by the pump actuating lever
- The movement of the pump actuating lever is controlled by the rudder angle order given by the bridge with the help of a bi-directional control valve
- A two-way shock relief valve is fitted between the two cylinders to release the pressure from one side of the cylinder to the other side in case of pressure increase in one of the cylinders due to heavy seas
- By-pass valves are also fitted between two cylinders, which are normally shut during operation. When one system is stopped, there is a pressure drop, as the auxiliary pump has also stopped this opens the by-pass valves, thus removing the hydraulic lock of the ram operation.
- Auto isolation valves in the system are there to isolate one system in case of any failure.
Case 1: Consider an oil leak from any pipe for cylinders 1 and 2 with the No. 1 pump running:
- No. 1 tank level will come down to L1, and it will sound an alarm on the bridge and in ECR
- When the tank level further drops to L2, i.e. low-low level, the no. 1 pump stops.
- Stopping the No. 1 pump also stops the attached auxiliary pump. So the line pressure drops, due to which the normally closed by-pass valves ‘X’ and ‘Y’ open.
- Simultaneously, the auto isolation valves ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’ will be operated by an electric signal. A, B and C are normally open valves. The electric signal will close them. So, systems 1 and 2 will be completely separated. Thus, the defective system, I.e. system 1, is isolated.
- Along with the operation of the auto isolation valves, the No. 2 pump will start automatically. The attached auxiliary pump will act on the by-pass valve ‘Y’ and close it. This enables cylinders 3 and 4 to be in normal operation.
- It should also be noted that since system 1 is completely isolated, there is no oil pressure to operate the bypass valve. So the by-pass valves remain open, thereby removing the hydraulic lock for the ram movement in cylinders 1 and 2
Case 2: Consider an oil leakage from any pipe of cylinders 3 and 4 with the No. 1 pump running:
Points 1, 2 and 3 are the same as case 1
- Simultaneously, the auto isolation valves ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’ will be operated by an electric signal. This will shut the normally open valves A, B and C. Thus, systems 1 and 2 will be completely separated
- Along with the operation of auto isolation valves, the No. 2 pump will start automatically. The attached auxiliary pump will act on the by-pass valve ‘Y’ and close. So, cylinders 3 and 4 will come into normal operation.
- Now, since the leak is between the pipe of cylinders 3 and 4, the level of the no. 2 tank will drop to L1 and give an alarm.
- The level will further drop to L2, but the pump will not stop and changeover to ensure that the leak is from the pipe of cylinders 3 and 4
- When the no. 2 tank level drops to L3, the no. 2 pump stops and the no. 1 pump starts to operate the steering using cylinders 1 and 2
- Starting the no. 1 pump will ensure that the by-pass valve ‘X’ is shut, and stopping the no. 2 pump will ensure that the by-pass valve ‘Y’ is open
This ensures the operation of the steering Gear with the defective system fully isolated.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q5 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting 🔥 Repeated 14x
Sketch a sealing arrangement for an oil-lubricated stern tube. Identify the common forms of seal failure. State how oil loss due to seal failure can be restricted whilst on passage? What is the material used for sealing rings and propeller shaft liner?
Appeared In: Dec 2024 Apr 2024 Aug 2023 Jun 2023 Feb 2021 Oct 2020 Mar 2020 Jan 2020 Dec 2019 Sep 2019 Jun 2019 Feb 2019 Oct 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Common forms of seal failure in a stern tube
- Loss of elasticity in seal material – Nitrile rubber seals may lose their elastic properties over time, reducing their sealing effectiveness.
- Surface damage to chrome liner – Grooving or scoring of the chrome liner can impair sealing surfaces, leading to leakage.
- Excessive shaft vibration – Heavy vibration of the propeller shaft can cause uneven wear and seal deformation.
- Insufficient cooling – Inadequate cooling can cause rubber sealing elements to harden and eventually fail.
- Exceeding running hour limits – Operating beyond the manufacturer’s recommended service life increases the risk of seal failure.
- Deterioration of oil quality – Contaminated or degraded oil reduces lubrication and protection, accelerating seal wear.
- Incorrect header tank level adjustment – Failure to adjust the header tank according to vessel draft can cause oil loss, leading to inadequate lubrication and seal damage.
Restricting oil loss due to seal failure whilst on passage
- Use of high-viscosity oil – Recharge the system with a thicker oil to reduce leakage rate through damaged seals.
- Temporary oil supply arrangement –
- Disconnect the existing oil supply line.
- Connect a 45-gallon drum supported by a block and tackle arrangement.
- Adjust the drum height to vary the oil head pressure, matching it to the surrounding water pressure and minimizing leakage.
- Fresh water introduction – Supply fresh water to the gravity tank to emulsify with any leaked oil. The resulting emulsion helps coagulate around the damaged seal area while the oil is circulated to maintain lubrication and sealing.
Materials for Sealing Rings and Propeller Shaft Liner:
- Sealing Rings: Nitrile rubber (NBR) is a commonly used material for stern tube sealing rings due to its good oil resistance, elasticity, and relatively low cost.
- Shaft Liner: Chrome-plated steel is a common material for stern tube liners. The chrome plating provides a hard, smooth, and corrosion-resistant surface, minimizing wear and improving the life of the sealing rings.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q6 (16 Marks)
Cargo & Tankers 🔥 Repeated 3x
Sketch and describe a system for oil monitoring of bilge and tanker ballast discharges. What inputs are recorded? Explain the difficulties encountered with the efficient operation of the oil monitoring system.
Appeared In: Sep 2019 Jan 2019 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The oil monitoring system for bilge and tanker ballast discharges ensures that the oil content in discharged water complies with regulatory standards. Below is a description of its general arrangement:
- Water from the discharge line is sampled before reaching the overboard discharge valve.
- The sample is directed to the PPM monitor, which measures the oil content in parts per million (PPM).
- The oil content value from the PPM monitor is sent to a comparator, which compares it to a preset allowable limit.
- If the oil content is within the allowable limit, the overboard valve opens automatically to discharge the water. If the oil content exceeds the set limit, the overboard valve is shut, and the water is redirected to the slop tank.
The PPM monitor works on the principle of scattered light. Light reflected or scattered by oil particles is measured using a photocell. The intensity of scattered light decreases with increasing oil content. This signal is then analysed and sent to the comparator.
The system records the following data:
- Oil content reading (in ppm)
- Ship's speed
- Oily water discharge rate
- Date and time
- Ship's position
Difficulties encountered with efficient operation:
- Response Delay in Sampling Pipe: The delay in transporting water samples from the discharge line to the PPM monitor can result in inaccurate or untimely readings.
- Clogged Sampling Pipe: Accumulation of debris or oil residues can obstruct the sampling pipe, leading to erratic or incorrect readings.
- Sealing and Cleaning of Optical Windows: The optical components of the PPM monitor, such as the scattered light window, require regular cleaning and maintenance. Dirty or poorly sealed optical windows can cause inaccurate measurements or system malfunction.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q9 (16 Marks)
General 🔥 Repeated 12x
With reference to Vacuum Sewage Systems:
(a) Sketch & Describe a Vacuum sewage system.
(b) State the advantage of Vacuum sewage system.
(c) State the different causes of dropping vacuum.
Appeared In: Aug 2025 Apr 2024 Mar 2020 Jan 2020 Oct 2019 Sep 2019 Aug 2019 Jun 2019 Mar 2019 Jan 2019 Oct 2018 Sep 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(b) Advantages of a Vacuum Sewage System:
- The vacuum sewage system uses 85–90% less water for flushing compared to conventional systems, requiring very little flushing water.
- Toilets can be positioned more flexibly, including below the level of the holding tank, which is not feasible with gravity-fed systems.
- The system uses smaller diameter piping, reducing material and space requirements.
- The reduced water usage contributes to overall water conservation, making the system environmentally friendly.
- If the pump is pumping foam instead of liquid, this will be evident due to severe vibration. Add water to the tank and try again. If adding water does not help, reduce the level of foam by pouring antifoam agent into the tank (1 cup per 2 cubic metres of foam and sewage).
- Check that shut-off valves are fully open and not clogged.
- If the direction of rotation of the pump is wrong, change wiring accordingly.
- Close the valves that isolate the collecting unit from the piping system and start the pump again. If vacuum now builds up, there must be a leak in the piping system.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q1 (16 Marks)
Auxiliary Machinery 🔥 Repeated 6x
Sketch and describe the operation of a four ram electro-hydraulic steering gear system. Indicate and explain the valve positions for the operation of the system when one pump is isolated and the unit is operating on two rams only
Appeared In: Apr 2024 Oct 2020 Mar 2020 Jan 2020 Sep 2019 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
According to SOLAS chapter - 2, part 1, regulation 29.16, every tanker of more than 10,000 GT shall comply with the following:
- The main steering capability due to a single failure in any part of one of the power actuating systems shall be regained in not more than 45 seconds.
- The main steering shall comprise at least two identical power actuating systems, each capable of meeting the requirements. Loss of fluid from one system shall be capable of being detected, and the defective system shall automatically get isolated so that the other system shall remain fully operational
Considering the above regulatory requirements, given below is a “Fail Safe steering gear” suitable for use on a tanker of more than 100,000 T DWT.
Shown in the diagram is a “Fail safe steering gear” having two independent power actuating systems that can
- Work simultaneously in normal operation, meeting the requirement OR
- Work independently and meet the requirement
- In the event of loss of fluid from any one system, it can be detected and isolated automatically so that the other system can remain fully operational.
Working:
- The system incorporates two sets of electric-driven pumps. Both main and auxiliary pumps are on the same shaft. The main pump shown in the diagram is a variable delivery pump
- The variable delivery pump takes suction from the tank and supplies hydraulic oil to the ram cylinders. The oil flow of the pump is determined by the pump actuating lever
- The movement of the pump actuating lever is controlled by the rudder angle order given by the bridge with the help of a bi-directional control valve
- A two-way shock relief valve is fitted between the two cylinders to release the pressure from one side of the cylinder to the other side in case of pressure increase in one of the cylinders due to heavy seas
- By-pass valves are also fitted between two cylinders, which are normally shut during operation. When one system is stopped, there is a pressure drop, as the auxiliary pump has also stopped this opens the by-pass valves, thus removing the hydraulic lock of the ram operation.
- Auto isolation valves in the system are there to isolate one system in case of any failure.
Case 1: Consider an oil leak from any pipe for cylinders 1 and 2 with the No. 1 pump running:
- No. 1 tank level will come down to L1, and it will sound an alarm on the bridge and in ECR
- When the tank level further drops to L2, i.e. low-low level, the no. 1 pump stops.
- Stopping the No. 1 pump also stops the attached auxiliary pump. So the line pressure drops, due to which the normally closed by-pass valves ‘X’ and ‘Y’ open.
- Simultaneously, the auto isolation valves ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’ will be operated by an electric signal. A, B and C are normally open valves. The electric signal will close them. So, systems 1 and 2 will be completely separated. Thus, the defective system, I.e. system 1, is isolated.
- Along with the operation of the auto isolation valves, the No. 2 pump will start automatically. The attached auxiliary pump will act on the by-pass valve ‘Y’ and close it. This enables cylinders 3 and 4 to be in normal operation.
- It should also be noted that since system 1 is completely isolated, there is no oil pressure to operate the bypass valve. So the by-pass valves remain open, thereby removing the hydraulic lock for the ram movement in cylinders 1 and 2
Case 2: Consider an oil leakage from any pipe of cylinders 3 and 4 with the No. 1 pump running:
Points 1, 2 and 3 are the same as case 1
- Simultaneously, the auto isolation valves ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’ will be operated by an electric signal. This will shut the normally open valves A, B and C. Thus, systems 1 and 2 will be completely separated
- Along with the operation of auto isolation valves, the No. 2 pump will start automatically. The attached auxiliary pump will act on the by-pass valve ‘Y’ and close. So, cylinders 3 and 4 will come into normal operation.
- Now, since the leak is between the pipe of cylinders 3 and 4, the level of the no. 2 tank will drop to L1 and give an alarm.
- The level will further drop to L2, but the pump will not stop and changeover to ensure that the leak is from the pipe of cylinders 3 and 4
- When the no. 2 tank level drops to L3, the no. 2 pump stops and the no. 1 pump starts to operate the steering using cylinders 1 and 2
- Starting the no. 1 pump will ensure that the by-pass valve ‘X’ is shut, and stopping the no. 2 pump will ensure that the by-pass valve ‘Y’ is open
This ensures the operation of the steering Gear with the defective system fully isolated.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q2 (16 Marks)
Cargo & Tankers 🔥 Repeated 7x
With reference to Flue gas Inert gas system:
(a) Sketch and describe using a line diagram showing a typical Inert Gas System' used for inerting the cargo tanks of oil tankers, labeling the component parts.
(b) State what oxygen content you would expect in the flue gases if good combustion is achieved.
Appeared In: Dec 2019 Apr 2019 Mar 2019 Jan 2020 Oct 2019 Sep 2019 Aug 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The following components are used in a typical inert gas system in oil tankers:
- Exhaust gases source: The inert gas source is taken from exhaust uptakes of the boiler as it contains flue gases in it.
- Inert gas isolating valve: It serves as the supply valve from uptake to the rest of the system, isolating both systems when not in use.
- Scrubbing tower: Flue gas enters the scrub tower from the bottom and passes through a series of water spray and baffle plates to cool, clean, and moist the gases. The SO2 level decreases up to 90%, and gas becomes clear of soot.
- Demister: Normally made of polypropylene, it is used to absorb moisture and water from the treated flue gas.
- Gas Blower: Normally, two types of fan blowers are used: a steam-driven turbine blower for I.G. operation and an electrically driven blower for topping-up purposes.
- I.G pressure regulating valve: The pressure within the tanks varies with the properties of oil and atmospheric conditions. To control this variation and to avoid overheating of the blower fan, a pressure regulator valve is attached after blower discharge, which re-circulates the excess gas back to the scrubbing tower.
- Deck seal: The purpose of the deck seal is to stop the gases to return back which are coming from the blower to the cargo tanks. Normally wet type deck seals are used. A demister is fitted to absorb the moisture carried away by the gases.
- Mechanical non-return valve: It is an additional non-return mechanical device in line with the deck seal.
- Deck isolating valve: The engine room system can be isolated fully with the deck system with the help of this valve.
- Pressure Vacuum (PV) breaker: The PV breaker helps in controlling the over or under-pressurization of cargo tanks. The PV breaker vent is fitted with a flame trap to prevent fire from igniting when loading or discharging operation is going on when in port.
- Cargo tank isolating valves: A vessel has several cargo holds, and each hold is provided with an isolating valve. The valve controls the flow of inert gas to hold and is operated only by a responsible officer in the vessel.
- Mast riser: The mast riser is used to maintain a positive pressure of inert gas at the time of loading of cargo, and during the loading time, it is kept open to avoid pressurisation of the cargo tank.
Working procedure:
- Boiler uptake gases are drawn to the scrubber unit via flue gas isolating valve(s).
- In the scrubber unit, the gas is cooled, cleaned and dried before being supplied into the tanks.
- Motor-driven inert gas blowers supply the treated gas from the scrubber tower to the tanks. They are mounted on rubber vibration absorbers and isolated from the piping by rubber expansion bellows.
- Regulation of gas quantity delivered to the deck is taken care of by the gas control valves, and the deck pressure is managed by the pressure controller. If the deck pressure is lower than the set point, the output signal will be raised to open the valve more, and vice versa. If the deck pressure is lower than the set point, these valves will then work in cooperation to keep both the deck pressure/blower pressure at their respective set point without starving or overfeeding the circuit.
- Entering the deck line, the gas passes through the deck water seal, which also acts as a non-return valve, automatically preventing the back-flow of explosive gases from the cargo tanks.
- After the deck seal, the inert gas relief is mounted to balance the built-up deck water seal pressure when the system is shut down. In case of a failure of both the deck seal and the non-return valve, the relief valve will vent the gases flowing from the cargo tank into the atmosphere
- The oxygen analyser, which is fitted after the blower separates the “production” and “distribution” components of the plant and analyses the oxygen content of the gas, if it is more than 8%, it alarms and shutdowns the plant
Alternate sketch of IG system.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q6 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting 🔥 Repeated 14x
Sketch a sealing arrangement for an oil lubricated stern tube, Identify the common forms of seal failure. State how oil loss due to seal failure can be restricted whilst on passage? What is the material used for sealing rings and propeller shaft liner?
Appeared In: Dec 2024 Apr 2024 Aug 2023 Jun 2023 Feb 2021 Oct 2020 Mar 2020 Jan 2020 Dec 2019 Sep 2019 Jun 2019 Feb 2019 Oct 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Common forms of seal failure in a stern tube
- Loss of elasticity in seal material – Nitrile rubber seals may lose their elastic properties over time, reducing their sealing effectiveness.
- Surface damage to chrome liner – Grooving or scoring of the chrome liner can impair sealing surfaces, leading to leakage.
- Excessive shaft vibration – Heavy vibration of the propeller shaft can cause uneven wear and seal deformation.
- Insufficient cooling – Inadequate cooling can cause rubber sealing elements to harden and eventually fail.
- Exceeding running hour limits – Operating beyond the manufacturer’s recommended service life increases the risk of seal failure.
- Deterioration of oil quality – Contaminated or degraded oil reduces lubrication and protection, accelerating seal wear.
- Incorrect header tank level adjustment – Failure to adjust the header tank according to vessel draft can cause oil loss, leading to inadequate lubrication and seal damage.
Restricting oil loss due to seal failure whilst on passage
- Use of high-viscosity oil – Recharge the system with a thicker oil to reduce leakage rate through damaged seals.
- Temporary oil supply arrangement –
- Disconnect the existing oil supply line.
- Connect a 45-gallon drum supported by a block and tackle arrangement.
- Adjust the drum height to vary the oil head pressure, matching it to the surrounding water pressure and minimizing leakage.
- Fresh water introduction – Supply fresh water to the gravity tank to emulsify with any leaked oil. The resulting emulsion helps coagulate around the damaged seal area while the oil is circulated to maintain lubrication and sealing.
Materials for Sealing Rings and Propeller Shaft Liner:
- Sealing Rings: Nitrile rubber (NBR) is a commonly used material for stern tube sealing rings due to its good oil resistance, elasticity, and relatively low cost.
- Shaft Liner: Chrome-plated steel is a common material for stern tube liners. The chrome plating provides a hard, smooth, and corrosion-resistant surface, minimizing wear and improving the life of the sealing rings.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q8 (16 Marks)
General 🔥 Repeated 12x
With reference to Vacuum Sewage Systems:
(a) Sketch & Describe a Vacuum sewage system.
(b) State the advantage of Vacuum sewage system.
(c) State the different causes of dropping
Appeared In: Aug 2025 Apr 2024 Mar 2020 Jan 2020 Oct 2019 Sep 2019 Aug 2019 Jun 2019 Mar 2019 Jan 2019 Oct 2018 Sep 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(b) Advantages of a Vacuum Sewage System:
- The vacuum sewage system uses 85–90% less water for flushing compared to conventional systems, requiring very little flushing water.
- Toilets can be positioned more flexibly, including below the level of the holding tank, which is not feasible with gravity-fed systems.
- The system uses smaller diameter piping, reducing material and space requirements.
- The reduced water usage contributes to overall water conservation, making the system environmentally friendly.
- If the pump is pumping foam instead of liquid, this will be evident due to severe vibration. Add water to the tank and try again. If adding water does not help, reduce the level of foam by pouring antifoam agent into the tank (1 cup per 2 cubic metres of foam and sewage).
- Check that shut-off valves are fully open and not clogged.
- If the direction of rotation of the pump is wrong, change wiring accordingly.
- Close the valves that isolate the collecting unit from the piping system and start the pump again. If vacuum now builds up, there must be a leak in the piping system.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q9 (16 Marks)
Refrigeration & Air Conditioning 🔥 Repeated 5x
With Respect to Container ship:
(a) Sketch and Describe a ship's indirect refrigeration system arranged for cooling containers showed in stacks in the hold.
(b) State the advantages of the system described in (a) compared with containers with their own refrigerated self-contained units.
Appeared In: Aug 2025 Feb 2021 Jan 2020 Aug 2019 Jan 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- Eliminating the need for individual refrigeration units within each container significantly increases the ship's cargo capacity.
- A centralized system simplifies maintenance procedures. Instead of numerous individual units requiring servicing, the focus is on a single, larger plant, resulting in reduced maintenance costs and downtime.
- Centralized systems, with their optimized design and variable speed components, are typically more energy-efficient than a large number of independent units operating simultaneously.
- The centralized control and monitoring offer better overall temperature regulation, minimizing the risk of temperature fluctuations that can damage sensitive goods.
- A centralized system uses less gas as compared to a multitude of individual units, resulting in a more environmentally friendly operation.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting 🔥 Repeated 14x
Sketch a sealing arrangement for an oil lubricated stern tube and (16)
(a) Identify the common form of seal failure
(b) State how oil loss due to seal failure can be restricted whist on passage
(c) What material is used for sealing ring and propeller shaft liner?
Appeared In: Dec 2024 Apr 2024 Aug 2023 Jun 2023 Feb 2021 Oct 2020 Mar 2020 Jan 2020 Dec 2019 Sep 2019 Jun 2019 Feb 2019 Oct 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Common forms of seal failure in a stern tube
- Loss of elasticity in seal material – Nitrile rubber seals may lose their elastic properties over time, reducing their sealing effectiveness.
- Surface damage to chrome liner – Grooving or scoring of the chrome liner can impair sealing surfaces, leading to leakage.
- Excessive shaft vibration – Heavy vibration of the propeller shaft can cause uneven wear and seal deformation.
- Insufficient cooling – Inadequate cooling can cause rubber sealing elements to harden and eventually fail.
- Exceeding running hour limits – Operating beyond the manufacturer’s recommended service life increases the risk of seal failure.
- Deterioration of oil quality – Contaminated or degraded oil reduces lubrication and protection, accelerating seal wear.
- Incorrect header tank level adjustment – Failure to adjust the header tank according to vessel draft can cause oil loss, leading to inadequate lubrication and seal damage.
Restricting oil loss due to seal failure whilst on passage
- Use of high-viscosity oil – Recharge the system with a thicker oil to reduce leakage rate through damaged seals.
- Temporary oil supply arrangement –
- Disconnect the existing oil supply line.
- Connect a 45-gallon drum supported by a block and tackle arrangement.
- Adjust the drum height to vary the oil head pressure, matching it to the surrounding water pressure and minimizing leakage.
- Fresh water introduction – Supply fresh water to the gravity tank to emulsify with any leaked oil. The resulting emulsion helps coagulate around the damaged seal area while the oil is circulated to maintain lubrication and sealing.
Materials for Sealing Rings and Propeller Shaft Liner:
- Sealing Rings: Nitrile rubber (NBR) is a commonly used material for stern tube sealing rings due to its good oil resistance, elasticity, and relatively low cost.
- Shaft Liner: Chrome-plated steel is a common material for stern tube liners. The chrome plating provides a hard, smooth, and corrosion-resistant surface, minimizing wear and improving the life of the sealing rings.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q5 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting 🔥 Repeated 2x
Misalignment of the main shafting between engine and propeller causes bearing overloads and shaft stress.
(a) State the difficulties associated with checking shaft alignment and the reason why results are unreliable due to external factors (6)
(b) Explain with a simple sketch how a bearing load is assessed (5)
(c) Explain how uneven loading could be rectified (5)
Appeared In: Jun 2023 Feb 2023
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Difficulties During Installation:
- The ship's configuration changes when transitioning from being berthed to afloat, affecting alignment.
- Natural deflection of the shafting occurs between supports due to its length and weight.
- The propeller's weight creates a cantilevered effect on the shaft, further complicating alignment.
Difficulties During Service:
- The ship's loading conditions (cargo, ballast, fuel, and water) affect alignment.
- Movement of the ship in water causes dynamic changes in alignment.
- Off-centre thrust from the propeller can create additional forces on the shafting system.
- Wear down of bearings over time impacts alignment.
- Water forces acting on the vessel's hull cause distortion, affecting shaft alignment.
Reasons for Unreliable Results:
Results are often unreliable due to various external factors such as temperature fluctuations (high deck temperatures in tropical climates versus low sea temperatures), wind, waves, draft, and water density. The ship's hull can distort due to hogging and sagging under different loading conditions, affecting the alignment measurements. Cargo weight and distribution, ballast, fuel, and water levels are all subject to change, further impacting the accuracy of measurements. Over the ship's lifetime, extreme weather conditions can alter the hull's shape, leading to variations in shaft alignment.
Reasons for Misalignment
- Uneven wear down of bearings.
- Hull deformation caused by hogging, sagging, or prolonged stress.
- Improper or incomplete alignment during initial installation.
- Changes in loading conditions, cargo distribution, and ballast arrangements.
- Long-term effects of extreme weather and sea conditions.
- Propeller thrust misalignment due to incorrect propeller installation or damage.
- Vibration and fatigue in the shaft system.
A simple sketch to illustrate bearing load assessment using the jacking method:
Hydraulic jacks are placed on either side of the bearing and used to lift the shaft. A dial gauge measures the shaft's lift, indicating the amount of force needed to lift it. The hydraulic pressure exerted by the jacks directly corresponds to the load on the bearing. By comparing this load with design specifications, engineers can determine if the load is evenly distributed among bearings.
- Alter the height of the bearing from the tank top by loosening the foundation bolts and tightening the jacking bolts.
- Insert or remove shims between the bearing housing and foundation to achieve proper alignment.
- Compare the actual bearing load with the original load specified in the manual and make adjustments accordingly.
- If the bearing is excessively worn or clearance exceeds limits, replace the bearing to restore proper function.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q6 (16 Marks)
Auxiliary Machinery 🔥 Repeated 4x
(a) Sketch a line diagram showing the layout components of hydraulic system with a variable delivery, pressure compensated pump and accumulator, suitable for the opereation of deck machinery (8)
(b) Describe the operation of the system sketched in part (a) (8)
Appeared In: Jun 2026 Jun 2025 Jul 2024 Jun 2023
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
When the pumping capacity exceeds load requirements, the system pressure increases above a set value, at which point the pressure compensator acts to take the pump off stroke. A relief valve is fitted in case of malfunction of the compensator.
Fluid flow to the load may be controlled by a variety of methods one of which is the simple three position valve shown.
This system suits an installation containing several high demand units such as deck winch hydraulics
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q8 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting 🔥 Repeated 11x
With regards to main transmission shaft flange coupling arrangements:
(a) Sketch a hollow type coupling bolt and the hydraulic head/nut and loading rod which are used to fit it. (6)
(b) Describe how the bolt is fitted. (5)
(c) State the advantage of the hollow coupling bolt as compared to the traditional type of coupling bolt. (5)
Appeared In: Aug 2026 Jul 2025 Apr 2024 Mar 2024 Jun 2023 Feb 2021 Jan 2021 Mar 2020 Jun 2019 Jul 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- A bolt with a diameter slightly larger than the flange coupling bore diameter (D + 0.00025D) is selected.
- A push rod (loading rod) is inserted into the hollow coupling bolt, and a hydraulic head is attached.
- Hydraulic oil pressure of approximately 30,000 N/m² is applied, causing the bolt to stretch (approximately 0.021mm) and temporarily reduce its diameter by 0.00025D. This allows easy insertion of the bolt into the flange bore.
- The bolt is placed inside the bore by hand, and the nut is tightened and nipped up using a spanner.
- The hydraulic pressure is then released, allowing the bolt to expand and create a secure interference fit within the bore. This generates a tensile stress of approximately 15.5 tons/m², ensuring a firm grip.
- After fitting, the hydraulic assembly (items A, B, and C) is removed, and a protective plastic cap is placed over the bolt head.
- The hollow bolt design allows precise control of the bolt load, ensuring optimal tightening and load distribution.
- Diametrical re-expansion after hydraulic pressure release ensures a strong interference fit of the shank within the flange bore, reducing the risk of loosening.
- Hollow coupling bolts are easier to remove for inspection and maintenance, significantly reducing dismantling and fitting time.
- Unlike traditional bolts, hollow coupling bolts minimize wear on the bore, eliminating the need for frequent re-machining.
- Replacement of hollow coupling bolts is less frequent, reducing operational downtime and maintenance costs.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q9 (16 Marks)
Cargo & Tankers 🔥 Repeated 3x
With reference to Inert Gas Generator fitted on gas carriers:
(a) Sketch a line diagram showing a typical 'Inert Gas System' used for inerting in gas carriers, labeling the component parts. (6)
(b) Describe the system. (5)
(c) State the function of a chiller used in this type of inert gas generator. (5)
Appeared In: Aug 2024 Jun 2023 Jul 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Components in line: fuel and air inlets -> combustion blower -> burner and combustion chamber (IG generator fired by marine diesel or gas) -> inert gas cooler/quench water -> scrubber/sea-water wash tower -> demister (moisture eliminator) -> chiller/refrigeration inert gas cooler (dryer) -> activated carbon / final polishing filter -> inert gas discharge blower -> distribution header -> tank purge / vent lines to cargo tanks. A gas sampling analyser (continuous O2, CO2, dew point) on the discharge with automatic overboard diversion, and a deck water seal at the inlet to the tanks.
The inert gas generator produces inert gas for gas-carrier tanks by burning fuel with a controlled quantity of air so that the oxygen in the air is fully consumed. The principal products are nitrogen and carbon dioxide with water vapour. Air from a blower is drawn through a burner and combusted in a pressurised combustion chamber; complete combustion leaves essentially no free oxygen. The hot gas then passes to a scrubber/cooler where sea water cools it and washes out soot, sulphur compounds and soluble gases, reducing temperature to near ambient. A demister removes water droplets. The gas then passes through a refrigeration chiller which dries it to a very low dew point so that no free water or ice can form in the cold tanks. After final polishing it is delivered by a discharge blower to a distribution header, through a deck water seal and dry lines to the inerting/purging/pressurising connections of each tank. Continuous O2 and dew-point analysis ensures the gas stays within specification (typically very low oxygen for gas carrier inerting); if it is off-spec it is automatically dumped overboard.
The chiller cools the inert gas so that water vapour condenses out, producing dry gas of a controlled low dew point. This prevents water, ice or hydrates forming in the cargo tanks - which would block valves, cause corrosion or contaminate the cargo - and ensures the tank atmosphere remains dry and of specified quality.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q5 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting 🔥 Repeated 11x
With regards to main transmission shaft flange coupling arrangements:
(a) Sketch a hollow type coupling bolt and the hydraulic head/nut and loading rod which are used to fit it;
(b) Describe how the bolt is fitted;
(c) State the advantage of the hollow coupling bolt as compared to the traditional type of coupling bolt.
Appeared In: Aug 2026 Jul 2025 Apr 2024 Mar 2024 Jun 2023 Feb 2021 Jan 2021 Mar 2020 Jun 2019 Jul 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- A bolt with a diameter slightly larger than the flange coupling bore diameter (D + 0.00025D) is selected.
- A push rod (loading rod) is inserted into the hollow coupling bolt, and a hydraulic head is attached.
- Hydraulic oil pressure of approximately 30,000 N/m² is applied, causing the bolt to stretch (approximately 0.021mm) and temporarily reduce its diameter by 0.00025D. This allows easy insertion of the bolt into the flange bore.
- The bolt is placed inside the bore by hand, and the nut is tightened and nipped up using a spanner.
- The hydraulic pressure is then released, allowing the bolt to expand and create a secure interference fit within the bore. This generates a tensile stress of approximately 15.5 tons/m², ensuring a firm grip.
- After fitting, the hydraulic assembly (items A, B, and C) is removed, and a protective plastic cap is placed over the bolt head.
- The hollow bolt design allows precise control of the bolt load, ensuring optimal tightening and load distribution.
- Diametrical re-expansion after hydraulic pressure release ensures a strong interference fit of the shank within the flange bore, reducing the risk of loosening.
- Hollow coupling bolts are easier to remove for inspection and maintenance, significantly reducing dismantling and fitting time.
- Unlike traditional bolts, hollow coupling bolts minimize wear on the bore, eliminating the need for frequent re-machining.
- Replacement of hollow coupling bolts is less frequent, reducing operational downtime and maintenance costs.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q6 (16 Marks)
Auxiliary Machinery 🔥 Repeated 6x
Sketch and describe the operation of a four ram electro-hydraulic steering gear system. Indicate and explain the valve positions for the operation of the system when one pump is isolated and the unit is operating on two rams only.
Appeared In: Apr 2024 Oct 2020 Mar 2020 Jan 2020 Sep 2019 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
According to SOLAS chapter - 2, part 1, regulation 29.16, every tanker of more than 10,000 GT shall comply with the following:
- The main steering capability due to a single failure in any part of one of the power actuating systems shall be regained in not more than 45 seconds.
- The main steering shall comprise at least two identical power actuating systems, each capable of meeting the requirements. Loss of fluid from one system shall be capable of being detected, and the defective system shall automatically get isolated so that the other system shall remain fully operational
Considering the above regulatory requirements, given below is a “Fail Safe steering gear” suitable for use on a tanker of more than 100,000 T DWT.
Shown in the diagram is a “Fail safe steering gear” having two independent power actuating systems that can
- Work simultaneously in normal operation, meeting the requirement OR
- Work independently and meet the requirement
- In the event of loss of fluid from any one system, it can be detected and isolated automatically so that the other system can remain fully operational.
Working:
- The system incorporates two sets of electric-driven pumps. Both main and auxiliary pumps are on the same shaft. The main pump shown in the diagram is a variable delivery pump
- The variable delivery pump takes suction from the tank and supplies hydraulic oil to the ram cylinders. The oil flow of the pump is determined by the pump actuating lever
- The movement of the pump actuating lever is controlled by the rudder angle order given by the bridge with the help of a bi-directional control valve
- A two-way shock relief valve is fitted between the two cylinders to release the pressure from one side of the cylinder to the other side in case of pressure increase in one of the cylinders due to heavy seas
- By-pass valves are also fitted between two cylinders, which are normally shut during operation. When one system is stopped, there is a pressure drop, as the auxiliary pump has also stopped this opens the by-pass valves, thus removing the hydraulic lock of the ram operation.
- Auto isolation valves in the system are there to isolate one system in case of any failure.
Case 1: Consider an oil leak from any pipe for cylinders 1 and 2 with the No. 1 pump running:
- No. 1 tank level will come down to L1, and it will sound an alarm on the bridge and in ECR
- When the tank level further drops to L2, i.e. low-low level, the no. 1 pump stops.
- Stopping the No. 1 pump also stops the attached auxiliary pump. So the line pressure drops, due to which the normally closed by-pass valves ‘X’ and ‘Y’ open.
- Simultaneously, the auto isolation valves ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’ will be operated by an electric signal. A, B and C are normally open valves. The electric signal will close them. So, systems 1 and 2 will be completely separated. Thus, the defective system, I.e. system 1, is isolated.
- Along with the operation of the auto isolation valves, the No. 2 pump will start automatically. The attached auxiliary pump will act on the by-pass valve ‘Y’ and close it. This enables cylinders 3 and 4 to be in normal operation.
- It should also be noted that since system 1 is completely isolated, there is no oil pressure to operate the bypass valve. So the by-pass valves remain open, thereby removing the hydraulic lock for the ram movement in cylinders 1 and 2
Case 2: Consider an oil leakage from any pipe of cylinders 3 and 4 with the No. 1 pump running:
Points 1, 2 and 3 are the same as case 1
- Simultaneously, the auto isolation valves ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’ will be operated by an electric signal. This will shut the normally open valves A, B and C. Thus, systems 1 and 2 will be completely separated
- Along with the operation of auto isolation valves, the No. 2 pump will start automatically. The attached auxiliary pump will act on the by-pass valve ‘Y’ and close. So, cylinders 3 and 4 will come into normal operation.
- Now, since the leak is between the pipe of cylinders 3 and 4, the level of the no. 2 tank will drop to L1 and give an alarm.
- The level will further drop to L2, but the pump will not stop and changeover to ensure that the leak is from the pipe of cylinders 3 and 4
- When the no. 2 tank level drops to L3, the no. 2 pump stops and the no. 1 pump starts to operate the steering using cylinders 1 and 2
- Starting the no. 1 pump will ensure that the by-pass valve ‘X’ is shut, and stopping the no. 2 pump will ensure that the by-pass valve ‘Y’ is open
This ensures the operation of the steering Gear with the defective system fully isolated.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q7 (16 Marks)
General 🔥 Repeated 12x
With reference to Vacuum Sewage Systems:
(a) Sketch & Describe a Vacuum sewage system.
(b) State the advantage of Vacuum sewage system.
(c) State the different causes of dropping vacuum.
Appeared In: Aug 2025 Apr 2024 Mar 2020 Jan 2020 Oct 2019 Sep 2019 Aug 2019 Jun 2019 Mar 2019 Jan 2019 Oct 2018 Sep 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(b) Advantages of a Vacuum Sewage System:
- The vacuum sewage system uses 85–90% less water for flushing compared to conventional systems, requiring very little flushing water.
- Toilets can be positioned more flexibly, including below the level of the holding tank, which is not feasible with gravity-fed systems.
- The system uses smaller diameter piping, reducing material and space requirements.
- The reduced water usage contributes to overall water conservation, making the system environmentally friendly.
- If the pump is pumping foam instead of liquid, this will be evident due to severe vibration. Add water to the tank and try again. If adding water does not help, reduce the level of foam by pouring antifoam agent into the tank (1 cup per 2 cubic metres of foam and sewage).
- Check that shut-off valves are fully open and not clogged.
- If the direction of rotation of the pump is wrong, change wiring accordingly.
- Close the valves that isolate the collecting unit from the piping system and start the pump again. If vacuum now builds up, there must be a leak in the piping system.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q9 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting 🔥 Repeated 14x
Sketch a sealing arrangement for an oil lubricated stem tube. Identify the common forms of seal failure. State how oil loss due to seal failure can be restricted whilst on passage? What is the material used for sealing rings and propeller shaft liner?
Appeared In: Dec 2024 Apr 2024 Aug 2023 Jun 2023 Feb 2021 Oct 2020 Mar 2020 Jan 2020 Dec 2019 Sep 2019 Jun 2019 Feb 2019 Oct 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Common forms of seal failure in a stern tube
- Loss of elasticity in seal material – Nitrile rubber seals may lose their elastic properties over time, reducing their sealing effectiveness.
- Surface damage to chrome liner – Grooving or scoring of the chrome liner can impair sealing surfaces, leading to leakage.
- Excessive shaft vibration – Heavy vibration of the propeller shaft can cause uneven wear and seal deformation.
- Insufficient cooling – Inadequate cooling can cause rubber sealing elements to harden and eventually fail.
- Exceeding running hour limits – Operating beyond the manufacturer’s recommended service life increases the risk of seal failure.
- Deterioration of oil quality – Contaminated or degraded oil reduces lubrication and protection, accelerating seal wear.
- Incorrect header tank level adjustment – Failure to adjust the header tank according to vessel draft can cause oil loss, leading to inadequate lubrication and seal damage.
Restricting oil loss due to seal failure whilst on passage
- Use of high-viscosity oil – Recharge the system with a thicker oil to reduce leakage rate through damaged seals.
- Temporary oil supply arrangement –
- Disconnect the existing oil supply line.
- Connect a 45-gallon drum supported by a block and tackle arrangement.
- Adjust the drum height to vary the oil head pressure, matching it to the surrounding water pressure and minimizing leakage.
- Fresh water introduction – Supply fresh water to the gravity tank to emulsify with any leaked oil. The resulting emulsion helps coagulate around the damaged seal area while the oil is circulated to maintain lubrication and sealing.
Materials for Sealing Rings and Propeller Shaft Liner:
- Sealing Rings: Nitrile rubber (NBR) is a commonly used material for stern tube sealing rings due to its good oil resistance, elasticity, and relatively low cost.
- Shaft Liner: Chrome-plated steel is a common material for stern tube liners. The chrome plating provides a hard, smooth, and corrosion-resistant surface, minimizing wear and improving the life of the sealing rings.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (16 Marks)
Auxiliary Machinery 🔥 Repeated 6x
Sketch and describe the operation of a four ram electro-hydraulic steering gear system. Indicate and explain the valve positions for the operation of the system when one pump is isolated and the unit is operating on two rams only.
Appeared In: Apr 2024 Oct 2020 Mar 2020 Jan 2020 Sep 2019 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
According to SOLAS chapter - 2, part 1, regulation 29.16, every tanker of more than 10,000 GT shall comply with the following:
- The main steering capability due to a single failure in any part of one of the power actuating systems shall be regained in not more than 45 seconds.
- The main steering shall comprise at least two identical power actuating systems, each capable of meeting the requirements. Loss of fluid from one system shall be capable of being detected, and the defective system shall automatically get isolated so that the other system shall remain fully operational
Considering the above regulatory requirements, given below is a “Fail Safe steering gear” suitable for use on a tanker of more than 100,000 T DWT.
Shown in the diagram is a “Fail safe steering gear” having two independent power actuating systems that can
- Work simultaneously in normal operation, meeting the requirement OR
- Work independently and meet the requirement
- In the event of loss of fluid from any one system, it can be detected and isolated automatically so that the other system can remain fully operational.
Working:
- The system incorporates two sets of electric-driven pumps. Both main and auxiliary pumps are on the same shaft. The main pump shown in the diagram is a variable delivery pump
- The variable delivery pump takes suction from the tank and supplies hydraulic oil to the ram cylinders. The oil flow of the pump is determined by the pump actuating lever
- The movement of the pump actuating lever is controlled by the rudder angle order given by the bridge with the help of a bi-directional control valve
- A two-way shock relief valve is fitted between the two cylinders to release the pressure from one side of the cylinder to the other side in case of pressure increase in one of the cylinders due to heavy seas
- By-pass valves are also fitted between two cylinders, which are normally shut during operation. When one system is stopped, there is a pressure drop, as the auxiliary pump has also stopped this opens the by-pass valves, thus removing the hydraulic lock of the ram operation.
- Auto isolation valves in the system are there to isolate one system in case of any failure.
Case 1: Consider an oil leak from any pipe for cylinders 1 and 2 with the No. 1 pump running:
- No. 1 tank level will come down to L1, and it will sound an alarm on the bridge and in ECR
- When the tank level further drops to L2, i.e. low-low level, the no. 1 pump stops.
- Stopping the No. 1 pump also stops the attached auxiliary pump. So the line pressure drops, due to which the normally closed by-pass valves ‘X’ and ‘Y’ open.
- Simultaneously, the auto isolation valves ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’ will be operated by an electric signal. A, B and C are normally open valves. The electric signal will close them. So, systems 1 and 2 will be completely separated. Thus, the defective system, I.e. system 1, is isolated.
- Along with the operation of the auto isolation valves, the No. 2 pump will start automatically. The attached auxiliary pump will act on the by-pass valve ‘Y’ and close it. This enables cylinders 3 and 4 to be in normal operation.
- It should also be noted that since system 1 is completely isolated, there is no oil pressure to operate the bypass valve. So the by-pass valves remain open, thereby removing the hydraulic lock for the ram movement in cylinders 1 and 2
Case 2: Consider an oil leakage from any pipe of cylinders 3 and 4 with the No. 1 pump running:
Points 1, 2 and 3 are the same as case 1
- Simultaneously, the auto isolation valves ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’ will be operated by an electric signal. This will shut the normally open valves A, B and C. Thus, systems 1 and 2 will be completely separated
- Along with the operation of auto isolation valves, the No. 2 pump will start automatically. The attached auxiliary pump will act on the by-pass valve ‘Y’ and close. So, cylinders 3 and 4 will come into normal operation.
- Now, since the leak is between the pipe of cylinders 3 and 4, the level of the no. 2 tank will drop to L1 and give an alarm.
- The level will further drop to L2, but the pump will not stop and changeover to ensure that the leak is from the pipe of cylinders 3 and 4
- When the no. 2 tank level drops to L3, the no. 2 pump stops and the no. 1 pump starts to operate the steering using cylinders 1 and 2
- Starting the no. 1 pump will ensure that the by-pass valve ‘X’ is shut, and stopping the no. 2 pump will ensure that the by-pass valve ‘Y’ is open
This ensures the operation of the steering Gear with the defective system fully isolated.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q5 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting 🔥 Repeated 14x
Sketch a sealing arrangement for an oil lubricated stern tube. Identify the common forms of seal failure. State how oil loss due to seal failure can be restricted whilst on passage? What is the material used for sealing rings and propeller shaft liner?
Appeared In: Dec 2024 Apr 2024 Aug 2023 Jun 2023 Feb 2021 Oct 2020 Mar 2020 Jan 2020 Dec 2019 Sep 2019 Jun 2019 Feb 2019 Oct 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Common forms of seal failure in a stern tube
- Loss of elasticity in seal material – Nitrile rubber seals may lose their elastic properties over time, reducing their sealing effectiveness.
- Surface damage to chrome liner – Grooving or scoring of the chrome liner can impair sealing surfaces, leading to leakage.
- Excessive shaft vibration – Heavy vibration of the propeller shaft can cause uneven wear and seal deformation.
- Insufficient cooling – Inadequate cooling can cause rubber sealing elements to harden and eventually fail.
- Exceeding running hour limits – Operating beyond the manufacturer’s recommended service life increases the risk of seal failure.
- Deterioration of oil quality – Contaminated or degraded oil reduces lubrication and protection, accelerating seal wear.
- Incorrect header tank level adjustment – Failure to adjust the header tank according to vessel draft can cause oil loss, leading to inadequate lubrication and seal damage.
Restricting oil loss due to seal failure whilst on passage
- Use of high-viscosity oil – Recharge the system with a thicker oil to reduce leakage rate through damaged seals.
- Temporary oil supply arrangement –
- Disconnect the existing oil supply line.
- Connect a 45-gallon drum supported by a block and tackle arrangement.
- Adjust the drum height to vary the oil head pressure, matching it to the surrounding water pressure and minimizing leakage.
- Fresh water introduction – Supply fresh water to the gravity tank to emulsify with any leaked oil. The resulting emulsion helps coagulate around the damaged seal area while the oil is circulated to maintain lubrication and sealing.
Materials for Sealing Rings and Propeller Shaft Liner:
- Sealing Rings: Nitrile rubber (NBR) is a commonly used material for stern tube sealing rings due to its good oil resistance, elasticity, and relatively low cost.
- Shaft Liner: Chrome-plated steel is a common material for stern tube liners. The chrome plating provides a hard, smooth, and corrosion-resistant surface, minimizing wear and improving the life of the sealing rings.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q7 (16 Marks)
Control & Instrumentation 🔥 Repeated 7x
Describe with a sketch a pneumatic relay and show how feedback can be achieved when such a relay is used in conjunction with a flapper mechanism.
Appeared In: Mar 2025 Sep 2023 Oct 2020 Oct 2018 Aug 2018 Jul 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The pneumatic relay operates on the principle of a nozzle-flapper arrangement. Air supply pressure acts on a diaphragm located below a spring. A rod and plug, connected to the diaphragm, control the flow of output air through a nozzle. A flapper is positioned near the nozzle.
Operation:
- An input signal (which can be a change in pressure or displacement of the flapper) affects the flapper's position.
- Flapper movement changes the distance between the flapper and the nozzle. A decrease in distance (flapper closer to the nozzle) restricts the output airflow. Conversely, an increase in distance increases output airflow. This is the direct action of the relay.
- Changes in the output air flow alter the back pressure at the nozzle.
- Increased nozzle back pressure pushes the diaphragm downwards, compressing the spring and further reducing the output airflow. Decreased nozzle back pressure allows the spring to push the diaphragm upwards, increasing output airflow.
- A portion of the output air is fed back through a line connected to a bellows and a feedback-adjusting spring (as shown in the sketch). This feedback pressure acts against the diaphragm, opposing the effect of the input signal. The bellows and spring arrangement allow the system to fine-tune the feedback strength. This negative feedback stabilises the system and increases the control range, preventing excessive overshoot or oscillation. The feedback mechanism subtracts from the effective input pressure, acting as a negative feedback loop.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
With reference to oil/water separators:
(a) Sketch and describe the working of such a separator.
(b) With regard to oil/ water interface detector, explain the consequence if the interface detector position is incorrect.
Appeared In: Oct 2020
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The oily bilge is drawn into the separator by the automatic self-priming pump. The pump is located on the outlet of the separate to prevent the formation of a mechanical emulsion. As the oily bilge water enters the separator, it flows upwards through the matrix plate pack towards the top of the separator. Some oil separates immediately due to the reduced flow velocity and the difference in specific gravity between oil and water. Oil droplets impinge on the surface of the matrix plate pack and begin the coalescing process. The oil droplets coalesce until they become large enough to detach from the corrugated plates and gravitate to the top of the separator. Smaller oil droplets that escape the matrix plate pack are removed by the polishing pack. After the separated oil accumulates to a predetermined level, the oil sensor initiates the oil discharge and cleaning cycle by stopping the pump, closing the water discharge valve and opening the clean water inlet valve. This allows clean sea or fresh water to cleanse the matrix plate pack and flow upward in the reverse direction, washing the polishing pack and displacing the accumulated oil. The outlet of the Oily Water Separator is directed by a 3-way valve either to the overboard or to the storage tank. The valve is controlled by a 15ppm monitor, which allows overboard discharge if oil content is below 15 ppm and stops discharge if oil content is exceeded.
- Probe Too Low: The sensor might not detect the actual oil level. This can lead to the frequent opening of the water discharge valve, allowing water to escape into the oil outlet, contaminating the separated oil.
- Probe Too High: The oil discharge valve will open late, reducing the separation efficiency. This is because the oil and water will mix more thoroughly before the valve opens, leading to a less effective separation of the two liquids.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (16 Marks)
Steering & Deck Machinery 🔥 Repeated 10x
Sketch and describe a "fail safe steering gear” suitable for use on a tanker of more than 100,000 T DWT. Explain the sequence events that take place when an oil leak takes place in one of the hydraulic pipe lines.
Appeared In: Oct 2024 Dec 2023 Aug 2023 Jul 2023 Mar 2023 Feb 2021 Feb 2019 Oct 2018 Aug 2018 Jul 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
According to SOLAS chapter - 2, part 1, regulation 29.16, every tanker of more than 10,000 GT shall comply with the following:
- The main steering capability due to a single failure in any part of one of the power actuating systems shall be regained in not more than 45 seconds.
- The main steering shall comprise at least two identical power actuating systems, each capable of meeting the requirements. Loss of fluid from one system shall be capable of being detected, and the defective system shall automatically get isolated so that the other system shall remain fully operational
Considering the above regulatory requirements, given below is a “Fail Safe steering gear” suitable for use on a tanker of more than 100,000 T DWT.
Shown in the diagram is a “Fail safe steering gear” having two independent power actuating systems that can
- Work simultaneously in normal operation, meeting the requirement OR
- Work independently and meet the requirement
- In the event of loss of fluid from any one system, it can be detected and isolated automatically so that the other system can remain fully operational.
Working:
- The system incorporates two sets of electric-driven pumps. Both main and auxiliary pumps are on the same shaft. The main pump shown in the diagram is a variable delivery pump
- The variable delivery pump takes suction from the tank and supplies hydraulic oil to the ram cylinders. The oil flow of the pump is determined by the pump actuating lever
- The movement of the pump actuating lever is controlled by the rudder angle order given by the bridge with the help of a bi-directional control valve
- A two-way shock relief valve is fitted between the two cylinders to release the pressure from one side of the cylinder to the other side in case of pressure increase in one of the cylinders due to heavy seas
- By-pass valves are also fitted between two cylinders, which are normally shut during operation. When one system is stopped, there is a pressure drop, as the auxiliary pump has also stopped this opens the by-pass valves, thus removing the hydraulic lock of the ram operation.
- Auto isolation valves in the system are there to isolate one system in case of any failure.
Sequence of events during hydraulic oil leak:
Case 1: Consider an oil leak from any pipe for cylinders 1 and 2 with the No. 1 pump running:
- No. 1 tank level will come down to L1, and it will sound an alarm on the bridge and in ECR
- When the tank level further drops to L2, i.e. low-low level, the no. 1 pump stops.
- Stopping the No. 1 pump also stops the attached auxiliary pump. So the line pressure drops, due to which the normally closed by-pass valves ‘X’ and ‘Y’ open.
- Simultaneously, the auto isolation valves ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’ will be operated by an electric signal. A, B and C are normally open valves. The electric signal will close them. So, systems 1 and 2 will be completely separated. Thus, the defective system, I.e. system 1, is isolated.
- Along with the operation of the auto isolation valves, the No. 2 pump will start automatically. The attached auxiliary pump will act on the by-pass valve ‘Y’ and close it. This enables cylinders 3 and 4 to be in normal operation.
- It should also be noted that since system 1 is completely isolated, there is no oil pressure to operate the bypass valve. So the by-pass valves remain open, thereby removing the hydraulic lock for the ram movement in cylinders 1 and 2
Case 2: Consider an oil leakage from any pipe of cylinders 3 and 4 with the No. 1 pump running:
Points 1, 2 and 3 are the same as case 1
- Simultaneously, the auto isolation valves ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’ will be operated by an electric signal. This will shut the normally open valves A, B and C. Thus, systems 1 and 2 will be completely separated
- Along with the operation of auto isolation valves, the No. 2 pump will start automatically. The attached auxiliary pump will act on the by-pass valve ‘Y’ and close. So, cylinders 3 and 4 will come into normal operation.
- Now, since the leak is between the pipe of cylinders 3 and 4, the level of the no. 2 tank will drop to L1 and give an alarm.
- The level will further drop to L2, but the pump will not stop and changeover to ensure that the leak is from the pipe of cylinders 3 and 4
- When the no. 2 tank level drops to L3, the no. 2 pump stops and the no. 1 pump starts to operate the steering using cylinders 1 and 2
- Starting the no. 1 pump will ensure that the by-pass valve ‘X’ is shut, and stopping the no. 2 pump will ensure that the by-pass valve ‘Y’ is open
This ensures the operation of the steering Gear with the defective system fully isolated.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q4 (16 Marks)
Boilers & Steam 🔥 Repeated 7x
Sketch and describe a boiler water level controller of the float operated type. State the reasons for having this mechanism on the boiler and using this controller and boiler for analogy explain the following terms:
(a) Detecting element
(b) Servo motor
(c) Desired Value
Appeared In: Nov 2024 Nov 2023 Feb 2021 Sep 2018 Jul 2018 Feb 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Boiler Water Level Controller – Float Operated Type
A simple float-operated water level controller consists of:
- A float chamber connected to the boiler steam drum by two lines — one for steam and one for water.
- A float inside the chamber, which rises and falls with changes in water level.
- A mechanical linkage or rod attached to the float, which extends to an electric sensor unit mounted above the chamber.
Working Principle:
- As the float moves up or down, it shifts a contactor along a variable resistance track or magnetic switches.
- This movement changes the electrical output signal, which is sent to a square-root converter.
- The converter transforms the electrical signal into a proportional pneumatic signal.
- The pneumatic signal acts on the diaphragm of the feed water control valve actuator, modulating feed flow to maintain the set water level.
Reasons for Using a Float-Operated Type
- Reliability: Unlike constant/variable head leg systems, there is no need to maintain a filled reference column.
- Simplified Installation: Electrical sensing eliminates the need for long impulse tubes for remote indication.
- Ease of Maintenance: The electric sensor unit can be easily replaced without dismantling the float chamber.
- Lower Cost: Fewer mechanical parts and no head leg piping reduce installation and maintenance expenses.
Explanation of Terms (Analogy with Controller and Boiler)
: In this system, the float is the detecting element. It directly senses the water level, which is the controlled variable, and its movement provides a signal that represents the current state of the system.
: The square root converter and the feedwater controller collectively act as the servo motor. They are the mechanisms that receive the signal from the detecting element and perform the physical action (opening or closing the feedwater valve) to correct the water level.
: The set point is the desired value. This is a fixed input to the square root converter (or a comparator) that represents the ideal water level that the system aims to maintain. The controller continuously works to match the actual water level to this desired value.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q6 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting 🔥 Repeated 14x
Sketch a sealing arrangement for an oil lubricated stern tube. Identify the common forms of seal failure; State how oil loss due to seal failure can be restricted whilst on passage? What is the material used for sealing rings and propeller shaft liner?
Appeared In: Dec 2024 Apr 2024 Aug 2023 Jun 2023 Feb 2021 Oct 2020 Mar 2020 Jan 2020 Dec 2019 Sep 2019 Jun 2019 Feb 2019 Oct 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Common forms of seal failure in a stern tube
- Loss of elasticity in seal material – Nitrile rubber seals may lose their elastic properties over time, reducing their sealing effectiveness.
- Surface damage to chrome liner – Grooving or scoring of the chrome liner can impair sealing surfaces, leading to leakage.
- Excessive shaft vibration – Heavy vibration of the propeller shaft can cause uneven wear and seal deformation.
- Insufficient cooling – Inadequate cooling can cause rubber sealing elements to harden and eventually fail.
- Exceeding running hour limits – Operating beyond the manufacturer’s recommended service life increases the risk of seal failure.
- Deterioration of oil quality – Contaminated or degraded oil reduces lubrication and protection, accelerating seal wear.
- Incorrect header tank level adjustment – Failure to adjust the header tank according to vessel draft can cause oil loss, leading to inadequate lubrication and seal damage.
Restricting oil loss due to seal failure whilst on passage
- Use of high-viscosity oil – Recharge the system with a thicker oil to reduce leakage rate through damaged seals.
- Temporary oil supply arrangement –
- Disconnect the existing oil supply line.
- Connect a 45-gallon drum supported by a block and tackle arrangement.
- Adjust the drum height to vary the oil head pressure, matching it to the surrounding water pressure and minimizing leakage.
- Fresh water introduction – Supply fresh water to the gravity tank to emulsify with any leaked oil. The resulting emulsion helps coagulate around the damaged seal area while the oil is circulated to maintain lubrication and sealing.
Materials for Sealing Rings and Propeller Shaft Liner:
- Sealing Rings: Nitrile rubber (NBR) is a commonly used material for stern tube sealing rings due to its good oil resistance, elasticity, and relatively low cost.
- Shaft Liner: Chrome-plated steel is a common material for stern tube liners. The chrome plating provides a hard, smooth, and corrosion-resistant surface, minimizing wear and improving the life of the sealing rings.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q7 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting 🔥 Repeated 11x
With regards to main transmission shaft flange coupling arrangements:
(a) Sketch a hollow type coupling bolt and the hydraulic head/nut and loading rod which are used to fit it.
(b) Describe how the bolt is fitted.
(c) State the advantage of the hollow coupling bolt as compared to the traditional type of coupling bolt.
Appeared In: Aug 2026 Jul 2025 Apr 2024 Mar 2024 Jun 2023 Feb 2021 Jan 2021 Mar 2020 Jun 2019 Jul 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- A bolt with a diameter slightly larger than the flange coupling bore diameter (D + 0.00025D) is selected.
- A push rod (loading rod) is inserted into the hollow coupling bolt, and a hydraulic head is attached.
- Hydraulic oil pressure of approximately 30,000 N/m² is applied, causing the bolt to stretch (approximately 0.021mm) and temporarily reduce its diameter by 0.00025D. This allows easy insertion of the bolt into the flange bore.
- The bolt is placed inside the bore by hand, and the nut is tightened and nipped up using a spanner.
- The hydraulic pressure is then released, allowing the bolt to expand and create a secure interference fit within the bore. This generates a tensile stress of approximately 15.5 tons/m², ensuring a firm grip.
- After fitting, the hydraulic assembly (items A, B, and C) is removed, and a protective plastic cap is placed over the bolt head.
- The hollow bolt design allows precise control of the bolt load, ensuring optimal tightening and load distribution.
- Diametrical re-expansion after hydraulic pressure release ensures a strong interference fit of the shank within the flange bore, reducing the risk of loosening.
- Hollow coupling bolts are easier to remove for inspection and maintenance, significantly reducing dismantling and fitting time.
- Unlike traditional bolts, hollow coupling bolts minimize wear on the bore, eliminating the need for frequent re-machining.
- Replacement of hollow coupling bolts is less frequent, reducing operational downtime and maintenance costs.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q8 (16 Marks)
Refrigeration & Air Conditioning 🔥 Repeated 6x
With Respect to Container Ship:
(a) Sketch a ship's indirect refrigeration system arranged for cooling containers stowed in stacks in the hold:
(b) Describe the refrigeration system sketched in (a)
(c) State the advantages of the system described in (a) compared with containers with their own refrigeration self-contained units.
Appeared In: Aug 2025 Feb 2021 Jan 2020 Aug 2019 Jan 2019 Nov 2022
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- Eliminating the need for individual refrigeration units within each container significantly increases the ship's cargo capacity.
- A centralized system simplifies maintenance procedures. Instead of numerous individual units requiring servicing, the focus is on a single, larger plant, resulting in reduced maintenance costs and downtime.
- Centralized systems, with their optimized design and variable speed components, are typically more energy-efficient than a large number of independent units operating simultaneously.
- The centralized control and monitoring offer better overall temperature regulation, minimizing the risk of temperature fluctuations that can damage sensitive goods.
- A centralized system uses less gas as compared to a multitude of individual units, resulting in a more environmentally friendly operation.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (16 Marks)
Steering & Deck Machinery 🔥 Repeated 2x
With reference to hydraulic steering gears, sketch and describe each of the following:
(a) Single failure concept
(b) 100 percent redundancy
Appeared In: Sep 2024 Jan 2021
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The main steering gear is arranged so that after a single failure in its piping system or one of the power units, the defect can be isolated so that steering capability can be maintained or speedily regained.
It refers to the operation of the steering gear even in the event of failure of one power actuating system with either 100% power or 50% power. i.e., a single failure concept can be either a 100% redundant system or a 50% redundant system.
It refers to the operation of two steering gears with at least two separate and independent power actuating systems, and each of them shall be capable of meeting the requirement. In case one system fails, it can be detected and isolated, and the other system comes into action.
Case 1: Consider an oil leak from any pipe for cylinders 1 and 2 with the No. 1 pump running:
- No. 1 tank level will come down to L1, and it will sound an alarm on the bridge and in ECR
- When the tank level further drops to L2, i.e. low-low level, the no. 1 pump stops.
- Stopping the No. 1 pump also stops the attached auxiliary pump. So the line pressure drops, due to which the normally closed by-pass valves ‘X’ and ‘Y’ open.
- Simultaneously, the auto isolation valves ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’ will be operated by an electric signal. A, B and C are normally open valves. The electric signal will close them. So, systems 1 and 2 will be completely separated. Thus, the defective system, I.e. system 1, is isolated.
- Along with the operation of the auto isolation valves, the No. 2 pump will start automatically. The attached auxiliary pump will act on the by-pass valve ‘Y’ and close it. This enables cylinders 3 and 4 to be in normal operation.
- It should also be noted that since system 1 is completely isolated, there is no oil pressure to operate the bypass valve. So the by-pass valves remain open, thereby removing the hydraulic lock for the ram movement in cylinders 1 and 2
Case 2: Consider an oil leakage from any pipe of cylinders 3 and 4 with the No. 1 pump running:
Points 1, 2 and 3 are the same as case 1
- Simultaneously, the auto isolation valves ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’ will be operated by an electric signal. This will shut the normally open valves A, B and C. Thus, systems 1 and 2 will be completely separated
- Along with the operation of auto isolation valves, the No. 2 pump will start automatically. The attached auxiliary pump will act on the by-pass valve ‘Y’ and close. So, cylinders 3 and 4 will come into normal operation.
- Now, since the leak is between the pipe of cylinders 3 and 4, the level of the no. 2 tank will drop to L1 and give an alarm.
- The level will further drop to L2, but the pump will not stop and changeover to ensure that the leak is from the pipe of cylinders 3 and 4
- When the no. 2 tank level drops to L3, the no. 2 pump stops and the no. 1 pump starts to operate the steering using cylinders 1 and 2
- Starting the no. 1 pump will ensure that the by-pass valve ‘X’ is shut, and stopping the no. 2 pump will ensure that the by-pass valve ‘Y’ is open
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q7 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting 🔥 Repeated 11x
With regards to main transmission shaft flange coupling arrangements:
(a) Sketch a hollow type coupling bolt and the hydraulic head/nut and loading rod which are used to fit it;
(b) Describe how the bolt is fitted.,
(c) State the advantage of the hollow coupling bolt as compared to the traditional type of coupling bolt.
Appeared In: Aug 2026 Jul 2025 Apr 2024 Mar 2024 Jun 2023 Feb 2021 Jan 2021 Mar 2020 Jun 2019 Jul 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- A bolt with a diameter slightly larger than the flange coupling bore diameter (D + 0.00025D) is selected.
- A push rod (loading rod) is inserted into the hollow coupling bolt, and a hydraulic head is attached.
- Hydraulic oil pressure of approximately 30,000 N/m² is applied, causing the bolt to stretch (approximately 0.021mm) and temporarily reduce its diameter by 0.00025D. This allows easy insertion of the bolt into the flange bore.
- The bolt is placed inside the bore by hand, and the nut is tightened and nipped up using a spanner.
- The hydraulic pressure is then released, allowing the bolt to expand and create a secure interference fit within the bore. This generates a tensile stress of approximately 15.5 tons/m², ensuring a firm grip.
- After fitting, the hydraulic assembly (items A, B, and C) is removed, and a protective plastic cap is placed over the bolt head.
- The hollow bolt design allows precise control of the bolt load, ensuring optimal tightening and load distribution.
- Diametrical re-expansion after hydraulic pressure release ensures a strong interference fit of the shank within the flange bore, reducing the risk of loosening.
- Hollow coupling bolts are easier to remove for inspection and maintenance, significantly reducing dismantling and fitting time.
- Unlike traditional bolts, hollow coupling bolts minimize wear on the bore, eliminating the need for frequent re-machining.
- Replacement of hollow coupling bolts is less frequent, reducing operational downtime and maintenance costs.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q8 (16 Marks)
Steering & Deck Machinery 🔥 Repeated 7x
(a) Describe the principle of a coil-operated brake suitable for winches and other deck machinery
(b) Explain with suitable sketches how the windlass is relieved of strain when riding at anchor
Appeared In: Jan 2024 Sep 2023 Mar 2021 Jan 2021 Dec 2018 Nov 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
A coil-operated brake for winches and deck machinery is designed to automatically adjust the braking force in response to changes in the load on the mooring line. This system ensures the correct force is applied between the brake band and the winch drum at all times.
The core principle is that when an additional load is applied to the mooring line, the line stretches, which in turn loosens the tightening mechanism. This loosening action automatically causes the brake to apply the correct force, maintaining constant tension. This has the significant advantage of being a self-adjusting system, meaning that once it's set, there's no need for a crew member to periodically re-apply the recommended torque. The brake is typically released using a hydraulic lever.
When a vessel is riding at anchor, a mechanism is used to lock the anchor chain and relieve the windlass of the strain. This is crucial for preventing damage to the windlass and ensuring the anchor is securely held.
A Cable stopper, often a pawl of a rod, is engaged with a link of the anchor chain. The pawl acts as a stop, preventing the chain from moving. All the weight and force from the anchor and the vessel's movement are then transferred to this locking device and the ship's structure, effectively relieving the windlass of any strain.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (16 Marks)
Steering & Deck Machinery 🔥 Repeated 7x
With respect to Windlass and Deck Machinery:
(a) Describe the principle of a coil-operated brake suitable for winches and other deck machinery.
(b) Explain with suitable sketches how the windlass is relieved of strain when riding at anchor.
Appeared In: Jan 2024 Sep 2023 Mar 2021 Jan 2021 Dec 2018 Nov 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
A coil-operated brake for winches and deck machinery is designed to automatically adjust the braking force in response to changes in the load on the mooring line. This system ensures the correct force is applied between the brake band and the winch drum at all times.
The core principle is that when an additional load is applied to the mooring line, the line stretches, which in turn loosens the tightening mechanism. This loosening action automatically causes the brake to apply the correct force, maintaining constant tension. This has the significant advantage of being a self-adjusting system, meaning that once it's set, there's no need for a crew member to periodically re-apply the recommended torque. The brake is typically released using a hydraulic lever.
When a vessel is riding at anchor, a mechanism is used to lock the anchor chain and relieve the windlass of the strain. This is crucial for preventing damage to the windlass and ensuring the anchor is securely held.
A Cable stopper, often a pawl of a rod, is engaged with a link of the anchor chain. The pawl acts as a stop, preventing the chain from moving. All the weight and force from the anchor and the vessel's movement are then transferred to this locking device and the ship's structure, effectively relieving the windlass of any strain.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q6 (16 Marks)
Auxiliary Machinery 🔥 Repeated 2x
(a) Explain the necessity of intercoolers on a multi-stage compressor. What attention is required to keep them safe and in good working order? Sketch and describe an intercooler suitable for a 2400 kPa compressor and state materials used.
(b) What attention is needed before opening up an air compressor for inspection?
(c) What faults are likely to develop in an air compressor and how are they remedied?
Appeared In: Mar 2021 Jan 2017
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- Compressing air generates heat, and intercoolers reduce the temperature of air before it enters the next stage, protecting components from heat damage.
- Cooler air requires less work for compression in subsequent stages, improving overall efficiency.
- By lowering operating temperatures, intercoolers reduce thermal stresses on components, enhancing durability.
- Cooling condenses moisture in the air, preventing water accumulation in downstream equipment.
To Keep Intercoolers safe and in good working condition:
- Ensure a continuous supply of cooling water.
- Regularly clean the intercooler to maintain efficient heat exchange.
- Drain accumulated oil and water frequently.
- Verify that the intercooler drain line is clear.
- Inspect and maintain the bursting disc to prevent failure under excessive pressure.
The sketch depicts a multi-tubular intercooler suitable for a 2400 kPa compressor. It uses a shell-and-tube design. The compressor's high-pressure air flows through numerous small-diameter copper tubes, maximizing the surface area for heat exchange. Cooling water circulates around the tubes in a cast iron jacket, absorbing the heat from the compressed air. A copper or brass bursting disc serves as a safety pressure relief device.
Materials Used:
- Body: Cast iron (provides strength and corrosion resistance)
- Tubes: Copper (excellent thermal conductivity)
- Bursting Disc: Copper/Brass/Steel (depending on pressure requirements)
- Ensure the electrical circuit is switched off and tagged with "Men at Work."
- Fully drain the compressor, intercoolers, and air receivers to release residual pressure.
- Verify that the discharge valve is not leaking air into the system.
- Remove dirt and debris from around the compressor to prevent contamination during inspection.
- Allow the compressor to cool if it has been in operation to prevent burns or thermal stresses.
- Wear appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE), including safety glasses, gloves etc, depending on the conditions.
Likely faults and remedy:
The most effective way to prevent faults and ensure long-term reliability is through a rigorous preventative maintenance schedule (PMS) – including regular inspections, cleaning, component replacements, and lubrication as per the manufacturer's recommendations.
Maintenance Recommendations:
- Overhaul suction and discharge valves every 1000 hours.
- Replace air filters every 500 hours.
- Inspect and test relief valves every 4000 hours.
- Check IR for motor windings every 2000 hours.
- Change lubricating oil every 2500 hours.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q9 (16 Marks)
General 🔥 Repeated 12x
Reverse osmosis is one of the alternatives for shipboard production of drinking water.
(a) Describe using simple diagrams if necessary, the principle of reverse osmosis.
(b) (i) Sketch a line diagram showing a single pass system for producing fresh water from sea water.
(ii) Describe such a system.
Appeared In: Jan 2018 Jul 2025 Jan 2023 Mar 2021 Oct 2019 Aug 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Nov 2018 Oct 2018 Jul 2018 Aug 2025
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Reverse osmosis (RO) is a process that purifies water by forcing it through a semi-permeable membrane. In this process, high pressure is applied to a solution with a high concentration of dissolved solids, such as saltwater, on one side of the membrane. This pressure overcomes the natural osmotic pressure, causing the pure water molecules to pass through the membrane while leaving behind the larger salt ions and other impurities. The membrane acts as a selective barrier, allowing only the water to pass, while the concentrated brine solution is discarded. For large-scale production, a large membrane surface area and a strong pump capable of generating high pressures are necessary.
1. Pretreatment Stage
Pretreatment is essential to protect the R.O. membranes from fouling and scaling.
- Scaling: Caused by soluble salts such as calcium carbonate and calcium sulphate depositing on the membrane.
- Fouling: Caused by micro-organisms, metal oxides, and colloidal particles coating the membrane surface.
Pretreatment methods include:
- Mechanical filtration: Multiple filter stages in series, e.g.:
- Sand filters
- Multi-layer filters
- Microfilters (<10 ppm particle size)
- Chemical treatment:
- Coagulants for fine particle removal
- Biocides to kill micro-organisms
- Acid dosing to neutralize calcium salts and prevent scale formation
A pump takes suction from the sea chest through a coarse filter, delivering water at about 6 bar through the pretreatment system.
2. High-Pressure Stage
- A high-pressure piston pump raises the feed water pressure to above 50 bar.
- This pressurized water enters the semi-permeable membrane modules.
3. Separation Process
- Due to the pressure difference between the concentrated brine side and the permeate side, water molecules pass through the membrane.
- Dissolved salts, organics, and microbes are rejected.
Outputs:
- Permeate (Fresh Water): Low-salt content water used for drinking and domestic purposes.
- Brine (Concentrated Reject): Discharged overboard (OVBD).
4. Post-Treatment
The fresh water (permeate) is further treated to make it suitable for shipboard use:
- Hardness adjustment (to prevent excessive softness)
- pH correction (maintained around 8 for taste and corrosion control)
- Chlorination (for disinfection)
Note: If pH rises too high, chlorine’s effectiveness against micro-organisms is reduced.
Flow Summary:
Sea Water → Coarse Filter → Pretreatment Filters & Chemicals → High-Pressure Pump → R.O. Membranes →
→ Permeate (Fresh Water) → Post-treatment → Ship’s Fresh Water System
→ Brine (Reject Water) → Overboard
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q4 (16 Marks)
Refrigeration & Air Conditioning 🔥 Repeated 5x
(a) Draw a block diagram for a fully automated accommodation air conditioning unit, labelling the component parts, and indicating the directions of air flow
(b) Explain why the unit includes means of dehumidification and humidification.
(c) A chart is used for ensuring that the accommodation conditions are within the so-called Comfort Zone what useful information does the chart give?
Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jan 2026 Sep 2025 Jun 2024 Dec 2022
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The unit includes both dehumidification and humidification to maintain air within the "comfort zone".
Dehumidification
Air is dehumidified to prevent health issues and equipment damage. When warm, humid air is cooled, its relative humidity increases. If it reaches 100% saturation, moisture condenses. In an A-C unit, air is cooled below the target temperature (e.g., to 10°C) to make it supersaturated, causing excess moisture to precipitate out. This dry, cool air is then reheated to the desired temperature (e.g., 20°C). At this new temperature, the air's relative humidity will be at a comfortable level, typically around 50%. Without this process, inhaling highly humid, cold air could lead to respiratory issues. Additionally, moisture condensation on electronic equipment can cause damage.
Humidification
Humidification is necessary when the incoming air is too dry. Dry air can cause discomfort, skin irritation, and static electricity issues. The humidifier adds moisture back into the air, usually by spraying a fine mist of water, to raise the humidity to the desired level and bring the conditions back into the comfort zone.
The chart provides the following useful information:
- Dry Bulb Temperature: The actual air temperature, measured with a standard thermometer.
- Wet Bulb Temperature: The temperature of air measured with a thermometer covered by a water-soaked cloth, indicating evaporative cooling potential.
- Dew Point Temperature: The temperature at which air becomes saturated and condensation begins.
- Relative Humidity: The percentage of moisture in the air compared to the maximum moisture the air can hold at that temperature.
- Moisture Content: The amount of water vapor present in the air, expressed as a ratio (e.g., grams of moisture per kilogram of dry air).
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q8 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting 🔥 Repeated 7x
With reference to shaft alignment:
(a) Explain the meaning of fair curve or rational alignment
(b) Shaft alignment is often verified using hydraulic jacks to obtain a simple graph. Sketch such a graph, indicating the following:
(i) Static load
(ii) Hysteresis
(iii) Influence number
(c) Explain the limitations of checking shaft alignment solely by hydraulic jacking methods.
Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jan 2026 Sep 2025 Dec 2024 Jun 2024 Aug 2023 Dec 2022
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(a) Meaning of Fair Curve / Rational Alignment
Fair curve alignment refers to the method of shaft alignment where the bearings are not arranged in a single straight line, but are deliberately set with calculated vertical offsets so that the shaft follows a smooth curve.
Explanation:
- For small-diameter shafts, bearings can often be kept in a straight line without issues.
- For large-diameter or high-power shafts, straight-line alignment causes:
- Uneven bearing loading
- High bending stress in the shaft
- Excessive wear and vibration
- In modern ships, fair curve alignment is preferred because:
- Bearing heights are adjusted individually
- Shaft load is distributed uniformly
- Bending stresses are minimized, preventing fatigue and vibration
Advantages of Fair Curve Alignment:
- Uniform bearing load distribution, reducing localized stress.
- Lower shaft bending stress, enhancing structural integrity.
- Reduced vibration, ensuring smoother operation.
- Longer bearing life, lowering maintenance costs.
(b) Shaft Alignment Check Using Hydraulic Jacks
The hydraulic jacking method is commonly used to verify shaft alignment by measuring the bearing loads when the shaft is lifted and plotting a graph of jack load vs. vertical displacement.
Procedure:
- Place a hydraulic jack near the bearing to be checked.
- Fix a dial gauge to measure vertical movement of the shaft.
- Slowly lift and lower the shaft using the jack.
- Record jack load and shaft displacement readings.
- Plot a graph of load versus displacement.
Graph Indications:
- (i) Static Load
- The load acting on the bearing at zero lift.
- Represents the actual operational load on the bearing when the shaft is at rest.
- (ii) Hysteresis
- The difference between the lifting and lowering curves.
- Caused by:
- Friction between shaft and bearing
- Oil film resistance
- Elastic deformation of the bearing
- Hysteresis indicates energy loss and affects measurement accuracy.
- (iii) Influence Number
- Represents the change in load per unit vertical movement of a bearing (N/mm).
- Shows the effect of raising one bearing on the load of other bearings.
- Used in fair curve alignment calculations to adjust bearing heights accurately.
(c) Limitations of Hydraulic Jacking Method
- Measures Only Vertical Loads
- Does not accurately measure horizontal bearing reactions.
- Less effective for resiliently mounted reduction gears.
- Time-Consuming
- Requires many readings for multiple bearings.
- Labour-intensive and difficult in restricted engine room spaces.
- Accuracy Issues
- Misalignment of the jack or dial gauge introduces errors.
- Shaft centerline mismatch reduces precision.
- Can produce wide hysteresis, complicating interpretation.
- Requires Skilled Interpretation
- Jacking curves vary depending on bearing type.
- Only trained personnel can correctly analyze the results.
- Hysteresis Effects
- Friction and oil film can cause non-linear readings.
- Lack of a load cell amplifies measurement errors.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q9 (16 Marks)
Control & Instrumentation 🔥 Repeated 3x
(a) Define proportional control action.
(b) Sketch and describe a simple pneumatic proportional controller.
(c) State a suitable process where a proportional controller may be employed.
(d) State the disadvantage of proportional only action.
Appeared In: Sep 2025 Oct 2024 Dec 2022
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Proportional control action is the most basic form of modulating control. In this control mode, the correction signal (or output from the controller) is directly proportional to the deviation or error between the measured variable (controlled condition) and the desired set point. The larger the deviation, the stronger the corrective response by the controller.
Mathematically:
$$Output\:\alpha\:Error$$
A proportional controller is suitable for processes where small, continuous adjustments are required and the process dynamics are relatively stable. A common application is in temperature control systems, where proportional action can effectively maintain the temperature close to a desired set point with minimal oscillation. It can also be used in pressure regulation, level control, and flow control systems.
The main disadvantage of proportional-only control is the presence of an offset or steady-state error. Since the controller output is proportional to the error, a finite error is required to maintain a specific output. This means the system may not reach the exact set point but will stabilise at a point close to it, depending on the proportional gain. Therefore, proportional control alone cannot eliminate steady-state error.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting 🔥 Repeated 2x
(a) Sketch a transmission shaft coupling which enables the propeller shaft to be withdrawn outboard.
(b) (i) Describe the coupling and the method of fitting and dismantling.
(ii) State how the grip of the coupling can be checked when fitted.
(iii) State what safety precaution should be taken when dismantling the coupling.
Appeared In: Jan 2025 - 1 Nov 2022
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The thin inner sleeve has a bore slightly larger than the shaft diameter and its outer surface is tapered to match the taper on the bore of the outer sleeve. The nut and sealing ring close the annular space at the end of the sleeves. When the coupling is in position, the outer sleeve is hydraulically driven on the tapered inner sleeve. At the same time, oil is injected between the contact surfaces to separate them and thus overcome the friction between them. Oil for the operation is supplied by hand pumps, two for the forced lubrication and another hand or power pump for the riving oil pressure. When the outer sleeve has driven onto a predetermined position, the forced lubrication pressure is released and drained. Oil pressure is maintained in the hydraulic space until the oil between the sleeves drain and normal friction is restored. After disconnection hoses, plugs are fitted and rust prevention is applied to protect exposed seating. A sealing strip is brought to a set pressure in the hydraulic space. Then with the shafts supported, oil is forced into the sleeves. The outer sleeve slides off the inner at a rate controlled by the release of the hydraulic oil pressure.
When it is required to remove the propeller, the process is equally simple and even quicker with the injection of oil between the surfaces obviating the need for any form of heating or mechanical withdrawn equipment. Precautions are necessary to prevent the propeller from jumping at release.
(ii) The grip of the coupling is checked by measuring the diameter of the outer sleeve before and after tightening. The diameter increase should agree with the figure stamped on the sleeve.
(iii) To disconnect the coupling, oil pressure is brought to a set pressure in the hydraulic space. Then with the shafts supported, oil is forced between the sleeves. The outer sleeve slid off the inner at a rate controlled by the release of the hydraulic oil pressure. Care must be taken to release the hydraulic pressure very very slowly to avoid and prevent the propeller from jumping at the release of the hydraulic pressure. When it is required to remove the propeller, the process is equally simple and even quicker with the injection of oil between the surfaces obviating the need for any form of heating or mechanical withdrawal equipment. Precautions are necessary to prevent the propeller from jumping at release.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q7 (16 Marks)
Refrigeration & Air Conditioning 🔥 Repeated 6x
(a) Sketch a ship's indirect refrigeration system arranged for cooling containers stowed in stacks in the hold
(b) Describe the refrigeration system sketched in (a)
(c) State the advantages and disadvantages of the system described in (a) compared with containers with their own refrigeration self-contained units.
Appeared In: Aug 2025 Feb 2021 Jan 2020 Aug 2019 Jan 2019 Nov 2022
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
Q8 (16 Marks)
Boilers & Steam 🔥 Repeated 2x
(a) Sketch diagrammatically an auxiliar boiler automatic combustion control system and explain how it operates.
(b) Specify how 'fail safe' conditions are ensured.
(c) How, the master controller follows steam pressure variations and air fuel ratio is adjusted?
Appeared In: Sep 2024 Nov 2022
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
A line diagram shows the closed-loop steam supply / firing-rate control loop: boiler steam pressure -> steam pressure transmitter/sensor -> master controller (follows steam pressure) -> fuel valve and forced-draught fan speed/damper -> furnace -> steam chest -> back to sensor forming the feedback loop; with a separate air/fuel ratio controller that measures fuel flow and air flow, and an oxygen (O2) analyser in the funnel providing a trimming/bias signal.
Operation: The object is to supply steam at the required pressure and to burn fuel efficiently with the correct air/fuel ratio. The master (steam pressure) controller senses the boiler steam pressure against set point. When the user takes steam, pressure falls; the master controller increases the firing-rate demand, which opens the fuel valve and increases the forced draught (fan speed/air damper) together, raising the heat input. When steam demand falls, pressure rises and the controller reduces firing rate. The air/fuel ratio controller ensures the correct proportion of air to fuel is supplied for the firing rate and, using the O2 analyser, trims the air so that combustion stays within the optimum band (avoiding too much excess air, which wastes heat, or too little, which causes soot and danger). A flame safeguard system supervises the flame during light-up, purge and operation.
- Low water level cut-out shuts the fuel supply if boiler water falls dangerously low.
- Flame failure/safeguard: if no flame is confirmed (UV/photo-e/e cell) within a set time, fuel is tripped off, and a purge is initiated before any re-light.
- Air failure: interlocks ensure fuel is only admitted when the forced-draught fan is running and purge is complete; loss of combustion air flow cuts fuel.
- High steam pressure cut-out and/or safety relief valves prevent over-pressure.
- Pre-purge and post-purge sequences clear any accumulated unburnt gas before and after firing; a lock-out prevents re-light after flame failure until manual reset.
- Loss of the control air/electrical supply trips the system to the safe condition; fuel valves fail closed on power/air loss.
- High/low gas or oil pressure trips and an air/fuel ratio guard prevent dangerous mixtures.
The master controller is a proportional-plus-integral (or PI/PID) controller that compares the measured steam pressure with the set point. The error (set point - measured) generates an output which positions the firing-rate demand - raising it when pressure is low and lowering it when pressure is high. This firing-rate demand simultaneously drives the fuel valve and the air supply (fan speed/damper) through a cam/programmed relationship so both follow the demanded load. The air/fuel ratio is then adjusted by a secondary trim loop: the O2 analyser in the exhaust gives a signal to the air controller, which trims (increases or decreases) the air flow with respect to fuel to maintain the air/fuel ratio in the optimum efficiency band, regardless of firing rate. Thus steam pressure sets the firing rate, and air flow is slaved to fuel flow with an oxygen trim to keep combustion correct at every load.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q1 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting 🔥 Repeated 2x
With reference to radial lip seals for propulsion shafting:
(a) Sketch and describe an outboard seal arrangement as fitted to an oil lubricated stern tube.
(b) Explain, with reasons, the possible actions that should be taken in the event of loss of oil from the header tank.
Appeared In: Sep 2024 Jul 2022
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Radial Lip Seals for Propulsion Shafting
An outboard seal arrangement on an oil-lubricated stern tube serves two primary purposes: to prevent lubricating oil from leaking into the sea and to stop seawater from entering the stern tube. This arrangement typically consists of several elastomeric lip seals fitted in sequence. These seals are mounted within a casing attached to the aft end of the stern tube and press against a smooth, hardened metal liner fitted on the propeller shaft. A garter spring wrapped around the lip of each seal provides continuous radial force to maintain the seal's contact with the shaft liner. The seals are usually made from durable materials like nitrile rubber or fluoroelastomer (Viton), chosen for their resistance to oil and temperature variations.
In a typical arrangement, multiple seal rings are used. The outermost seal acts as a seawater barrier, while the inner seals retain the lubricating oil. The outboard seals dissipate heat to the surrounding seawater, while the inner seals transfer heat to the lubricating oil through convection. The entire seal assembly includes key components such as a flange, cover rings, intermediate rings, and the shaft liner, all designed to work together to create a reliable barrier.
Loss of oil from the stern tube header tank is a serious condition as it leads to insufficient lubrication and increases the risk of seawater ingress into the stern tube bearings. The following actions should be taken:
- Immediate checks:
- Verify oil level in the header tank.
- Top up with the correct grade of lubricating oil if required.
- Inspection for leakage:
- Check stern tube seal chambers and drain tanks for signs of oil leakage or seawater ingress.
- Identify the source of failure (seal wear, damage, or liner scoring).
- Monitoring:
- Observe oil level alarms, leakage indication systems, and bearing temperature alarms.
- Operating adjustments:
- If leakage is severe, reduce shaft speed to minimize further oil loss.
- Stop the main engine if necessary to prevent bearing damage.
- Leakage control measures:
- Temporarily lower the oil level in the header tank to reduce leakage pressure.
- Use more viscous oil (if permitted) to slow down the leakage rate.
- Repair arrangements:
- Plan for emergency seal repairs, either through underwater maintenance by divers or during dry docking.
- Ensure spare sealing elements and liners are available.
- Continuous lubrication assurance:
- Maintain positive oil pressure at the seals via gravity feed or auxiliary pumps.
- Drain any accumulated water/oil mixtures in seal chambers regularly.
ALTERNATE ANSWER:
The loss of oil from the stern tube header tank is a critical issue that can lead to insufficient lubrication for the stern tube bearings and potential seawater ingress. This can cause severe damage to the bearings and the propeller shaft. Immediate and reasoned actions are essential to mitigate the risk.
Here are the possible actions and the reasons behind them:
- Immediately check and top up the oil level: The most direct action is to restore the oil level in the header tank with the correct grade of lubricating oil. This re-establishes the hydrostatic pressure, which is essential to prevent seawater from entering the stern tube.
- Reduce shaft speed or stop the engine: If oil loss is significant and ongoing, a reduction in propeller shaft speed or a complete stop is necessary. This lessens the pressure and heat on the seals, reducing the leak rate and minimizing the risk of bearing damage due to poor lubrication.
- Inspect seal chambers and drain tanks: Regularly checking the drain tanks and seal chambers for an abnormal mixture of oil and water helps diagnose the location and severity of the leak. For example, a large amount of milky-white fluid indicates significant seawater ingress, while an excessive amount of clear oil points to an oil leak.
- Consider temporary pressure adjustments: As a temporary measure, the header tank's height may be adjusted to change the hydrostatic pressure. In some cases, a more viscous oil might be used to reduce the leakage, but this is a short-term solution and should only be done if the oil is compatible with the system.
- Arrange for repair or replacement: The underlying issue—a failed seal—must be addressed. This requires planning for either an underwater seal replacement by divers while the vessel is afloat or, for a more permanent and thorough repair, drydocking the vessel. This ensures the long-term integrity of the sealing system.
- Maintain positive pressure: Ensuring a continuous and positive oil pressure within the stern tube system is paramount. This pressure, supplied by the header tank or a pump, creates a positive differential pressure that actively prevents seawater from breaching the seals. This is the fundamental principle of preventing water ingress.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q5 (16 Marks)
Control & Instrumentation 🔥 Repeated 4x
With reference to feed regulation:
(a) Describe, with the aid of sketches, the operation of a boiler feed water regulator controlled by at least two other parameters besides water level in the drum
(b) Give reasons for the inclusion of the other elements besides water level in controlling feed flow
(c) Deduce the possible effects on the system when the drain valve in the constant leg in the level transmitter starts to leak
Appeared In: Feb 2024 Oct 2022 Jul 2026 Feb 2026
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The three elements (parameters) used are:
- Steam flow rate
- Feed water flow rate
- Water level in the drum
Each parameter transmits a signal proportional to its measured value.
- Steam flow and feed flow signals pass through individual square-root converters and are compared in a relay.
- The relay sends a signal to the controller only when steam flow and feed flow are in a 1:1 ratio.
- Once this condition is met, the controller compares the drum level signal (from a float level transmitter) with the setpoint.
- Based on the deviation, the controller sends an air signal to the feed water control valve, which opens or closes to maintain the desired water level.
As steam demand normalises, the saturation temperature rises, and bubble formation ceases, causing the water level to fall—known as the "shrinkage effect." Including steam flow and water flow, elements help counteract these effects, ensuring an accurate reflection of the true water level and allowing the feed water control system to respond appropriately.
The Proportional-Integral (P+I) controller misinterprets this as a higher water level and reduces the feed water flow by closing the feed control valve. This incorrect response leads to instability within the system and results in erratic water level indications.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q7 (16 Marks)
Refrigeration & Air Conditioning
With reference to air conditioning units
(a) With the aid of a sketch, explain the operation of a unit that includes means of dehumidifying, humidifying, and refrigerated cooling.
(b) (i) Describe the conditions that could lead to legionella growth.
(ii) List the precautions necessary in the maintenance of air conditioning systems to reduce the risk of legionnaires disease being contacted.
Appeared In: Oct 2022
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- Accumulated or standing water provides a breeding ground for the bacteria.
- Legionella thrive in water temperatures between 20°C and 45°C.
- Dust, debris, and other particulate matter in aerated water provide nutrients for bacterial growth.
- Water mist, generated by cooling towers or humidifiers, allows Legionella bacteria to become airborne and potentially inhaled.
- Regularly drain and clean areas where water could accumulate, such as air handling units (AHUs).
- Ensure proper cleaning and maintenance of drains and traps to prevent stagnation.
- Regularly clean or replace air filters in the system.
- Treat humidifiers with super-chlorinated water to inhibit bacterial growth.
- Ensure that duct and equipment insulation remains dry to avoid damp conditions.
- Perform routine cleaning of air ducts to remove dust and debris.
- Use approved disinfectants periodically, especially after any maintenance activities.
- Regularly clean AHU components, such as cooling coils and drain pans, to eliminate potential bacterial habitats.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q8 (16 Marks)
Refrigeration & Air Conditioning 🔥 Repeated 4x
(a) Explain with a sketch the operation of an automatic expansion valve as fitted in the direct expansion refrigeration plants. How is this valve adjusted?
(b) Explain how critical temperature restricts plant operation and how these limitations can be overcome?
(c) Explain how this system maintains the provision rooms at different temperatures?
Appeared In: Mar 2025 Aug 2024 Feb 2023 Oct 2022
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The purpose of the expansion valve in a refrigeration system is to regulate the flow of refrigerant from the high-pressure side (condenser) to the low-pressure side (evaporator), ensuring efficient operation based on the cooling demand. It adjusts refrigerant flow to maintain the desired temperature in the evaporator. It prevents liquid refrigerant from reaching the compressor, ensuring complete vaporisation in the evaporator.
Pressure Regulation: The valve contains a diaphragm that responds to pressure differences:
- P1 (Top Pressure): Exerted by a heat-sensitive fluid in a bulb, which senses the temperature of the gas leaving the evaporator.
- P2 (Bottom Pressure): Exerted by the refrigerant entering the evaporator.
- P3 (Spring Pressure): Ensures a degree of superheat, keeping the valve slightly closed to convert all liquid refrigerant into gas.
- At superheat conditions, P1 = P2 + P3.
- An Adjusting Screw is used to modify the superheat degree, optimizing the evaporator’s performance.
Equalizing Line: In systems with a significant pressure drop in the evaporator (more than 0.3 bar), an Equalizing Line feeds the outlet pressure back to the valve for accurate temperature and pressure control.
- Ensures efficient heat absorption in the evaporator.
- Protects the compressor by avoiding liquid refrigerant carryover.
- Adapts to varying cooling loads for optimal system performance.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q1 (16 Marks)
Fire Protection & Safety 🔥 Repeated 3x
With reference to Automatic sprinkler systems for firefighting purposes:
(a) Explain, with the aid of a Heat Release versus Time diagram, the difference between fire control and fire suppression
(b) State the limitations of using glass bulbs to activate sprinkler heads and suggest, with reasons, an alternative mechanism.
(c) The safety devices incorporated in the system.
(d) The parameters governing the volume of the pressure tank
Appeared In: Aug 2026 Dec 2023 Sep 2022
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Fire suppression can be defined as quickly lowering the heat release rate of a fire and preventing its regrowth using sufficient application of water through flames to the seat of the fire.
Key Differences in Performance
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (16 Marks)
General 🔥 Repeated 4x
(a) Explain why pilot injection is required for a Dual fuel engine when burning natural gas.
(b) Describe, with the aid of a sketch, the arrangements for a dual fuel engine which is capable of burning natural gas on:
(i) The Otto cycle
(ii) The Diesel cycle
Appeared In: Jul 2025 Mar 2025 Mar 2024 Sep 2022
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- The engine operates in gas mode during the suction stroke, where a lean air-gas mixture is drawn into the cylinders.
- The cylinder head is equipped with a gas admission valve positioned in the air inlet passage, and there is a fuel injector capable of both main and pilot injection.
- A common rail computer-operated pilot fuel injection system is utilised, providing precise control over the injected fuel. This system can easily regulate or shut off the fuel injected through the main injector nozzles.
- During engine startup, diesel fuel is used for ignition, employing both pilot and main injection. Once combustion is stable, the engine transitions to a gas supply. This transition typically takes about one minute, during which the substitution of fuel oil by gas occurs gradually.
(ii) Diesel Cycle:
- As a two-stroke engine uses intake air for scavenging, it's essential not to mix the gas fuel with the intake air.
- Instead, the gas fuel is injected into the compressed air, similar to the injection process for diesel fuel.
- Ignition is achieved by injecting fuel via the micro-pilot fuel injector, resulting in diffusion combustion.
- This approach not only reduces CO emissions by 20% or more but also maintains low levels of unburned gas and CO emissions without the occurrence of knocking. The utilisation of micro-pilot fuel injection ensures a controlled and efficient combustion process, optimising the performance of the dual-fuel engine burning natural gas.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q4 (16 Marks)
General 🔥 Repeated 6x
(a) Describe, with the aid of a sketch, an open loop system for reducing SOx emissions from engine exhaust gas, explaining how the system operates whilst the vessel is in open waters.
(b) Describe, with the aid of a sketch, a closed loop scrubber system for removing Sox from engine exhaust gas, explaining the operation of this unit and stating When it would be used.
Appeared In: Nov 2025 Jun 2025 Jul 2024 Sep 2022 Jun 2026 Jan 2025 - 1
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- Exhaust gases enter via the bottom side of the scrubber tower
- Seawater is sprayed at the top of the scrubber through spraying nozzles
- This results in an equally divided spray pattern throughout the scrubber
- Sulphur particles in the exhaust gas attach to the water droplets under the right temperature and process conditions
- Cleaned exhaust gas leaves via the top of the scrubber tower
- The seawater leaves* via the bottom and is discharged overboard.
- pH, turbidity and PAH are continuously monitored in accordance with IMO regulations, MARPOL Annex VI resolution.
- Closed loop systems are primarily used for vessels that operate in ports and sailing areas where overboard discharge is prohibited.
- Exhaust gasses enter via the bottom side of the scrubber tower
- Fresh water is inserted at the top of the scrubber through spraying nozzles
- This results in an equally divided spray pattern throughout the scrubber
- Sulphur particles in the exhaust gas attach to the water droplets under the right temperature and process conditions
- Process water is led to the circulation tank
- NaOH is added to the process water to neutralise acidity
- Cleaned process water is pumped upwards again to the top
- Polluted water is drained and led through a separator
- Solids and oil are removed from the polluted water forming sludge
- Sludge is pumped to the sludge storage tank on the ship
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q9 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting
Misalignment of the Main shafting between engine and propeller causes bearing overloads and shaft stress.
(a) State the difficulties associated with checking shaft alignment and the reasons why results are unreliable due to external factors.
(b) State the reasons for misalignment.
(c) Explain with a simple sketch how a bearing load is assessed.
(d) Explain how uneven loading could be rectified.
(e) Why wear down in main bearings is critical to the condition of the crankshaft and propeller shaft system
Appeared In: Sep 2022
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Difficulties During Installation:
- The ship's configuration changes when transitioning from being berthed to afloat, affecting alignment.
- Natural deflection of the shafting occurs between supports due to its length and weight.
- The propeller's weight creates a cantilevered effect on the shaft, further complicating alignment.
Difficulties During Service:
- The ship's loading conditions (cargo, ballast, fuel, and water) affect alignment.
- Movement of the ship in water causes dynamic changes in alignment.
- Off-centre thrust from the propeller can create additional forces on the shafting system.
- Wear down of bearings over time impacts alignment.
- Water forces acting on the vessel's hull cause distortion, affecting shaft alignment.
Reasons for Unreliable Results:
Results are often unreliable due to various external factors such as temperature fluctuations (high deck temperatures in tropical climates versus low sea temperatures), wind, waves, draft, and water density. The ship's hull can distort due to hogging and sagging under different loading conditions, affecting the alignment measurements. Cargo weight and distribution, ballast, fuel, and water levels are all subject to change, further impacting the accuracy of measurements. Over the ship's lifetime, extreme weather conditions can alter the hull's shape, leading to variations in shaft alignment.
- Uneven wear down of bearings.
- Hull deformation caused by hogging, sagging, or prolonged stress.
- Improper or incomplete alignment during initial installation.
- Changes in loading conditions, cargo distribution, and ballast arrangements.
- Long-term effects of extreme weather and sea conditions.
- Propeller thrust misalignment due to incorrect propeller installation or damage.
- Vibration and fatigue in the shaft system.
A simple sketch to illustrate bearing load assessment using the jacking method:
Hydraulic jacks are placed on either side of the bearing and used to lift the shaft. A dial gauge measures the shaft's lift, indicating the amount of force needed to lift it. The hydraulic pressure exerted by the jacks directly corresponds to the load on the bearing. By comparing this load with design specifications, engineers can determine if the load is evenly distributed among bearings.
- Alter the height of the bearing from the tank top by loosening the foundation bolts and tightening the jacking bolts.
- Insert or remove shims between the bearing housing and foundation to achieve proper alignment.
- Compare the actual bearing load with the original load specified in the manual and make adjustments accordingly.
- If the bearing is excessively worn or clearance exceeds limits, replace the bearing to restore proper function.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q1 (16 Marks)
Cargo & Tankers 🔥 Repeated 4x
With reference to the carriage and pumping of liquified gas cargo:
(a) Sketch a suitable pumping system labeling the component parts
(b) State, why submerged hydraulically driven pumps are not used
(c) How overheating of pump drive shaft bearings is avoided
(d) State, how the risk of fire and explosion in cargo tanks is obviated both in the loaded and discharged condition.
Appeared In: Jan 2025 - 1 Sep 2023 Feb 2023 Jan 2017
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(ii) Overheating of the pump drive shaft bearings is prevented by using the shaft housing (which also acts as a cargo riser) to cool and lubricate the bearings.
- Continuous boil-off gas reliquefaction
- Relief valves to release excess pressure
- Inert gas blanketing of the cargo hold; and
- If cargo hold is considered as secondary barrier, then if primary barrier/ cargo tank leaks then the flammable gas should not get oxygen to from an explosive mixture. So cargo hold is inverted.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (16 Marks)
Refrigeration & Air Conditioning 🔥 Repeated 4x
(a) Explain with sketch, the operation of an automatic explansion valve as fitted in the direct expansion refrigeration plants. How is this valve adjusted
(b) Explain how critical temperture restricts plant operation and how these limitations can be overcome
(c) Explain how this system maintains the provision rooms at different temperatures
Appeared In: Mar 2025 Aug 2024 Feb 2023 Oct 2022
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The purpose of the expansion valve in a refrigeration system is to regulate the flow of refrigerant from the high-pressure side (condenser) to the low-pressure side (evaporator), ensuring efficient operation based on the cooling demand. It adjusts refrigerant flow to maintain the desired temperature in the evaporator. It prevents liquid refrigerant from reaching the compressor, ensuring complete vaporisation in the evaporator.
Pressure Regulation: The valve contains a diaphragm that responds to pressure differences:
- P1 (Top Pressure): Exerted by a heat-sensitive fluid in a bulb, which senses the temperature of the gas leaving the evaporator.
- P2 (Bottom Pressure): Exerted by the refrigerant entering the evaporator.
- P3 (Spring Pressure): Ensures a degree of superheat, keeping the valve slightly closed to convert all liquid refrigerant into gas.
- At superheat conditions, P1 = P2 + P3.
- An Adjusting Screw is used to modify the superheat degree, optimizing the evaporator’s performance.
Equalizing Line: In systems with a significant pressure drop in the evaporator (more than 0.3 bar), an Equalizing Line feeds the outlet pressure back to the valve for accurate temperature and pressure control.
- Ensures efficient heat absorption in the evaporator.
- Protects the compressor by avoiding liquid refrigerant carryover.
- Adapts to varying cooling loads for optimal system performance.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q4 (16 Marks)
Steering & Deck Machinery 🔥 Repeated 4x
With reference to hull cathodic protection systems of the impressed current type
(a) Sketch and describe such a system
(b) Explain how protection may be ensured for the rudder and propeller
(c) State any precautions that should be taken when this type of system is installed.
Appeared In: Oct 2025 Feb 2025 Oct 2023 Feb 2023
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
An Impressed Current Cathodic Protection (ICCP) system protects the underwater hull from corrosion by making the ship’s hull the cathode of an electrochemical cell. A rectifier supplies controlled DC current to inert anodes, while the hull receives the return current and is protected from corrosion. ICCP systems on ships use a DC source and inert anodes such as MMO/titanium, with automatic regulation based on hull potential measured by reference electrodes.
Working:
- AC supply is fed to a transformer-rectifier unit.
- The rectifier converts AC to low-voltage DC.
- The positive terminal is connected to inert anodes (usually titanium/MMO) fitted externally on the hull.
- The negative terminal is connected to the ship’s hull.
- Current flows from anodes → seawater → hull.
- The hull becomes cathodic, so corrosion of hull steel is prevented.
- Reference electrodes (silver/silver chloride / zinc type) measure hull potential.
- The automatic controller adjusts output current so hull potential remains within the protective range, avoiding under-protection or over-protection.
Main components
- Transformer/rectifier
- Automatic control panel
- Inert anodes
- Reference electrodes / potential sensors
- Hull bonding cables and monitoring arrangement
Rudder
- The rudder may be electrically insulated by bearings/pintles, so bonding is required.
- Protection is ensured by:
- flexible bonding straps / cables across rudder stock, carrier bearing or pintles
- sometimes supplementary sacrificial anodes on rudder
- This ensures the rudder remains electrically continuous with the hull and receives cathodic protection.
Propeller
- The propeller shaft is often electrically insulated from the hull by the oil film in stern tube and bearings.
- Therefore, ICCP current may not protect the propeller effectively.
- Protection is ensured by fitting a shaft earthing / shaft bonding device:
- slip ring on shaft
- silver/graphite brushes to hull earth
- This provides electrical continuity between shaft/propeller and hull, and also prevents bearing pitting due to shaft potential. A turning propeller is often insulated from the hull by the lubricating oil film, so a shaft earthing device with brushes and slip ring is used to avoid bearing damage and improve protection.
- Do not overprotect the hull: Excess current can damage paint coating and may cause hydrogen effects on high-strength steel.
- Maintain electrical continuity: Ensure proper bonding of rudder, shaft, stabilizers, thrusters, sea chests, etc.
- Inspect anodes and reference cells regularly: Keep them clean, undamaged, and properly insulated from hull structure where required.
- Check and calibrate control system: Reference electrodes and controller must be tested periodically for correct hull potential.
- Avoid stray current interference: Careful cable insulation and earthing arrangement to prevent corrosion of nearby fittings.
- During dry dock: Switch off ICCP before docking/undocking and inspect anodes, shields, and hull coating condition.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q7 (16 Marks)
Lubrication & Oils 🔥 Repeated 3x
State why the temperature of lubricating oil supplied to an engine needs close control. Sketch and describe an arrangement and explain the principles of operation of instrumenation and control equipment for automatically maintaining the temperature of lubricating oil supplied to an engine at its desired value.
Appeared In: Oct 2024 Apr 2023 Feb 2023
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The temperature of lubricating oil (LO) supplied to an engine requires close control due to:
- Elevated LO temperatures increase the oxidation rate, doubling it for every 10°C rise. Oxidation produces acidic compounds and insoluble sludge that foul the engine components.
- At high temperatures, if water is present in the oil film, a tin oxide layer may form on white-metal bearings, resulting in hard, black or grey corrosion.
- LO temperatures between 25-40°C encourage microbial growth when water is present, especially when the engine is in a laid-up condition.
- LO viscosity is temperature-dependent, and fluctuations can affect the oil’s load-carrying capacity, leading to inadequate lubrication.
- Low LO temperature can cause thermal shock, while high LO temperature can lead to overheating, both of which increase the risk of piston cracking.
- Uncontrolled LO temperature may lead to engine slowdowns or shutdowns.
The main engine lubricating oil cooling system uses cascade control. In this case, the two main variables that influence the oil temperature are the engine load and the sea cooling water inlet temperature, which forms two loops: An outer loop that measures the engine oil inlet temperature and passes the information for further processing to a controller which is called the master or primary controller and an inner loop that measures the seawater inlet temperature and passes the information to a second controller called the slave or secondary controller. The secondary controller processes the signals from the primary controller and the secondary sensor and sends an appropriate signal to the 3-way valve to control the oil temperature at the inlet to the engine. When the seawater temperature changes, an immediate signal will be sent to the slave controller for adjustment of the 3-way valve even before the actual oil inlet temperature begins to change. The response is, therefore, faster.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q8 (16 Marks)
Auxiliary Machinery
(a) Sketch a simple cross section through a single stage centrifugal pump with a fully shrouded single entry impeller, name the components of the pump and indicate the direction of fluid flow
(b) Describe
(i) The function of the impeller and how suction is created by it
(ii) The funciton of the volute casing
(iii) State the material of each component of the pump
(c) State the materials of each component of the pump
(d) State why some centrifugal pumps have
(i) A double volute casing
(ii) A diffuser ring
Appeared In: Feb 2023
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(a) Cross-section of a Single stage centrifugal pump:
(b) (i) The impeller is a rotating component that imparts kinetic energy to the fluid. As it rotates, the vanes throw the liquid outward, increasing its velocity (kinetic energy). This high-speed movement creates a low-pressure area or vacuum at the impeller's eye, drawing fluid into the suction inlet. This vacuum effect is what allows liquid to be "sucked" into the pump, facilitating continuous flow.
(ii) The volute casing is a curved, spiral casing around the impeller. The volute casing gradually increases in area, converting the high-velocity fluid leaving the impeller into higher pressure energy. This gradual expansion minimises turbulence and maximises pressure conversion efficiency.
(c) Material of each component of the pump:
(ii) Diffuser Ring: A diffuser ring increases pump efficiency. By gradually expanding the flow area after the impeller, it converts more of the fluid's kinetic energy into pressure energy, reducing velocity and turbulence losses. This results in higher pressure output and improved efficiency.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q9 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting 🔥 Repeated 2x
Misalignment of the main shafting between engine and propller causes bearing overloads and shaft stress.
(a) State the difficulties associated with checking shaft alignment and the reasons why results are unreliable due to external factors
(b) Explain with a simple sketch how a bearing load is assessed
(c) Explain how uneven laoding could be rectified.
Appeared In: Jun 2023 Feb 2023
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Difficulties During Installation:
- The ship's configuration changes when transitioning from being berthed to afloat, affecting alignment.
- Natural deflection of the shafting occurs between supports due to its length and weight.
- The propeller's weight creates a cantilevered effect on the shaft, further complicating alignment.
Difficulties During Service:
- The ship's loading conditions (cargo, ballast, fuel, and water) affect alignment.
- Movement of the ship in water causes dynamic changes in alignment.
- Off-centre thrust from the propeller can create additional forces on the shafting system.
- Wear down of bearings over time impacts alignment.
- Water forces acting on the vessel's hull cause distortion, affecting shaft alignment.
Reasons for Unreliable Results:
Results are often unreliable due to various external factors such as temperature fluctuations (high deck temperatures in tropical climates versus low sea temperatures), wind, waves, draft, and water density. The ship's hull can distort due to hogging and sagging under different loading conditions, affecting the alignment measurements. Cargo weight and distribution, ballast, fuel, and water levels are all subject to change, further impacting the accuracy of measurements. Over the ship's lifetime, extreme weather conditions can alter the hull's shape, leading to variations in shaft alignment.
Reasons for Misalignment
- Uneven wear down of bearings.
- Hull deformation caused by hogging, sagging, or prolonged stress.
- Improper or incomplete alignment during initial installation.
- Changes in loading conditions, cargo distribution, and ballast arrangements.
- Long-term effects of extreme weather and sea conditions.
- Propeller thrust misalignment due to incorrect propeller installation or damage.
- Vibration and fatigue in the shaft system.
A simple sketch to illustrate bearing load assessment using the jacking method:
Hydraulic jacks are placed on either side of the bearing and used to lift the shaft. A dial gauge measures the shaft's lift, indicating the amount of force needed to lift it. The hydraulic pressure exerted by the jacks directly corresponds to the load on the bearing. By comparing this load with design specifications, engineers can determine if the load is evenly distributed among bearings.
- Alter the height of the bearing from the tank top by loosening the foundation bolts and tightening the jacking bolts.
- Insert or remove shims between the bearing housing and foundation to achieve proper alignment.
- Compare the actual bearing load with the original load specified in the manual and make adjustments accordingly.
- If the bearing is excessively worn or clearance exceeds limits, replace the bearing to restore proper function.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (16 Marks)
General 🔥 Repeated 12x
Reverse osmosis is the modern alternative for shipboard production of drinking water.
(a) Describe using simple diagrams, if necessary, the principle of reverse osmosis
(b) Sketch a line diagram showing a single pass system for producing fresh water from sea water.
(c) Describe such a system.
Appeared In: Jan 2018 Jul 2025 Jan 2023 Mar 2021 Oct 2019 Aug 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Nov 2018 Oct 2018 Jul 2018 Aug 2025
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Reverse osmosis (RO) is a process that purifies water by forcing it through a semi-permeable membrane. In this process, high pressure is applied to a solution with a high concentration of dissolved solids, such as saltwater, on one side of the membrane. This pressure overcomes the natural osmotic pressure, causing the pure water molecules to pass through the membrane while leaving behind the larger salt ions and other impurities. The membrane acts as a selective barrier, allowing only the water to pass, while the concentrated brine solution is discarded. For large-scale production, a large membrane surface area and a strong pump capable of generating high pressures are necessary.
1. Pretreatment Stage
Pretreatment is essential to protect the R.O. membranes from fouling and scaling.
- Scaling: Caused by soluble salts such as calcium carbonate and calcium sulphate depositing on the membrane.
- Fouling: Caused by micro-organisms, metal oxides, and colloidal particles coating the membrane surface.
Pretreatment methods include:
- Mechanical filtration: Multiple filter stages in series, e.g.:
- Sand filters
- Multi-layer filters
- Microfilters (<10 ppm particle size)
- Chemical treatment:
- Coagulants for fine particle removal
- Biocides to kill micro-organisms
- Acid dosing to neutralize calcium salts and prevent scale formation
A pump takes suction from the sea chest through a coarse filter, delivering water at about 6 bar through the pretreatment system.
2. High-Pressure Stage
- A high-pressure piston pump raises the feed water pressure to above 50 bar.
- This pressurized water enters the semi-permeable membrane modules.
3. Separation Process
- Due to the pressure difference between the concentrated brine side and the permeate side, water molecules pass through the membrane.
- Dissolved salts, organics, and microbes are rejected.
Outputs:
- Permeate (Fresh Water): Low-salt content water used for drinking and domestic purposes.
- Brine (Concentrated Reject): Discharged overboard (OVBD).
4. Post-Treatment
The fresh water (permeate) is further treated to make it suitable for shipboard use:
- Hardness adjustment (to prevent excessive softness)
- pH correction (maintained around 8 for taste and corrosion control)
- Chlorination (for disinfection)
Note: If pH rises too high, chlorine’s effectiveness against micro-organisms is reduced.
Flow Summary:
Sea Water → Coarse Filter → Pretreatment Filters & Chemicals → High-Pressure Pump → R.O. Membranes →
→ Permeate (Fresh Water) → Post-treatment → Ship’s Fresh Water System
→ Brine (Reject Water) → Overboard
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q6 (16 Marks)
Control & Instrumentation 🔥 Repeated 4x
Explain the working principle of differential Pressure Transmitter with the help of diagram and explain the following parts with their usages.
(a) Zero and span calibration
(b) Negative feedback bellow
(c) Pilot amplifier functions
(d) Zero Elevation Concept
Appeared In: Jul 2026 Feb 2024 Jan 2023 Jan 2025 - 1
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
A Differential Pressure Transmitter measures the difference in pressure between two points and converts it into a pneumatic or electrical output signal. The working principle involves the use of a sensing element (e.g., a diaphragm or bellows) that deforms proportionally to the applied pressure difference. This deformation is converted into a measurable signal, which can then be processed and transmitted to control systems or indicators.
- The system comprises two pressure chambers, high-pressure (H) and low-pressure (L), separated by a diaphragm.
- Pressure from two points (H and L) is applied to either side of a flexible diaphragm or bellows within a sealed process chamber. The difference in pressure (ΔP = H - L) causes the diaphragm/bellows to deflect proportionally.
- This deflection is precisely measured by a mechanism, often incorporating a capacitive sensor or LVDT (Linear Variable Differential Transformer).
- The displacement of the diaphragm/bellows is converted into an electrical signal (e.g., 4-20 mA). This often involves a Wheatstone bridge configuration if using a strain gauge or a similar technique based on the chosen sensor.
- This electrical signal is then amplified by a pilot amplifier (see section (c)) and transmitted as the output signal.
As defined in the provided text, zero calibration adjusts the output to correspond to zero differential pressure (H = L). Span calibration adjusts the output range to accurately reflect the full differential pressure range the transmitter is designed to measure. Adjustment screws on the transmitter casing allow for these calibrations, often requiring specialized tools and procedures to ensure accuracy.
A negative feedback bellows is used in some differential pressure transmitters to improve accuracy and stability. It works by counteracting the deflection of the main sensing element. A portion of the output signal is used to generate a counter pressure within this feedback bellows, effectively reducing the deflection from the main sensing element and thus increasing the linearity and stability of the instrument. This reduces the sensitivity to small pressure changes but improves overall accuracy and reduces hysteresis.
The pilot amplifier is essential for converting the weak signal generated by the displacement sensing mechanism into a usable output signal. It amplifies the signal and converts it from a pneumatic signal (in some older designs) or a low-level electrical signal into a standardized 4-20 mA or 0-10 V signal for transmission to a control system. It might use a transducer like a strain gauge to perform this conversion.
When measuring liquid level using a differential pressure transmitter, the transmitter may not be installed precisely at the zero level of the tank. The "zero elevation" concept accounts for this difference in height. The hydrostatic pressure difference due to the elevation difference between the transmitter and the true zero level must be compensated in the output signal calculations. This ensures the accurate measurement of the liquid level even when the transmitter is not located at the tank's bottom. This compensation can involve either adding or subtracting a pressure offset from the raw differential pressure measurement, depending on the transmitter's configuration.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q7 (16 Marks)
Materials & Testing
With reference to sleeved keyless propeller assemblies:
(a) (i) State, with reasons, the metals used in the manufacture of the sleeve and tail end shaft
(ii) State the type and thickness of material used to bond the sleeve to the propeller boss.
(b) When removing the propeller from the tail end shaft, state why the following procedures are not recommended:
(i) Application of push off force by means of wedges or jacks and draw off force by strong back
(ii) Expansion of propeller boss by concentrated local heating with gas torches.
(c) State the correct procedure for removal of the propeller from the tail end shaft
Appeared In: Jan 2023
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- With a coefficient of friction of 0.28, it minimizes the likelihood of propeller slippage.
- Its expansion rates are similar to those of steel, reducing the risk of misalignment or loosening during temperature variations.
- Pearlitic cast iron exhibits excellent resistance to fretting, which is important for prolonged and reliable operation.
Tail End Shaft: Forged Mild Steel
- Forged mild steel provides the necessary mechanical strength and durability for withstanding high torsional forces.
- Easy to fabricate and repair during maintenance.
- Suitable for marine environments when properly treated.
(ii) Material Used to Bond Sleeve to Propeller and Thickness of Bonding Material:
- High-strength epoxy Araldite filling is used to bond the sleeve to the propeller securely.
- The bonding material is applied with a thickness of approximately 1 mm, ensuring adequate adhesion and durability.
- Can put the shaft in tension, leading to potential damage to the thrust block or propeller boss.
- May cause elongation or damage to coupling bolts, especially due to the high stress concentration.
- Excessive force on the screw threads can result in cracks or permanent deformation.
(ii) Local Heating with Gas Torches is Not Recommended due to:
- Concentrated heating causes uneven expansion, which can lead to cracks or other structural damage during service.
- High temperatures can weaken or destroy the epoxy layer bonding the sleeve to the propeller
- Prolonged heating can alter the material properties of the sleeve or boss\
- Remove the Propeller Cone and Locking Plate to expose the shaft-end fitting.
- Slack the Pilgrim Nut by the amount equivalent to the push-up distance
- Insert a wooden piece between the pilgrim nut and the boss face to absorb the impact during disconnection.
- Connect a hydraulic oil pump and inject hydraulic oil into the fitting to expand the boss.
- Operate the pump and maintain a pressure of 100–150 kg/cm² until the propeller disengages.
- The propeller releases safely and rests on the wooden block, ready for removal.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q1 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting 🔥 Repeated 14x
Sketch a sealing arrangement for an oil lubricated stern tube and (16)
(a) Identify the common forms of seal failure.
(b) State how oil loss due to seal failure can be restricted whilst on passage?
(c) What is the material used for sealing rings and propeller shaft liner?
Appeared In: Dec 2024 Apr 2024 Aug 2023 Jun 2023 Feb 2021 Oct 2020 Mar 2020 Jan 2020 Dec 2019 Sep 2019 Jun 2019 Feb 2019 Oct 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Common forms of seal failure in a stern tube
- Loss of elasticity in seal material – Nitrile rubber seals may lose their elastic properties over time, reducing their sealing effectiveness.
- Surface damage to chrome liner – Grooving or scoring of the chrome liner can impair sealing surfaces, leading to leakage.
- Excessive shaft vibration – Heavy vibration of the propeller shaft can cause uneven wear and seal deformation.
- Insufficient cooling – Inadequate cooling can cause rubber sealing elements to harden and eventually fail.
- Exceeding running hour limits – Operating beyond the manufacturer’s recommended service life increases the risk of seal failure.
- Deterioration of oil quality – Contaminated or degraded oil reduces lubrication and protection, accelerating seal wear.
- Incorrect header tank level adjustment – Failure to adjust the header tank according to vessel draft can cause oil loss, leading to inadequate lubrication and seal damage.
Restricting oil loss due to seal failure whilst on passage
- Use of high-viscosity oil – Recharge the system with a thicker oil to reduce leakage rate through damaged seals.
- Temporary oil supply arrangement –
- Disconnect the existing oil supply line.
- Connect a 45-gallon drum supported by a block and tackle arrangement.
- Adjust the drum height to vary the oil head pressure, matching it to the surrounding water pressure and minimizing leakage.
- Fresh water introduction – Supply fresh water to the gravity tank to emulsify with any leaked oil. The resulting emulsion helps coagulate around the damaged seal area while the oil is circulated to maintain lubrication and sealing.
Materials for Sealing Rings and Propeller Shaft Liner:
- Sealing Rings: Nitrile rubber (NBR) is a commonly used material for stern tube sealing rings due to its good oil resistance, elasticity, and relatively low cost.
- Shaft Liner: Chrome-plated steel is a common material for stern tube liners. The chrome plating provides a hard, smooth, and corrosion-resistant surface, minimizing wear and improving the life of the sealing rings.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q2 (16 Marks)
Cargo & Tankers
(a) Sketch a line diagram showing a typical Inert Gas System used for inerting the cargo tanks of oil tankers. labelling the component parts.
(b) Describe the system
(c) State what oxygen content you would expect in the flue gases if good combustion is achieved (16)
Appeared In: Aug 2023
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Components in line: boiler uptake/ flue gas source -> sea water washing/scrubbing tower (flue gas scrubber with centrifugal blower drawing flue gas) -> demister/moisture separator -> inert gas (flue gas) blower -> inert gas cooler (optional) -> non-return/PT (pressure/vacuum situations) valve -> deck water seal -> distribution main along deck -> cross-over valves / branch lines -> gas risers (drop lines) into each cargo tank -> tank pressure/vacuum relief or venting. Automated controls: oxygen analyser and SO2/temperature/density monitor on the discharge, relief valve to atmosphere, overboard discharge/dump line, and connection to the tank atmosphere control.
The inert gas system (IGS) supplies inert gas, normally the flue gas from the main or auxiliary boilers, to keep the cargo tank atmosphere above the flammable range and to prevent the formation of an explosive mixture during cargo handling. Flue gas, which contains only a small residual oxygen (about 2-5 per cent depending on combustion), is drawn from the boiler uptake by a centrifugal/inert gas blower and passed into a sea-water scrubber/cleaning tower. In the scrubber the gas is cooled and washed by sprays of sea water, which removes sulphur dioxide, soot and ash and reduces its temperature, while also lowering the oxygen slightly. The cleaned, cooled gas then passes through a demister (mist eliminator) to remove entrained water droplets, and then through the deck water seal - a tank of water through which the gas passes - which acts as a non-return barrier preventing cargo vapour or tank gas from flowing back into the machinery space. From the water seal the gas goes to a deck distribution main, and from there through branch lines and drop lines (risers) down into each cargo tank via tank valves. The gas flows into the tank pressing the atmosphere; the excess gas and vapours are displaced out through the vent lines and the relief (or through the tank's PV valve) as the inert gas purges the tank of air. Continuous oxygen analysis on the discharge diverts gas overboard if the oxygen content exceeds the safe limit. A high-pressure/high-vacuum relief valve protects the system, and during loading the IGS is adjusted to maintain a slight positive pressure in the tanks so that air cannot enter.
With good (complete, slightly excess air) combustion the flue gas will typically contain about 2-5 per cent oxygen (often stated as approximately 3 per cent), the balance being mainly nitrogen and carbon dioxide, with the carbon dioxide content typically 12-14 per cent and little carbon monoxide. The IGS is required to supply gas with oxygen content not exceeding about 5 per cent (SOLAS requires below 8 per cent entering the tanks, but good practice well below that).
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (16 Marks)
Auxiliary Machinery 🔥 Repeated 8x
With reference to a tubular heat exchanger: state the various types used on board a ship and explain with sketches how the construction, flow pattern, baffles differ from each other depending upon the medium in use (16)
Appeared In: Dec 2025 Nov 2025 Oct 2025 Jun 2025 Feb 2025 Jul 2024 Aug 2023 Jun 2026
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Tubular heat exchangers and their construction variations
Types used on board ship
- Shell and tube heat exchangers (coolers) for sea-water cooling of lubricating oil (lube oil cooler), freshwater (FW cooler), jacket cooling water, fuel oil (fuel heater/cooler), and for steam condensers.
- Double-pipe (hairpin) heat exchangers, which are two concentric pipes.
- U-tube / multipass shell-and-tube exchangers, and floating-head (floating tube sheet) exchangers to allow for thermal expansion.
- Plate heat exchangers are technically not tubular but are used in some duties; the question concerns tubular ones, so the focus is shell-and-tube.
Construction, flow pattern and baffles depending on the medium
Shell-and-tube construction: a cylindrical shell (e.g. steel, zinc-protected or cupro-nickel lined for sea water), with a bundle of tubes fitted between two tube sheets (headers) and secured by tube expansion/glands, the whole enclosed by channel covers. One fluid flows through the tubes (tube side) and the other through the shell in the space around the tubes (shell side), transferring heat through the tube walls.
Flow pattern: for clean fluids (e.g. oil/fresh water) a number of passes is arranged - the tubes are grouped so the fluid passes back and forth to give multipass; the shell fluid is guided across the tube bundle by baffles. Counter-flow is preferred for efficiency (hot and cold enter opposite ends); where a counter-flow cannot conveniently be arranged, a "two-pass" tube-side with shell fluid cross-flow is used. For sea water (dirty, scale-forming) the sea water is normally put on the tube side so it can be cleaned by rodding out/backflushing and so the tube bundle can be withdrawn - and a spacer/no-differential expansion design (floating head) accommodates the large thermal expansion.
Baffles: transverse baffles (segmental baffles) are fitted in the shell to force the shell-side fluid to flow back and forth across the tube bundle, increasing turbulence, mixing and the heat transfer coefficient, and supporting the long tube bundle to prevent sagging/vibration. Baffle spacing and cut shape differ with the medium: for low-viscosity or clean fluids closer baffles and a larger cut promote turbulence; for viscous oils (which have poor heat transfer and high pressure drop) the baffles are spaced wider and have a reduced cut to limit the pressure drop while still sweeping the tubes. For sea water, fewer/wider baffles reduce pressure drop and erosion.
Depending on the medium:
- Oil/fuel (viscous, poor convection): oil on shell side over a large tube area with wide, partly-cut baffles, or oil on tube side with multipass; materials tolerant of heating.
- Fresh water: may be either side; six-pass or four-pass tube arrangement common.
- Sea water (corrosive, scale forming): on the tube side, so tubes cleaned and selected in cupro-nickel; spacious shell, floating (expansion) heads to allow differential expansion; baffles arranged to maintain good cross-flow without excessive pressure drop.
- Steam (steam condenser): steam on the shell side with the cooling water in tubes; the condensate drains; baffles shaped/nozzles arranged to sweep the tubes and direct the steam.
Distinguishing sketch features: shell and flanged cover with tube bundle and tube sheets, removable floating head, the pattern of baffles (segmental plates with holes), the pass partitions, and the inlet/outlet nozzles for tube-side and shell-side.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q5 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting 🔥 Repeated 7x
With reference to shaft alignment: (16)
(a) Explain the meaning of fair curve or rational alignment
(b) Shaft alignment is often verified using hydraulic jacks to obtain a simple graph. Sketch such a graph, indicating the following:
(i) Static load
(ii) Hysteresis
(iii) Influence number
(c) Explain the limitations of checking shaft alignment solely by hydraulic jacking methods
Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jan 2026 Sep 2025 Dec 2024 Jun 2024 Aug 2023 Dec 2022
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(a) Meaning of Fair Curve / Rational Alignment
Fair curve alignment refers to the method of shaft alignment where the bearings are not arranged in a single straight line, but are deliberately set with calculated vertical offsets so that the shaft follows a smooth curve.
Explanation:
- For small-diameter shafts, bearings can often be kept in a straight line without issues.
- For large-diameter or high-power shafts, straight-line alignment causes:
- Uneven bearing loading
- High bending stress in the shaft
- Excessive wear and vibration
- In modern ships, fair curve alignment is preferred because:
- Bearing heights are adjusted individually
- Shaft load is distributed uniformly
- Bending stresses are minimized, preventing fatigue and vibration
Advantages of Fair Curve Alignment:
- Uniform bearing load distribution, reducing localized stress.
- Lower shaft bending stress, enhancing structural integrity.
- Reduced vibration, ensuring smoother operation.
- Longer bearing life, lowering maintenance costs.
(b) Shaft Alignment Check Using Hydraulic Jacks
The hydraulic jacking method is commonly used to verify shaft alignment by measuring the bearing loads when the shaft is lifted and plotting a graph of jack load vs. vertical displacement.
Procedure:
- Place a hydraulic jack near the bearing to be checked.
- Fix a dial gauge to measure vertical movement of the shaft.
- Slowly lift and lower the shaft using the jack.
- Record jack load and shaft displacement readings.
- Plot a graph of load versus displacement.
Graph Indications:
- (i) Static Load
- The load acting on the bearing at zero lift.
- Represents the actual operational load on the bearing when the shaft is at rest.
- (ii) Hysteresis
- The difference between the lifting and lowering curves.
- Caused by:
- Friction between shaft and bearing
- Oil film resistance
- Elastic deformation of the bearing
- Hysteresis indicates energy loss and affects measurement accuracy.
- (iii) Influence Number
- Represents the change in load per unit vertical movement of a bearing (N/mm).
- Shows the effect of raising one bearing on the load of other bearings.
- Used in fair curve alignment calculations to adjust bearing heights accurately.
(c) Limitations of Hydraulic Jacking Method
- Measures Only Vertical Loads
- Does not accurately measure horizontal bearing reactions.
- Less effective for resiliently mounted reduction gears.
- Time-Consuming
- Requires many readings for multiple bearings.
- Labour-intensive and difficult in restricted engine room spaces.
- Accuracy Issues
- Misalignment of the jack or dial gauge introduces errors.
- Shaft centerline mismatch reduces precision.
- Can produce wide hysteresis, complicating interpretation.
- Requires Skilled Interpretation
- Jacking curves vary depending on bearing type.
- Only trained personnel can correctly analyze the results.
- Hysteresis Effects
- Friction and oil film can cause non-linear readings.
- Lack of a load cell amplifies measurement errors.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q7 (16 Marks)
Auxiliary Machinery
(a) Describe with aid of a line diagram the layout and components of a hydraulic system suitable for the operation of deck machinery (8)
(b) Explain how the hydraulic system pressure is controlled assuming the use of a variable Delivery pump. (4)
(c) State which design of hydraulic motor is used in the system described in (a). (4)
Appeared In: Aug 2023
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
When the variable delivery pump operates at a given speed, the flow rate of hydraulic fluid leaving the pump can be adjusted. By reducing the flow rate leaving the pump, the pressure in the system will increase since the same amount of hydraulic fluid is being pressurized in a smaller amount of time. Conversely, increasing the flow rate leaving the pump will lower the system pressure as the hydraulic fluid is pressurized over a larger volume.
Control valves (directional valves) can be used to direct the flow of hydraulic fluid to the hydraulic motors, and by adjusting these valves, operators can control the pressure and flow to achieve the desired deck machinery operation.
- They offer excellent efficiency, ensuring that a high percentage of the hydraulic energy is converted into mechanical power.
- These motors provide high torque at low speeds, making them suitable for applications where heavy loads need to be lifted or moved slowly.
- They can effectively handle variable flow rates, which is essential for providing variable speed and torque control for deck machinery operations.
- The speed and torque of the motor can be precisely controlled by varying the flow rate from the variable delivery pump.
- Hydraulic radial piston motors are known for their durability and ability to withstand the demanding conditions typically encountered in marine applications, making them a suitable choice for deck machinery on ships.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q8 (16 Marks)
Steering & Deck Machinery 🔥 Repeated 10x
Sketch and describe a "fail safe steering gear" suitable for use on a tanker of more thar 100,000 T DWT. Explain the sequence of events that take place when an oil leak takes place in one of the hydraulic pipelines
Appeared In: Oct 2024 Dec 2023 Aug 2023 Jul 2023 Mar 2023 Feb 2021 Feb 2019 Oct 2018 Aug 2018 Jul 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
According to SOLAS chapter - 2, part 1, regulation 29.16, every tanker of more than 10,000 GT shall comply with the following:
- The main steering capability due to a single failure in any part of one of the power actuating systems shall be regained in not more than 45 seconds.
- The main steering shall comprise at least two identical power actuating systems, each capable of meeting the requirements. Loss of fluid from one system shall be capable of being detected, and the defective system shall automatically get isolated so that the other system shall remain fully operational
Considering the above regulatory requirements, given below is a “Fail Safe steering gear” suitable for use on a tanker of more than 100,000 T DWT.
Shown in the diagram is a “Fail safe steering gear” having two independent power actuating systems that can
- Work simultaneously in normal operation, meeting the requirement OR
- Work independently and meet the requirement
- In the event of loss of fluid from any one system, it can be detected and isolated automatically so that the other system can remain fully operational.
Working:
- The system incorporates two sets of electric-driven pumps. Both main and auxiliary pumps are on the same shaft. The main pump shown in the diagram is a variable delivery pump
- The variable delivery pump takes suction from the tank and supplies hydraulic oil to the ram cylinders. The oil flow of the pump is determined by the pump actuating lever
- The movement of the pump actuating lever is controlled by the rudder angle order given by the bridge with the help of a bi-directional control valve
- A two-way shock relief valve is fitted between the two cylinders to release the pressure from one side of the cylinder to the other side in case of pressure increase in one of the cylinders due to heavy seas
- By-pass valves are also fitted between two cylinders, which are normally shut during operation. When one system is stopped, there is a pressure drop, as the auxiliary pump has also stopped this opens the by-pass valves, thus removing the hydraulic lock of the ram operation.
- Auto isolation valves in the system are there to isolate one system in case of any failure.
Sequence of events during hydraulic oil leak:
Case 1: Consider an oil leak from any pipe for cylinders 1 and 2 with the No. 1 pump running:
- No. 1 tank level will come down to L1, and it will sound an alarm on the bridge and in ECR
- When the tank level further drops to L2, i.e. low-low level, the no. 1 pump stops.
- Stopping the No. 1 pump also stops the attached auxiliary pump. So the line pressure drops, due to which the normally closed by-pass valves ‘X’ and ‘Y’ open.
- Simultaneously, the auto isolation valves ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’ will be operated by an electric signal. A, B and C are normally open valves. The electric signal will close them. So, systems 1 and 2 will be completely separated. Thus, the defective system, I.e. system 1, is isolated.
- Along with the operation of the auto isolation valves, the No. 2 pump will start automatically. The attached auxiliary pump will act on the by-pass valve ‘Y’ and close it. This enables cylinders 3 and 4 to be in normal operation.
- It should also be noted that since system 1 is completely isolated, there is no oil pressure to operate the bypass valve. So the by-pass valves remain open, thereby removing the hydraulic lock for the ram movement in cylinders 1 and 2
Case 2: Consider an oil leakage from any pipe of cylinders 3 and 4 with the No. 1 pump running:
Points 1, 2 and 3 are the same as case 1
- Simultaneously, the auto isolation valves ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’ will be operated by an electric signal. This will shut the normally open valves A, B and C. Thus, systems 1 and 2 will be completely separated
- Along with the operation of auto isolation valves, the No. 2 pump will start automatically. The attached auxiliary pump will act on the by-pass valve ‘Y’ and close. So, cylinders 3 and 4 will come into normal operation.
- Now, since the leak is between the pipe of cylinders 3 and 4, the level of the no. 2 tank will drop to L1 and give an alarm.
- The level will further drop to L2, but the pump will not stop and changeover to ensure that the leak is from the pipe of cylinders 3 and 4
- When the no. 2 tank level drops to L3, the no. 2 pump stops and the no. 1 pump starts to operate the steering using cylinders 1 and 2
- Starting the no. 1 pump will ensure that the by-pass valve ‘X’ is shut, and stopping the no. 2 pump will ensure that the by-pass valve ‘Y’ is open
This ensures the operation of the steering Gear with the defective system fully isolated.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q1 (16 Marks)
Steering & Deck Machinery 🔥 Repeated 6x
(a) Describe with the aid of sketches where necessary a vane type steering gear showing how the weight of the rudder and stock are carried and the arrangement that allow for wear down. (10)
(b) State how the vanes described in (a) are secured and the method of sealing the edges. (3)
(c) State how, if necessary, the steering gear is locked for rudder maintenance (3)
Appeared In: Dec 2025 Oct 2025 Mar 2025 Sep 2023 Apr 2023 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- The rotor is fitted to the tapered rudder stock. The rudder stock carries the weight of the rudder, supported by a rudder carrier bearing.
- The stator is fixed to the ship’s structure, forming a rigid support.
- The fixed vanes are evenly spaced inside the stator bore, while the rotating vanes are equally spaced on the rotor.
- These vanes form two sets of pressure chambers in the annular space between the rotor and stator. Hydraulic fluid is supplied at pressure to one set of chambers, causing the rotor and rudder to rotate in the required direction based on the steering order from the wheelhouse.
- The weight of the rudder and rudder stock is carried by the rudder carrier bearing, which is mounted on steel chocks supported by thicker deck plating to ensure stability and handle the load.
- There is a vertical clearance between the stator flange and the anchor bracket to allow for rudder "jump" (vertical movement).
- Another clearance exists between the top of the anchor bracket and the stator flange to accommodate for rudder wear down or rudder drop over time. The total clearance provided is around 38 mm, allowing the system to absorb wear and vertical movement without affecting performance.
- The fixed and rotary vanes are made from modular cast iron and are secured to the rotor and stator using high-tensile steel dowel pins and cap screws to maintain strength and prevent detachment under stress. A key is fitted along the length of the rotary vanes to provide additional reinforcement and ensure the strength of the rotor.
- The sealing of the vanes is achieved using sealing strips made of cast iron. These strips are fitted into grooves along the edges of the vanes. The sealing strips are backed by elastically loaded synthetic rubber, which provides a tight seal by pressing against the faces of both the fixed and rotating vanes. This arrangement prevents hydraulic fluid leakage.
- Hydraulic Locking: This involves closing the manual isolating valves provided for each cylinder (in ram-type systems) or each vane chamber (in vane-type systems). This prevents hydraulic fluid flow, thus immobilizing the rudder.
- Mechanical Locking: Three methods are available:
- A spanner is fitted to the rudder stock head nut and secured to the ship's structure, directly preventing rudder movement.
- If provided, tow gigs are fitted between the crosshead and cylinder base, mechanically locking the steering mechanism
- (Assuming a braking system is integrated into the design) Engaging the brake will prevent any movement of the rudder.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q2 (16 Marks)
Steering & Deck Machinery 🔥 Repeated 7x
(a) Describe the principle of a coil-operated brake suitable for winches and other deck machinery (8)
(b) Explain with suitable sketches how the windlass is relieved of strain when riding at anchor. (8)
Appeared In: Jan 2024 Sep 2023 Mar 2021 Jan 2021 Dec 2018 Nov 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
A coil-operated brake for winches and deck machinery is designed to automatically adjust the braking force in response to changes in the load on the mooring line. This system ensures the correct force is applied between the brake band and the winch drum at all times.
The core principle is that when an additional load is applied to the mooring line, the line stretches, which in turn loosens the tightening mechanism. This loosening action automatically causes the brake to apply the correct force, maintaining constant tension. This has the significant advantage of being a self-adjusting system, meaning that once it's set, there's no need for a crew member to periodically re-apply the recommended torque. The brake is typically released using a hydraulic lever.
When a vessel is riding at anchor, a mechanism is used to lock the anchor chain and relieve the windlass of the strain. This is crucial for preventing damage to the windlass and ensuring the anchor is securely held.
A Cable stopper, often a pawl of a rod, is engaged with a link of the anchor chain. The pawl acts as a stop, preventing the chain from moving. All the weight and force from the anchor and the vessel's movement are then transferred to this locking device and the ship's structure, effectively relieving the windlass of any strain.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (16 Marks)
Cargo & Tankers 🔥 Repeated 4x
With reference to the carriage and pumping of liquefied gas cargo:
(a) Sketch a suitable pumping system labelling the component parts. (5)
(b) State
(i) Why submerged hydraulically driven pumps are not used. (3)
(ii) How overheating of pump drive shaft bearings is avoided (3)
(c) State how the risk of fire and explosion in cargo tanks is obviated both in the loaded and discharged condition. (5)
Appeared In: Jan 2025 - 1 Sep 2023 Feb 2023 Jan 2017
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(ii) Overheating of the pump drive shaft bearings is prevented by using the shaft housing (which also acts as a cargo riser) to cool and lubricate the bearings.
- Continuous boil-off gas reliquefaction
- Relief valves to release excess pressure
- Inert gas blanketing of the cargo hold; and
- If cargo hold is considered as secondary barrier, then if primary barrier/ cargo tank leaks then the flammable gas should not get oxygen to from an explosive mixture. So cargo hold is inverted.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q7 (16 Marks)
Control & Instrumentation 🔥 Repeated 7x
Describe with a sketch a pneumatic relay and show how feedback can be achieved when such a relay is used in conjunction with a flapper mechanism (16)
Appeared In: Mar 2025 Sep 2023 Oct 2020 Oct 2018 Aug 2018 Jul 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The pneumatic relay operates on the principle of a nozzle-flapper arrangement. Air supply pressure acts on a diaphragm located below a spring. A rod and plug, connected to the diaphragm, control the flow of output air through a nozzle. A flapper is positioned near the nozzle.
Operation:
- An input signal (which can be a change in pressure or displacement of the flapper) affects the flapper's position.
- Flapper movement changes the distance between the flapper and the nozzle. A decrease in distance (flapper closer to the nozzle) restricts the output airflow. Conversely, an increase in distance increases output airflow. This is the direct action of the relay.
- Changes in the output air flow alter the back pressure at the nozzle.
- Increased nozzle back pressure pushes the diaphragm downwards, compressing the spring and further reducing the output airflow. Decreased nozzle back pressure allows the spring to push the diaphragm upwards, increasing output airflow.
- A portion of the output air is fed back through a line connected to a bellows and a feedback-adjusting spring (as shown in the sketch). This feedback pressure acts against the diaphragm, opposing the effect of the input signal. The bellows and spring arrangement allow the system to fine-tune the feedback strength. This negative feedback stabilises the system and increases the control range, preventing excessive overshoot or oscillation. The feedback mechanism subtracts from the effective input pressure, acting as a negative feedback loop.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q8 (16 Marks)
Steering & Deck Machinery 🔥 Repeated 4x
With reference to hull cathodic protection systems of the impressed current type: (16)
(a) Sketch and describe such a system
(b) Explain how protection may be ensured for the rudder and propeller
(c) State any precautions that should be taken when this type of system is installed.
Appeared In: Oct 2025 Feb 2025 Oct 2023 Feb 2023
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
An Impressed Current Cathodic Protection (ICCP) system protects the underwater hull from corrosion by making the ship’s hull the cathode of an electrochemical cell. A rectifier supplies controlled DC current to inert anodes, while the hull receives the return current and is protected from corrosion. ICCP systems on ships use a DC source and inert anodes such as MMO/titanium, with automatic regulation based on hull potential measured by reference electrodes.
Working:
- AC supply is fed to a transformer-rectifier unit.
- The rectifier converts AC to low-voltage DC.
- The positive terminal is connected to inert anodes (usually titanium/MMO) fitted externally on the hull.
- The negative terminal is connected to the ship’s hull.
- Current flows from anodes → seawater → hull.
- The hull becomes cathodic, so corrosion of hull steel is prevented.
- Reference electrodes (silver/silver chloride / zinc type) measure hull potential.
- The automatic controller adjusts output current so hull potential remains within the protective range, avoiding under-protection or over-protection.
Main components
- Transformer/rectifier
- Automatic control panel
- Inert anodes
- Reference electrodes / potential sensors
- Hull bonding cables and monitoring arrangement
Rudder
- The rudder may be electrically insulated by bearings/pintles, so bonding is required.
- Protection is ensured by:
- flexible bonding straps / cables across rudder stock, carrier bearing or pintles
- sometimes supplementary sacrificial anodes on rudder
- This ensures the rudder remains electrically continuous with the hull and receives cathodic protection.
Propeller
- The propeller shaft is often electrically insulated from the hull by the oil film in stern tube and bearings.
- Therefore, ICCP current may not protect the propeller effectively.
- Protection is ensured by fitting a shaft earthing / shaft bonding device:
- slip ring on shaft
- silver/graphite brushes to hull earth
- This provides electrical continuity between shaft/propeller and hull, and also prevents bearing pitting due to shaft potential. A turning propeller is often insulated from the hull by the lubricating oil film, so a shaft earthing device with brushes and slip ring is used to avoid bearing damage and improve protection.
- Do not overprotect the hull: Excess current can damage paint coating and may cause hydrogen effects on high-strength steel.
- Maintain electrical continuity: Ensure proper bonding of rudder, shaft, stabilizers, thrusters, sea chests, etc.
- Inspect anodes and reference cells regularly: Keep them clean, undamaged, and properly insulated from hull structure where required.
- Check and calibrate control system: Reference electrodes and controller must be tested periodically for correct hull potential.
- Avoid stray current interference: Careful cable insulation and earthing arrangement to prevent corrosion of nearby fittings.
- During dry dock: Switch off ICCP before docking/undocking and inspect anodes, shields, and hull coating condition.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q9 (16 Marks)
Materials & Testing 🔥 Repeated 8x
With reference to Keyless Propellers:
(a) Sketch a section through a keyless sleeved propeller. (4)
(b) State the advantages of using a keyless sleeved propeller. (4)
(c) State with reasons, which metal sleeve, should be made for contact with the forged mild steel tail shaft. (4)
(d) State the material used to bond the sleeve to the propeller and the general thickness of the bonding material. (4)
Appeared In: Jan 2026 Jun 2024 Dec 2023 Oct 2023 Mar 2019 Jan 2019 Sep 2018 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- Keyless design avoids stress concentration caused by keys and keyways.
- Stresses are evenly distributed across the internal surface of the propeller boss
- The absence of a keyway increases the friction available for torque transmission.
- The design prevents overstressing or permanent damage to the propeller hub during operation.
- The keyless arrangement simplifies the propeller and shaft interface, making it easier to manufacture and maintain.
- With a coefficient of friction of 0.28, it minimizes the likelihood of propeller slippage.
- Its expansion rates are similar to those of steel, reducing the risk of misalignment or loosening during temperature variations.
- Pearlitic cast iron exhibits excellent resistance to fretting, which is important for prolonged and reliable operation.
- High-strength epoxy Araldite filling is used to bond the sleeve to the propeller securely.
- The bonding material is applied with a thickness of approximately 1 mm, ensuring adequate adhesion and durability.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q1 (16 Marks)
Boilers & Steam 🔥 Repeated 7x
Sketch and describe a boiler water level controller of the float operated type. State the reasons for having this mechanism on the boiler and using this controller and boiler for analogy explain the following terms. (16)
(a) Detecting element
(b) Servo motor
(c) Desired Value
Appeared In: Nov 2024 Nov 2023 Feb 2021 Sep 2018 Jul 2018 Feb 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Boiler Water Level Controller – Float Operated Type
A simple float-operated water level controller consists of:
- A float chamber connected to the boiler steam drum by two lines — one for steam and one for water.
- A float inside the chamber, which rises and falls with changes in water level.
- A mechanical linkage or rod attached to the float, which extends to an electric sensor unit mounted above the chamber.
Working Principle:
- As the float moves up or down, it shifts a contactor along a variable resistance track or magnetic switches.
- This movement changes the electrical output signal, which is sent to a square-root converter.
- The converter transforms the electrical signal into a proportional pneumatic signal.
- The pneumatic signal acts on the diaphragm of the feed water control valve actuator, modulating feed flow to maintain the set water level.
Reasons for Using a Float-Operated Type
- Reliability: Unlike constant/variable head leg systems, there is no need to maintain a filled reference column.
- Simplified Installation: Electrical sensing eliminates the need for long impulse tubes for remote indication.
- Ease of Maintenance: The electric sensor unit can be easily replaced without dismantling the float chamber.
- Lower Cost: Fewer mechanical parts and no head leg piping reduce installation and maintenance expenses.
Explanation of Terms (Analogy with Controller and Boiler)
: In this system, the float is the detecting element. It directly senses the water level, which is the controlled variable, and its movement provides a signal that represents the current state of the system.
: The square root converter and the feedwater controller collectively act as the servo motor. They are the mechanisms that receive the signal from the detecting element and perform the physical action (opening or closing the feedwater valve) to correct the water level.
: The set point is the desired value. This is a fixed input to the square root converter (or a comparator) that represents the ideal water level that the system aims to maintain. The controller continuously works to match the actual water level to this desired value.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q2 (16 Marks)
Control & Instrumentation 🔥 Repeated 4x
Sketch, and describe, a valve suitable for reducing air pressure and maintaining the reduced pressure within close limits. Describe the processes through which air from the starting air receivers should be treated before it is used in a pneumatic control system. (16)
Appeared In: Jul 2026 Sep 2024 Nov 2023 Mar 2023
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Operation:
- The valve operates based on the balance of forces acting upon it:
- Downward Force: P1 × A, where P1 is the inlet pressure and A is the diaphragm area.
- Upward Force: (P1−P2) × a+f, where P2 is the outlet pressure, a is the valve area, and f is the spring force.
At equilibrium:
- P1×A = (P1−P2) × a+f
- If P1, A, and a are constant, P2 is directly proportional to the spring force f.
- The discharge pressure P2 can be adjusted by rotating the adjustment screw, which changes the spring force f.
Hence, if supply pressure is kept constant, the discharge pressure can be reduced or increased by rotating the adjustment screw.
process:
- The high-pressure air from the main air receiver is passed through a pressure-reducing valve, lowering the pressure to a range of 7–8 bar suitable for pneumatic systems.
- The air is passed through a filter to remove oil and water carried over from the compressor. This step eliminates contaminants that could affect system performance.
- The filtered air is sent through a dryer containing materials like silica gel or activated alumina to remove residual moisture. Dry air prevents corrosion and freezing in control lines.
- Regular drainage of accumulated water, oil, and condensate is necessary to maintain the air quality and prevent blockages in the system.
Now the air is clean & dry enough to be suitable for use in pneumatic control systems.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q8 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting
With reference to main propulsion shaft systems:
(a) Describe a method of hydraulic jacking to check bearing loads. (8)
(b) Sketch the Bearing Load versus Shift Lift Dial Gauge Reading graph obtained by the method described in part (a), annotating the graph and how the characteristic of bearing load is obtained. (8)
Appeared In: Nov 2023
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
If the jacking is taken too far, then adjacent bearings gradually become unloaded and the plot is affected by a change in the elastic system. To guard against this, dial gauges are fixed on adjacent bearings to ensure that the lift is limited to the bearing that is being checked.
The jack-up curves indicate a higher jack load than the jack-down curves. This hysteresis is caused by friction. It is compensated by taking the average value of the jack loads obtained from the lifting and the lowering curve.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q9 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting 🔥 Repeated 5x
With respect to Energy efficient running of ships:
(a) Sketch and explain the optimization of propeller hull interface flow devices and improvement of propulsion efficiency. (8)
(b) sketch and explain the optimization of Auxiliary machinery using VFDs. (8)
Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jan 2026 Jun 2024 Nov 2023 Jul 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Energy-Efficient Running of Ships
The propulsion efficiency of a ship does not depend only on the propeller design. The flow of water approaching and leaving the propeller is equally important. Unfavourable inflow, uneven velocity distribution, vortex formation and rotational energy in the propeller slipstream result in energy losses, even when the propeller itself is well designed.
To reduce these hydrodynamic losses, Energy Saving Devices (ESDs) are fitted around the propeller–hull interface. These devices guide, straighten or deflect the water flow so that the propeller can convert more of the available engine power into useful thrust.
ESDs are particularly useful for existing ships, where replacing the complete propulsion system may not be technically or economically practical. Depending on the type of device and the ship's operating profile, they can provide a measurable improvement in propulsion efficiency and reduction in fuel consumption.
Common devices include:
1. Propeller Nozzle
A propeller nozzle is an annular hydrodynamic structure fitted around the propeller. It guides and directs the water flow through the propeller and improves the inflow conditions.
The shape and position of the nozzle help convert a greater portion of the propeller-generated impulse into useful axial thrust.
The benefit is particularly significant at low ship speeds and high propeller loading, where an open propeller is comparatively less efficient.
Advantages:
- Increased thrust at low speed and heavy load.
- Improved propeller efficiency.
- Useful during manoeuvring and operation against currents.
- Particularly suitable for tugs, dredgers and workboats.
- Provides better handling and working capability in laden conditions.
2. Guiding Fins / Stators
Guiding fins, also called stators, are generally fitted ahead of the propeller. They modify the incoming water flow by aligning and redistributing it, reducing swirl and making the velocity distribution over the propeller disc more uniform.
As a result, water reaches the propeller blades at more favourable angles of attack, improving the hydrodynamic performance of the propeller.
Advantages:
- More uniform water inflow.
- More even loading of propeller blades.
- Better utilisation of available shaft power.
- Reduced local blade overloading.
- Reduced vibration and pressure pulses.
- Reduced possibility of cavitation.
- Lower fuel consumption.
- Reduced stress and wear on the propeller, shaft line and bearings.
3. Propeller Boss Cap Fins (PBCF)
Behind a conventional propeller hub, a concentrated rotating flow called a hub vortex is normally formed. This vortex contains kinetic energy that does not contribute to useful propulsion and is therefore lost as vortex energy and turbulence in the propeller wake.
The hub vortex may also cause:
- Additional energy losses.
- Increased turbulence in the wake.
- Pressure pulses and vibration.
- Adverse interaction with the rudder and other stern components.
Propeller Boss Cap Fins (PBCF) are fitted to the propeller boss cap to reduce the strength of the hub vortex. By recovering part of the rotational energy and improving the flow leaving the propeller, they can increase propulsion efficiency and reduce energy losses.
Variable Frequency Drives (VFDs) are used to control the speed of electric motors driving auxiliary machinery such as centrifugal pumps, fans, blowers and compressors.
In conventional systems, an electric motor often runs at a constant speed, while the required flow or pressure is controlled using valves, dampers or bypass arrangements. This wastes energy because the motor continues to operate at full speed even when the actual demand is low.
With a VFD, the frequency and voltage supplied to the motor are varied according to the required load. Therefore, the motor speed can be adjusted to match the actual demand of the auxiliary machinery.
Working Principle
AC supply → VFD → Variable-frequency/variable-speed motor → Auxiliary machinery
The VFD changes the frequency supplied to the motor:
Frequency ↓ → Motor speed ↓ → Flow ↓ → Power consumption ↓
When demand increases:
Frequency ↑ → Motor speed ↑ → Flow ↑ → Power consumption ↑
For centrifugal pumps and fans, the affinity laws show that:
- Flow ∝ Speed
- Pressure/Head ∝ Speed²
- Power ∝ Speed³
Therefore, even a small reduction in motor speed can produce a large reduction in power consumption.
Applications on Ships
VFDs can be used for:
- Sea-water and fresh-water cooling pumps.
- Boiler feed-water and circulation pumps.
- Ventilation and engine-room fans.
- Air-conditioning and chilled-water pumps.
- Fuel and oil circulation systems, where applicable.
- Other variable-load auxiliary machinery.
Advantages of VFDs
- Reduced electrical power consumption by matching motor speed to actual demand.
- Reduced fuel consumption, because less electrical power is generated by the ship's generators.
- Better control of flow and pressure without excessive throttling or bypassing.
- Reduced mechanical wear due to smooth starting and stopping.
- Reduced starting current and mechanical shock.
- Improved operating efficiency during part-load conditions.
- Reduced running hours/load on diesel generators, helping optimise generator operation.
- Overall improvement in the ship's energy efficiency and operating cost.
Example
Consider a cooling-water pump operating at full speed when only 70% flow is required. Instead of keeping the pump at full speed and throttling the discharge valve, the VFD reduces the motor speed to approximately the required level.
Because pump power varies approximately with the cube of speed, a reduction in speed can result in a significant reduction in electrical power consumption.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q2 (16 Marks)
Fire Protection & Safety 🔥 Repeated 3x
With reference to automatic sprinkler system for firefighting purposes:
(a) Explain, with the aid of a heat release versus time diagram, the difference between fire control and fire suppression. (6)
(b) State the limitations of using glass bulb to activate sprinkler heads and suggest, with reasons, an alternative mechanism. (4)
(c) The safety devices incorporated in the system. (3)
(d) The parameters governing the volume of the pressure tank. (3)
Appeared In: Aug 2026 Dec 2023 Sep 2022
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Fire suppression can be defined as quickly lowering the heat release rate of a fire and preventing its regrowth using sufficient application of water through flames to the seat of the fire.
Key Differences in Performance
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q6 (16 Marks)
Control & Instrumentation 🔥 Repeated 2x
(a) Describe, with the aid of a sketch, an external system for reducing engine NOx emissions, explaining the chemistry of the process. (8)
(b) Explain why Urea is used in the Selective Catalytic Reduction process instead of ammonia. (4)
(c) Explain why the exhaust gas quality must be monitored before and after the Selective Catalytic Reduction unit, stating how such monitoring influences operation of the SCR unit. (4)
Appeared In: Sep 2024 Dec 2023
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Selective Catalytic Reduction is a means of converting nitrous oxides in the exhaust with the help of a catalyst into diatomic nitrogen and water.
A reductant Anhydrous Ammonia (NH3), Aqueous Ammonia (Ammonium Hydroxide) or Urea (Carbamide) solution is added to a stream of exhaust gas and is adsorbed onto a catalyst. Carbon Dioxide (CO2) is a reaction product when urea is used as the reductant.
The chemical equation for the reaction using either anhydrous aqueous ammonia for the process is
4NO + 4NH3 + O2 = 4N2 + 6H2O
2NO2 + 4NH3 + O2 = 3N2 + 6H2O
NO + NO2 + 2NH3 = 2N2 + 3H2O
The reaction for urea instead of anhydrous or aqueous ammonia is
4NO + 2(NH2)2CO + O2 = 4N2 + 4H2O + 2CO2 (in presence of catalyst)
Selective Catalytic Reduction
This exhaust gas after-treatment technology has a NOx abatement capability Of more than 80%. The SCR concept involves injecting a Urea-Water solution into the exhaust gas stream in combination with a special catalyst unit.
The SCR is considered as an additional and independent exhaust treatment system and as such does not interfere with the basic engine design or combustion process.
The process diagram below gives a better understanding of the SCR system wherein the urea interacts with nitrous oxides present in the incoming exhaust gas, in the presence of a catalyst, converting it into free nitrogen and water vapour.
The Maritime Environmental Protection Committee (MEPC) At The IMO has published guidelines for the certification of selective catalytic reduction (SCR) systems, referred to the “SCR Guideline”, namely IMO Resolution MEPC.198(62).
According to their configurations, SCRs can Be Classified into 2 Types- They can be either installed between The Exhaust Gas Manifold & The Turbocharger or between The Turbocharger and The Exhaust Gas Boiler.
1. High-Pressure SCR
In the High-Pressure SCR, the reactor is placed before the turbocharger. A sufficient exhaust gas temperature is to be maintained between 300 to 400 deg Celsius, which might be challenging when the engine is running at low loads and manoeuvring.
Therefore, for two-stroke engines, the most likely location of the SCR unit is before the turbocharger in order to expand the active range of SCR operation. This has little to no effect on the engine combustion process.
It is possible to run high-pressure SCRs on Heavy Fuel Oil.
2. Low-Pressure SCR
In Low-Pressure SCRs, the reactor is placed after the turbine. Pre-heating of the exhaust gas stream may be necessary in order to achieve a sufficient temperature at the reactor inlet for the catalytic reaction. Some power generation may be needed for preheating.
Components of an SCR Dosing Unit
The dosing unit consists of a compact external dosing system having a urea-water solution tank. The tank size depends upon how often the vessel enters NOx Tier III areas and how often the SCR is put in use. Urea Tank capacities range from 4 to 10 cub metres/MW for larger engines.
The area for marine use is usually dissolved in water having a concentration of 32%-40%. Urea is a non-toxic odourless solution considered safe to transport and store at ambient temperature & pressure. However special caution is required in winter temperatures in order to avoid crystallization.
The dosing handling system provides the reducing agent (urea solution) based on the dosing demand signal provided by the SCR and Engine control and monitoring system.
Vaporizer/ Mixing Unit
The urea from the dosing system is metered and injected into the vaporizer or mixing unit. The injected reducing agent (urea) will vaporise and mix with the incoming exhaust gas.
The mixing unit is in line with the exhaust manifold of the engine and its pipes are designed & constructed after complex flow calculations & intensive testing, to ensure a good mixture of the urea solution & hot exhaust gases. The mixing unit is usually 2 to 6 meters long and 500mm in diameter, however, size may vary as per Engine size.
Injection tubes from the dosing unit penetrate the vaporizer from the bottom, the top of the vaporizer is equipped with an electronic enclosure having a NOx measurement sensor to monitor nitrous oxides in the exhaust gas and Backpressure sensor.
SCR Reactor Chamber
This is where the conversion of NOx in exhaust gas into nitrogen and water takes place in the presence of catalyst material. The SCR reactor contains cassettes of the catalyst substrate material. The substrate elements work in limited temperatures, if exhaust gas temperature is too high, the elements get destroyed.
If the temperature is too low, SCR efficiency is reduced. Catalyst element contains Vanadium Pentoxide (V2O5) which helps the reaction process of converting the urea and exhaust gas into nitrogen and water vapour. The SCR reactor volume is usually 1.5-3 cub metres/MW installed power.
Fuel Oil Quality and SCR technology
The sulphur content in fuel oil and consequent SO2 concentration in the exhaust gas is a critical parameter which has to be observed while operating SCR systems. Urea temperature is to be controlled according to sulphur content in fuel.
A high sulphur content in presence of a low exhaust gas temperature (in case of manoeuvring) will require a higher temperature of urea solution to be injected as a condensation of exhaust gas could result in corrosion and catalyst substrate damage. A lesser content of sulphur in fuel will allow a lesser temperature of urea solution to be injected.
Condensation of water vapour in the presence of sulphur in the exhaust gas during low load operations can cause the formation of solid ammonium bisulphate. Thus, the exhaust inlet temperature is to be kept high enough to avoid condensation of ammonium bisulphate onto catalyst substrate elements.
Condensation would severely affect NOx reduction performance and cause clogging, increasing backpressure due to soot formation in the reactor.
Soot Blowing Unit
To prevent contamination of the reactor elements, a soot blowing system is installed. Soot blowing is done using compressed air of 7 bar.
SCR Control Sensor Unit
NOx sensors measure the NOx concentration before the SCR reactor and the turbocharger.
The reactor chamber also contains outlet NOx sensors and outlet temperature sensors.
Venting System
The venting system vents the SCR reactor when the SCR is bypassed (i.e. when the engine is running in Tier-II mode) to avoid exhaust gas accumulation and soot formation in the reactor. The reactor is vented with Fresh Air during Tier II operation.
The Reactor Sealing Valve is used to seal the reactor during venting when the SCR is not in use.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q7 (16 Marks)
Materials & Testing 🔥 Repeated 8x
With reference to Keyless Propellers:
(a) Sketch a section through a keyless sleeved propeller. (6)
(b) State the advantages of using a keyless sleeved propeller. (4)
(c) State with reasons, which metal sleeve, should be made for contact with the forged mild steel tail shaft. (3)
(d) State the material uses to bond the sleeve to the propeller and the general thickness of the bonding material. (3)
Appeared In: Jan 2026 Jun 2024 Dec 2023 Oct 2023 Mar 2019 Jan 2019 Sep 2018 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- Keyless design avoids stress concentration caused by keys and keyways.
- Stresses are evenly distributed across the internal surface of the propeller boss
- The absence of a keyway increases the friction available for torque transmission.
- The design prevents overstressing or permanent damage to the propeller hub during operation.
- The keyless arrangement simplifies the propeller and shaft interface, making it easier to manufacture and maintain.
- With a coefficient of friction of 0.28, it minimizes the likelihood of propeller slippage.
- Its expansion rates are similar to those of steel, reducing the risk of misalignment or loosening during temperature variations.
- Pearlitic cast iron exhibits excellent resistance to fretting, which is important for prolonged and reliable operation.
- High-strength epoxy Araldite filling is used to bond the sleeve to the propeller securely.
- The bonding material is applied with a thickness of approximately 1 mm, ensuring adequate adhesion and durability.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q8 (16 Marks)
Steering & Deck Machinery 🔥 Repeated 10x
Sketch and describe a "fail safe steering gear" suitable for use on a tanker of more than 100,000 T dwt; Explain the sequence of events that take place when an oil leak takes place in one of the hydraulic pipe lines. (16)
Appeared In: Oct 2024 Dec 2023 Aug 2023 Jul 2023 Mar 2023 Feb 2021 Feb 2019 Oct 2018 Aug 2018 Jul 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
According to SOLAS chapter - 2, part 1, regulation 29.16, every tanker of more than 10,000 GT shall comply with the following:
- The main steering capability due to a single failure in any part of one of the power actuating systems shall be regained in not more than 45 seconds.
- The main steering shall comprise at least two identical power actuating systems, each capable of meeting the requirements. Loss of fluid from one system shall be capable of being detected, and the defective system shall automatically get isolated so that the other system shall remain fully operational
Considering the above regulatory requirements, given below is a “Fail Safe steering gear” suitable for use on a tanker of more than 100,000 T DWT.
Shown in the diagram is a “Fail safe steering gear” having two independent power actuating systems that can
- Work simultaneously in normal operation, meeting the requirement OR
- Work independently and meet the requirement
- In the event of loss of fluid from any one system, it can be detected and isolated automatically so that the other system can remain fully operational.
Working:
- The system incorporates two sets of electric-driven pumps. Both main and auxiliary pumps are on the same shaft. The main pump shown in the diagram is a variable delivery pump
- The variable delivery pump takes suction from the tank and supplies hydraulic oil to the ram cylinders. The oil flow of the pump is determined by the pump actuating lever
- The movement of the pump actuating lever is controlled by the rudder angle order given by the bridge with the help of a bi-directional control valve
- A two-way shock relief valve is fitted between the two cylinders to release the pressure from one side of the cylinder to the other side in case of pressure increase in one of the cylinders due to heavy seas
- By-pass valves are also fitted between two cylinders, which are normally shut during operation. When one system is stopped, there is a pressure drop, as the auxiliary pump has also stopped this opens the by-pass valves, thus removing the hydraulic lock of the ram operation.
- Auto isolation valves in the system are there to isolate one system in case of any failure.
Sequence of events during hydraulic oil leak:
Case 1: Consider an oil leak from any pipe for cylinders 1 and 2 with the No. 1 pump running:
- No. 1 tank level will come down to L1, and it will sound an alarm on the bridge and in ECR
- When the tank level further drops to L2, i.e. low-low level, the no. 1 pump stops.
- Stopping the No. 1 pump also stops the attached auxiliary pump. So the line pressure drops, due to which the normally closed by-pass valves ‘X’ and ‘Y’ open.
- Simultaneously, the auto isolation valves ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’ will be operated by an electric signal. A, B and C are normally open valves. The electric signal will close them. So, systems 1 and 2 will be completely separated. Thus, the defective system, I.e. system 1, is isolated.
- Along with the operation of the auto isolation valves, the No. 2 pump will start automatically. The attached auxiliary pump will act on the by-pass valve ‘Y’ and close it. This enables cylinders 3 and 4 to be in normal operation.
- It should also be noted that since system 1 is completely isolated, there is no oil pressure to operate the bypass valve. So the by-pass valves remain open, thereby removing the hydraulic lock for the ram movement in cylinders 1 and 2
Case 2: Consider an oil leakage from any pipe of cylinders 3 and 4 with the No. 1 pump running:
Points 1, 2 and 3 are the same as case 1
- Simultaneously, the auto isolation valves ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’ will be operated by an electric signal. This will shut the normally open valves A, B and C. Thus, systems 1 and 2 will be completely separated
- Along with the operation of auto isolation valves, the No. 2 pump will start automatically. The attached auxiliary pump will act on the by-pass valve ‘Y’ and close. So, cylinders 3 and 4 will come into normal operation.
- Now, since the leak is between the pipe of cylinders 3 and 4, the level of the no. 2 tank will drop to L1 and give an alarm.
- The level will further drop to L2, but the pump will not stop and changeover to ensure that the leak is from the pipe of cylinders 3 and 4
- When the no. 2 tank level drops to L3, the no. 2 pump stops and the no. 1 pump starts to operate the steering using cylinders 1 and 2
- Starting the no. 1 pump will ensure that the by-pass valve ‘X’ is shut, and stopping the no. 2 pump will ensure that the by-pass valve ‘Y’ is open
This ensures the operation of the steering Gear with the defective system fully isolated.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q1 (16 Marks)
Steering & Deck Machinery 🔥 Repeated 7x
With respect to Windlass and deck Machinery:
(a) Describe the principle of coil-operated brake suitable for winches and other deck machinery. (8)
(b) Explain with suitable sketches how the windlass is relieved of strain when riding at anchor. (8)
Appeared In: Jan 2024 Sep 2023 Mar 2021 Jan 2021 Dec 2018 Nov 2018 Aug 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
A coil-operated brake for winches and deck machinery is designed to automatically adjust the braking force in response to changes in the load on the mooring line. This system ensures the correct force is applied between the brake band and the winch drum at all times.
The core principle is that when an additional load is applied to the mooring line, the line stretches, which in turn loosens the tightening mechanism. This loosening action automatically causes the brake to apply the correct force, maintaining constant tension. This has the significant advantage of being a self-adjusting system, meaning that once it's set, there's no need for a crew member to periodically re-apply the recommended torque. The brake is typically released using a hydraulic lever.
When a vessel is riding at anchor, a mechanism is used to lock the anchor chain and relieve the windlass of the strain. This is crucial for preventing damage to the windlass and ensuring the anchor is securely held.
A Cable stopper, often a pawl of a rod, is engaged with a link of the anchor chain. The pawl acts as a stop, preventing the chain from moving. All the weight and force from the anchor and the vessel's movement are then transferred to this locking device and the ship's structure, effectively relieving the windlass of any strain.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q1 (16 Marks)
Control & Instrumentation 🔥 Repeated 4x
Explain the working principle of differential Pressure Transmitter with the help of diagram and explain the following parts with their usages. (16)
(a) Zero and span calibration
(b) Negative feedback bellow
(c) Pilot amplifier functions
(d) Zero Elevation Concept
Appeared In: Jul 2026 Feb 2024 Jan 2023 Jan 2025 - 1
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
A Differential Pressure Transmitter measures the difference in pressure between two points and converts it into a pneumatic or electrical output signal. The working principle involves the use of a sensing element (e.g., a diaphragm or bellows) that deforms proportionally to the applied pressure difference. This deformation is converted into a measurable signal, which can then be processed and transmitted to control systems or indicators.
- The system comprises two pressure chambers, high-pressure (H) and low-pressure (L), separated by a diaphragm.
- Pressure from two points (H and L) is applied to either side of a flexible diaphragm or bellows within a sealed process chamber. The difference in pressure (ΔP = H - L) causes the diaphragm/bellows to deflect proportionally.
- This deflection is precisely measured by a mechanism, often incorporating a capacitive sensor or LVDT (Linear Variable Differential Transformer).
- The displacement of the diaphragm/bellows is converted into an electrical signal (e.g., 4-20 mA). This often involves a Wheatstone bridge configuration if using a strain gauge or a similar technique based on the chosen sensor.
- This electrical signal is then amplified by a pilot amplifier (see section (c)) and transmitted as the output signal.
As defined in the provided text, zero calibration adjusts the output to correspond to zero differential pressure (H = L). Span calibration adjusts the output range to accurately reflect the full differential pressure range the transmitter is designed to measure. Adjustment screws on the transmitter casing allow for these calibrations, often requiring specialized tools and procedures to ensure accuracy.
A negative feedback bellows is used in some differential pressure transmitters to improve accuracy and stability. It works by counteracting the deflection of the main sensing element. A portion of the output signal is used to generate a counter pressure within this feedback bellows, effectively reducing the deflection from the main sensing element and thus increasing the linearity and stability of the instrument. This reduces the sensitivity to small pressure changes but improves overall accuracy and reduces hysteresis.
The pilot amplifier is essential for converting the weak signal generated by the displacement sensing mechanism into a usable output signal. It amplifies the signal and converts it from a pneumatic signal (in some older designs) or a low-level electrical signal into a standardized 4-20 mA or 0-10 V signal for transmission to a control system. It might use a transducer like a strain gauge to perform this conversion.
When measuring liquid level using a differential pressure transmitter, the transmitter may not be installed precisely at the zero level of the tank. The "zero elevation" concept accounts for this difference in height. The hydrostatic pressure difference due to the elevation difference between the transmitter and the true zero level must be compensated in the output signal calculations. This ensures the accurate measurement of the liquid level even when the transmitter is not located at the tank's bottom. This compensation can involve either adding or subtracting a pressure offset from the raw differential pressure measurement, depending on the transmitter's configuration.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q2 (16 Marks)
Auxiliary Machinery 🔥 Repeated 6x
With reference to Air-conditioning system onboard your vessel:
(a) Sketch and describe high pressure cut-out in a refrigeration system. (6)
(b) The refrigeration compressor has stopped due to operation of the h.p cut-out Explain.
(i) The possible cause. (3)
(ii) How these causes would be found and possible remedies. (3)
(c) What steps are taken if the compressor "short-cycle" on low pressure cut-out? (4)
Appeared In: Jul 2026 Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2024 Jul 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- Dirty condenser
- Overcharge of refrigerant
- Condenser coolant failure
- Clogged filter drier
- Malfunctioning expansion valve
- Faulty pressure switch
(ii)
- Dirty condenser - Visual inspection of condenser, clean the condenser
- Overcharge of refrigerant - check the refrigerant level in sight glass, reduce the refrigerant charge.
- Condenser coolant failure - check in/out pressures, clean the condenser.
- Clogged filter drier - visual inspection of drier, change the drier
- Malfunctioning expansion valve - inspect expansion valve, repair or replace the valve
- Faulty pressure switch - inspect the switch, repair or replace the pressure switch
- To provide sufficient suction pressure control difference according to the system loading and frequency of room inspection
- Refrigerant charges should be adequate, the system should be without leaks. The suction line filter is to be kept clean with no obstruction in suction line.
- The leaky solenoid valve is to be replaced. The evaporator coil is to be defrosted regularly and ensure the inner surface is clean.
- Piston rings, cylinder liner, discharge valve, by-pass valve and safety valve are to be maintained in good condition. Compressor capacity is to be selected according to the system requirement and nature of loading.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q8 (16 Marks)
Control & Instrumentation 🔥 Repeated 4x
With reference to Boiler feed regulation:
(a) Describe, with the aid of sketches, the operation of a boiler feed water regulator controlled by at least two other parameters besides water level in the drum. (6)
(b) Give reasons for the inclusion of the other elements besides water level in controlling feed flow. (6)
(c) Deduce the possible effects on the system when the drain valve in the constant leg in the level transmitter starts to leak. (4)
Appeared In: Feb 2024 Oct 2022 Jul 2026 Feb 2026
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The three elements (parameters) used are:
- Steam flow rate
- Feed water flow rate
- Water level in the drum
Each parameter transmits a signal proportional to its measured value.
- Steam flow and feed flow signals pass through individual square-root converters and are compared in a relay.
- The relay sends a signal to the controller only when steam flow and feed flow are in a 1:1 ratio.
- Once this condition is met, the controller compares the drum level signal (from a float level transmitter) with the setpoint.
- Based on the deviation, the controller sends an air signal to the feed water control valve, which opens or closes to maintain the desired water level.
As steam demand normalises, the saturation temperature rises, and bubble formation ceases, causing the water level to fall—known as the "shrinkage effect." Including steam flow and water flow, elements help counteract these effects, ensuring an accurate reflection of the true water level and allowing the feed water control system to respond appropriately.
The Proportional-Integral (P+I) controller misinterprets this as a higher water level and reduces the feed water flow by closing the feed control valve. This incorrect response leads to instability within the system and results in erratic water level indications.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q9 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting 🔥 Repeated 3x
(a) Sketch and describe a Pilgrim Nut for securing a propeller to the screw shaft. (8)
(b) Describe how this device is used to loosen the propeller on the shaft when removal or inspection becomes necessary (4)
(c) Give reasons why this method is considered to be superior to all other methods. (4)
Appeared In: Jul 2026 Feb 2026 Feb 2024
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The Pilgrim Nut is a hydraulic device used for mounting and removing a propeller from the tapered tail shaft. It provides an accurate, safe and controlled method of pushing the propeller onto the shaft without hammering.
Construction and Working:
- The propeller is mounted on a tapered tail shaft and secured by a Pilgrim Nut.
- The Pilgrim Nut contains an internal nitrile rubber tube (hydraulic bladder).
- When hydraulic oil is pumped into the rubber tube, it expands and pushes a steel loading ring against the propeller hub.
- This hydraulic force pushes the propeller uniformly onto the taper, producing the required interference fit.
- A dial indicator (clock gauge) is fitted to measure the actual movement (push-up) of the propeller hub relative to the shaft.
- The loading ring should not move outward by more than one-third of its width from the flush position; otherwise, the nitrile rubber tube may rupture.
- Before mounting:
- The shaft taper and propeller bore are thoroughly cleaned and degreased to obtain predictable friction.
- (Exception: Cast steel propellers are lightly wiped with an oil-soaked rag as recommended by the manufacturer.)
- Blue marking (Prussian blue) is applied on the shaft taper to check proper contact between the shaft and propeller bore.
- The temperatures of both the shaft and propeller hub are recorded because they affect the required hydraulic pressure. The manufacturer's push-up table/graph (push-up curve) is used to determine the correct final push-up pressure.
- The propeller is pushed up successively in approximately 25 mm stages, with hydraulic pressure applied gradually while continuously monitoring:
- Hydraulic pressure
- Propeller movement using the dial indicator
- Once the required push-up distance is achieved, the Pilgrim Nut is finally tightened using a tommy bar.
- The assembly is then secured by a locking plate and locking bolts to prevent loosening during service.
The Pilgrim Nut can also be used as a hydraulic withdrawal tool by reversing its position.
Procedure:
- Remove the locking plate and bolts, then loosen and unscrew the Pilgrim Nut.
- Reverse the Pilgrim Nut so that the loading ring faces the withdrawal plate.
- Fit the withdrawal plate in front of the nut and secure it using studs, as shown in the sketch.
- Connect the hydraulic pump to the Pilgrim Nut.
- Apply hydraulic pressure.
- The expanding nitrile rubber tube pushes the loading ring against the withdrawal plate, producing an equal and opposite force that pulls the propeller hub off the shaft taper.
- As the taper grip breaks, the propeller moves away from the shaft and can be safely removed.
Safety Precautions:
- Support the propeller using chain blocks, lifting tackles or suitable lifting gear before releasing it.
- Place wooden blocks between the Pilgrim Nut and the propeller, leaving only a gap slightly greater than the push-up distance. This prevents violent movement when the taper suddenly releases.
The Pilgrim Nut method is considered superior to conventional propeller mounting methods because:
- Accurate and controlled push-up is achieved using hydraulic pressure and dial gauge measurements, ensuring the correct interference fit.
- No hammering or heavy mechanical force is required, eliminating damage to the propeller hub, shaft taper and bearings.
- Quick, safe and easily reversible for both installation and removal, reducing maintenance time and minimizing the risk of accidents.
- Uniform hydraulic loading ensures even distribution of forces, reducing stress concentrations.
- The manufacturer's push-up curve/graph allows precise control by considering shaft and hub temperature, resulting in consistent and reliable mounting.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q5 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting 🔥 Repeated 11x
With regards to main transmission shaft flange coupling arrangements:
(a) Sketch a hollow type coupling bolt and the hydraulic head/nut and loading rod which are used to fit it. (8)
(b) Describe how the bolt is fitted. (4)
(c) State the advantage of the hollow coupling bolt as compared to the traditional type of coupling bolt. (4)
Appeared In: Aug 2026 Jul 2025 Apr 2024 Mar 2024 Jun 2023 Feb 2021 Jan 2021 Mar 2020 Jun 2019 Jul 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- A bolt with a diameter slightly larger than the flange coupling bore diameter (D + 0.00025D) is selected.
- A push rod (loading rod) is inserted into the hollow coupling bolt, and a hydraulic head is attached.
- Hydraulic oil pressure of approximately 30,000 N/m² is applied, causing the bolt to stretch (approximately 0.021mm) and temporarily reduce its diameter by 0.00025D. This allows easy insertion of the bolt into the flange bore.
- The bolt is placed inside the bore by hand, and the nut is tightened and nipped up using a spanner.
- The hydraulic pressure is then released, allowing the bolt to expand and create a secure interference fit within the bore. This generates a tensile stress of approximately 15.5 tons/m², ensuring a firm grip.
- After fitting, the hydraulic assembly (items A, B, and C) is removed, and a protective plastic cap is placed over the bolt head.
- The hollow bolt design allows precise control of the bolt load, ensuring optimal tightening and load distribution.
- Diametrical re-expansion after hydraulic pressure release ensures a strong interference fit of the shank within the flange bore, reducing the risk of loosening.
- Hollow coupling bolts are easier to remove for inspection and maintenance, significantly reducing dismantling and fitting time.
- Unlike traditional bolts, hollow coupling bolts minimize wear on the bore, eliminating the need for frequent re-machining.
- Replacement of hollow coupling bolts is less frequent, reducing operational downtime and maintenance costs.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q6 (16 Marks)
Auxiliary Machinery 🔥 Repeated 6x
Sketch and describe the operation of a four ram electro-hydraulic steering gear system. Indicate and explain the valve positions for the operation of the system when one pump is isolated, and the unit is operating on two rams only. (16)
Appeared In: Apr 2024 Oct 2020 Mar 2020 Jan 2020 Sep 2019 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
According to SOLAS chapter - 2, part 1, regulation 29.16, every tanker of more than 10,000 GT shall comply with the following:
- The main steering capability due to a single failure in any part of one of the power actuating systems shall be regained in not more than 45 seconds.
- The main steering shall comprise at least two identical power actuating systems, each capable of meeting the requirements. Loss of fluid from one system shall be capable of being detected, and the defective system shall automatically get isolated so that the other system shall remain fully operational
Considering the above regulatory requirements, given below is a “Fail Safe steering gear” suitable for use on a tanker of more than 100,000 T DWT.
Shown in the diagram is a “Fail safe steering gear” having two independent power actuating systems that can
- Work simultaneously in normal operation, meeting the requirement OR
- Work independently and meet the requirement
- In the event of loss of fluid from any one system, it can be detected and isolated automatically so that the other system can remain fully operational.
Working:
- The system incorporates two sets of electric-driven pumps. Both main and auxiliary pumps are on the same shaft. The main pump shown in the diagram is a variable delivery pump
- The variable delivery pump takes suction from the tank and supplies hydraulic oil to the ram cylinders. The oil flow of the pump is determined by the pump actuating lever
- The movement of the pump actuating lever is controlled by the rudder angle order given by the bridge with the help of a bi-directional control valve
- A two-way shock relief valve is fitted between the two cylinders to release the pressure from one side of the cylinder to the other side in case of pressure increase in one of the cylinders due to heavy seas
- By-pass valves are also fitted between two cylinders, which are normally shut during operation. When one system is stopped, there is a pressure drop, as the auxiliary pump has also stopped this opens the by-pass valves, thus removing the hydraulic lock of the ram operation.
- Auto isolation valves in the system are there to isolate one system in case of any failure.
Case 1: Consider an oil leak from any pipe for cylinders 1 and 2 with the No. 1 pump running:
- No. 1 tank level will come down to L1, and it will sound an alarm on the bridge and in ECR
- When the tank level further drops to L2, i.e. low-low level, the no. 1 pump stops.
- Stopping the No. 1 pump also stops the attached auxiliary pump. So the line pressure drops, due to which the normally closed by-pass valves ‘X’ and ‘Y’ open.
- Simultaneously, the auto isolation valves ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’ will be operated by an electric signal. A, B and C are normally open valves. The electric signal will close them. So, systems 1 and 2 will be completely separated. Thus, the defective system, I.e. system 1, is isolated.
- Along with the operation of the auto isolation valves, the No. 2 pump will start automatically. The attached auxiliary pump will act on the by-pass valve ‘Y’ and close it. This enables cylinders 3 and 4 to be in normal operation.
- It should also be noted that since system 1 is completely isolated, there is no oil pressure to operate the bypass valve. So the by-pass valves remain open, thereby removing the hydraulic lock for the ram movement in cylinders 1 and 2
Case 2: Consider an oil leakage from any pipe of cylinders 3 and 4 with the No. 1 pump running:
Points 1, 2 and 3 are the same as case 1
- Simultaneously, the auto isolation valves ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’ will be operated by an electric signal. This will shut the normally open valves A, B and C. Thus, systems 1 and 2 will be completely separated
- Along with the operation of auto isolation valves, the No. 2 pump will start automatically. The attached auxiliary pump will act on the by-pass valve ‘Y’ and close. So, cylinders 3 and 4 will come into normal operation.
- Now, since the leak is between the pipe of cylinders 3 and 4, the level of the no. 2 tank will drop to L1 and give an alarm.
- The level will further drop to L2, but the pump will not stop and changeover to ensure that the leak is from the pipe of cylinders 3 and 4
- When the no. 2 tank level drops to L3, the no. 2 pump stops and the no. 1 pump starts to operate the steering using cylinders 1 and 2
- Starting the no. 1 pump will ensure that the by-pass valve ‘X’ is shut, and stopping the no. 2 pump will ensure that the by-pass valve ‘Y’ is open
This ensures the operation of the steering Gear with the defective system fully isolated.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q7 (16 Marks)
General 🔥 Repeated 12x
With reference to Vacuum Sewage System
(a) Sketch & Describe a Vacuum Sewage System. (7)
(b) State the advantages of Vacuum Sewage System. (5)
(c) State the different causes of dropping vacuum. (4)
Appeared In: Aug 2025 Apr 2024 Mar 2020 Jan 2020 Oct 2019 Sep 2019 Aug 2019 Jun 2019 Mar 2019 Jan 2019 Oct 2018 Sep 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(b) Advantages of a Vacuum Sewage System:
- The vacuum sewage system uses 85–90% less water for flushing compared to conventional systems, requiring very little flushing water.
- Toilets can be positioned more flexibly, including below the level of the holding tank, which is not feasible with gravity-fed systems.
- The system uses smaller diameter piping, reducing material and space requirements.
- The reduced water usage contributes to overall water conservation, making the system environmentally friendly.
- If the pump is pumping foam instead of liquid, this will be evident due to severe vibration. Add water to the tank and try again. If adding water does not help, reduce the level of foam by pouring antifoam agent into the tank (1 cup per 2 cubic metres of foam and sewage).
- Check that shut-off valves are fully open and not clogged.
- If the direction of rotation of the pump is wrong, change wiring accordingly.
- Close the valves that isolate the collecting unit from the piping system and start the pump again. If vacuum now builds up, there must be a leak in the piping system.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q9 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting 🔥 Repeated 14x
Sketch a sealing arrangement for an oil-lubricated stern tube. Identify the common forms of seal failure; State how oil loss due to seal failure can be restricted whilst on passage? What is the material used for sealing rings and propeller shaft liner? (16)
Appeared In: Dec 2024 Apr 2024 Aug 2023 Jun 2023 Feb 2021 Oct 2020 Mar 2020 Jan 2020 Dec 2019 Sep 2019 Jun 2019 Feb 2019 Oct 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Common forms of seal failure in a stern tube
- Loss of elasticity in seal material – Nitrile rubber seals may lose their elastic properties over time, reducing their sealing effectiveness.
- Surface damage to chrome liner – Grooving or scoring of the chrome liner can impair sealing surfaces, leading to leakage.
- Excessive shaft vibration – Heavy vibration of the propeller shaft can cause uneven wear and seal deformation.
- Insufficient cooling – Inadequate cooling can cause rubber sealing elements to harden and eventually fail.
- Exceeding running hour limits – Operating beyond the manufacturer’s recommended service life increases the risk of seal failure.
- Deterioration of oil quality – Contaminated or degraded oil reduces lubrication and protection, accelerating seal wear.
- Incorrect header tank level adjustment – Failure to adjust the header tank according to vessel draft can cause oil loss, leading to inadequate lubrication and seal damage.
Restricting oil loss due to seal failure whilst on passage
- Use of high-viscosity oil – Recharge the system with a thicker oil to reduce leakage rate through damaged seals.
- Temporary oil supply arrangement –
- Disconnect the existing oil supply line.
- Connect a 45-gallon drum supported by a block and tackle arrangement.
- Adjust the drum height to vary the oil head pressure, matching it to the surrounding water pressure and minimizing leakage.
- Fresh water introduction – Supply fresh water to the gravity tank to emulsify with any leaked oil. The resulting emulsion helps coagulate around the damaged seal area while the oil is circulated to maintain lubrication and sealing.
Materials for Sealing Rings and Propeller Shaft Liner:
- Sealing Rings: Nitrile rubber (NBR) is a commonly used material for stern tube sealing rings due to its good oil resistance, elasticity, and relatively low cost.
- Shaft Liner: Chrome-plated steel is a common material for stern tube liners. The chrome plating provides a hard, smooth, and corrosion-resistant surface, minimizing wear and improving the life of the sealing rings.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (16 Marks)
General 🔥 Repeated 6x
(a) Describe, with the aid of a sketch, an open loop system for reducing SOx emissions from engine exhaust gas, explaining how the system operates whilst the vessel is in open waters. (6)
(b) Describe, with the aid of a sketch, a closed loop scrubber system for removing SOx from engine exhaust gas, explaining the operation of this unit and stating when it would be used. (10)
Appeared In: Nov 2025 Jun 2025 Jul 2024 Sep 2022 Jun 2026 Jan 2025 - 1
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- Exhaust gases enter via the bottom side of the scrubber tower
- Seawater is sprayed at the top of the scrubber through spraying nozzles
- This results in an equally divided spray pattern throughout the scrubber
- Sulphur particles in the exhaust gas attach to the water droplets under the right temperature and process conditions
- Cleaned exhaust gas leaves via the top of the scrubber tower
- The seawater leaves* via the bottom and is discharged overboard.
- pH, turbidity and PAH are continuously monitored in accordance with IMO regulations, MARPOL Annex VI resolution.
- Closed loop systems are primarily used for vessels that operate in ports and sailing areas where overboard discharge is prohibited.
- Exhaust gasses enter via the bottom side of the scrubber tower
- Fresh water is inserted at the top of the scrubber through spraying nozzles
- This results in an equally divided spray pattern throughout the scrubber
- Sulphur particles in the exhaust gas attach to the water droplets under the right temperature and process conditions
- Process water is led to the circulation tank
- NaOH is added to the process water to neutralise acidity
- Cleaned process water is pumped upwards again to the top
- Polluted water is drained and led through a separator
- Solids and oil are removed from the polluted water forming sludge
- Sludge is pumped to the sludge storage tank on the ship
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q4 (16 Marks)
Auxiliary Machinery 🔥 Repeated 8x
With reference to a tubular heat exchanger, state the various types used on board a ship and explain with sketches how the construction, flow pattern, baffles, differ from each other depending upon the medium in use. (16)
Appeared In: Dec 2025 Nov 2025 Oct 2025 Jun 2025 Feb 2025 Jul 2024 Aug 2023 Jun 2026
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Tubular heat exchangers and their construction variations
Types used on board ship
- Shell and tube heat exchangers (coolers) for sea-water cooling of lubricating oil (lube oil cooler), freshwater (FW cooler), jacket cooling water, fuel oil (fuel heater/cooler), and for steam condensers.
- Double-pipe (hairpin) heat exchangers, which are two concentric pipes.
- U-tube / multipass shell-and-tube exchangers, and floating-head (floating tube sheet) exchangers to allow for thermal expansion.
- Plate heat exchangers are technically not tubular but are used in some duties; the question concerns tubular ones, so the focus is shell-and-tube.
Construction, flow pattern and baffles depending on the medium
Shell-and-tube construction: a cylindrical shell (e.g. steel, zinc-protected or cupro-nickel lined for sea water), with a bundle of tubes fitted between two tube sheets (headers) and secured by tube expansion/glands, the whole enclosed by channel covers. One fluid flows through the tubes (tube side) and the other through the shell in the space around the tubes (shell side), transferring heat through the tube walls.
Flow pattern: for clean fluids (e.g. oil/fresh water) a number of passes is arranged - the tubes are grouped so the fluid passes back and forth to give multipass; the shell fluid is guided across the tube bundle by baffles. Counter-flow is preferred for efficiency (hot and cold enter opposite ends); where a counter-flow cannot conveniently be arranged, a "two-pass" tube-side with shell fluid cross-flow is used. For sea water (dirty, scale-forming) the sea water is normally put on the tube side so it can be cleaned by rodding out/backflushing and so the tube bundle can be withdrawn - and a spacer/no-differential expansion design (floating head) accommodates the large thermal expansion.
Baffles: transverse baffles (segmental baffles) are fitted in the shell to force the shell-side fluid to flow back and forth across the tube bundle, increasing turbulence, mixing and the heat transfer coefficient, and supporting the long tube bundle to prevent sagging/vibration. Baffle spacing and cut shape differ with the medium: for low-viscosity or clean fluids closer baffles and a larger cut promote turbulence; for viscous oils (which have poor heat transfer and high pressure drop) the baffles are spaced wider and have a reduced cut to limit the pressure drop while still sweeping the tubes. For sea water, fewer/wider baffles reduce pressure drop and erosion.
Depending on the medium:
- Oil/fuel (viscous, poor convection): oil on shell side over a large tube area with wide, partly-cut baffles, or oil on tube side with multipass; materials tolerant of heating.
- Fresh water: may be either side; six-pass or four-pass tube arrangement common.
- Sea water (corrosive, scale forming): on the tube side, so tubes cleaned and selected in cupro-nickel; spacious shell, floating (expansion) heads to allow differential expansion; baffles arranged to maintain good cross-flow without excessive pressure drop.
- Steam (steam condenser): steam on the shell side with the cooling water in tubes; the condensate drains; baffles shaped/nozzles arranged to sweep the tubes and direct the steam.
Distinguishing sketch features: shell and flanged cover with tube bundle and tube sheets, removable floating head, the pattern of baffles (segmental plates with holes), the pass partitions, and the inlet/outlet nozzles for tube-side and shell-side.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q6 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting 🔥 Repeated 6x
(a) Describe with the aid of a sketch, the main engine ancillary equipment for automatic monitoring and regulation of fuel viscosity. (6)
(b) Explain the operation of equipment described in (a). (5)
(c) Discuss the single fuel concept. (5)
Appeared In: Jun 2026 Dec 2025 Nov 2025 Jun 2025 Jul 2024 Apr 2023
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Viscotherm with Differential Pressure (DP) Transmitter:
- The viscotherm consists of a capillary tube connected to the discharge side of a gear pump driven by an electric motor.
- A DP transmitter measures the pressure difference in the capillary tube, which is directly proportional to the viscosity of the fuel oil.
- The fuel oil passes through a heater controlled by a steam valve. The valve adjusts the steam flow to maintain the desired fuel viscosity.
- A controller compares the measured viscosity from the DP transmitter to the set point and sends a signal to regulate the steam valve.
- As fuel flows through the viscotherm, the gear pump diverts a portion of the fuel through the capillary tube.
- The DP transmitter measures the pressure difference across the capillary tube.
- The DP transmitter sends the viscosity data to the controller.
- The controller compares the measured viscosity to the set point value.
- If the viscosity deviates from the desired level, the controller adjusts the steam valve to increase or decrease the steam flow to the fuel heater.
- Adjusting the steam flow changes the fuel temperature, directly impacting viscosity to maintain optimal levels.
- Modern two-stroke engines are equipped with fuel circulation systems that ensure the fuel at injectors is always maintained at the correct temperature and viscosity.
- Continuous circulation eliminates the need to switch between HFO and low-sulphur fuel oil (LSFO) under normal conditions.
Advantages:
- Significant savings are achieved as residual fuel is cheaper than distillate fuel.
- Reduces the complexities and risks associated with frequent fuel changeovers, such as thermal shock and injector clogging.
Where local regulations demand the use of VLSFO, changeovers may still be necessary. However, automated systems simplify this process.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q8 (16 Marks)
Auxiliary Machinery 🔥 Repeated 4x
(a) Sketch a line diagram showing the layout components of a hydraulic system with a variable delivery, Pressure compensated pump and accumulator, suitable for the operation of deck machinery (8)
(b) Describe the operation of the system sketched in part (a). (8)
Appeared In: Jun 2026 Jun 2025 Jul 2024 Jun 2023
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
When the pumping capacity exceeds load requirements, the system pressure increases above a set value, at which point the pressure compensator acts to take the pump off stroke. A relief valve is fitted in case of malfunction of the compensator.
Fluid flow to the load may be controlled by a variety of methods one of which is the simple three position valve shown.
This system suits an installation containing several high demand units such as deck winch hydraulics
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q1 (16 Marks)
General 🔥 Repeated 4x
(a) Describe the key phases and microstructures present in the iron-carbon equilibrium diagram and explain their significance in the heat treatment of steel. (8)
(b) How do the different regions of the iron-carbon diagram influence the mechanical properties of steel, such as hardness, toughness, and ductility? Provide examples of how specific compositions and heat treatments can achieve desired properties. (8)
Appeared In: Apr 2026 Mar 2026 Apr 2025 Aug 2024
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Iron–Carbon Equilibrium Diagram
The iron–carbon (Fe–C) equilibrium diagram shows the phases and microstructures that form in iron–carbon alloys at different carbon contents and temperatures. Understanding this diagram is essential for selecting and controlling the heat treatment of steel.
1. Important Regions and Microstructures
Type | Carbon Content | Main Characteristics |
Hypoeutectoid steels | 0.02–0.8% C | Ferrite + pearlite; generally good ductility and toughness |
Eutectoid steel | ≈ 0.8% C | Mainly pearlite; good balance between hardness and ductility |
Hypereutectoid steels | 0.8–2.14% C | Pearlite + cementite; higher hardness and strength |
Hypoeutectic cast irons | 2.14–4.3% C | Pearlite + transformed ledeburite |
Eutectic cast iron | ≈ 4.3% C | Ledeburite |
Hypereutectic cast irons | 4.3–6.67% C | Ledeburite + primary cementite |
2. Important Phases
Ferrite (α-iron):
- Soft and relatively weak.
- Has very low carbon solubility.
- Provides good ductility and toughness.
Austenite (γ-iron):
- Exists at higher temperatures.
- Can dissolve considerably more carbon than ferrite.
- It is the starting phase for important heat treatments such as quenching and normalising.
Cementite (Fe₃C):
- Iron carbide containing approximately 6.67% carbon.
- Very hard and brittle.
- Increases hardness and wear resistance, but reduces ductility and toughness.
Pearlite:
- A layered mixture of ferrite and cementite.
- Forms when austenite undergoes eutectoid transformation.
- Provides a useful combination of strength, hardness and ductility.
Martensite:
- A very hard, metastable structure formed when austenite is rapidly quenched.
- It provides very high hardness and strength but is relatively brittle.
3. Critical Points of the Fe–C Diagram
Eutectoid Point
The eutectoid point is approximately:
At this temperature, austenite transforms completely into pearlite during slow cooling:
Austenite → Ferrite + Cementite = Pearlite
This is one of the most important reference points for steel heat treatment.
Eutectic Point
The eutectic point is approximately:
At this point, liquid alloy solidifies directly into:
Liquid → Austenite + Cementite
This point is particularly important in the study and manufacture of cast irons.
Peritectic Point
The peritectic point occurs at approximately:
At this point:
Liquid + Delta Ferrite → Austenite
4. Significance in Heat Treatment
The Fe–C diagram is essential for determining the appropriate heating and cooling temperatures for different heat treatments.
- Annealing: The steel is heated to the appropriate temperature and then cooled slowly. This allows the microstructure to approach equilibrium, reducing residual stresses and increasing ductility and toughness.
- Normalising: The steel is heated into the austenite region and then cooled in air. It produces a finer microstructure than annealing and generally improves strength and toughness.
- Quenching: The steel is heated to form austenite and then cooled rapidly. Rapid cooling prevents normal carbon diffusion and transforms austenite into martensite, producing very high hardness and strength.
- Tempering: Tempering is carried out after quenching. The steel is reheated to a suitable temperature and then cooled. It reduces the brittleness and internal stresses of martensite while improving toughness and ductility.
- Carburising: Carburising enriches the surface layer with carbon. The carburised surface can then be quenched to form a hard martensitic case, while the lower-carbon core remains relatively tough and ductile.
The carbon content and resulting microstructure have a major influence on the mechanical properties of steel. As carbon content increases, hardness and strength generally increase, while ductility and toughness generally decrease.
1. Hypoeutectoid Steel – 0.02–0.8% C
Hypoeutectoid steels contain ferrite + pearlite.
- Ferrite provides ductility and toughness.
- Pearlite provides increased strength and hardness.
- As carbon content increases within this range, the amount of pearlite increases, resulting in higher strength and hardness.
Example:
A low-carbon steel with approximately 0.2% C, when normalised, produces a ferrite–pearlite structure with good strength, ductility and toughness. Such steels are suitable where good formability and toughness are required.
2. Eutectoid Steel – Approximately 0.77–0.8% C
At approximately 0.77–0.8% carbon, the steel transforms into mainly pearlite during slow cooling.
Pearlite provides a good balance of:
- Hardness
- Strength
- Ductility
If eutectoid steel is quenched, it forms martensite and becomes very hard and strong. However, it also becomes more brittle.
After quenching, tempering is normally carried out to reduce brittleness and improve toughness.
3. Hypereutectoid Steel – 0.8–2.14% C
Hypereutectoid steels contain pearlite + cementite.
The additional cementite increases:
- Hardness
- Strength
- Wear resistance
However, excessive cementite makes the steel more brittle and reduces ductility and toughness.
Example:
A steel containing approximately 1.0% C, when suitably heat treated, can develop high hardness and wear resistance, making it suitable for components such as tools, cutting components and wear-resistant parts.
4. Effect of Quenching and Tempering
A high-carbon or medium-carbon steel can be heated into the austenite region and then quenched.
Austenite → Martensite
This produces:
- Very high hardness.
- High strength.
- Good wear resistance.
However, untempered martensite is brittle and contains high internal stresses.
Therefore, tempering after quenching is used to:
- Reduce brittleness.
- Relieve internal stresses.
- Increase toughness and ductility.
- Retain an appropriate level of hardness.
The tempering temperature can be selected according to the required balance between hardness and toughness.
5. Carburising – Hard Surface with Tough Core
For a low-carbon steel, carburising can be used to increase the carbon content at the surface.
After carburising and quenching:
- The surface becomes high-carbon martensite and therefore very hard and wear-resistant.
- The core remains relatively low in carbon and therefore retains good toughness and ductility.
This is useful for components requiring a hard, wear-resistant surface together with a tough core, such as gears and similar machine components.
ALTERNATE ANSWER:
Different Phases
α-ferrite
Existing at low temperatures and low carbon content, α-ferrite is a solid solution of carbon in BCC Fe. This phase is stable at room temperature. In the graph, it can be seen as a sliver on the left edge with the Y-axis on the left side and A2 on the right. This phase is magnetic below 768°C.
It has a maximum carbon content of 0.022 %, and it will transform to γ-austenite at 912°C, as shown in the graph.
γ-austenite
This phase is a solid solution of carbon in FCC Fe with a maximum solubility of 2.14% C. On further heating, it converts into BCC δ-ferrite at 1395°C. γ-austenite is unstable at temperatures below the eutectic temperature (727°C) unless cooled rapidly. This phase is non-magnetic.
δ-ferrite
This phase has a similar structure to α-ferrite but exists only at high temperatures. The phase can be spotted at the top left corner on the graph. It has a melting point of 1538°C.
Fe3C or cementite
Cementite is a metastable phase of this alloy with a fixed composition of Fe3C. It decomposes extremely slowly at room temperature into iron and carbon (graphite).
This decomposition time is long, and it will take much longer than the service life of the application at room temperature. Some other factors (high temperatures and the addition of certain alloying elements, for instance) can affect this decomposition as they promote graphite formation.
Cementite is hard and brittle, which makes it suitable for strengthening steels. Its mechanical properties are a function of its microstructure, which depends upon how it is mixed with ferrite.
Fe-C liquid solution
Marked on the diagram as ‘L’, it can be seen in the upper region on the diagram. As the name suggests, it is a liquid solution of carbon in iron. As we know that δ-ferrite melts at 1538°C, it is evident that the melting temperature of iron decreases with increasing carbon content.
Significance in the Heat Treatment of Steel
- Austenitizing Foundation: Heat treatments (like annealing, normalizing, and hardening) begin by heating steel into the stable γ-austenite region. The diagram defines the exact minimum temperature (A3 or A1 critical lines) required to dissolve carbon and homogenize the microstructure.
- Controlling Phase Transformations: By tracking carbon content and crossing critical boundary lines, metallurgists predict whether slow cooling will yield soft ferrite-pearlite structures (via annealing) or if rapid quenching will trap carbon atoms to form ultra-hard martensite (the non-equilibrium body-centered tetragonal structure essential for hardening).
- Tailoring Mechanical Properties: The relative proportions of soft ferrite, hard cementite layers (pearlite spacing), and interstitial phases dictate the ultimate balance of tensile strength, hardness, and ductility
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q2 (16 Marks)
Refrigeration & Air Conditioning 🔥 Repeated 4x
(a) Explain with a sketch the operation of an automatic expansion valve as fitted in the direct expansion refrigeration plants. How is this valve adjusted? (6)
(b) Explain how critical temperature restricts plant operation and how these limitations can be overcome? (5)
(c) Explain how this system maintains the provision rooms at different temperatures. (5)
Appeared In: Mar 2025 Aug 2024 Feb 2023 Oct 2022
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The purpose of the expansion valve in a refrigeration system is to regulate the flow of refrigerant from the high-pressure side (condenser) to the low-pressure side (evaporator), ensuring efficient operation based on the cooling demand. It adjusts refrigerant flow to maintain the desired temperature in the evaporator. It prevents liquid refrigerant from reaching the compressor, ensuring complete vaporisation in the evaporator.
Pressure Regulation: The valve contains a diaphragm that responds to pressure differences:
- P1 (Top Pressure): Exerted by a heat-sensitive fluid in a bulb, which senses the temperature of the gas leaving the evaporator.
- P2 (Bottom Pressure): Exerted by the refrigerant entering the evaporator.
- P3 (Spring Pressure): Ensures a degree of superheat, keeping the valve slightly closed to convert all liquid refrigerant into gas.
- At superheat conditions, P1 = P2 + P3.
- An Adjusting Screw is used to modify the superheat degree, optimizing the evaporator’s performance.
Equalizing Line: In systems with a significant pressure drop in the evaporator (more than 0.3 bar), an Equalizing Line feeds the outlet pressure back to the valve for accurate temperature and pressure control.
- Ensures efficient heat absorption in the evaporator.
- Protects the compressor by avoiding liquid refrigerant carryover.
- Adapts to varying cooling loads for optimal system performance.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (16 Marks)
Cargo & Tankers 🔥 Repeated 3x
With reference to Inert Gas Generator fitted on gas carriers:
(a) Sketch a line diagram showing a typical ‘Inert Gas System’ used for inerting in gas carriers, labelling the component parts. (6)
(b) Describe the system. (5)
(c) State the function of a chiller used in this type of inert gas generator. (5)
Appeared In: Aug 2024 Jun 2023 Jul 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Components in line: fuel and air inlets -> combustion blower -> burner and combustion chamber (IG generator fired by marine diesel or gas) -> inert gas cooler/quench water -> scrubber/sea-water wash tower -> demister (moisture eliminator) -> chiller/refrigeration inert gas cooler (dryer) -> activated carbon / final polishing filter -> inert gas discharge blower -> distribution header -> tank purge / vent lines to cargo tanks. A gas sampling analyser (continuous O2, CO2, dew point) on the discharge with automatic overboard diversion, and a deck water seal at the inlet to the tanks.
The inert gas generator produces inert gas for gas-carrier tanks by burning fuel with a controlled quantity of air so that the oxygen in the air is fully consumed. The principal products are nitrogen and carbon dioxide with water vapour. Air from a blower is drawn through a burner and combusted in a pressurised combustion chamber; complete combustion leaves essentially no free oxygen. The hot gas then passes to a scrubber/cooler where sea water cools it and washes out soot, sulphur compounds and soluble gases, reducing temperature to near ambient. A demister removes water droplets. The gas then passes through a refrigeration chiller which dries it to a very low dew point so that no free water or ice can form in the cold tanks. After final polishing it is delivered by a discharge blower to a distribution header, through a deck water seal and dry lines to the inerting/purging/pressurising connections of each tank. Continuous O2 and dew-point analysis ensures the gas stays within specification (typically very low oxygen for gas carrier inerting); if it is off-spec it is automatically dumped overboard.
The chiller cools the inert gas so that water vapour condenses out, producing dry gas of a controlled low dew point. This prevents water, ice or hydrates forming in the cargo tanks - which would block valves, cause corrosion or contaminate the cargo - and ensures the tank atmosphere remains dry and of specified quality.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q5 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting
With reference to main propulsion shaft systems: (a) Sketch a method of hydraulic jacking to check bearing loads (8)
(b) Describe the Bearing Load versus shift Dial Gauge Reading graph obtained by the method is described in part (a), annotating the graph and how the characteristic of bearing load is obtained. (8)
Appeared In: Aug 2024
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
A line diagram shows the shafting bearing (e.g. a line/stern tube bearing) with a hydraulic jack placed beneath the bearing housing (or a jacking pad under the shaft at the bearing). A dial gauge (dial test indicator) is mounted on a firm datum adjacent to the bearing so that its plunger bears on the bearing housing/shaft. The horizontal/vertical alignment direction is checked by jacking up and down.
The method: a small hydraulic jack is placed under the bearing pedestal/housing, and a dial gauge records the vertical/lateral deflection of the bearing (or of the shaft at that point) as the jack is progressively raised or released. The load on the bearing (the fraction of the shaft weight it supports) is found by jacking the bearing just clear (lifting it until the shaft no longer rests on it) or by observing lifted/heeling, and measuring the load required.
The graph plots the dial-gauge reading (jacking/shift, i.e. the jack movement/dial deflection, abscissa) against the bearing load carried (ordinate), obtained by jacking the bearing up and down between the fully-supported and just-lifted positions.
Procedure and characteristic obtained:
- As the jack lifts the bearing, the dial gauge shows the shift of the bearing/shaft; initially the shaft remains fully supported and the bearing load is zero; when the jack has lifted the bearing so the shaft is just lifted off the original bearing, the load registered is the weight that bearing portion carries.
- The graph is annotated with: the zero/initial position, the "break-free"/lift-off point (where the dial gauge reading starts to indicate the shaft has lifted = bearing light), the point of maximum bearing load, and the "settled" line (weight of the shaft portion).
- The characteristic bearing load is obtained from the point where the shaft is just lifted - the load at which the dial gauge reading changes slope - which corresponds to the actual load supported by that bearing in the "as-aligned" state. By comparing this with the design/expected bearing load, misalignment is detected: a bearing carrying much more or much less than the designed share indicates the shaft is not straight/level and must be re-aligned.
The graph therefore is used to set and check correct bearing load distribution, and to confirm that each bearing supports the correct fraction of the shaft, with the annotations showing lift-off, supported and over/under-load regions. The engineer adjusts by jacking/realigning until all bearings show the designed load.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q6 (16 Marks)
Auxiliary Machinery
With reference to a "four-ram hydraulic gear", having duplicate pumps:
(a) Sketch the arrangements of relief, make up, isolating and by-pass valves. (8)
(b) Explain the use of isolating and by-pass valves, if one of the cylinders has fractured. (4)
(c) Describe the arrangement provided to indicate the loss of hydraulic fluid due to leakage. (4)
Appeared In: Aug 2024
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The diagram shows the telemotor/control transmitter -> duplicate hydraulic pump units (port and starboard pumps, each with its own motor and relief valve) -> the four-ram steering gear: two double-acting rams in each actuator, i.e. four cylinders/rams (two cylinders of two rams, or two double-acting cylinders). Each cylinder is connected via the pipe line to the pump delivery on both sides of the ram. The valve arrangement comprises:
- Relief valves (s) on the pump delivery/high-pressure side that open at a set pressure to protect the system (e.g. above the working pressure) and by-pass excess oil back to suction/tank.
- Make-up (charging) valves: pilot/charging valves that admit oil from an expansion/charging tank to maintain the circuit full of oil and make up any leakage.
- Isolating valves: gate valves at each cylinder/ram so that a cylinder (e.g. a fractured one) can be shut off (bypassed) without losing the whole steering gear.
- By-pass valves: a by-pass (short-circuit) arrangement so that when one cylinder is isolated its rams are connected to allow oil flow/return (the disabled ram is bypassed and its oil flows freely) so it does not lock or resist.
A single-line diagram shows: charging/make-up tank -> make-up valves -> pump (duplicate) -> relief valve -> isolating valves -> cylinder A and cylinder B -> bypass valve linking the two sides of each disabled cylinder. Telemotor control operates the pumps.
If one cylinder/ram is fractured (e.g. the cylinder casing has developed a crack/leak), the corresponding isolating valves are closed to cut off that cylinder from the main system, and the by-pass valve on that cylinder (or the isolating/by-pass arrangement) is opened so that the ram can still move freely and oil displaced by it returns through the by-pass instead of building up pressure in the broken cylinder. This removes the damaged cylinder from service while the remaining rams continue to operate the rudder (with reduced torque). The relieving valve and make-up valves maintain the pressure/level. The vessel then continues steering on the reduced capacity until repairs are made, with due care of rudder loads.
A low-level alarm is provided by a sight glass/level switch in the charging/expansion tank (the make-up tank). If oil leaks from the system, the level in the charging tank falls; a level switch/float activates an alarm (lamp and audible alarm, and a low-level indication at the steering gear and at the bridge). Additionally, a pressure switch on the circuit may raise an alarm if the oil pressure falls, and the relief/by-pass flows would normally restore but the loss of oil shows as falling level in the make-up tank. This gives immediate warning of leakage so that the crew can isolate the leaking circuit.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q7 (16 Marks)
Cargo & Tankers
With reference to chemical tankers:
(a) Sketch a suitable cargo pumping and stripping system, labelling the component parts and indicating the direction of fluid flow. (10)
(b) State the requirements of the regulations evolved to reduce pollution of the sea by chemical tanker cargoes. (6)
Appeared In: Aug 2024
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(b) Regulations to Reduce Chemical Pollution
The primary regulations for minimizing pollution from chemical cargoes are outlined in SOLAS Chapter VII, Part-B. These regulations refer to specific codes that govern the construction and equipment of chemical tankers.
- IBC Code: For tankers built on or after July 1, 1986, they must comply with the International Code for the Construction and Equipment of Ships Carrying Dangerous Chemicals in Bulk (IBC Code).
- BCH Code: Tankers built before July 1, 1986, must adhere to the Code for the Construction and Equipment of Ships Carrying Dangerous Chemicals in Bulk (BCH Code).
These codes establish standards for the safe carriage of chemical cargoes and play a significant role in preventing pollution.
Discharge Criteria and Tank Residue Limits
The regulations also specify the maximum permissible tank residues and the criteria for discharging these residues into the sea.
Date of Construction | Category X Residue Limit (litres) |
Before July 1, 1986 | 300 |
July 1, 1986, to January 1, 2007 | 100 |
After January 1, 2007 | 75 |
Discharge Criteria:
To discharge tank residues at sea, a vessel must meet the following conditions:
- The ship must be en route.
- The discharge must be below the waterline.
- The ship must be at least 12 nautical miles from the nearest land and in water with a minimum depth of 25 meters.
- No discharge is permitted in the Antarctic Area.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q1 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting 🔥 Repeated 2x
With reference to radial lip seals for propulsion shafting:
(a) Describe, with the aid of a sketch, an outboard seal arrangement as fitted to an oil lubricated stern tube (8)
(b) Explain, with reasons, the possible actions that should be taken in the event of loss of oil from the header tank (8)
Appeared In: Sep 2024 Jul 2022
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Radial Lip Seals for Propulsion Shafting
An outboard seal arrangement on an oil-lubricated stern tube serves two primary purposes: to prevent lubricating oil from leaking into the sea and to stop seawater from entering the stern tube. This arrangement typically consists of several elastomeric lip seals fitted in sequence. These seals are mounted within a casing attached to the aft end of the stern tube and press against a smooth, hardened metal liner fitted on the propeller shaft. A garter spring wrapped around the lip of each seal provides continuous radial force to maintain the seal's contact with the shaft liner. The seals are usually made from durable materials like nitrile rubber or fluoroelastomer (Viton), chosen for their resistance to oil and temperature variations.
In a typical arrangement, multiple seal rings are used. The outermost seal acts as a seawater barrier, while the inner seals retain the lubricating oil. The outboard seals dissipate heat to the surrounding seawater, while the inner seals transfer heat to the lubricating oil through convection. The entire seal assembly includes key components such as a flange, cover rings, intermediate rings, and the shaft liner, all designed to work together to create a reliable barrier.
Loss of oil from the stern tube header tank is a serious condition as it leads to insufficient lubrication and increases the risk of seawater ingress into the stern tube bearings. The following actions should be taken:
- Immediate checks:
- Verify oil level in the header tank.
- Top up with the correct grade of lubricating oil if required.
- Inspection for leakage:
- Check stern tube seal chambers and drain tanks for signs of oil leakage or seawater ingress.
- Identify the source of failure (seal wear, damage, or liner scoring).
- Monitoring:
- Observe oil level alarms, leakage indication systems, and bearing temperature alarms.
- Operating adjustments:
- If leakage is severe, reduce shaft speed to minimize further oil loss.
- Stop the main engine if necessary to prevent bearing damage.
- Leakage control measures:
- Temporarily lower the oil level in the header tank to reduce leakage pressure.
- Use more viscous oil (if permitted) to slow down the leakage rate.
- Repair arrangements:
- Plan for emergency seal repairs, either through underwater maintenance by divers or during dry docking.
- Ensure spare sealing elements and liners are available.
- Continuous lubrication assurance:
- Maintain positive oil pressure at the seals via gravity feed or auxiliary pumps.
- Drain any accumulated water/oil mixtures in seal chambers regularly.
ALTERNATE ANSWER:
The loss of oil from the stern tube header tank is a critical issue that can lead to insufficient lubrication for the stern tube bearings and potential seawater ingress. This can cause severe damage to the bearings and the propeller shaft. Immediate and reasoned actions are essential to mitigate the risk.
Here are the possible actions and the reasons behind them:
- Immediately check and top up the oil level: The most direct action is to restore the oil level in the header tank with the correct grade of lubricating oil. This re-establishes the hydrostatic pressure, which is essential to prevent seawater from entering the stern tube.
- Reduce shaft speed or stop the engine: If oil loss is significant and ongoing, a reduction in propeller shaft speed or a complete stop is necessary. This lessens the pressure and heat on the seals, reducing the leak rate and minimizing the risk of bearing damage due to poor lubrication.
- Inspect seal chambers and drain tanks: Regularly checking the drain tanks and seal chambers for an abnormal mixture of oil and water helps diagnose the location and severity of the leak. For example, a large amount of milky-white fluid indicates significant seawater ingress, while an excessive amount of clear oil points to an oil leak.
- Consider temporary pressure adjustments: As a temporary measure, the header tank's height may be adjusted to change the hydrostatic pressure. In some cases, a more viscous oil might be used to reduce the leakage, but this is a short-term solution and should only be done if the oil is compatible with the system.
- Arrange for repair or replacement: The underlying issue—a failed seal—must be addressed. This requires planning for either an underwater seal replacement by divers while the vessel is afloat or, for a more permanent and thorough repair, drydocking the vessel. This ensures the long-term integrity of the sealing system.
- Maintain positive pressure: Ensuring a continuous and positive oil pressure within the stern tube system is paramount. This pressure, supplied by the header tank or a pump, creates a positive differential pressure that actively prevents seawater from breaching the seals. This is the fundamental principle of preventing water ingress.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q4 (16 Marks)
Control & Instrumentation 🔥 Repeated 4x
(a) Sketch and describe a valve suitable for reducing air pressure and maintaining the reduced pressure within close limits. (8)
(b) Describe the processes through which air from the starting air receivers should be treated before it is used in a pneumatic control system (8)
Appeared In: Jul 2026 Sep 2024 Nov 2023 Mar 2023
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Operation:
- The valve operates based on the balance of forces acting upon it:
- Downward Force: P1 × A, where P1 is the inlet pressure and A is the diaphragm area.
- Upward Force: (P1−P2) × a+f, where P2 is the outlet pressure, a is the valve area, and f is the spring force.
At equilibrium:
- P1×A = (P1−P2) × a+f
- If P1, A, and a are constant, P2 is directly proportional to the spring force f.
- The discharge pressure P2 can be adjusted by rotating the adjustment screw, which changes the spring force f.
Hence, if supply pressure is kept constant, the discharge pressure can be reduced or increased by rotating the adjustment screw.
process:
- The high-pressure air from the main air receiver is passed through a pressure-reducing valve, lowering the pressure to a range of 7–8 bar suitable for pneumatic systems.
- The air is passed through a filter to remove oil and water carried over from the compressor. This step eliminates contaminants that could affect system performance.
- The filtered air is sent through a dryer containing materials like silica gel or activated alumina to remove residual moisture. Dry air prevents corrosion and freezing in control lines.
- Regular drainage of accumulated water, oil, and condensate is necessary to maintain the air quality and prevent blockages in the system.
Now the air is clean & dry enough to be suitable for use in pneumatic control systems.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q5 (16 Marks)
Steering & Deck Machinery 🔥 Repeated 2x
With reference to hydraulic steering gears, sketch and describe each of the following:
(a) Single failure concept
(b) 100 Percent redundancy. (16)
Appeared In: Sep 2024 Jan 2021
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The main steering gear is arranged so that after a single failure in its piping system or one of the power units, the defect can be isolated so that steering capability can be maintained or speedily regained.
It refers to the operation of the steering gear even in the event of failure of one power actuating system with either 100% power or 50% power. i.e., a single failure concept can be either a 100% redundant system or a 50% redundant system.
It refers to the operation of two steering gears with at least two separate and independent power actuating systems, and each of them shall be capable of meeting the requirement. In case one system fails, it can be detected and isolated, and the other system comes into action.
Case 1: Consider an oil leak from any pipe for cylinders 1 and 2 with the No. 1 pump running:
- No. 1 tank level will come down to L1, and it will sound an alarm on the bridge and in ECR
- When the tank level further drops to L2, i.e. low-low level, the no. 1 pump stops.
- Stopping the No. 1 pump also stops the attached auxiliary pump. So the line pressure drops, due to which the normally closed by-pass valves ‘X’ and ‘Y’ open.
- Simultaneously, the auto isolation valves ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’ will be operated by an electric signal. A, B and C are normally open valves. The electric signal will close them. So, systems 1 and 2 will be completely separated. Thus, the defective system, I.e. system 1, is isolated.
- Along with the operation of the auto isolation valves, the No. 2 pump will start automatically. The attached auxiliary pump will act on the by-pass valve ‘Y’ and close it. This enables cylinders 3 and 4 to be in normal operation.
- It should also be noted that since system 1 is completely isolated, there is no oil pressure to operate the bypass valve. So the by-pass valves remain open, thereby removing the hydraulic lock for the ram movement in cylinders 1 and 2
Case 2: Consider an oil leakage from any pipe of cylinders 3 and 4 with the No. 1 pump running:
Points 1, 2 and 3 are the same as case 1
- Simultaneously, the auto isolation valves ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’ will be operated by an electric signal. This will shut the normally open valves A, B and C. Thus, systems 1 and 2 will be completely separated
- Along with the operation of auto isolation valves, the No. 2 pump will start automatically. The attached auxiliary pump will act on the by-pass valve ‘Y’ and close. So, cylinders 3 and 4 will come into normal operation.
- Now, since the leak is between the pipe of cylinders 3 and 4, the level of the no. 2 tank will drop to L1 and give an alarm.
- The level will further drop to L2, but the pump will not stop and changeover to ensure that the leak is from the pipe of cylinders 3 and 4
- When the no. 2 tank level drops to L3, the no. 2 pump stops and the no. 1 pump starts to operate the steering using cylinders 1 and 2
- Starting the no. 1 pump will ensure that the by-pass valve ‘X’ is shut, and stopping the no. 2 pump will ensure that the by-pass valve ‘Y’ is open
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q6 (16 Marks)
Control & Instrumentation 🔥 Repeated 2x
(a) Describe, with the aid of a sketch, an external system for reducing engine NOx emission, explaining the chemistry of the process. (8)
(b) Explain why Urea is used in the selective catalytic reduction process instead of ammonia. (4)
(c) Explain why the exhaust gas quality must be monitored before and after the selective catalytic reduction unit, stating how such monitoring influences operation of the SCR unit. (4)
Appeared In: Sep 2024 Dec 2023
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Selective Catalytic Reduction is a means of converting nitrous oxides in the exhaust with the help of a catalyst into diatomic nitrogen and water.
A reductant Anhydrous Ammonia (NH3), Aqueous Ammonia (Ammonium Hydroxide) or Urea (Carbamide) solution is added to a stream of exhaust gas and is adsorbed onto a catalyst. Carbon Dioxide (CO2) is a reaction product when urea is used as the reductant.
The chemical equation for the reaction using either anhydrous aqueous ammonia for the process is
4NO + 4NH3 + O2 = 4N2 + 6H2O
2NO2 + 4NH3 + O2 = 3N2 + 6H2O
NO + NO2 + 2NH3 = 2N2 + 3H2O
The reaction for urea instead of anhydrous or aqueous ammonia is
4NO + 2(NH2)2CO + O2 = 4N2 + 4H2O + 2CO2 (in presence of catalyst)
Selective Catalytic Reduction
This exhaust gas after-treatment technology has a NOx abatement capability Of more than 80%. The SCR concept involves injecting a Urea-Water solution into the exhaust gas stream in combination with a special catalyst unit.
The SCR is considered as an additional and independent exhaust treatment system and as such does not interfere with the basic engine design or combustion process.
The process diagram below gives a better understanding of the SCR system wherein the urea interacts with nitrous oxides present in the incoming exhaust gas, in the presence of a catalyst, converting it into free nitrogen and water vapour.
The Maritime Environmental Protection Committee (MEPC) At The IMO has published guidelines for the certification of selective catalytic reduction (SCR) systems, referred to the “SCR Guideline”, namely IMO Resolution MEPC.198(62).
According to their configurations, SCRs can Be Classified into 2 Types- They can be either installed between The Exhaust Gas Manifold & The Turbocharger or between The Turbocharger and The Exhaust Gas Boiler.
1. High-Pressure SCR
In the High-Pressure SCR, the reactor is placed before the turbocharger. A sufficient exhaust gas temperature is to be maintained between 300 to 400 deg Celsius, which might be challenging when the engine is running at low loads and manoeuvring.
Therefore, for two-stroke engines, the most likely location of the SCR unit is before the turbocharger in order to expand the active range of SCR operation. This has little to no effect on the engine combustion process.
It is possible to run high-pressure SCRs on Heavy Fuel Oil.
2. Low-Pressure SCR
In Low-Pressure SCRs, the reactor is placed after the turbine. Pre-heating of the exhaust gas stream may be necessary in order to achieve a sufficient temperature at the reactor inlet for the catalytic reaction. Some power generation may be needed for preheating.
Components of an SCR Dosing Unit
The dosing unit consists of a compact external dosing system having a urea-water solution tank. The tank size depends upon how often the vessel enters NOx Tier III areas and how often the SCR is put in use. Urea Tank capacities range from 4 to 10 cub metres/MW for larger engines.
The area for marine use is usually dissolved in water having a concentration of 32%-40%. Urea is a non-toxic odourless solution considered safe to transport and store at ambient temperature & pressure. However special caution is required in winter temperatures in order to avoid crystallization.
The dosing handling system provides the reducing agent (urea solution) based on the dosing demand signal provided by the SCR and Engine control and monitoring system.
Vaporizer/ Mixing Unit
The urea from the dosing system is metered and injected into the vaporizer or mixing unit. The injected reducing agent (urea) will vaporise and mix with the incoming exhaust gas.
The mixing unit is in line with the exhaust manifold of the engine and its pipes are designed & constructed after complex flow calculations & intensive testing, to ensure a good mixture of the urea solution & hot exhaust gases. The mixing unit is usually 2 to 6 meters long and 500mm in diameter, however, size may vary as per Engine size.
Injection tubes from the dosing unit penetrate the vaporizer from the bottom, the top of the vaporizer is equipped with an electronic enclosure having a NOx measurement sensor to monitor nitrous oxides in the exhaust gas and Backpressure sensor.
SCR Reactor Chamber
This is where the conversion of NOx in exhaust gas into nitrogen and water takes place in the presence of catalyst material. The SCR reactor contains cassettes of the catalyst substrate material. The substrate elements work in limited temperatures, if exhaust gas temperature is too high, the elements get destroyed.
If the temperature is too low, SCR efficiency is reduced. Catalyst element contains Vanadium Pentoxide (V2O5) which helps the reaction process of converting the urea and exhaust gas into nitrogen and water vapour. The SCR reactor volume is usually 1.5-3 cub metres/MW installed power.
Fuel Oil Quality and SCR technology
The sulphur content in fuel oil and consequent SO2 concentration in the exhaust gas is a critical parameter which has to be observed while operating SCR systems. Urea temperature is to be controlled according to sulphur content in fuel.
A high sulphur content in presence of a low exhaust gas temperature (in case of manoeuvring) will require a higher temperature of urea solution to be injected as a condensation of exhaust gas could result in corrosion and catalyst substrate damage. A lesser content of sulphur in fuel will allow a lesser temperature of urea solution to be injected.
Condensation of water vapour in the presence of sulphur in the exhaust gas during low load operations can cause the formation of solid ammonium bisulphate. Thus, the exhaust inlet temperature is to be kept high enough to avoid condensation of ammonium bisulphate onto catalyst substrate elements.
Condensation would severely affect NOx reduction performance and cause clogging, increasing backpressure due to soot formation in the reactor.
Soot Blowing Unit
To prevent contamination of the reactor elements, a soot blowing system is installed. Soot blowing is done using compressed air of 7 bar.
SCR Control Sensor Unit
NOx sensors measure the NOx concentration before the SCR reactor and the turbocharger.
The reactor chamber also contains outlet NOx sensors and outlet temperature sensors.
Venting System
The venting system vents the SCR reactor when the SCR is bypassed (i.e. when the engine is running in Tier-II mode) to avoid exhaust gas accumulation and soot formation in the reactor. The reactor is vented with Fresh Air during Tier II operation.
The Reactor Sealing Valve is used to seal the reactor during venting when the SCR is not in use.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q7 (16 Marks)
Boilers & Steam 🔥 Repeated 2x
(a) Sketch diagrammatically an auxiliary boiler automatic combustion control system and explain how it operates. (8)
(b) Specify how 'fail-safe' conditions are ensured. (4)
(c) How, the master controller follows steam pressure variations and air fuel ratio is adjusted (4)
Appeared In: Sep 2024 Nov 2022
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
A line diagram: boiler steam pressure(s) -> steam pressure transmitter -> master controller (follows steam pressure) -> fuel valve and forced-draught fan (air) -> furnace -> steam chest (back to transmitter) with a secondary loop of fuel flow, air flow and O2 analyser providing air/fuel trim.
Operation: The system maintains the required steam pressure while burning fuel efficiently. The master (steam pressure) controller compares the measured steam pressure to the set point. When steam is taken, pressure falls; with a negative error the controller raises the firing-rate demand which opens the fuel valve and increases the forced-draught fan/air supply together, increasing heat input until pressure returns to set point. When steam demand falls, pressure rises and firing rate is reduced. A separate air/fuel-ratio controller (with an O2 analyser in the uptake) trims the air flow relative to fuel so combustion remains in the optimum efficiency band at every firing rate, preventing excess air (which wastes heat) or the dangerous smoke/soot of air starvation. A flame safeguard supervises ignition and operation.
- Low-water cut-out trips the fuel supply if the boiler water level falls dangerously low.
- Flame-failure safeguard: if no flame is confirmed (UV/photo cell) within the light-up time, fuel is shut off and a purge/lock-out occurs; safe re-light only after purge.
- Forced-draught/fan interlock: fuel cannot be admitted unless the fan is running and the pre-purge is complete; loss of air flow trips fuel.
- High steam-pressure trip and safety relief valves prevent over-pressure.
- Loss of control air or electrical supply fails the system to safe (fuel valves shut).
- Gas/oil pressure/vacuum trips and pre/post-purge sequences prevent explosive mixtures; lock-out requires manual reset after flame failure.
The master controller is a proportional-integral(-derivative) controller: its output is proportional to the error (set point - measured steam pressure) plus an integral term that removes steady offset. A fall in steam pressure gives a positive error, raising the controller output which (through a programmed cam/electronic curve) simultaneously increases fuel valve position and the fan-speed/air-damper command; a rise in pressure reduces both. The air/fuel ratio controller then trims the air: it measures fuel flow and air flow, and takes the O2 analyser signal; the O2 reading is compared with the set-point O2 (optimum for the fuel), and the air controller adjusts the fan/damper to add or remove air so the ratio stays in the efficient band. Thus steam pressure sets the firing rate, and the ratio is corrected automatically for load and fuel variation.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q2 (14 Marks)
Fire Protection & Safety 🔥 Repeated 2x
Sketch a high-lift safety-valve lid and seat detailing their special features. Describe how such a valve is overhauled and any clearances that should be measured and noted. (16)
Appeared In: Dec 2024 Mar 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Special Features of Valve Lid and Seat:
- The seat's design deflects escaping steam towards the valve lid's lip, boosting the valve's lift. This increases the efficiency of steam release.
- The pressure of escaping steam acting on a piston provides extra lift to the valve. This helps in a faster, more complete opening.
- A loose pin secures the valve lid, allowing for thermal expansion without stress.
Overhauling the Boiler Safety Valve:
Safety:
- Carry out a Toolbox meeting, Risk assessment and Permit to work.
- Ensure that the internal pressure of the boiler is fully relieved before attempting to remove the safety valve. Wear appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE), including safety glasses, to protect against residual fluid splashes.
Disassembly Steps:
- Remove the seal and pull out the split pin.
- Detach the fork lever.
- Loosen the set screw and remove the cap.
- Remove the spindle lock nut and adjusting screws from the spring cover (make a mark on the position of the adjusting screw and spring cover for easy reassembly).
- Take off the spring cover.
- Remove the nut connecting the yoke with the body, then lift the block composed of the yoke, upper spring, and lower spring carrier along with the spring.
- Pull out the spindle.
- Remove the disc.
- Loosen the screw and remove the valve seat.
Checks:
- Inspect the valve seat and disc for damage; lap if necessary.
- Check the sliding surface of the floating piston for dirt and foreign materials, cleaning thoroughly.
- Assess the condition of the spindle for trueness.
- Inspect the body for rust and corrosion.
- Examine the spring for cracks and measure its free length.
- Verify the working of the easing gear.
- Ensure the drain line is clear.
- Conduct non-destructive testing of components as needed.
- Check the condition of the blowdown ring and the compression ring neck bush.
Clearances to be measured:
- Measure the clearance between the valve lip and the seat lip.
- Clearances between spindle and cap nut
- Measure the clearance between the cotter pin and the groove in the spindle.
- Check the clearances between the floating piston and the spindle
- Check the lift after assembly. It should be more than D/16 for high lift safety valve
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting
(a) Sketch and describe TWO methods that employ manometric means for measuring tank contents. (6)
(b) State what corrections are made to the readings obtained by the methods described in (a) in order to gauge the mass content. (5)
(c) Explain how bunkering requirements may be estimated when no records of main engine fuel consumption are available on board. (5)
Appeared In: Dec 2024
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
1. Bubbler System: In this system, air is supplied under pressure through a flow indicator such as a rotameter and an orifice. A dip tube extends into the tank to a point approximately 75 mm above the sludge level. As the liquid level rises, the hydrostatic pressure at the tip of the tube increases. This pressure is directly proportional to the liquid head and is used to operate indicators, alarms, and control circuits. The pressure required to just overcome the liquid head and allow air bubbles to escape is measured and used to determine the tank level.
2. Pneumercator Gauge: This system is commonly used for measuring liquid levels in deep tanks and double bottom tanks. It operates on the principle of a well-type mercury manometer. Air pressure is transmitted to the well of the manometer, where the pressure is balanced against the force exerted by the liquid head in the tank. The resulting mercury level difference provides a direct measure of the hydrostatic pressure and hence the liquid level in the tank.
The readings from manometric gauges typically indicate the volume of liquid in the tank. However, for accurate gauging of mass content, the following corrections must be applied:
- Temperature Correction: The density of the liquid varies with temperature, so it must be corrected to standard conditions.
- Density Correction: The actual relative density at tank temperature (T °C) is calculated as:
$$R_{T}=R_{15}\:\times\left(1-.00065\left(T-15\right)\right)$$
- where R15 is the relative density at 15°C.
Mass Calculation: Once the corrected density is known, the mass is calculated as:
$$Mass=Volume\times Relative\:density\:at\:T^{o}C$$
When no records of the main engine’s daily fuel consumption are available, bunkering requirements can be estimated by determining the engine's power output using alternative methods such as:
- Torsion Meter: Measures the torque transmitted through the shaft to calculate power.
- Draw Cards (Indicator Diagrams): Provide engine pressure-volume data to calculate indicated power.
Using the power output and known specific fuel oil consumption (SFOC) values for the engine, the approximate daily fuel consumption can be estimated, and thus, the bunkering requirement can be reasonably calculated.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q4 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting 🔥 Repeated 14x
Sketch a sealing arrangement for an oil lubricated stern tube.
(a) Identify the common form of seal failure. (6)
(b) State how gland leakage due to seal failure can be restricted whilst on passage. (5)
(c) What material is used for sealing ring and propeller shaft liner? (5)
Appeared In: Dec 2024 Apr 2024 Aug 2023 Jun 2023 Feb 2021 Oct 2020 Mar 2020 Jan 2020 Dec 2019 Sep 2019 Jun 2019 Feb 2019 Oct 2018 Apr 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Common forms of seal failure in a stern tube
- Loss of elasticity in seal material – Nitrile rubber seals may lose their elastic properties over time, reducing their sealing effectiveness.
- Surface damage to chrome liner – Grooving or scoring of the chrome liner can impair sealing surfaces, leading to leakage.
- Excessive shaft vibration – Heavy vibration of the propeller shaft can cause uneven wear and seal deformation.
- Insufficient cooling – Inadequate cooling can cause rubber sealing elements to harden and eventually fail.
- Exceeding running hour limits – Operating beyond the manufacturer’s recommended service life increases the risk of seal failure.
- Deterioration of oil quality – Contaminated or degraded oil reduces lubrication and protection, accelerating seal wear.
- Incorrect header tank level adjustment – Failure to adjust the header tank according to vessel draft can cause oil loss, leading to inadequate lubrication and seal damage.
Restricting oil loss due to seal failure whilst on passage
- Use of high-viscosity oil – Recharge the system with a thicker oil to reduce leakage rate through damaged seals.
- Temporary oil supply arrangement –
- Disconnect the existing oil supply line.
- Connect a 45-gallon drum supported by a block and tackle arrangement.
- Adjust the drum height to vary the oil head pressure, matching it to the surrounding water pressure and minimizing leakage.
- Fresh water introduction – Supply fresh water to the gravity tank to emulsify with any leaked oil. The resulting emulsion helps coagulate around the damaged seal area while the oil is circulated to maintain lubrication and sealing.
Materials for Sealing Rings and Propeller Shaft Liner:
- Sealing Rings: Nitrile rubber (NBR) is a commonly used material for stern tube sealing rings due to its good oil resistance, elasticity, and relatively low cost.
- Shaft Liner: Chrome-plated steel is a common material for stern tube liners. The chrome plating provides a hard, smooth, and corrosion-resistant surface, minimizing wear and improving the life of the sealing rings.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q7 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting 🔥 Repeated 7x
With reference to shaft alignment: (16)
(a) Explain the meaning of fair curve or rational alignment;
(b) Shaft alignment is often verified using hydraulic jacks to obtain a simple graph. Sketch such a graph, indicating the following:
(i) Static load
(ii) Hysteresis
(iii) Influence numbers.
(c) Explain the limitations of checking shaft alignment solely by hydraulic jacking methods.
Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jan 2026 Sep 2025 Dec 2024 Jun 2024 Aug 2023 Dec 2022
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(a) Meaning of Fair Curve / Rational Alignment
Fair curve alignment refers to the method of shaft alignment where the bearings are not arranged in a single straight line, but are deliberately set with calculated vertical offsets so that the shaft follows a smooth curve.
Explanation:
- For small-diameter shafts, bearings can often be kept in a straight line without issues.
- For large-diameter or high-power shafts, straight-line alignment causes:
- Uneven bearing loading
- High bending stress in the shaft
- Excessive wear and vibration
- In modern ships, fair curve alignment is preferred because:
- Bearing heights are adjusted individually
- Shaft load is distributed uniformly
- Bending stresses are minimized, preventing fatigue and vibration
Advantages of Fair Curve Alignment:
- Uniform bearing load distribution, reducing localized stress.
- Lower shaft bending stress, enhancing structural integrity.
- Reduced vibration, ensuring smoother operation.
- Longer bearing life, lowering maintenance costs.
(b) Shaft Alignment Check Using Hydraulic Jacks
The hydraulic jacking method is commonly used to verify shaft alignment by measuring the bearing loads when the shaft is lifted and plotting a graph of jack load vs. vertical displacement.
Procedure:
- Place a hydraulic jack near the bearing to be checked.
- Fix a dial gauge to measure vertical movement of the shaft.
- Slowly lift and lower the shaft using the jack.
- Record jack load and shaft displacement readings.
- Plot a graph of load versus displacement.
Graph Indications:
- (i) Static Load
- The load acting on the bearing at zero lift.
- Represents the actual operational load on the bearing when the shaft is at rest.
- (ii) Hysteresis
- The difference between the lifting and lowering curves.
- Caused by:
- Friction between shaft and bearing
- Oil film resistance
- Elastic deformation of the bearing
- Hysteresis indicates energy loss and affects measurement accuracy.
- (iii) Influence Number
- Represents the change in load per unit vertical movement of a bearing (N/mm).
- Shows the effect of raising one bearing on the load of other bearings.
- Used in fair curve alignment calculations to adjust bearing heights accurately.
(c) Limitations of Hydraulic Jacking Method
- Measures Only Vertical Loads
- Does not accurately measure horizontal bearing reactions.
- Less effective for resiliently mounted reduction gears.
- Time-Consuming
- Requires many readings for multiple bearings.
- Labour-intensive and difficult in restricted engine room spaces.
- Accuracy Issues
- Misalignment of the jack or dial gauge introduces errors.
- Shaft centerline mismatch reduces precision.
- Can produce wide hysteresis, complicating interpretation.
- Requires Skilled Interpretation
- Jacking curves vary depending on bearing type.
- Only trained personnel can correctly analyze the results.
- Hysteresis Effects
- Friction and oil film can cause non-linear readings.
- Lack of a load cell amplifies measurement errors.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q8 (16 Marks)
General 🔥 Repeated 2x
With reference to oil / water separators:
(a) Describe with the aid of a sketch, the working of such a separator. (6)
(b) Explain the consequence if the interface detector position is incorrect. (5)
(c) Enumerate the various possibilities by which oil / water interface can be moved. (6)
Appeared In: Mar 2018 Dec 2024
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The oily bilge is drawn into the separator by the automatic self-priming pump. The pump is located on the outlet of the separate to prevent the formation of a mechanical emulsion. As the oily bilge water enters the separator, it flows upwards through the matrix plate pack towards the top of the separator. Some oil separates immediately due to the reduced flow velocity and the difference in specific gravity between oil and water. Oil droplets impinge on the surface of the matrix plate pack and begin the coalescing process. The oil droplets coalesce until they become large enough to detach from the corrugated plates and gravitate to the top of the separator. Smaller oil droplets that escape the matrix plate pack are removed by the polishing pack. After the separated oil accumulates to a predetermined level, the oil sensor initiates the oil discharge and cleaning cycle by stopping the pump, closing the water discharge valve and opening the clean water inlet valve. This allows clean sea or fresh water to cleanse the matrix plate pack and flow upward in the reverse direction, washing the polishing pack and displacing the accumulated oil. The outlet of the Oily Water Separator is directed by a 3-way valve either to the overboard or to the storage tank. The valve is controlled by a 15ppm monitor, which allows overboard discharge if oil content is below 15 ppm and stops discharge if oil content is exceeded.
- Probe Too Low: The sensor might not detect the actual oil level. This can lead to the frequent opening of the water discharge valve, allowing water to escape into the oil outlet, contaminating the separated oil.
- Probe Too High: The oil discharge valve will open late, reducing the separation efficiency. This is because the oil and water will mix more thoroughly before the valve opens, leading to a less effective separation of the two liquids.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q4 (16 Marks)
Lubrication & Oils 🔥 Repeated 3x
State why the temperature of lubricating oil supplied to an engine needs close control.
Sketch and describe an arrangement and explain the principle of operation of instruments control equipment for automatically maintaining the temperature of lubricating oil supplied to an engine at desired value. (16)
Appeared In: Oct 2024 Apr 2023 Feb 2023
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The temperature of lubricating oil (LO) supplied to an engine requires close control due to:
- Elevated LO temperatures increase the oxidation rate, doubling it for every 10°C rise. Oxidation produces acidic compounds and insoluble sludge that foul the engine components.
- At high temperatures, if water is present in the oil film, a tin oxide layer may form on white-metal bearings, resulting in hard, black or grey corrosion.
- LO temperatures between 25-40°C encourage microbial growth when water is present, especially when the engine is in a laid-up condition.
- LO viscosity is temperature-dependent, and fluctuations can affect the oil’s load-carrying capacity, leading to inadequate lubrication.
- Low LO temperature can cause thermal shock, while high LO temperature can lead to overheating, both of which increase the risk of piston cracking.
- Uncontrolled LO temperature may lead to engine slowdowns or shutdowns.
The main engine lubricating oil cooling system uses cascade control. In this case, the two main variables that influence the oil temperature are the engine load and the sea cooling water inlet temperature, which forms two loops: An outer loop that measures the engine oil inlet temperature and passes the information for further processing to a controller which is called the master or primary controller and an inner loop that measures the seawater inlet temperature and passes the information to a second controller called the slave or secondary controller. The secondary controller processes the signals from the primary controller and the secondary sensor and sends an appropriate signal to the 3-way valve to control the oil temperature at the inlet to the engine. When the seawater temperature changes, an immediate signal will be sent to the slave controller for adjustment of the 3-way valve even before the actual oil inlet temperature begins to change. The response is, therefore, faster.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q5 (16 Marks)
Control & Instrumentation 🔥 Repeated 3x
(a) Define proportional control action. (4)
(b) Sketch and describe a simple pneumatic proportional controller. (4)
(c) State a process where a proportional controller may be employed. (4)
(d) State the disadvantage of proportional only action. (4)
Appeared In: Sep 2025 Oct 2024 Dec 2022
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Proportional control action is the most basic form of modulating control. In this control mode, the correction signal (or output from the controller) is directly proportional to the deviation or error between the measured variable (controlled condition) and the desired set point. The larger the deviation, the stronger the corrective response by the controller.
Mathematically:
$$Output\:\alpha\:Error$$
A proportional controller is suitable for processes where small, continuous adjustments are required and the process dynamics are relatively stable. A common application is in temperature control systems, where proportional action can effectively maintain the temperature close to a desired set point with minimal oscillation. It can also be used in pressure regulation, level control, and flow control systems.
The main disadvantage of proportional-only control is the presence of an offset or steady-state error. Since the controller output is proportional to the error, a finite error is required to maintain a specific output. This means the system may not reach the exact set point but will stabilise at a point close to it, depending on the proportional gain. Therefore, proportional control alone cannot eliminate steady-state error.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q8 (16 Marks)
Steering & Deck Machinery 🔥 Repeated 10x
Sketch and describe a "fail safe steering gear" suitable for use on a tanker of more than 1000,000 T. DWT. Explain the sequence of events that take place when an oil leak takes place in one of the hydraulic pipelines. (16)
Appeared In: Oct 2024 Dec 2023 Aug 2023 Jul 2023 Mar 2023 Feb 2021 Feb 2019 Oct 2018 Aug 2018 Jul 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
According to SOLAS chapter - 2, part 1, regulation 29.16, every tanker of more than 10,000 GT shall comply with the following:
- The main steering capability due to a single failure in any part of one of the power actuating systems shall be regained in not more than 45 seconds.
- The main steering shall comprise at least two identical power actuating systems, each capable of meeting the requirements. Loss of fluid from one system shall be capable of being detected, and the defective system shall automatically get isolated so that the other system shall remain fully operational
Considering the above regulatory requirements, given below is a “Fail Safe steering gear” suitable for use on a tanker of more than 100,000 T DWT.
Shown in the diagram is a “Fail safe steering gear” having two independent power actuating systems that can
- Work simultaneously in normal operation, meeting the requirement OR
- Work independently and meet the requirement
- In the event of loss of fluid from any one system, it can be detected and isolated automatically so that the other system can remain fully operational.
Working:
- The system incorporates two sets of electric-driven pumps. Both main and auxiliary pumps are on the same shaft. The main pump shown in the diagram is a variable delivery pump
- The variable delivery pump takes suction from the tank and supplies hydraulic oil to the ram cylinders. The oil flow of the pump is determined by the pump actuating lever
- The movement of the pump actuating lever is controlled by the rudder angle order given by the bridge with the help of a bi-directional control valve
- A two-way shock relief valve is fitted between the two cylinders to release the pressure from one side of the cylinder to the other side in case of pressure increase in one of the cylinders due to heavy seas
- By-pass valves are also fitted between two cylinders, which are normally shut during operation. When one system is stopped, there is a pressure drop, as the auxiliary pump has also stopped this opens the by-pass valves, thus removing the hydraulic lock of the ram operation.
- Auto isolation valves in the system are there to isolate one system in case of any failure.
Sequence of events during hydraulic oil leak:
Case 1: Consider an oil leak from any pipe for cylinders 1 and 2 with the No. 1 pump running:
- No. 1 tank level will come down to L1, and it will sound an alarm on the bridge and in ECR
- When the tank level further drops to L2, i.e. low-low level, the no. 1 pump stops.
- Stopping the No. 1 pump also stops the attached auxiliary pump. So the line pressure drops, due to which the normally closed by-pass valves ‘X’ and ‘Y’ open.
- Simultaneously, the auto isolation valves ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’ will be operated by an electric signal. A, B and C are normally open valves. The electric signal will close them. So, systems 1 and 2 will be completely separated. Thus, the defective system, I.e. system 1, is isolated.
- Along with the operation of the auto isolation valves, the No. 2 pump will start automatically. The attached auxiliary pump will act on the by-pass valve ‘Y’ and close it. This enables cylinders 3 and 4 to be in normal operation.
- It should also be noted that since system 1 is completely isolated, there is no oil pressure to operate the bypass valve. So the by-pass valves remain open, thereby removing the hydraulic lock for the ram movement in cylinders 1 and 2
Case 2: Consider an oil leakage from any pipe of cylinders 3 and 4 with the No. 1 pump running:
Points 1, 2 and 3 are the same as case 1
- Simultaneously, the auto isolation valves ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’ will be operated by an electric signal. This will shut the normally open valves A, B and C. Thus, systems 1 and 2 will be completely separated
- Along with the operation of auto isolation valves, the No. 2 pump will start automatically. The attached auxiliary pump will act on the by-pass valve ‘Y’ and close. So, cylinders 3 and 4 will come into normal operation.
- Now, since the leak is between the pipe of cylinders 3 and 4, the level of the no. 2 tank will drop to L1 and give an alarm.
- The level will further drop to L2, but the pump will not stop and changeover to ensure that the leak is from the pipe of cylinders 3 and 4
- When the no. 2 tank level drops to L3, the no. 2 pump stops and the no. 1 pump starts to operate the steering using cylinders 1 and 2
- Starting the no. 1 pump will ensure that the by-pass valve ‘X’ is shut, and stopping the no. 2 pump will ensure that the by-pass valve ‘Y’ is open
This ensures the operation of the steering Gear with the defective system fully isolated.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q6 (16 Marks)
Auxiliary Machinery
(a) Explain the necessity of intercooler on a multi-stage compressor. What attention is required to keep them safe and good working order? Sketch and describe an intercooler suitable for a 2-stage compressor and state materials used. (8)
(b) What attention is needed before opening up an air compressor for inspection? (4)
(c) What faults are likely to develop in an air compressor and how are they remedied. (4)
Appeared In: Nov 2024
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Intercoolers are essential in multistage compressors to remove heat between compression stages, which increases air density, reduces the work needed for subsequent stages, prevents overheating and equipment damage, removes moisture, and improves overall efficiency, allowing for higher final pressures more effectively than a single stage could.
- Increased Density: Compressing air heats it up, making it expand and become less dense (more voluminous). Cooling it between stages brings it back to a denser state, meaning more air molecules (mass) fit into the same volume, making the next compression stage much easier and more efficient.
- Reduced Workload: Compressing hot, less dense air requires significantly more power. By cooling the air, you reduce the work required for the next stage, saving energy and lowering operating costs.
- Equipment Protection: Uncontrolled heat can exceed the temperature limits of compressor components, leading to damage to seals, lubricants, and the machine itself.
- Moisture Removal: Hot compressed air contains significant water vapor. Cooling it causes this moisture to condense into liquid water, which can then be drained out, preventing corrosion, lubricant washout, and freezing issues in the system.
- Higher Pressure Capability: A single-stage compressor struggles to reach very high pressures efficiently due to extreme heat. Multistage compression breaks down the process, with intercoolers managing the heat, allowing the system to reach much higher final pressures safely and economically
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q7 (16 Marks)
Boilers & Steam 🔥 Repeated 7x
Sketch and describe a boiler water level controller of the float operated type. State the reasons for having this mechanism on the boiler and using this controller and boiler for analogy explain the following terms. (16)
(a) Sensing Element
(b) Servo motor
(c) Desired Value
Appeared In: Nov 2024 Nov 2023 Feb 2021 Sep 2018 Jul 2018 Feb 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Boiler Water Level Controller – Float Operated Type
A simple float-operated water level controller consists of:
- A float chamber connected to the boiler steam drum by two lines — one for steam and one for water.
- A float inside the chamber, which rises and falls with changes in water level.
- A mechanical linkage or rod attached to the float, which extends to an electric sensor unit mounted above the chamber.
Working Principle:
- As the float moves up or down, it shifts a contactor along a variable resistance track or magnetic switches.
- This movement changes the electrical output signal, which is sent to a square-root converter.
- The converter transforms the electrical signal into a proportional pneumatic signal.
- The pneumatic signal acts on the diaphragm of the feed water control valve actuator, modulating feed flow to maintain the set water level.
Reasons for Using a Float-Operated Type
- Reliability: Unlike constant/variable head leg systems, there is no need to maintain a filled reference column.
- Simplified Installation: Electrical sensing eliminates the need for long impulse tubes for remote indication.
- Ease of Maintenance: The electric sensor unit can be easily replaced without dismantling the float chamber.
- Lower Cost: Fewer mechanical parts and no head leg piping reduce installation and maintenance expenses.
Explanation of Terms (Analogy with Controller and Boiler)
: In this system, the float is the detecting element. It directly senses the water level, which is the controlled variable, and its movement provides a signal that represents the current state of the system.
: The square root converter and the feedwater controller collectively act as the servo motor. They are the mechanisms that receive the signal from the detecting element and perform the physical action (opening or closing the feedwater valve) to correct the water level.
: The set point is the desired value. This is a fixed input to the square root converter (or a comparator) that represents the ideal water level that the system aims to maintain. The controller continuously works to match the actual water level to this desired value.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q2 (16 Marks)
Refrigeration & Air Conditioning 🔥 Repeated 2x
(a) Draw a line diagram of an accommodation air conditioning plant labelling the principal items and showing the direction of air flow. (6)
(b) State how:
(i) Accommodation air temperature is controlled, (4)
(ii) Humidity is controlled within prescribed comfort limits, (3)
(iii) Such an installation can contribute to the efficiency of ship's main plant. (3)
Appeared In: Oct 2025 Feb 2025
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(i) Accommodation Air Temperature Control
The air temperature is controlled to a specific set point, typically around 24°C. A thermostat senses the temperature in the accommodation spaces. When the temperature rises above the set point, the thermostat signals a solenoid valve to open, allowing refrigerant to flow through the cooling coil. This cools the air passing over the coil. Conversely, when the temperature drops, the solenoid valve closes, stopping the cooling process.
The evaporator pressure is also a key factor. The system is designed so that the refrigerant's saturation pressure corresponds to the desired temperature. For example, if the desired temperature is 24°C, the system might be set to maintain an evaporator pressure of 4.5 bar, where the refrigerant's saturation temperature is 24°C. The thermostatic expansion valve (TEV) senses the superheat at the evaporator outlet and adjusts the refrigerant flow to maintain this pressure and thus the desired cooling temperature.
(ii) Humidity Control within Comfort Limits
Humidity is controlled using a humidistat, which measures the relative humidity (RH) of the air. The comfort zone for RH is generally between 30% and 50%.
- To reduce humidity (dehumidify): If the RH is too high, the air is overcooled below the set temperature (e.g., to 18°C). At this lower temperature, the air reaches its dew point, and excess moisture condenses out. This condensate is then drained away. The now cool, dry air is then passed through a reheater to bring its temperature back up to the set point of 24°C, which in turn lowers its RH to within the comfort zone.
- To increase humidity (humidify): If the RH is too low, the humidistat activates a humidifier. This device sprays a fine mist of water (often freshwater) into the air stream, increasing the air's moisture content until the desired RH is achieved.
(iii) Contribution to Ship's Main Plant Efficiency
A well-maintained accommodation air conditioning system can contribute to the ship's main plant efficiency in several ways:
- Reduced electrical load on the main generators: A more efficient air conditioning system requires less power to operate. This reduces the load on the ship's generators, which are often powered by auxiliary engines. A lower generator load means less fuel consumption for these engines.
- Heat Recovery: Some modern systems are designed to recover waste heat from the main plant's cooling systems. This recovered heat can be used for the reheater or other heating purposes on the ship, reducing the need for additional heating sources and thereby saving energy.
- Crew Comfort and Performance: A comfortable working and living environment helps maintain crew morale and performance. A well-rested and alert crew is less prone to making errors, which can prevent costly operational mistakes and improve overall plant efficiency and safety.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q4 (16 Marks)
Auxiliary Machinery 🔥 Repeated 8x
With reference to a tubular heat exchanger, state the various types used on board a ship and explain with sketches how the construction, flow pattern, baffles, differ from each other depending upon the medium in use. (16)
Appeared In: Dec 2025 Nov 2025 Oct 2025 Jun 2025 Feb 2025 Jul 2024 Aug 2023 Jun 2026
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Tubular heat exchangers and their construction variations
Types used on board ship
- Shell and tube heat exchangers (coolers) for sea-water cooling of lubricating oil (lube oil cooler), freshwater (FW cooler), jacket cooling water, fuel oil (fuel heater/cooler), and for steam condensers.
- Double-pipe (hairpin) heat exchangers, which are two concentric pipes.
- U-tube / multipass shell-and-tube exchangers, and floating-head (floating tube sheet) exchangers to allow for thermal expansion.
- Plate heat exchangers are technically not tubular but are used in some duties; the question concerns tubular ones, so the focus is shell-and-tube.
Construction, flow pattern and baffles depending on the medium
Shell-and-tube construction: a cylindrical shell (e.g. steel, zinc-protected or cupro-nickel lined for sea water), with a bundle of tubes fitted between two tube sheets (headers) and secured by tube expansion/glands, the whole enclosed by channel covers. One fluid flows through the tubes (tube side) and the other through the shell in the space around the tubes (shell side), transferring heat through the tube walls.
Flow pattern: for clean fluids (e.g. oil/fresh water) a number of passes is arranged - the tubes are grouped so the fluid passes back and forth to give multipass; the shell fluid is guided across the tube bundle by baffles. Counter-flow is preferred for efficiency (hot and cold enter opposite ends); where a counter-flow cannot conveniently be arranged, a "two-pass" tube-side with shell fluid cross-flow is used. For sea water (dirty, scale-forming) the sea water is normally put on the tube side so it can be cleaned by rodding out/backflushing and so the tube bundle can be withdrawn - and a spacer/no-differential expansion design (floating head) accommodates the large thermal expansion.
Baffles: transverse baffles (segmental baffles) are fitted in the shell to force the shell-side fluid to flow back and forth across the tube bundle, increasing turbulence, mixing and the heat transfer coefficient, and supporting the long tube bundle to prevent sagging/vibration. Baffle spacing and cut shape differ with the medium: for low-viscosity or clean fluids closer baffles and a larger cut promote turbulence; for viscous oils (which have poor heat transfer and high pressure drop) the baffles are spaced wider and have a reduced cut to limit the pressure drop while still sweeping the tubes. For sea water, fewer/wider baffles reduce pressure drop and erosion.
Depending on the medium:
- Oil/fuel (viscous, poor convection): oil on shell side over a large tube area with wide, partly-cut baffles, or oil on tube side with multipass; materials tolerant of heating.
- Fresh water: may be either side; six-pass or four-pass tube arrangement common.
- Sea water (corrosive, scale forming): on the tube side, so tubes cleaned and selected in cupro-nickel; spacious shell, floating (expansion) heads to allow differential expansion; baffles arranged to maintain good cross-flow without excessive pressure drop.
- Steam (steam condenser): steam on the shell side with the cooling water in tubes; the condensate drains; baffles shaped/nozzles arranged to sweep the tubes and direct the steam.
Distinguishing sketch features: shell and flanged cover with tube bundle and tube sheets, removable floating head, the pattern of baffles (segmental plates with holes), the pass partitions, and the inlet/outlet nozzles for tube-side and shell-side.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q6 (16 Marks)
Steering & Deck Machinery 🔥 Repeated 4x
With reference to hull cathodic protection systems of the impressed current type:
(a) Sketch and describe such a system (8)
(b) Explain how protection may be ensured for the rudder and propeller. (4)
(c) State any precautions that should be taken when this type of system is installed. (4)
Appeared In: Oct 2025 Feb 2025 Oct 2023 Feb 2023
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
An Impressed Current Cathodic Protection (ICCP) system protects the underwater hull from corrosion by making the ship’s hull the cathode of an electrochemical cell. A rectifier supplies controlled DC current to inert anodes, while the hull receives the return current and is protected from corrosion. ICCP systems on ships use a DC source and inert anodes such as MMO/titanium, with automatic regulation based on hull potential measured by reference electrodes.
Working:
- AC supply is fed to a transformer-rectifier unit.
- The rectifier converts AC to low-voltage DC.
- The positive terminal is connected to inert anodes (usually titanium/MMO) fitted externally on the hull.
- The negative terminal is connected to the ship’s hull.
- Current flows from anodes → seawater → hull.
- The hull becomes cathodic, so corrosion of hull steel is prevented.
- Reference electrodes (silver/silver chloride / zinc type) measure hull potential.
- The automatic controller adjusts output current so hull potential remains within the protective range, avoiding under-protection or over-protection.
Main components
- Transformer/rectifier
- Automatic control panel
- Inert anodes
- Reference electrodes / potential sensors
- Hull bonding cables and monitoring arrangement
Rudder
- The rudder may be electrically insulated by bearings/pintles, so bonding is required.
- Protection is ensured by:
- flexible bonding straps / cables across rudder stock, carrier bearing or pintles
- sometimes supplementary sacrificial anodes on rudder
- This ensures the rudder remains electrically continuous with the hull and receives cathodic protection.
Propeller
- The propeller shaft is often electrically insulated from the hull by the oil film in stern tube and bearings.
- Therefore, ICCP current may not protect the propeller effectively.
- Protection is ensured by fitting a shaft earthing / shaft bonding device:
- slip ring on shaft
- silver/graphite brushes to hull earth
- This provides electrical continuity between shaft/propeller and hull, and also prevents bearing pitting due to shaft potential. A turning propeller is often insulated from the hull by the lubricating oil film, so a shaft earthing device with brushes and slip ring is used to avoid bearing damage and improve protection.
- Do not overprotect the hull: Excess current can damage paint coating and may cause hydrogen effects on high-strength steel.
- Maintain electrical continuity: Ensure proper bonding of rudder, shaft, stabilizers, thrusters, sea chests, etc.
- Inspect anodes and reference cells regularly: Keep them clean, undamaged, and properly insulated from hull structure where required.
- Check and calibrate control system: Reference electrodes and controller must be tested periodically for correct hull potential.
- Avoid stray current interference: Careful cable insulation and earthing arrangement to prevent corrosion of nearby fittings.
- During dry dock: Switch off ICCP before docking/undocking and inspect anodes, shields, and hull coating condition.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (16 Marks)
Materials & Testing 🔥 Repeated 8x
With reference to Keyless Propeller: (16)
(a) Sketch a section through a keyless sleeved propeller.
(b) State the advantages of using a keyless sleeved propeller.
(c) State with reason, Which metal sleeve should be made for contact with the forged mild steel tail shaft?
(d) State the material used to bond the sleeve to the propeller and the general thickness of the bonding material.
Appeared In: Jan 2026 Jun 2024 Dec 2023 Oct 2023 Mar 2019 Jan 2019 Sep 2018 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- Keyless design avoids stress concentration caused by keys and keyways.
- Stresses are evenly distributed across the internal surface of the propeller boss
- The absence of a keyway increases the friction available for torque transmission.
- The design prevents overstressing or permanent damage to the propeller hub during operation.
- The keyless arrangement simplifies the propeller and shaft interface, making it easier to manufacture and maintain.
- With a coefficient of friction of 0.28, it minimizes the likelihood of propeller slippage.
- Its expansion rates are similar to those of steel, reducing the risk of misalignment or loosening during temperature variations.
- Pearlitic cast iron exhibits excellent resistance to fretting, which is important for prolonged and reliable operation.
- High-strength epoxy Araldite filling is used to bond the sleeve to the propeller securely.
- The bonding material is applied with a thickness of approximately 1 mm, ensuring adequate adhesion and durability.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q4 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting 🔥 Repeated 7x
With reference to shaft alignment:
(a) Explain the meaning of fair curve or rational alignment (8)
(b) Shaft alignment is often verified using hydraulic jacks to obtain a simple graph. Sketch such a graph, indicating the following: (8)
(i) Static load
(ii) Hysteresis
(iii) Influence number
(iv) Explain the limitations of checking shaft alignment solely by hydraulic jacking methods.
Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jan 2026 Sep 2025 Dec 2024 Jun 2024 Aug 2023 Dec 2022
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(a) Meaning of Fair Curve / Rational Alignment
Fair curve alignment refers to the method of shaft alignment where the bearings are not arranged in a single straight line, but are deliberately set with calculated vertical offsets so that the shaft follows a smooth curve.
Explanation:
- For small-diameter shafts, bearings can often be kept in a straight line without issues.
- For large-diameter or high-power shafts, straight-line alignment causes:
- Uneven bearing loading
- High bending stress in the shaft
- Excessive wear and vibration
- In modern ships, fair curve alignment is preferred because:
- Bearing heights are adjusted individually
- Shaft load is distributed uniformly
- Bending stresses are minimized, preventing fatigue and vibration
Advantages of Fair Curve Alignment:
- Uniform bearing load distribution, reducing localized stress.
- Lower shaft bending stress, enhancing structural integrity.
- Reduced vibration, ensuring smoother operation.
- Longer bearing life, lowering maintenance costs.
(b) Shaft Alignment Check Using Hydraulic Jacks
The hydraulic jacking method is commonly used to verify shaft alignment by measuring the bearing loads when the shaft is lifted and plotting a graph of jack load vs. vertical displacement.
Procedure:
- Place a hydraulic jack near the bearing to be checked.
- Fix a dial gauge to measure vertical movement of the shaft.
- Slowly lift and lower the shaft using the jack.
- Record jack load and shaft displacement readings.
- Plot a graph of load versus displacement.
Graph Indications:
- (i) Static Load
- The load acting on the bearing at zero lift.
- Represents the actual operational load on the bearing when the shaft is at rest.
- (ii) Hysteresis
- The difference between the lifting and lowering curves.
- Caused by:
- Friction between shaft and bearing
- Oil film resistance
- Elastic deformation of the bearing
- Hysteresis indicates energy loss and affects measurement accuracy.
- (iii) Influence Number
- Represents the change in load per unit vertical movement of a bearing (N/mm).
- Shows the effect of raising one bearing on the load of other bearings.
- Used in fair curve alignment calculations to adjust bearing heights accurately.
(c) Limitations of Hydraulic Jacking Method
- Measures Only Vertical Loads
- Does not accurately measure horizontal bearing reactions.
- Less effective for resiliently mounted reduction gears.
- Time-Consuming
- Requires many readings for multiple bearings.
- Labour-intensive and difficult in restricted engine room spaces.
- Accuracy Issues
- Misalignment of the jack or dial gauge introduces errors.
- Shaft centerline mismatch reduces precision.
- Can produce wide hysteresis, complicating interpretation.
- Requires Skilled Interpretation
- Jacking curves vary depending on bearing type.
- Only trained personnel can correctly analyze the results.
- Hysteresis Effects
- Friction and oil film can cause non-linear readings.
- Lack of a load cell amplifies measurement errors.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q5 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting 🔥 Repeated 5x
With respect to Energy efficient running of ships:
(a) Sketch and explain the optimization of propeller hull interface flow devices and improvement of propulsion efficiency. (8)
(b) sketch and explain the optimization of Auxiliary machinery using VFDs. (8)
Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jan 2026 Jun 2024 Nov 2023 Jul 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Energy-Efficient Running of Ships
The propulsion efficiency of a ship does not depend only on the propeller design. The flow of water approaching and leaving the propeller is equally important. Unfavourable inflow, uneven velocity distribution, vortex formation and rotational energy in the propeller slipstream result in energy losses, even when the propeller itself is well designed.
To reduce these hydrodynamic losses, Energy Saving Devices (ESDs) are fitted around the propeller–hull interface. These devices guide, straighten or deflect the water flow so that the propeller can convert more of the available engine power into useful thrust.
ESDs are particularly useful for existing ships, where replacing the complete propulsion system may not be technically or economically practical. Depending on the type of device and the ship's operating profile, they can provide a measurable improvement in propulsion efficiency and reduction in fuel consumption.
Common devices include:
1. Propeller Nozzle
A propeller nozzle is an annular hydrodynamic structure fitted around the propeller. It guides and directs the water flow through the propeller and improves the inflow conditions.
The shape and position of the nozzle help convert a greater portion of the propeller-generated impulse into useful axial thrust.
The benefit is particularly significant at low ship speeds and high propeller loading, where an open propeller is comparatively less efficient.
Advantages:
- Increased thrust at low speed and heavy load.
- Improved propeller efficiency.
- Useful during manoeuvring and operation against currents.
- Particularly suitable for tugs, dredgers and workboats.
- Provides better handling and working capability in laden conditions.
2. Guiding Fins / Stators
Guiding fins, also called stators, are generally fitted ahead of the propeller. They modify the incoming water flow by aligning and redistributing it, reducing swirl and making the velocity distribution over the propeller disc more uniform.
As a result, water reaches the propeller blades at more favourable angles of attack, improving the hydrodynamic performance of the propeller.
Advantages:
- More uniform water inflow.
- More even loading of propeller blades.
- Better utilisation of available shaft power.
- Reduced local blade overloading.
- Reduced vibration and pressure pulses.
- Reduced possibility of cavitation.
- Lower fuel consumption.
- Reduced stress and wear on the propeller, shaft line and bearings.
3. Propeller Boss Cap Fins (PBCF)
Behind a conventional propeller hub, a concentrated rotating flow called a hub vortex is normally formed. This vortex contains kinetic energy that does not contribute to useful propulsion and is therefore lost as vortex energy and turbulence in the propeller wake.
The hub vortex may also cause:
- Additional energy losses.
- Increased turbulence in the wake.
- Pressure pulses and vibration.
- Adverse interaction with the rudder and other stern components.
Propeller Boss Cap Fins (PBCF) are fitted to the propeller boss cap to reduce the strength of the hub vortex. By recovering part of the rotational energy and improving the flow leaving the propeller, they can increase propulsion efficiency and reduce energy losses.
Variable Frequency Drives (VFDs) are used to control the speed of electric motors driving auxiliary machinery such as centrifugal pumps, fans, blowers and compressors.
In conventional systems, an electric motor often runs at a constant speed, while the required flow or pressure is controlled using valves, dampers or bypass arrangements. This wastes energy because the motor continues to operate at full speed even when the actual demand is low.
With a VFD, the frequency and voltage supplied to the motor are varied according to the required load. Therefore, the motor speed can be adjusted to match the actual demand of the auxiliary machinery.
Working Principle
AC supply → VFD → Variable-frequency/variable-speed motor → Auxiliary machinery
The VFD changes the frequency supplied to the motor:
Frequency ↓ → Motor speed ↓ → Flow ↓ → Power consumption ↓
When demand increases:
Frequency ↑ → Motor speed ↑ → Flow ↑ → Power consumption ↑
For centrifugal pumps and fans, the affinity laws show that:
- Flow ∝ Speed
- Pressure/Head ∝ Speed²
- Power ∝ Speed³
Therefore, even a small reduction in motor speed can produce a large reduction in power consumption.
Applications on Ships
VFDs can be used for:
- Sea-water and fresh-water cooling pumps.
- Boiler feed-water and circulation pumps.
- Ventilation and engine-room fans.
- Air-conditioning and chilled-water pumps.
- Fuel and oil circulation systems, where applicable.
- Other variable-load auxiliary machinery.
Advantages of VFDs
- Reduced electrical power consumption by matching motor speed to actual demand.
- Reduced fuel consumption, because less electrical power is generated by the ship's generators.
- Better control of flow and pressure without excessive throttling or bypassing.
- Reduced mechanical wear due to smooth starting and stopping.
- Reduced starting current and mechanical shock.
- Improved operating efficiency during part-load conditions.
- Reduced running hours/load on diesel generators, helping optimise generator operation.
- Overall improvement in the ship's energy efficiency and operating cost.
Example
Consider a cooling-water pump operating at full speed when only 70% flow is required. Instead of keeping the pump at full speed and throttling the discharge valve, the VFD reduces the motor speed to approximately the required level.
Because pump power varies approximately with the cube of speed, a reduction in speed can result in a significant reduction in electrical power consumption.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q7 (16 Marks)
Refrigeration & Air Conditioning 🔥 Repeated 5x
(a) Draw a block diagram for a fully automated accommodation air conditioning unit, labelling the component parts and indicating the directions of air flow; (8)
(b) Explain why the unit includes means of dehumidification and humidification; (4)
(c) A chart is used for ensuring that the accommodation conditions are within the so-called Comfort Zone: what useful information does the chart give? (4)
Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jan 2026 Sep 2025 Jun 2024 Dec 2022
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The unit includes both dehumidification and humidification to maintain air within the "comfort zone".
Dehumidification
Air is dehumidified to prevent health issues and equipment damage. When warm, humid air is cooled, its relative humidity increases. If it reaches 100% saturation, moisture condenses. In an A-C unit, air is cooled below the target temperature (e.g., to 10°C) to make it supersaturated, causing excess moisture to precipitate out. This dry, cool air is then reheated to the desired temperature (e.g., 20°C). At this new temperature, the air's relative humidity will be at a comfortable level, typically around 50%. Without this process, inhaling highly humid, cold air could lead to respiratory issues. Additionally, moisture condensation on electronic equipment can cause damage.
Humidification
Humidification is necessary when the incoming air is too dry. Dry air can cause discomfort, skin irritation, and static electricity issues. The humidifier adds moisture back into the air, usually by spraying a fine mist of water, to raise the humidity to the desired level and bring the conditions back into the comfort zone.
The chart provides the following useful information:
- Dry Bulb Temperature: The actual air temperature, measured with a standard thermometer.
- Wet Bulb Temperature: The temperature of air measured with a thermometer covered by a water-soaked cloth, indicating evaporative cooling potential.
- Dew Point Temperature: The temperature at which air becomes saturated and condensation begins.
- Relative Humidity: The percentage of moisture in the air compared to the maximum moisture the air can hold at that temperature.
- Moisture Content: The amount of water vapor present in the air, expressed as a ratio (e.g., grams of moisture per kilogram of dry air).
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q8 (16 Marks)
Steering & Deck Machinery 🔥 Repeated 2x
Sketch and describe a stockless anchor illustrating the method or device used to attach it to the chain cable. When are the anchor and cable ranged during the ships underwater survey what parts require special attention and what defects are likely to be discovered? (16)
Appeared In: Jan 2026 Jun 2024
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
Q4 (16 Marks)
Steering & Deck Machinery 🔥 Repeated 6x
(a) Describe with the aid of sketches where necessary a vane type steering gear showing how to weight of the rudder and stock are carried and the arrangement that allow for wear down
(b) State how the vanes described in (a) are secured and the method of sealing the edges
(c) State how, if necessary, the steering gear is locked for rudder maintenance.
Appeared In: Dec 2025 Oct 2025 Mar 2025 Sep 2023 Apr 2023 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- The rotor is fitted to the tapered rudder stock. The rudder stock carries the weight of the rudder, supported by a rudder carrier bearing.
- The stator is fixed to the ship’s structure, forming a rigid support.
- The fixed vanes are evenly spaced inside the stator bore, while the rotating vanes are equally spaced on the rotor.
- These vanes form two sets of pressure chambers in the annular space between the rotor and stator. Hydraulic fluid is supplied at pressure to one set of chambers, causing the rotor and rudder to rotate in the required direction based on the steering order from the wheelhouse.
- The weight of the rudder and rudder stock is carried by the rudder carrier bearing, which is mounted on steel chocks supported by thicker deck plating to ensure stability and handle the load.
- There is a vertical clearance between the stator flange and the anchor bracket to allow for rudder "jump" (vertical movement).
- Another clearance exists between the top of the anchor bracket and the stator flange to accommodate for rudder wear down or rudder drop over time. The total clearance provided is around 38 mm, allowing the system to absorb wear and vertical movement without affecting performance.
- The fixed and rotary vanes are made from modular cast iron and are secured to the rotor and stator using high-tensile steel dowel pins and cap screws to maintain strength and prevent detachment under stress. A key is fitted along the length of the rotary vanes to provide additional reinforcement and ensure the strength of the rotor.
- The sealing of the vanes is achieved using sealing strips made of cast iron. These strips are fitted into grooves along the edges of the vanes. The sealing strips are backed by elastically loaded synthetic rubber, which provides a tight seal by pressing against the faces of both the fixed and rotating vanes. This arrangement prevents hydraulic fluid leakage.
- Hydraulic Locking: This involves closing the manual isolating valves provided for each cylinder (in ram-type systems) or each vane chamber (in vane-type systems). This prevents hydraulic fluid flow, thus immobilizing the rudder.
- Mechanical Locking: Three methods are available:
- A spanner is fitted to the rudder stock head nut and secured to the ship's structure, directly preventing rudder movement.
- If provided, tow gigs are fitted between the crosshead and cylinder base, mechanically locking the steering mechanism
- (Assuming a braking system is integrated into the design) Engaging the brake will prevent any movement of the rudder.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q5 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting 🔥 Repeated 6x
(a) Describe with the aid of a sketch, the main engine ancillary equipment for automatic monitoring and regulation of fuel viscosity
(b) Explain the operation of equipment described in (a)
(c) Discuss the single fuel concept.
Appeared In: Jun 2026 Dec 2025 Nov 2025 Jun 2025 Jul 2024 Apr 2023
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Viscotherm with Differential Pressure (DP) Transmitter:
- The viscotherm consists of a capillary tube connected to the discharge side of a gear pump driven by an electric motor.
- A DP transmitter measures the pressure difference in the capillary tube, which is directly proportional to the viscosity of the fuel oil.
- The fuel oil passes through a heater controlled by a steam valve. The valve adjusts the steam flow to maintain the desired fuel viscosity.
- A controller compares the measured viscosity from the DP transmitter to the set point and sends a signal to regulate the steam valve.
- As fuel flows through the viscotherm, the gear pump diverts a portion of the fuel through the capillary tube.
- The DP transmitter measures the pressure difference across the capillary tube.
- The DP transmitter sends the viscosity data to the controller.
- The controller compares the measured viscosity to the set point value.
- If the viscosity deviates from the desired level, the controller adjusts the steam valve to increase or decrease the steam flow to the fuel heater.
- Adjusting the steam flow changes the fuel temperature, directly impacting viscosity to maintain optimal levels.
- Modern two-stroke engines are equipped with fuel circulation systems that ensure the fuel at injectors is always maintained at the correct temperature and viscosity.
- Continuous circulation eliminates the need to switch between HFO and low-sulphur fuel oil (LSFO) under normal conditions.
Advantages:
- Significant savings are achieved as residual fuel is cheaper than distillate fuel.
- Reduces the complexities and risks associated with frequent fuel changeovers, such as thermal shock and injector clogging.
Where local regulations demand the use of VLSFO, changeovers may still be necessary. However, automated systems simplify this process.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q9 (16 Marks)
Control & Instrumentation 🔥 Repeated 3x
(a) State why the temperature of lubricating oil supplied to an engine needs close control.
(b) Sketch and describe an arrangement and explain the principle of operation of instrumentation and control equipment for automatically maintaining the temperature of lubricating oil supplied to an engine at its desired value
Appeared In: Oct 2024 Apr 2023 Feb 2023
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The temperature of lubricating oil (LO) supplied to an engine requires close control due to:
- Elevated LO temperatures increase the oxidation rate, doubling it for every 10°C rise. Oxidation produces acidic compounds and insoluble sludge that foul the engine components.
- At high temperatures, if water is present in the oil film, a tin oxide layer may form on white-metal bearings, resulting in hard, black or grey corrosion.
- LO temperatures between 25-40°C encourage microbial growth when water is present, especially when the engine is in a laid-up condition.
- LO viscosity is temperature-dependent, and fluctuations can affect the oil’s load-carrying capacity, leading to inadequate lubrication.
- Low LO temperature can cause thermal shock, while high LO temperature can lead to overheating, both of which increase the risk of piston cracking.
- Uncontrolled LO temperature may lead to engine slowdowns or shutdowns.
The main engine lubricating oil cooling system uses cascade control. In this case, the two main variables that influence the oil temperature are the engine load and the sea cooling water inlet temperature, which forms two loops: An outer loop that measures the engine oil inlet temperature and passes the information for further processing to a controller which is called the master or primary controller and an inner loop that measures the seawater inlet temperature and passes the information to a second controller called the slave or secondary controller. The secondary controller processes the signals from the primary controller and the secondary sensor and sends an appropriate signal to the 3-way valve to control the oil temperature at the inlet to the engine. When the seawater temperature changes, an immediate signal will be sent to the slave controller for adjustment of the 3-way valve even before the actual oil inlet temperature begins to change. The response is, therefore, faster.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q1 (16 Marks)
Materials & Testing
With reference to fixed installations for dealing with a machinery space fire:
(a) Describe with the aid of a sketch a typical installation. (5)
(b) Explain the testing procedure for the equipment. (5)
(c) Outline the testing procedure for (6)
(i) remote shut down
(ii) other equipment to be used in the event of an engine room fire
Appeared In: Mar 2023
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
A typical fixed fire-fighting installation for a machinery space uses a bulk CO2 system. This system consists of large pressure vessels built to Class 1 construction standards, with low-temperature properties down to -50°C. These vessels are heavily insulated and kept cool by two refrigeration units, one in use and one on standby. The system can maintain its temperature for up to 24 hours without refrigeration before boil-off occurs.
System Components
- Pressure Vessels: The system uses pressure vessels designed for low temperatures.
- Refrigeration Units: Two refrigeration units are used, one active and one on standby, to maintain the low temperature.
- Relief Valves:
- Set A: Vented to the atmosphere at 21.5 bar.
- Set B: Vented to a CO2 compartment in case of fire at 27 bar.
- Each set has a cock for isolating one valve for repairs.
- Level Indicators: The system has two means of indicating content level: a remote electrical display and a standby indicator.
- Alarms: Alarms are activated for the following conditions:
- 5% loss of content.
- Overfilling at 98% of tank capacity.
- Leakage past the main discharge valve.
- Opening of a section valve.
- High CO2 pressure (25 bar), which protects against liquid locks.
System Operation
To operate the system, the appropriate section valve and the main discharge valve are opened. The main discharge valve is typically fitted with an actuator for remote control. CO2 is then discharged for a specific period, after which the main valve is closed.
Testing Procedures
Weekly: Check the pressure and temperature of the CO2 in the tank and the cooling plant.
Fortnightly: Check the contents of the bulk CO2 system and the master gauge reading.
Monthly:
- Check for tightness around stuffing boxes, valves, joints, and removable covers using CO2 gas detectors or a soap solution.
- Verify that the alarm can be heard throughout the machinery space when the door switch on the control panel is opened.
Annually:
- Test the flow through the CO2 gas system piping with excess compressed air. This should also trigger the gas-operated alarm.
- Conduct a mandatory annual survey.
Every 10 years: Perform an internal inspection of the bulk CO2 tank.
(i) Remote Shutdown
All fuel transfer pumps, oil-fired unit pumps, similar fuel pumps, and ventilation fans or blowers must have remote shutdown connections located outside the space where the machinery is situated. Any pipe connected to an oil fuel storage, settling, or daily service tank (not a double-bottom tank) that could create a fire hazard if damaged must be fitted with a valve or cock capable of being closed from a readily accessible location outside the tank's space.
These systems should be tested during fire drills if possible. Otherwise, they must be operated during a port stay to ensure they function properly.
(ii) Other Equipment for an Engine Room Fire
The fixed fire system is a last resort, used only after a preliminary attack on the fire has failed. Before that, other equipment is used.
- Portable Fire Extinguishers: The appropriate type of portable extinguisher should be used first, depending on the class of fire. During fire drills, a few extinguishers may be tested, then refilled and made ready for use.
- Fire Pumps and Hoses: Fire pumps, hoses, and nozzles are provided as per regulations. These should be tested during fire drills. The emergency fire pump should also be tested.
- Firefighter's Outfits: As per SOLAS 74, Chapter II-2, Regulation 10, firefighter's outfits are provided.
- Breathing Apparatus & EEBDs: Breathing apparatus and Emergency Escape Breathing Devices (EEBDs) are available to facilitate firefighting and escape, respectively. During drills, personnel should wear this equipment to test its proper function.
Local Application Fire-Fighting Systems
In addition to the main fixed system, machinery spaces of Category A with a volume over 500m³ must be protected by an approved fixed water-based or equivalent local application fire-fighting system. This is required for:
- Fire hazard portions of internal combustion engines used for propulsion and power generation.
- Boiler fronts.
- Fire hazard positions of incinerators.
- Heated oil purifiers.
This system can be checked zone by zone. To do so, shut the isolating valve, connect compressed air, and manually operate the zone's solenoid valve. Air should then come out through the nozzles of that zone, confirming they are clear. The pump can be tested by shutting the isolating valve and opening the drain valve before it, ensuring the pump is working correctly.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q4 (16 Marks)
Steering & Deck Machinery 🔥 Repeated 10x
With respect to the steering gear, answer the following:
(a) Explain with a diagram, a "failsafe steering gear" suitable for use on a tanker of more
than 100000 T dwt. (8)
(b) Explain the sequence of events that take place when an Oil leak takes place in one of the hydraulic pipelines. (8)
Appeared In: Oct 2024 Dec 2023 Aug 2023 Jul 2023 Mar 2023 Feb 2021 Feb 2019 Oct 2018 Aug 2018 Jul 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
According to SOLAS chapter - 2, part 1, regulation 29.16, every tanker of more than 10,000 GT shall comply with the following:
- The main steering capability due to a single failure in any part of one of the power actuating systems shall be regained in not more than 45 seconds.
- The main steering shall comprise at least two identical power actuating systems, each capable of meeting the requirements. Loss of fluid from one system shall be capable of being detected, and the defective system shall automatically get isolated so that the other system shall remain fully operational
Considering the above regulatory requirements, given below is a “Fail Safe steering gear” suitable for use on a tanker of more than 100,000 T DWT.
Shown in the diagram is a “Fail safe steering gear” having two independent power actuating systems that can
- Work simultaneously in normal operation, meeting the requirement OR
- Work independently and meet the requirement
- In the event of loss of fluid from any one system, it can be detected and isolated automatically so that the other system can remain fully operational.
Working:
- The system incorporates two sets of electric-driven pumps. Both main and auxiliary pumps are on the same shaft. The main pump shown in the diagram is a variable delivery pump
- The variable delivery pump takes suction from the tank and supplies hydraulic oil to the ram cylinders. The oil flow of the pump is determined by the pump actuating lever
- The movement of the pump actuating lever is controlled by the rudder angle order given by the bridge with the help of a bi-directional control valve
- A two-way shock relief valve is fitted between the two cylinders to release the pressure from one side of the cylinder to the other side in case of pressure increase in one of the cylinders due to heavy seas
- By-pass valves are also fitted between two cylinders, which are normally shut during operation. When one system is stopped, there is a pressure drop, as the auxiliary pump has also stopped this opens the by-pass valves, thus removing the hydraulic lock of the ram operation.
- Auto isolation valves in the system are there to isolate one system in case of any failure.
Sequence of events during hydraulic oil leak:
Case 1: Consider an oil leak from any pipe for cylinders 1 and 2 with the No. 1 pump running:
- No. 1 tank level will come down to L1, and it will sound an alarm on the bridge and in ECR
- When the tank level further drops to L2, i.e. low-low level, the no. 1 pump stops.
- Stopping the No. 1 pump also stops the attached auxiliary pump. So the line pressure drops, due to which the normally closed by-pass valves ‘X’ and ‘Y’ open.
- Simultaneously, the auto isolation valves ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’ will be operated by an electric signal. A, B and C are normally open valves. The electric signal will close them. So, systems 1 and 2 will be completely separated. Thus, the defective system, I.e. system 1, is isolated.
- Along with the operation of the auto isolation valves, the No. 2 pump will start automatically. The attached auxiliary pump will act on the by-pass valve ‘Y’ and close it. This enables cylinders 3 and 4 to be in normal operation.
- It should also be noted that since system 1 is completely isolated, there is no oil pressure to operate the bypass valve. So the by-pass valves remain open, thereby removing the hydraulic lock for the ram movement in cylinders 1 and 2
Case 2: Consider an oil leakage from any pipe of cylinders 3 and 4 with the No. 1 pump running:
Points 1, 2 and 3 are the same as case 1
- Simultaneously, the auto isolation valves ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’ will be operated by an electric signal. This will shut the normally open valves A, B and C. Thus, systems 1 and 2 will be completely separated
- Along with the operation of auto isolation valves, the No. 2 pump will start automatically. The attached auxiliary pump will act on the by-pass valve ‘Y’ and close. So, cylinders 3 and 4 will come into normal operation.
- Now, since the leak is between the pipe of cylinders 3 and 4, the level of the no. 2 tank will drop to L1 and give an alarm.
- The level will further drop to L2, but the pump will not stop and changeover to ensure that the leak is from the pipe of cylinders 3 and 4
- When the no. 2 tank level drops to L3, the no. 2 pump stops and the no. 1 pump starts to operate the steering using cylinders 1 and 2
- Starting the no. 1 pump will ensure that the by-pass valve ‘X’ is shut, and stopping the no. 2 pump will ensure that the by-pass valve ‘Y’ is open
This ensures the operation of the steering Gear with the defective system fully isolated.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q7 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting
Sketch an arrangement of propeller shaft and stern in which the tube is filled with oil and
(a) Describe the attention it requires at sea
(b) Suggest a method of repair when the rubbing surfaces Of the Oil seal get estate the defects that you would look for when the shaft is withdrawn in the dry-dock.
Appeared In: Mar 2023
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Propeller shaft and stern tube with the tube filled with oil (oil-lubricated stern tube)
Sketch: the propeller shaft (tailshaft/line shaft) passes through the stern tube, which is fitted in the stern frame. The stern tube is filled with lubricating oil and sealed at both ends by oil seals - a stern (inboard) seal near the flange and an outboard (aft) seal at the propeller end. Bearing/lining (white metal or controlling-fit) is attached to the tube, and the shaft runs on it in oil. The oil is circulated/pressurised by a small lub oil pump from an expansion/header tank, or a gravity system, so that the tube is always full of oil. A line diagram shows: stern tube -> oil-return and oil-supply pipes -> expansion tank (with level glass) -> lub oil pump -> seals/rings -> shaft.
- Maintain the correct oil level in the expansion/header tank - top up as necessary so the tube stays full.
- Regularly observe the oil sight glass / level and the oil pressure if a circulation pump is fitted; ensure the lub oil pump is running and delivering.
- Check the sterntube oil temperature - it should be steady; a rise indicates a bearing/alignment or lubrication problem.
- Watch for oil leakage - oil dripping from the outboard/inboard seals, or a falling tank level, indicates seal wear/blow-by; note the amount of leakage (a small weep is sometimes normal, but an increase warns of seal failure).
- Periodically sample the sterntube oil for the laboratory for water content/contamination and metal wear particles, as an indicator of bearing and seal condition.
- Monitor for vibration/noise from the shaft indicating a worn bearing or misalignment.
- In port/lying idle, keep the shaft turned occasionally (if required) and check the oil system.
Repair method: dry-dock the vessel, withdraw the propeller shaft (tailshaft) from the stern tube inboard, and examine the oil seals and the bearing. Renew the worn oil seals with new seal/insert rings; the cutters/seal carrier/springs and the shaft's wearing surface (the ground/plated area) are inspected. If the shaft surface is worn/grooved at the seal land, it is built up by metallising (flame-spray/thermal spraying) and re-machined to size, or the shaft is renewed, so a new seal runs on a good surface. Renew the white-metal bearing lining if worn, and remake the bearing to size. Re-assemble, refit the shaft, set the seals, and refill the tube with fresh lubricating oil; run and check for leaks/temperature.
Defects to look for when the shaft is withdrawn in dry-dock
- Worn, scoured or grooved shaft surface at the seal and lining (out-of-roundness, battering of the lands).
- Corrosion pitting/staining on the shaft and at the coupling.
- Leaked oil stain/grease on the hull and shaft - indicates the seal failed and sea water/corrosion may have entered.
- Damaged or distorted seals, carriers, springs and counterfaces.
- Bearing/lining wear - scored, overheated (discoloured) white-metal, wear particles; check the clearance.
- Evidence of water ingress (emulsified/water-contaminated oil, corrosion of the tube) indicating seal or bearing damage.
- Cracks/defects in the stern tube, coupling flange, and the shaft bend/bow (run-out) at the bearing; damage to the propeller cone/threads.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q8 (16 Marks)
Control & Instrumentation 🔥 Repeated 4x
Sketch and describe a valve suitable for reducing air pressure maintaining the reduced pressure within close limits. Describe the processes through which from the starting air receivers should be treated before it is used in a pneumatic control system. (16)
Appeared In: Jul 2026 Sep 2024 Nov 2023 Mar 2023
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Operation:
- The valve operates based on the balance of forces acting upon it:
- Downward Force: P1 × A, where P1 is the inlet pressure and A is the diaphragm area.
- Upward Force: (P1−P2) × a+f, where P2 is the outlet pressure, a is the valve area, and f is the spring force.
At equilibrium:
- P1×A = (P1−P2) × a+f
- If P1, A, and a are constant, P2 is directly proportional to the spring force f.
- The discharge pressure P2 can be adjusted by rotating the adjustment screw, which changes the spring force f.
Hence, if supply pressure is kept constant, the discharge pressure can be reduced or increased by rotating the adjustment screw.
process:
- The high-pressure air from the main air receiver is passed through a pressure-reducing valve, lowering the pressure to a range of 7–8 bar suitable for pneumatic systems.
- The air is passed through a filter to remove oil and water carried over from the compressor. This step eliminates contaminants that could affect system performance.
- The filtered air is sent through a dryer containing materials like silica gel or activated alumina to remove residual moisture. Dry air prevents corrosion and freezing in control lines.
- Regular drainage of accumulated water, oil, and condensate is necessary to maintain the air quality and prevent blockages in the system.
Now the air is clean & dry enough to be suitable for use in pneumatic control systems.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q2 (16 Marks)
Steering & Deck Machinery 🔥 Repeated 10x
With respect to the steering gear, answer the following:
(a) Explain with a diagram, a "failsafe steering gear" suitable for use on a tanker of more than 100000 T dwt. (8)
(b) Explain the sequence of events that take place when an Oil leak takes place in one of the hydraulic pipelines. (8)
Appeared In: Oct 2024 Dec 2023 Aug 2023 Jul 2023 Mar 2023 Feb 2021 Feb 2019 Oct 2018 Aug 2018 Jul 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
According to SOLAS chapter - 2, part 1, regulation 29.16, every tanker of more than 10,000 GT shall comply with the following:
- The main steering capability due to a single failure in any part of one of the power actuating systems shall be regained in not more than 45 seconds.
- The main steering shall comprise at least two identical power actuating systems, each capable of meeting the requirements. Loss of fluid from one system shall be capable of being detected, and the defective system shall automatically get isolated so that the other system shall remain fully operational
Considering the above regulatory requirements, given below is a “Fail Safe steering gear” suitable for use on a tanker of more than 100,000 T DWT.
Shown in the diagram is a “Fail safe steering gear” having two independent power actuating systems that can
- Work simultaneously in normal operation, meeting the requirement OR
- Work independently and meet the requirement
- In the event of loss of fluid from any one system, it can be detected and isolated automatically so that the other system can remain fully operational.
Working:
- The system incorporates two sets of electric-driven pumps. Both main and auxiliary pumps are on the same shaft. The main pump shown in the diagram is a variable delivery pump
- The variable delivery pump takes suction from the tank and supplies hydraulic oil to the ram cylinders. The oil flow of the pump is determined by the pump actuating lever
- The movement of the pump actuating lever is controlled by the rudder angle order given by the bridge with the help of a bi-directional control valve
- A two-way shock relief valve is fitted between the two cylinders to release the pressure from one side of the cylinder to the other side in case of pressure increase in one of the cylinders due to heavy seas
- By-pass valves are also fitted between two cylinders, which are normally shut during operation. When one system is stopped, there is a pressure drop, as the auxiliary pump has also stopped this opens the by-pass valves, thus removing the hydraulic lock of the ram operation.
- Auto isolation valves in the system are there to isolate one system in case of any failure.
Sequence of events during hydraulic oil leak:
Case 1: Consider an oil leak from any pipe for cylinders 1 and 2 with the No. 1 pump running:
- No. 1 tank level will come down to L1, and it will sound an alarm on the bridge and in ECR
- When the tank level further drops to L2, i.e. low-low level, the no. 1 pump stops.
- Stopping the No. 1 pump also stops the attached auxiliary pump. So the line pressure drops, due to which the normally closed by-pass valves ‘X’ and ‘Y’ open.
- Simultaneously, the auto isolation valves ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’ will be operated by an electric signal. A, B and C are normally open valves. The electric signal will close them. So, systems 1 and 2 will be completely separated. Thus, the defective system, I.e. system 1, is isolated.
- Along with the operation of the auto isolation valves, the No. 2 pump will start automatically. The attached auxiliary pump will act on the by-pass valve ‘Y’ and close it. This enables cylinders 3 and 4 to be in normal operation.
- It should also be noted that since system 1 is completely isolated, there is no oil pressure to operate the bypass valve. So the by-pass valves remain open, thereby removing the hydraulic lock for the ram movement in cylinders 1 and 2
Case 2: Consider an oil leakage from any pipe of cylinders 3 and 4 with the No. 1 pump running:
Points 1, 2 and 3 are the same as case 1
- Simultaneously, the auto isolation valves ‘A’, ‘B’ and ‘C’ will be operated by an electric signal. This will shut the normally open valves A, B and C. Thus, systems 1 and 2 will be completely separated
- Along with the operation of auto isolation valves, the No. 2 pump will start automatically. The attached auxiliary pump will act on the by-pass valve ‘Y’ and close. So, cylinders 3 and 4 will come into normal operation.
- Now, since the leak is between the pipe of cylinders 3 and 4, the level of the no. 2 tank will drop to L1 and give an alarm.
- The level will further drop to L2, but the pump will not stop and changeover to ensure that the leak is from the pipe of cylinders 3 and 4
- When the no. 2 tank level drops to L3, the no. 2 pump stops and the no. 1 pump starts to operate the steering using cylinders 1 and 2
- Starting the no. 1 pump will ensure that the by-pass valve ‘X’ is shut, and stopping the no. 2 pump will ensure that the by-pass valve ‘Y’ is open
This ensures the operation of the steering Gear with the defective system fully isolated.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q9 (16 Marks)
Materials & Testing
With reference to machinery parts under cyclic loading, describe, with the aid of sketches, the propagation of even the smallest of cracks can lead to total component failure. (16)
Appeared In: Jul 2023
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Machinery components such as crankshafts, propeller shafts, connecting rods, gears, and other rotating parts are subjected to repeated or cyclic loading during normal operation. Even when the applied stress is below the material's yield strength, repeated loading can cause fatigue failure. Fatigue failure occurs due to the initiation and gradual propagation of small cracks until the component fractures suddenly.
1. Crack Initiation
Small imperfections are always present in engineering materials. These may include:
- Machining marks
- Corrosion pits
- Material inclusions
- Weak welds
- Manufacturing defects
- Sharp changes in section or poor design features
These imperfections act as stress concentration points. During repeated cyclic loading, the local stress at these points becomes much higher than the average stress, resulting in the formation of a small fatigue crack.
2. Crack Propagation
Once initiated, the crack opens and closes during every loading cycle.
- The crack tip experiences very high stress concentration.
- Each stress cycle extends the crack by a very small amount.
- Initially, crack growth is slow.
- As the crack becomes longer, the stress intensity at the crack tip increases, causing the crack to grow more rapidly.
- Corrosion can further accelerate crack growth by making the material brittle and more susceptible to fatigue.
3. Reduction of Load-Carrying Area
As the crack propagates, the effective cross-sectional area of the component decreases.
- The remaining uncracked section has to carry the entire operating load.
- This increases the stress on the remaining material.
- The higher stress further accelerates crack growth, creating a continuous cycle of weakening.
4. Critical Crack Size and Final Failure
Eventually, the crack reaches a critical size, where the remaining cross-section is no longer able to withstand the applied load.
At this stage:
- Rapid crack propagation occurs.
- The remaining section fractures suddenly without warning.
- The component fails completely, often causing serious machinery damage.
Factors Causing Fatigue Cracking
Fatigue cracking may be initiated or accelerated by:
- Mechanical fatigue due to repeated cyclic loading.
- Poor material selection.
- Manufacturing defects.
- Weak welds.
- Design flaws causing stress concentration.
- Corrosion and oxidation, which make the material brittle and increase susceptibility to fatigue cracking.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q1 (16 Marks)
Auxiliary Machinery 🔥 Repeated 2x
With reference to centrifugal pumps and pumping systems.
(a) Under what conditions a centrifugal pump require a priming device for pump to operate normally? (6)
(b) Draw a neat graph and explain the performance curves of a centrifugal pump. (10)
Appeared In: Aug 2026 Mar 2024
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
A centrifugal pump requires priming when the pump casing and suction line are not completely filled with liquid before starting, particularly when:
- The pump is installed above the liquid level, i.e. under a suction-lift arrangement.
- The pump and/or suction pipe contains air or vapour after the pump has been stopped, drained, opened for maintenance, or has lost its prime.
- The pump is started for the first time after installation.
- Air has entered through the suction side due to leakage, a defective foot valve, or an improperly filled suction line.
Reason for priming
A centrifugal pump cannot normally pump air effectively. If the impeller rotates with air in the casing, it produces only a small pressure difference, which is generally insufficient to draw the liquid up through the suction pipe. Therefore, the pump casing and suction line must first be filled with liquid and the air removed.
Priming may be carried out by:
- Filling the pump casing and suction line manually.
- Using a foot valve to retain liquid in the suction line.
- Using an external priming device, such as a vacuum pump or ejector.
Once the casing and suction line are filled with liquid, the rotating impeller can produce the required pressure difference and the pump will operate normally.
The performance curves of a centrifugal pump show the relationship between the pump capacity and its operating characteristics. These curves are normally obtained by testing the pump with water at a constant rotational speed.
The horizontal axis represents the capacity or flow rate, (Q). Depending on the graph, the vertical axes represent head, efficiency and brake horsepower (power).
The main performance curves are as follows:
1. Head–Capacity Curve ((H-Q))
The head produced by the pump decreases as the flow rate increases.
- At zero flow, the pump develops its maximum or shut-off head.
- As the discharge or capacity increases, the head gradually decreases.
- At high flow rates, the head falls rapidly.
This is the characteristic downward-sloping pump head curve.
2. Efficiency–Capacity Curve ((\eta-Q))
The efficiency curve shows how effectively the pump converts the mechanical energy supplied to the shaft into useful hydraulic energy.
- At zero flow, the efficiency is zero.
- As the flow increases, the efficiency rises.
- It reaches a maximum value known as the Best Efficiency Point (BEP).
- Beyond the BEP, the efficiency decreases again as the flow increases further.
Thus, the efficiency curve is approximately bell-shaped or parabolic.
The pump should preferably be operated at or close to the BEP, as this gives maximum efficiency and generally results in lower vibration, noise and mechanical wear.
3. Brake Horsepower–Capacity Curve ((BHP-Q))
The brake horsepower curve shows the power required to drive the pump at different flow rates.
- The power requirement generally increases as the capacity increases.
- Therefore, the driving motor must be selected with sufficient capacity to meet the maximum expected power requirement.
Best Efficiency Point (BEP)
As shown in the graph, the BEP is the point at which the pump operates at maximum efficiency. It corresponds to a particular combination of flow rate, head and power requirement.
For satisfactory and economical operation, the pump should normally be selected so that its normal operating point is as close as practicable to the BEP.
System Operating or Duty Point
A centrifugal pump does not operate independently of the piping system. The actual operating condition depends on the system head, which consists of:
- Static head, and
- Frictional and other flow losses in the piping system.
When the system head curve is superimposed on the pump head-capacity curve, the point of intersection is called the:
- Operating Point, or
- Duty Point.
At this point, the head developed by the pump is exactly equal to the head required by the system.
Ideally, the pumping system should be designed so that the normal duty point lies at or near the pump's Best Efficiency Point (BEP).
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting 🔥 Repeated 11x
With regards to main transmission shaft flange coupling arrangements:
(a) Sketch a hollow type coupling bolt and the hydraulic head/nut and loading rod which are used to fit it. (8)
(b) Describe how the bolt is fitted. (4)
(c) State the advantage of the hollow coupling bolt as compared to the traditional type of coupling bolt. (4)
Appeared In: Aug 2026 Jul 2025 Apr 2024 Mar 2024 Jun 2023 Feb 2021 Jan 2021 Mar 2020 Jun 2019 Jul 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- A bolt with a diameter slightly larger than the flange coupling bore diameter (D + 0.00025D) is selected.
- A push rod (loading rod) is inserted into the hollow coupling bolt, and a hydraulic head is attached.
- Hydraulic oil pressure of approximately 30,000 N/m² is applied, causing the bolt to stretch (approximately 0.021mm) and temporarily reduce its diameter by 0.00025D. This allows easy insertion of the bolt into the flange bore.
- The bolt is placed inside the bore by hand, and the nut is tightened and nipped up using a spanner.
- The hydraulic pressure is then released, allowing the bolt to expand and create a secure interference fit within the bore. This generates a tensile stress of approximately 15.5 tons/m², ensuring a firm grip.
- After fitting, the hydraulic assembly (items A, B, and C) is removed, and a protective plastic cap is placed over the bolt head.
- The hollow bolt design allows precise control of the bolt load, ensuring optimal tightening and load distribution.
- Diametrical re-expansion after hydraulic pressure release ensures a strong interference fit of the shank within the flange bore, reducing the risk of loosening.
- Hollow coupling bolts are easier to remove for inspection and maintenance, significantly reducing dismantling and fitting time.
- Unlike traditional bolts, hollow coupling bolts minimize wear on the bore, eliminating the need for frequent re-machining.
- Replacement of hollow coupling bolts is less frequent, reducing operational downtime and maintenance costs.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q4 (16 Marks)
Steering & Deck Machinery 🔥 Repeated 3x
With reference to electrohydraulic steering gear systems with four Rams,
(a) With the aid of a sketch describe the working principle of hydraulic pump. (8)
(b) Explain the method adopted to prevent hydraulic oil leakage along the rams (4)
(c) Discuss the methods adopted to prevent damage to the steering gear due to jumping of rudder in heavy seas. (4).
Appeared In: Aug 2026 Jul 2025 Mar 2024
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The Hele-Shaw pump, commonly used in electrohydraulic steering gear systems, is a variable-displacement, reversible axial-piston pump. Its delivery and direction of flow are controlled by changing the position or angle of the circular floating ring/swash plate.
Working Principle
The pump consists of a rotating cylinder barrel containing a number of pistons, the outer ends of which are connected through slippers to a circular floating ring or swash-plate arrangement. The cylinder barrel rotates with the driving shaft, while the ports are arranged through a central valve arrangement.
1. Neutral Position – No Pumping
When the circular ring accommodating the slippers is concentric with the central valve arrangement, the pistons do not have any relative reciprocating motion inside their cylinders.
Therefore:
- No change in cylinder volume takes place.
- No oil is sucked into the cylinders.
- No oil is discharged.
- Although the pump and cylinder barrel continue to rotate, no fluid is delivered.
This is the neutral or zero-delivery position.
Similarly, in the swash-plate type arrangement, when the swash plate is in the vertical or neutral position, no pumping takes place.
2. Ring/Swash Plate Moved to One Side
When the circular floating ring is pulled to the right, or the swash plate is tilted in one direction, the pistons are forced to move to and fro within their cylinders as the cylinder barrel rotates.
This produces the pumping action.
For example:
- The lower piston moves inwards and discharges fluid through the lower port.
- As the cylinder barrel continues to rotate, the piston reaches the horizontal position and then starts moving outwards.
- During the outward movement, fluid is drawn into the cylinder through the upper port.
Thus, with the ring displaced to one side:
- Upper ports act as suction ports.
- Lower ports act as discharge ports.
The pump therefore delivers hydraulic oil in one direction.
3. Ring/Swash Plate Moved to the Opposite Side
If the circular ring is pushed to the left, or the swash plate is tilted in the opposite direction, the reciprocating movement of the pistons is reversed relative to the ports.
Consequently:
- The previous suction ports become discharge ports.
- The previous discharge ports become suction ports.
Thus, the direction of hydraulic oil flow is reversed.
This reversible flow enables the hydraulic rams of the steering gear to move in either direction, thereby turning the rudder to port or starboard.
Swash-Pump Operation – Summary
- The driving shaft rotates the cylinder barrel and pistons.
- An external trunnion shaft enables the swash plate to be moved or tilted about its axis.
- When the swash plate is in the vertical/neutral position, no pumping takes place.
- When the swash plate is tilted in one direction, the pistons reciprocate, causing one set of ports to act as suction ports and the ports on the opposite side of the centreline to act as discharge ports.
- When the swash plate is tilted in the opposite direction, the direction of fluid flow is reversed.
- The stroke length of the pistons, and hence the quantity of fluid delivered, depends on the angle of tilt of the swash plate. A greater angle of tilt produces a longer piston stroke and greater pump delivery.
In Summary
The Hele-Shaw pump provides:
- Zero delivery when the swash plate/floating ring is in the neutral position.
- Variable delivery depending on the angle of displacement or tilt.
- Reversible flow when the direction of displacement is reversed.
Hydraulic oil leakage along the ram is prevented by providing an effective ram sealing arrangement at the point where the ram passes through the cylinder cover or gland.
The arrangement generally consists of:
- Gland packing or sealing rings: Special seals are fitted around the ram to prevent hydraulic oil from escaping along the reciprocating surface.
- Multiple sealing elements: A combination of pressure seals, backup rings and scraper/wiper rings may be used to provide reliable sealing.
- Wiper or scraper ring: This removes dirt, moisture and other contaminants from the ram surface before it enters the cylinder, thereby protecting the main sealing elements.
- Drainage/leakage collection arrangement: The gland area may be provided with a leakage collection or drain arrangement so that any seal leakage is detected and prevented from spreading into the steering gear compartment.
The ram surface must also be kept smooth, clean and free from corrosion or scoring, since a damaged ram surface can rapidly destroy the seals and cause excessive oil leakage.
In heavy seas, a large external force acting on the rudder may cause sudden movement or vertical jumping of the rudder. Suitable arrangements are therefore provided to protect the steering gear, tiller and hydraulic rams from excessive shock loads.
1. Relief or safety valves
- When a heavy sea strikes the rudder, the external force can cause the hydraulic pressure in the steering system to rise sharply.
- Safety or relief valves are fitted to prevent excessive pressure from damaging the hydraulic system. If the pressure exceeds the preset value, the relief valve opens and allows hydraulic oil to bypass. This relieves the excessive pressure and permits controlled movement, thereby protecting the steering gear components.
2. Jumping clearance
- A specified vertical jumping clearance is maintained between the structural stops associated with the rudder and the ship's hull.
- This clearance is carefully designed to be less than the internal clearance between the tiller and the steering gear ram casing. Therefore, if the rudder moves vertically due to heavy seas, the external structural stop takes the load before the tiller or crosshead can strike and damage the steering gear components.
3. Jumping bars or stop pads
- Heavy-duty jumping bars or stop pads are fitted to the hull structure.
- If the rudder jumps upward, it contacts these solid structural stops first. The stops limit the vertical movement of the rudder and prevent the internal tiller or crosshead from striking the hydraulic rams or actuators, thereby avoiding serious mechanical damage.
4. Rudder carrier bearing
- A robust rudder carrier bearing supports the weight of the rudder assembly and limits excessive vertical or lateral movement.
- By reducing unwanted play, the carrier bearing helps reduce the severity of shock loading and impacts when the rudder is subjected to heavy sea forces.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q7 (16 Marks)
General 🔥 Repeated 4x
(a) Explain why pilot injection is required for a Dual fuel engine when burning natural gas. (8)
(b) Describe, with the aid of a sketch, the arrangements for a dual fuel engine which is capable of burning natural gas on,
(i) The Otto cycle. (4)
(ii) The Diesel cycle. (4)
Appeared In: Jul 2025 Mar 2025 Mar 2024 Sep 2022
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- The engine operates in gas mode during the suction stroke, where a lean air-gas mixture is drawn into the cylinders.
- The cylinder head is equipped with a gas admission valve positioned in the air inlet passage, and there is a fuel injector capable of both main and pilot injection.
- A common rail computer-operated pilot fuel injection system is utilised, providing precise control over the injected fuel. This system can easily regulate or shut off the fuel injected through the main injector nozzles.
- During engine startup, diesel fuel is used for ignition, employing both pilot and main injection. Once combustion is stable, the engine transitions to a gas supply. This transition typically takes about one minute, during which the substitution of fuel oil by gas occurs gradually.
(ii) Diesel Cycle:
- As a two-stroke engine uses intake air for scavenging, it's essential not to mix the gas fuel with the intake air.
- Instead, the gas fuel is injected into the compressed air, similar to the injection process for diesel fuel.
- Ignition is achieved by injecting fuel via the micro-pilot fuel injector, resulting in diffusion combustion.
- This approach not only reduces CO emissions by 20% or more but also maintains low levels of unburned gas and CO emissions without the occurrence of knocking. The utilisation of micro-pilot fuel injection ensures a controlled and efficient combustion process, optimising the performance of the dual-fuel engine burning natural gas.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q8 (16 Marks)
Refrigeration & Air Conditioning 🔥 Repeated 2x
Explain vapor compression refrigeration cycle on T-S and P-H diagram and explain the purpose of EACH of the following:
(a) Expansion valve (4)
(b) Room thermostat (4)
(c) High pressure cut out. (4)
(d) Equalizing line. (4)
Appeared In: Aug 2026 Mar 2024
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Vapor Compression Refrigeration Cycle
The vapour compression refrigeration cycle consists of four main processes:
- Compression – 1 → 2
- Condensation – 2 → 3
- Expansion – 3 → 4
- Evaporation – 4 → 1
1. T-S Diagram
- 1 → 2: Compression: Refrigerant vapour from the evaporator is compressed in the compressor. Ideally, compression is isentropic, so entropy remains constant.
- 2 → 3: Condensation: High-pressure, high-temperature vapour passes through the condenser and rejects heat to the surroundings. The refrigerant changes from vapour to liquid.
- 3 → 4: Expansion: High-pressure liquid passes through the expansion valve. Pressure and temperature drop suddenly. The process is approximately constant enthalpy (isenthalpic).
- 4 → 1: Evaporation: The low-pressure refrigerant absorbs heat from the refrigerated space and evaporates, producing the cooling effect.
2. P-H Diagram
- 1 → 2: Pressure and enthalpy increase during compression.
- 2 → 3: Pressure remains approximately constant while heat is rejected and the refrigerant condenses.
- 3 → 4: Pressure drops through the expansion valve, while enthalpy remains approximately constant.
- 4 → 1: Pressure remains approximately constant while the refrigerant absorbs heat and evaporates.
The expansion valve:
- Reduces the pressure of the liquid refrigerant from condenser pressure to evaporator pressure.
- Causes a corresponding drop in refrigerant temperature.
- Meters the correct quantity of refrigerant entering the evaporator.
- Produces a mixture of liquid and vapour at the evaporator inlet.
- The expansion process is approximately isenthalpic, i.e. h₃ = h₄.
Purpose: To provide the required pressure reduction and control the refrigerant flow into the evaporator.
The room thermostat controls the temperature of the refrigerated space.
- It senses the room/cold-space temperature.
- When the temperature rises above the set value, it starts or keeps the compressor running.
- When the required temperature is reached, it stops the compressor or signals the control system to stop it.
- It therefore prevents excessive cooling and maintains the required room temperature.
Purpose: To automatically maintain the refrigerated space at the desired temperature.
The high-pressure cut-out is a safety device fitted on the high-pressure side of the refrigeration system.
- It senses the discharge/condenser pressure.
- If the pressure rises above the preset safe limit, it stops the compressor.
- It protects the compressor, condenser and other components from excessive pressure.
- Causes of high pressure may include poor condenser cooling, dirty condenser, inadequate cooling-water/air flow, overcharging or non-condensable gases.
- The fault should be investigated and rectified before restarting the system.
Purpose: To protect the refrigeration plant against dangerously high discharge pressure.
The equalizing line is normally associated with a thermostatic expansion valve (TXV).
- It connects the evaporator outlet/suction line to the pressure-sensing side of the TXV.
- It allows the TXV to sense the actual evaporator outlet pressure.
- This pressure is used together with the sensing-bulb temperature to control the refrigerant flow and maintain the required superheat.
- It is particularly important where there is a significant pressure drop between the evaporator outlet and the TXV sensing point.
Purpose: To transmit the actual evaporator pressure to the TXV so that the valve can correctly control refrigerant flow and maintain proper superheat.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (16 Marks)
Steering & Deck Machinery 🔥 Repeated 6x
(a) Describe with the aid of sketches where necessary a vane type steering gear showing how to weight of the rudder and stock are carried and the arrangement that allow for wear down (6)
(b) State how the vanes described in (a) are secured and the method of sealing the edges. (5)
(c) State how, if necessary, the steering gear is locked for rudder maintenance. (5)
Appeared In: Dec 2025 Oct 2025 Mar 2025 Sep 2023 Apr 2023 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- The rotor is fitted to the tapered rudder stock. The rudder stock carries the weight of the rudder, supported by a rudder carrier bearing.
- The stator is fixed to the ship’s structure, forming a rigid support.
- The fixed vanes are evenly spaced inside the stator bore, while the rotating vanes are equally spaced on the rotor.
- These vanes form two sets of pressure chambers in the annular space between the rotor and stator. Hydraulic fluid is supplied at pressure to one set of chambers, causing the rotor and rudder to rotate in the required direction based on the steering order from the wheelhouse.
- The weight of the rudder and rudder stock is carried by the rudder carrier bearing, which is mounted on steel chocks supported by thicker deck plating to ensure stability and handle the load.
- There is a vertical clearance between the stator flange and the anchor bracket to allow for rudder "jump" (vertical movement).
- Another clearance exists between the top of the anchor bracket and the stator flange to accommodate for rudder wear down or rudder drop over time. The total clearance provided is around 38 mm, allowing the system to absorb wear and vertical movement without affecting performance.
- The fixed and rotary vanes are made from modular cast iron and are secured to the rotor and stator using high-tensile steel dowel pins and cap screws to maintain strength and prevent detachment under stress. A key is fitted along the length of the rotary vanes to provide additional reinforcement and ensure the strength of the rotor.
- The sealing of the vanes is achieved using sealing strips made of cast iron. These strips are fitted into grooves along the edges of the vanes. The sealing strips are backed by elastically loaded synthetic rubber, which provides a tight seal by pressing against the faces of both the fixed and rotating vanes. This arrangement prevents hydraulic fluid leakage.
- Hydraulic Locking: This involves closing the manual isolating valves provided for each cylinder (in ram-type systems) or each vane chamber (in vane-type systems). This prevents hydraulic fluid flow, thus immobilizing the rudder.
- Mechanical Locking: Three methods are available:
- A spanner is fitted to the rudder stock head nut and secured to the ship's structure, directly preventing rudder movement.
- If provided, tow gigs are fitted between the crosshead and cylinder base, mechanically locking the steering mechanism
- (Assuming a braking system is integrated into the design) Engaging the brake will prevent any movement of the rudder.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q7 (16 Marks)
Refrigeration & Air Conditioning 🔥 Repeated 4x
(a) Explain with a sketch the operation of an automatic expansion valve as fitted in the direct expansion refrigeration plants. How is this valve adjusted? (6)
(b) Explain how critical temperature restricts plant operation and how these limitations can be overcome? (5)
(c) Explain how this system maintains the provision rooms at different temperatures? (5)
Appeared In: Mar 2025 Aug 2024 Feb 2023 Oct 2022
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The purpose of the expansion valve in a refrigeration system is to regulate the flow of refrigerant from the high-pressure side (condenser) to the low-pressure side (evaporator), ensuring efficient operation based on the cooling demand. It adjusts refrigerant flow to maintain the desired temperature in the evaporator. It prevents liquid refrigerant from reaching the compressor, ensuring complete vaporisation in the evaporator.
Pressure Regulation: The valve contains a diaphragm that responds to pressure differences:
- P1 (Top Pressure): Exerted by a heat-sensitive fluid in a bulb, which senses the temperature of the gas leaving the evaporator.
- P2 (Bottom Pressure): Exerted by the refrigerant entering the evaporator.
- P3 (Spring Pressure): Ensures a degree of superheat, keeping the valve slightly closed to convert all liquid refrigerant into gas.
- At superheat conditions, P1 = P2 + P3.
- An Adjusting Screw is used to modify the superheat degree, optimizing the evaporator’s performance.
Equalizing Line: In systems with a significant pressure drop in the evaporator (more than 0.3 bar), an Equalizing Line feeds the outlet pressure back to the valve for accurate temperature and pressure control.
- Ensures efficient heat absorption in the evaporator.
- Protects the compressor by avoiding liquid refrigerant carryover.
- Adapts to varying cooling loads for optimal system performance.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q8 (16 Marks)
General 🔥 Repeated 4x
(a) Explain why pilot injection is required for a Dual fuel engine when burning natural gas. (8)
(b) Describe, with the aid of a sketch, the arrangements for a dual fuel engine which is capable of burning natural gas on (8)
(i) The otto cycle
(ii) The Diesel cycle
Appeared In: Jul 2025 Mar 2025 Mar 2024 Sep 2022
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- The engine operates in gas mode during the suction stroke, where a lean air-gas mixture is drawn into the cylinders.
- The cylinder head is equipped with a gas admission valve positioned in the air inlet passage, and there is a fuel injector capable of both main and pilot injection.
- A common rail computer-operated pilot fuel injection system is utilised, providing precise control over the injected fuel. This system can easily regulate or shut off the fuel injected through the main injector nozzles.
- During engine startup, diesel fuel is used for ignition, employing both pilot and main injection. Once combustion is stable, the engine transitions to a gas supply. This transition typically takes about one minute, during which the substitution of fuel oil by gas occurs gradually.
(ii) Diesel Cycle:
- As a two-stroke engine uses intake air for scavenging, it's essential not to mix the gas fuel with the intake air.
- Instead, the gas fuel is injected into the compressed air, similar to the injection process for diesel fuel.
- Ignition is achieved by injecting fuel via the micro-pilot fuel injector, resulting in diffusion combustion.
- This approach not only reduces CO emissions by 20% or more but also maintains low levels of unburned gas and CO emissions without the occurrence of knocking. The utilisation of micro-pilot fuel injection ensures a controlled and efficient combustion process, optimising the performance of the dual-fuel engine burning natural gas.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q9 (16 Marks)
Control & Instrumentation 🔥 Repeated 7x
Describe with a sketch a pneumatic relay and show how feedback can be achieved when such a relay is used in conjunction with a flapper mechanism. (16)
Appeared In: Mar 2025 Sep 2023 Oct 2020 Oct 2018 Aug 2018 Jul 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The pneumatic relay operates on the principle of a nozzle-flapper arrangement. Air supply pressure acts on a diaphragm located below a spring. A rod and plug, connected to the diaphragm, control the flow of output air through a nozzle. A flapper is positioned near the nozzle.
Operation:
- An input signal (which can be a change in pressure or displacement of the flapper) affects the flapper's position.
- Flapper movement changes the distance between the flapper and the nozzle. A decrease in distance (flapper closer to the nozzle) restricts the output airflow. Conversely, an increase in distance increases output airflow. This is the direct action of the relay.
- Changes in the output air flow alter the back pressure at the nozzle.
- Increased nozzle back pressure pushes the diaphragm downwards, compressing the spring and further reducing the output airflow. Decreased nozzle back pressure allows the spring to push the diaphragm upwards, increasing output airflow.
- A portion of the output air is fed back through a line connected to a bellows and a feedback-adjusting spring (as shown in the sketch). This feedback pressure acts against the diaphragm, opposing the effect of the input signal. The bellows and spring arrangement allow the system to fine-tune the feedback strength. This negative feedback stabilises the system and increases the control range, preventing excessive overshoot or oscillation. The feedback mechanism subtracts from the effective input pressure, acting as a negative feedback loop.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (16 Marks)
General 🔥 Repeated 4x
(a) Describe the key phases and microstructures present in the iron-carbon equilibrium diagram and explain their significance in the heat treatment of steel. (8)
(b) How do the different regions of the iron carbon diagram influence the mechanical properties of steel, such as hardness, toughness, and ductility? Provide examples of how specific compositions and heat treatments can achieve desired properties. (8)
Appeared In: Apr 2026 Mar 2026 Apr 2025 Aug 2024
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Iron–Carbon Equilibrium Diagram
The iron–carbon (Fe–C) equilibrium diagram shows the phases and microstructures that form in iron–carbon alloys at different carbon contents and temperatures. Understanding this diagram is essential for selecting and controlling the heat treatment of steel.
1. Important Regions and Microstructures
Type | Carbon Content | Main Characteristics |
Hypoeutectoid steels | 0.02–0.8% C | Ferrite + pearlite; generally good ductility and toughness |
Eutectoid steel | ≈ 0.8% C | Mainly pearlite; good balance between hardness and ductility |
Hypereutectoid steels | 0.8–2.14% C | Pearlite + cementite; higher hardness and strength |
Hypoeutectic cast irons | 2.14–4.3% C | Pearlite + transformed ledeburite |
Eutectic cast iron | ≈ 4.3% C | Ledeburite |
Hypereutectic cast irons | 4.3–6.67% C | Ledeburite + primary cementite |
2. Important Phases
Ferrite (α-iron):
- Soft and relatively weak.
- Has very low carbon solubility.
- Provides good ductility and toughness.
Austenite (γ-iron):
- Exists at higher temperatures.
- Can dissolve considerably more carbon than ferrite.
- It is the starting phase for important heat treatments such as quenching and normalising.
Cementite (Fe₃C):
- Iron carbide containing approximately 6.67% carbon.
- Very hard and brittle.
- Increases hardness and wear resistance, but reduces ductility and toughness.
Pearlite:
- A layered mixture of ferrite and cementite.
- Forms when austenite undergoes eutectoid transformation.
- Provides a useful combination of strength, hardness and ductility.
Martensite:
- A very hard, metastable structure formed when austenite is rapidly quenched.
- It provides very high hardness and strength but is relatively brittle.
3. Critical Points of the Fe–C Diagram
Eutectoid Point
The eutectoid point is approximately:
At this temperature, austenite transforms completely into pearlite during slow cooling:
Austenite → Ferrite + Cementite = Pearlite
This is one of the most important reference points for steel heat treatment.
Eutectic Point
The eutectic point is approximately:
At this point, liquid alloy solidifies directly into:
Liquid → Austenite + Cementite
This point is particularly important in the study and manufacture of cast irons.
Peritectic Point
The peritectic point occurs at approximately:
At this point:
Liquid + Delta Ferrite → Austenite
4. Significance in Heat Treatment
The Fe–C diagram is essential for determining the appropriate heating and cooling temperatures for different heat treatments.
- Annealing: The steel is heated to the appropriate temperature and then cooled slowly. This allows the microstructure to approach equilibrium, reducing residual stresses and increasing ductility and toughness.
- Normalising: The steel is heated into the austenite region and then cooled in air. It produces a finer microstructure than annealing and generally improves strength and toughness.
- Quenching: The steel is heated to form austenite and then cooled rapidly. Rapid cooling prevents normal carbon diffusion and transforms austenite into martensite, producing very high hardness and strength.
- Tempering: Tempering is carried out after quenching. The steel is reheated to a suitable temperature and then cooled. It reduces the brittleness and internal stresses of martensite while improving toughness and ductility.
- Carburising: Carburising enriches the surface layer with carbon. The carburised surface can then be quenched to form a hard martensitic case, while the lower-carbon core remains relatively tough and ductile.
The carbon content and resulting microstructure have a major influence on the mechanical properties of steel. As carbon content increases, hardness and strength generally increase, while ductility and toughness generally decrease.
1. Hypoeutectoid Steel – 0.02–0.8% C
Hypoeutectoid steels contain ferrite + pearlite.
- Ferrite provides ductility and toughness.
- Pearlite provides increased strength and hardness.
- As carbon content increases within this range, the amount of pearlite increases, resulting in higher strength and hardness.
Example:
A low-carbon steel with approximately 0.2% C, when normalised, produces a ferrite–pearlite structure with good strength, ductility and toughness. Such steels are suitable where good formability and toughness are required.
2. Eutectoid Steel – Approximately 0.77–0.8% C
At approximately 0.77–0.8% carbon, the steel transforms into mainly pearlite during slow cooling.
Pearlite provides a good balance of:
- Hardness
- Strength
- Ductility
If eutectoid steel is quenched, it forms martensite and becomes very hard and strong. However, it also becomes more brittle.
After quenching, tempering is normally carried out to reduce brittleness and improve toughness.
3. Hypereutectoid Steel – 0.8–2.14% C
Hypereutectoid steels contain pearlite + cementite.
The additional cementite increases:
- Hardness
- Strength
- Wear resistance
However, excessive cementite makes the steel more brittle and reduces ductility and toughness.
Example:
A steel containing approximately 1.0% C, when suitably heat treated, can develop high hardness and wear resistance, making it suitable for components such as tools, cutting components and wear-resistant parts.
4. Effect of Quenching and Tempering
A high-carbon or medium-carbon steel can be heated into the austenite region and then quenched.
Austenite → Martensite
This produces:
- Very high hardness.
- High strength.
- Good wear resistance.
However, untempered martensite is brittle and contains high internal stresses.
Therefore, tempering after quenching is used to:
- Reduce brittleness.
- Relieve internal stresses.
- Increase toughness and ductility.
- Retain an appropriate level of hardness.
The tempering temperature can be selected according to the required balance between hardness and toughness.
5. Carburising – Hard Surface with Tough Core
For a low-carbon steel, carburising can be used to increase the carbon content at the surface.
After carburising and quenching:
- The surface becomes high-carbon martensite and therefore very hard and wear-resistant.
- The core remains relatively low in carbon and therefore retains good toughness and ductility.
This is useful for components requiring a hard, wear-resistant surface together with a tough core, such as gears and similar machine components.
ALTERNATE ANSWER:
Different Phases
α-ferrite
Existing at low temperatures and low carbon content, α-ferrite is a solid solution of carbon in BCC Fe. This phase is stable at room temperature. In the graph, it can be seen as a sliver on the left edge with the Y-axis on the left side and A2 on the right. This phase is magnetic below 768°C.
It has a maximum carbon content of 0.022 %, and it will transform to γ-austenite at 912°C, as shown in the graph.
γ-austenite
This phase is a solid solution of carbon in FCC Fe with a maximum solubility of 2.14% C. On further heating, it converts into BCC δ-ferrite at 1395°C. γ-austenite is unstable at temperatures below the eutectic temperature (727°C) unless cooled rapidly. This phase is non-magnetic.
δ-ferrite
This phase has a similar structure to α-ferrite but exists only at high temperatures. The phase can be spotted at the top left corner on the graph. It has a melting point of 1538°C.
Fe3C or cementite
Cementite is a metastable phase of this alloy with a fixed composition of Fe3C. It decomposes extremely slowly at room temperature into iron and carbon (graphite).
This decomposition time is long, and it will take much longer than the service life of the application at room temperature. Some other factors (high temperatures and the addition of certain alloying elements, for instance) can affect this decomposition as they promote graphite formation.
Cementite is hard and brittle, which makes it suitable for strengthening steels. Its mechanical properties are a function of its microstructure, which depends upon how it is mixed with ferrite.
Fe-C liquid solution
Marked on the diagram as ‘L’, it can be seen in the upper region on the diagram. As the name suggests, it is a liquid solution of carbon in iron. As we know that δ-ferrite melts at 1538°C, it is evident that the melting temperature of iron decreases with increasing carbon content.
Significance in the Heat Treatment of Steel
- Austenitizing Foundation: Heat treatments (like annealing, normalizing, and hardening) begin by heating steel into the stable γ-austenite region. The diagram defines the exact minimum temperature (A3 or A1 critical lines) required to dissolve carbon and homogenize the microstructure.
- Controlling Phase Transformations: By tracking carbon content and crossing critical boundary lines, metallurgists predict whether slow cooling will yield soft ferrite-pearlite structures (via annealing) or if rapid quenching will trap carbon atoms to form ultra-hard martensite (the non-equilibrium body-centered tetragonal structure essential for hardening).
- Tailoring Mechanical Properties: The relative proportions of soft ferrite, hard cementite layers (pearlite spacing), and interstitial phases dictate the ultimate balance of tensile strength, hardness, and ductility
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q7 (16 Marks)
Auxiliary Machinery
(a) Describe the purpose and main components of an air conditioning system used on ships. Describe the layout and working of the system with the help of a diagram. Describe the function of the unloader in the compressor and its importance during system operation. (6)
(b) Name the thermodynamic cycle on which the marine air conditioning system operates. Explain this cycle using a pressure enthalpy (P-h) diagram and describe the role of each component in the cycle. (10)
Appeared In: Apr 2025
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Purpose: to maintain a comfortable, healthy environment in the accommodation/public spaces by controlling temperature, humidity and air freshness (ventilation) - heating or cooling the air, and providing filtered, fresh air. It also dehumidifies in hot humid conditions.
Main components: compressor, condenser (with fan/cooler), thermostatic/expansion valve, evaporator coil, air handling/ fan unit, filters, ducts (supply and return), heating battery/ re-heater (for winter or humidity control), fresh-air intake, and the duct grilles. Refrigerant circuit: compressor -> condenser -> expansion device -> evaporator, closed loop.
Layout and working: Fresh and recirculated air is drawn through filters into the central air-handling/l every coil unit, where a fan blows it over the evaporator (in cooling mode) which removes heat and moisture and drops the air temperature; the cooled air is then distributed through supply ducts to each cabin via grilles, and return air is ducted back. In heating mode the heat is supplied by a heating battery (hot water or electric) instead of/by passing the coil. A thermostat/humidistat controls the system and the temperature is regulated.
Function of the unloader and its importance: the compressor unloader is a capacity-control device (e.g. a cylinder-head unloader valve / suction by-pass or a cylinder unloader that lifts the suction valves when unloaded) that reduces the compressor's effective displacement. Its importance: it prevents the sudden on/off cycling and slugging under light load, reduces motor starting overload, prevents evaporator frosting/short cycling, saves energy and ensures stable temperature control - by reducing capacity when the cooling load falls and increasing it when the load rises, so the compressor does not overload the motor or surge on start-up.
The marine A/C system operates on the vapour-compression refrigeration cycle.
Using a pressure-enthalpy (P-h) diagram: the cycle has four processes (1-2-3-4 on the diagram):
- 1-2: Compression. Refrigerant vapour is compressed from the suction pressure (low) to the discharge pressure (high); work is put in, enthalpy rises and temperature rises - the refrigerant leaves as hot, high-pressure vapour.
- 2-3: Condensation. The hot vapour flows through the condenser where heat is rejected to the cooling medium (air/sea water); the refrigerant gives up latent heat, condenses to a liquid at high pressure, with decreasing enthalpy at constant pressure.
- 3-4: Expansion (throttling). The liquid passes through the expansion (thermostatic) valve, dropping to the low pressure (flash gas formed, enthalpy essentially constant).
- 4-1: Evaporation. The low-pressure liquid/vapour mixture flows through the evaporator where it absorbs heat from the air, evaporating and cooling the airstream; the vapour returns to the compressor and the cycle repeats.
Role of each component: compressor - raises pressure/temperature of the vapour (heart of the cycle); condenser - rejects heat and liquefies the refrigerant; expansion valve - drops pressure so the refrigerant can evaporate at the required low temperature and control flow; evaporator - absorbs heat from the air to cool it. The cycle provides both cooling and (via the heating battery) heating as required.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (16 Marks)
General 🔥 Repeated 6x
(a) Describe, with the aid of a sketch, an open loop system for reducing SOx emissions from engine exhaust gas, explaining how the system operates whilst the vessel is in open waters. (6)
(b) Describe, with the aid of a sketch, a closed loop scrubber system for removing SOx from engine exhaust gas, explaining the operation of this unit and stating when it would be used. (10)
Appeared In: Nov 2025 Jun 2025 Jul 2024 Sep 2022 Jun 2026 Jan 2025 - 1
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- Exhaust gases enter via the bottom side of the scrubber tower
- Seawater is sprayed at the top of the scrubber through spraying nozzles
- This results in an equally divided spray pattern throughout the scrubber
- Sulphur particles in the exhaust gas attach to the water droplets under the right temperature and process conditions
- Cleaned exhaust gas leaves via the top of the scrubber tower
- The seawater leaves* via the bottom and is discharged overboard.
- pH, turbidity and PAH are continuously monitored in accordance with IMO regulations, MARPOL Annex VI resolution.
- Closed loop systems are primarily used for vessels that operate in ports and sailing areas where overboard discharge is prohibited.
- Exhaust gasses enter via the bottom side of the scrubber tower
- Fresh water is inserted at the top of the scrubber through spraying nozzles
- This results in an equally divided spray pattern throughout the scrubber
- Sulphur particles in the exhaust gas attach to the water droplets under the right temperature and process conditions
- Process water is led to the circulation tank
- NaOH is added to the process water to neutralise acidity
- Cleaned process water is pumped upwards again to the top
- Polluted water is drained and led through a separator
- Solids and oil are removed from the polluted water forming sludge
- Sludge is pumped to the sludge storage tank on the ship
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q4 (16 Marks)
Auxiliary Machinery 🔥 Repeated 8x
With reference to a tubular heat exchanger, state the various types used on board a ship and explain with sketches how the construction, flow pattern, baffles, differ from each other depending upon the medium in use. (16)
Appeared In: Dec 2025 Nov 2025 Oct 2025 Jun 2025 Feb 2025 Jul 2024 Aug 2023 Jun 2026
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Tubular heat exchangers and their construction variations
Types used on board ship
- Shell and tube heat exchangers (coolers) for sea-water cooling of lubricating oil (lube oil cooler), freshwater (FW cooler), jacket cooling water, fuel oil (fuel heater/cooler), and for steam condensers.
- Double-pipe (hairpin) heat exchangers, which are two concentric pipes.
- U-tube / multipass shell-and-tube exchangers, and floating-head (floating tube sheet) exchangers to allow for thermal expansion.
- Plate heat exchangers are technically not tubular but are used in some duties; the question concerns tubular ones, so the focus is shell-and-tube.
Construction, flow pattern and baffles depending on the medium
Shell-and-tube construction: a cylindrical shell (e.g. steel, zinc-protected or cupro-nickel lined for sea water), with a bundle of tubes fitted between two tube sheets (headers) and secured by tube expansion/glands, the whole enclosed by channel covers. One fluid flows through the tubes (tube side) and the other through the shell in the space around the tubes (shell side), transferring heat through the tube walls.
Flow pattern: for clean fluids (e.g. oil/fresh water) a number of passes is arranged - the tubes are grouped so the fluid passes back and forth to give multipass; the shell fluid is guided across the tube bundle by baffles. Counter-flow is preferred for efficiency (hot and cold enter opposite ends); where a counter-flow cannot conveniently be arranged, a "two-pass" tube-side with shell fluid cross-flow is used. For sea water (dirty, scale-forming) the sea water is normally put on the tube side so it can be cleaned by rodding out/backflushing and so the tube bundle can be withdrawn - and a spacer/no-differential expansion design (floating head) accommodates the large thermal expansion.
Baffles: transverse baffles (segmental baffles) are fitted in the shell to force the shell-side fluid to flow back and forth across the tube bundle, increasing turbulence, mixing and the heat transfer coefficient, and supporting the long tube bundle to prevent sagging/vibration. Baffle spacing and cut shape differ with the medium: for low-viscosity or clean fluids closer baffles and a larger cut promote turbulence; for viscous oils (which have poor heat transfer and high pressure drop) the baffles are spaced wider and have a reduced cut to limit the pressure drop while still sweeping the tubes. For sea water, fewer/wider baffles reduce pressure drop and erosion.
Depending on the medium:
- Oil/fuel (viscous, poor convection): oil on shell side over a large tube area with wide, partly-cut baffles, or oil on tube side with multipass; materials tolerant of heating.
- Fresh water: may be either side; six-pass or four-pass tube arrangement common.
- Sea water (corrosive, scale forming): on the tube side, so tubes cleaned and selected in cupro-nickel; spacious shell, floating (expansion) heads to allow differential expansion; baffles arranged to maintain good cross-flow without excessive pressure drop.
- Steam (steam condenser): steam on the shell side with the cooling water in tubes; the condensate drains; baffles shaped/nozzles arranged to sweep the tubes and direct the steam.
Distinguishing sketch features: shell and flanged cover with tube bundle and tube sheets, removable floating head, the pattern of baffles (segmental plates with holes), the pass partitions, and the inlet/outlet nozzles for tube-side and shell-side.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q6 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting 🔥 Repeated 6x
(a) Describe with the aid of sketch the main engine ancillary equipment for automatic monitoring and regulation of fuel viscosity. (6)
(b) Explain the operation of equipment described in (a). (5)
(c) Discuss the single fuel concept. (5)
Appeared In: Jun 2026 Dec 2025 Nov 2025 Jun 2025 Jul 2024 Apr 2023
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Viscotherm with Differential Pressure (DP) Transmitter:
- The viscotherm consists of a capillary tube connected to the discharge side of a gear pump driven by an electric motor.
- A DP transmitter measures the pressure difference in the capillary tube, which is directly proportional to the viscosity of the fuel oil.
- The fuel oil passes through a heater controlled by a steam valve. The valve adjusts the steam flow to maintain the desired fuel viscosity.
- A controller compares the measured viscosity from the DP transmitter to the set point and sends a signal to regulate the steam valve.
- As fuel flows through the viscotherm, the gear pump diverts a portion of the fuel through the capillary tube.
- The DP transmitter measures the pressure difference across the capillary tube.
- The DP transmitter sends the viscosity data to the controller.
- The controller compares the measured viscosity to the set point value.
- If the viscosity deviates from the desired level, the controller adjusts the steam valve to increase or decrease the steam flow to the fuel heater.
- Adjusting the steam flow changes the fuel temperature, directly impacting viscosity to maintain optimal levels.
- Modern two-stroke engines are equipped with fuel circulation systems that ensure the fuel at injectors is always maintained at the correct temperature and viscosity.
- Continuous circulation eliminates the need to switch between HFO and low-sulphur fuel oil (LSFO) under normal conditions.
Advantages:
- Significant savings are achieved as residual fuel is cheaper than distillate fuel.
- Reduces the complexities and risks associated with frequent fuel changeovers, such as thermal shock and injector clogging.
Where local regulations demand the use of VLSFO, changeovers may still be necessary. However, automated systems simplify this process.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q8 (16 Marks)
Auxiliary Machinery 🔥 Repeated 4x
(a) Sketch a line diagram showing the layout components of a hydraulic system with a variable delivery, Pressure compensated pump and accumulator, suitable for the operation of deck machinery. (8)
(b) Describe the operation of the system sketched in part (a). (8)
Appeared In: Jun 2026 Jun 2025 Jul 2024 Jun 2023
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
When the pumping capacity exceeds load requirements, the system pressure increases above a set value, at which point the pressure compensator acts to take the pump off stroke. A relief valve is fitted in case of malfunction of the compensator.
Fluid flow to the load may be controlled by a variety of methods one of which is the simple three position valve shown.
This system suits an installation containing several high demand units such as deck winch hydraulics
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (16 Marks)
General 🔥 Repeated 4x
(a) Explain why pilot injection is required for a Dual fuel engine when burning natural gas. (8)
(b) Describe, with the aid of a sketch, the arrangements for a dual fuel engine which is capable of burning natural gas on: (8)
(i) The otto cycle
(ii) The Diesel cycle.
Appeared In: Jul 2025 Mar 2025 Mar 2024 Sep 2022
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- The engine operates in gas mode during the suction stroke, where a lean air-gas mixture is drawn into the cylinders.
- The cylinder head is equipped with a gas admission valve positioned in the air inlet passage, and there is a fuel injector capable of both main and pilot injection.
- A common rail computer-operated pilot fuel injection system is utilised, providing precise control over the injected fuel. This system can easily regulate or shut off the fuel injected through the main injector nozzles.
- During engine startup, diesel fuel is used for ignition, employing both pilot and main injection. Once combustion is stable, the engine transitions to a gas supply. This transition typically takes about one minute, during which the substitution of fuel oil by gas occurs gradually.
(ii) Diesel Cycle:
- As a two-stroke engine uses intake air for scavenging, it's essential not to mix the gas fuel with the intake air.
- Instead, the gas fuel is injected into the compressed air, similar to the injection process for diesel fuel.
- Ignition is achieved by injecting fuel via the micro-pilot fuel injector, resulting in diffusion combustion.
- This approach not only reduces CO emissions by 20% or more but also maintains low levels of unburned gas and CO emissions without the occurrence of knocking. The utilisation of micro-pilot fuel injection ensures a controlled and efficient combustion process, optimising the performance of the dual-fuel engine burning natural gas.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q4 (16 Marks)
General 🔥 Repeated 12x
Reverse osmosis is the modern alternative for shipboard production of drinking water.
(a) Describe using simple diagrams if necessary, the principle of reverse osmosis. (8)
(b) Sketch a line diagram showing a single pass system for producing fresh water from seawater and describe the system. (8)
Appeared In: Jan 2018 Jul 2025 Jan 2023 Mar 2021 Oct 2019 Aug 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Nov 2018 Oct 2018 Jul 2018 Aug 2025
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Reverse osmosis (RO) is a process that purifies water by forcing it through a semi-permeable membrane. In this process, high pressure is applied to a solution with a high concentration of dissolved solids, such as saltwater, on one side of the membrane. This pressure overcomes the natural osmotic pressure, causing the pure water molecules to pass through the membrane while leaving behind the larger salt ions and other impurities. The membrane acts as a selective barrier, allowing only the water to pass, while the concentrated brine solution is discarded. For large-scale production, a large membrane surface area and a strong pump capable of generating high pressures are necessary.
1. Pretreatment Stage
Pretreatment is essential to protect the R.O. membranes from fouling and scaling.
- Scaling: Caused by soluble salts such as calcium carbonate and calcium sulphate depositing on the membrane.
- Fouling: Caused by micro-organisms, metal oxides, and colloidal particles coating the membrane surface.
Pretreatment methods include:
- Mechanical filtration: Multiple filter stages in series, e.g.:
- Sand filters
- Multi-layer filters
- Microfilters (<10 ppm particle size)
- Chemical treatment:
- Coagulants for fine particle removal
- Biocides to kill micro-organisms
- Acid dosing to neutralize calcium salts and prevent scale formation
A pump takes suction from the sea chest through a coarse filter, delivering water at about 6 bar through the pretreatment system.
2. High-Pressure Stage
- A high-pressure piston pump raises the feed water pressure to above 50 bar.
- This pressurized water enters the semi-permeable membrane modules.
3. Separation Process
- Due to the pressure difference between the concentrated brine side and the permeate side, water molecules pass through the membrane.
- Dissolved salts, organics, and microbes are rejected.
Outputs:
- Permeate (Fresh Water): Low-salt content water used for drinking and domestic purposes.
- Brine (Concentrated Reject): Discharged overboard (OVBD).
4. Post-Treatment
The fresh water (permeate) is further treated to make it suitable for shipboard use:
- Hardness adjustment (to prevent excessive softness)
- pH correction (maintained around 8 for taste and corrosion control)
- Chlorination (for disinfection)
Note: If pH rises too high, chlorine’s effectiveness against micro-organisms is reduced.
Flow Summary:
Sea Water → Coarse Filter → Pretreatment Filters & Chemicals → High-Pressure Pump → R.O. Membranes →
→ Permeate (Fresh Water) → Post-treatment → Ship’s Fresh Water System
→ Brine (Reject Water) → Overboard
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q5 (16 Marks)
Auxiliary Machinery 🔥 Repeated 6x
With Reference to Gear pumps used for lubricating oil transfer:
(a) Sketch and describe a gear type pump indicating the flow of fluid. (6)
(b) State the materials that gear type pump components may be manufactured from. (4)
(c) Specify THREE applications that are suitable for the employment of gear type pumps (6)
Appeared In: Aug 2025 Jul 2025 Oct 2019 Aug 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(a) Gear Type Pump
A gear pump is a positive displacement rotary pump. It commonly has two meshing spur gears inside a close-fitting casing. One gear is driven by the shaft and the other is an idler gear.
Operation
As the gears rotate, the teeth unmesh at the inlet side. This creates a low-pressure area, so lubricating oil enters the pump casing.
The oil is trapped in the spaces between the gear teeth and casing. It is carried around the outside of the gears from inlet to outlet.
At the outlet side, the gear teeth mesh again. This reduces the space available and forces the oil out through the discharge port.
Oil does not pass through the centre between the gears because the meshing teeth form a seal. Since a fixed volume is delivered each revolution, the gear pump is a positive displacement pump. A relief valve is therefore required to prevent excessive pressure if the discharge is blocked.
(b) Materials for Gear Pump Components
- Casing/body: Cast iron, cast steel, bronze, or aluminium alloy for small pumps.
- Gears: Hardened steel, alloy steel, stainless steel, bronze, or cast iron.
- Shafts: Carbon steel, alloy steel, or stainless steel.
- Bearings/bushes: Bronze, white metal, phosphor bronze, or ball/roller bearings.
- Seals: Mechanical seal, gland packing, nitrile/Viton oil seals.
- Relief valve parts: Steel or stainless steel spring and valve components.
For lubricating oil pumps, cast iron casing with hardened steel gears and steel shafts is common.
(c) Suitable Applications of Gear Pumps
- Lubricating oil transfer and circulation
Gear pumps are suitable because lubricating oil is clean, viscous, and has good lubricating properties. The pump gives steady positive flow.
- Fuel oil transfer and booster service
They are used for diesel oil and heavy fuel oil transfer because they handle viscous liquids well and can produce moderate to high pressure.
- Hydraulic oil systems
Gear pumps are used in hydraulic power packs and control systems because they give positive delivery and compact construction.
Other suitable uses include:
- Sludge oil transfer
- Bilge oily water transfer, where liquid is not too contaminated
- Boiler fuel oil supply
- Steering gear auxiliary hydraulic systems
- Cargo oil stripping for suitable viscous liquids
Gear pumps are not suitable for liquids containing hard abrasive solids because close clearances between gears and casing can wear quickly.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q6 (16 Marks)
Auxiliary Machinery 🔥 Repeated 6x
With Reference to Air-conditioning System onboard your vessel:
(a) Sketch and describe a high pressure cut-out in a refrigeration system. (6)
(b) The refrigeration compressor has stopped due to operation of the h.p. cut-out. Explain
(i) The possible causes.
(ii) How these causes would be found and possible remedies. (4)
(c) What steps are taken if the compressor "short-cycle" on low pressure cut-out? (6)
Appeared In: Jul 2026 Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2024 Jul 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- Dirty condenser
- Overcharge of refrigerant
- Condenser coolant failure
- Clogged filter drier
- Malfunctioning expansion valve
- Faulty pressure switch
(ii)
- Dirty condenser - Visual inspection of condenser, clean the condenser
- Overcharge of refrigerant - check the refrigerant level in sight glass, reduce the refrigerant charge.
- Condenser coolant failure - check in/out pressures, clean the condenser.
- Clogged filter drier - visual inspection of drier, change the drier
- Malfunctioning expansion valve - inspect expansion valve, repair or replace the valve
- Faulty pressure switch - inspect the switch, repair or replace the pressure switch
- To provide sufficient suction pressure control difference according to the system loading and frequency of room inspection
- Refrigerant charges should be adequate, the system should be without leaks. The suction line filter is to be kept clean with no obstruction in suction line.
- The leaky solenoid valve is to be replaced. The evaporator coil is to be defrosted regularly and ensure the inner surface is clean.
- Piston rings, cylinder liner, discharge valve, by-pass valve and safety valve are to be maintained in good condition. Compressor capacity is to be selected according to the system requirement and nature of loading.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q8 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting 🔥 Repeated 11x
With regards to main transmission shaft flange coupling arrangements: (16)
(a) Sketch a hollow type coupling bolt and the hydraulic head/nut and loading rod which are used to fit it.
(b) Describe how the bolt is fitted.
(c) State the advantage of the hollow coupling bolt as compared to the traditional type of coupling bolt.
Appeared In: Aug 2026 Jul 2025 Apr 2024 Mar 2024 Jun 2023 Feb 2021 Jan 2021 Mar 2020 Jun 2019 Jul 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- A bolt with a diameter slightly larger than the flange coupling bore diameter (D + 0.00025D) is selected.
- A push rod (loading rod) is inserted into the hollow coupling bolt, and a hydraulic head is attached.
- Hydraulic oil pressure of approximately 30,000 N/m² is applied, causing the bolt to stretch (approximately 0.021mm) and temporarily reduce its diameter by 0.00025D. This allows easy insertion of the bolt into the flange bore.
- The bolt is placed inside the bore by hand, and the nut is tightened and nipped up using a spanner.
- The hydraulic pressure is then released, allowing the bolt to expand and create a secure interference fit within the bore. This generates a tensile stress of approximately 15.5 tons/m², ensuring a firm grip.
- After fitting, the hydraulic assembly (items A, B, and C) is removed, and a protective plastic cap is placed over the bolt head.
- The hollow bolt design allows precise control of the bolt load, ensuring optimal tightening and load distribution.
- Diametrical re-expansion after hydraulic pressure release ensures a strong interference fit of the shank within the flange bore, reducing the risk of loosening.
- Hollow coupling bolts are easier to remove for inspection and maintenance, significantly reducing dismantling and fitting time.
- Unlike traditional bolts, hollow coupling bolts minimize wear on the bore, eliminating the need for frequent re-machining.
- Replacement of hollow coupling bolts is less frequent, reducing operational downtime and maintenance costs.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q9 (16 Marks)
Steering & Deck Machinery 🔥 Repeated 3x
With reference to electrohydraulic steering gear systems with four rams: (16)
(a) With the aid of a sketch, describe the working principle of hydraulic pump.
(b) Explain the method adopted to prevent hydraulic oil leakage along the rams
(c) Discuss the methods adopted to prevent damage to the steering gear due to jumping of rudder in heavy seas.
Appeared In: Aug 2026 Jul 2025 Mar 2024
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The Hele-Shaw pump, commonly used in electrohydraulic steering gear systems, is a variable-displacement, reversible axial-piston pump. Its delivery and direction of flow are controlled by changing the position or angle of the circular floating ring/swash plate.
Working Principle
The pump consists of a rotating cylinder barrel containing a number of pistons, the outer ends of which are connected through slippers to a circular floating ring or swash-plate arrangement. The cylinder barrel rotates with the driving shaft, while the ports are arranged through a central valve arrangement.
1. Neutral Position – No Pumping
When the circular ring accommodating the slippers is concentric with the central valve arrangement, the pistons do not have any relative reciprocating motion inside their cylinders.
Therefore:
- No change in cylinder volume takes place.
- No oil is sucked into the cylinders.
- No oil is discharged.
- Although the pump and cylinder barrel continue to rotate, no fluid is delivered.
This is the neutral or zero-delivery position.
Similarly, in the swash-plate type arrangement, when the swash plate is in the vertical or neutral position, no pumping takes place.
2. Ring/Swash Plate Moved to One Side
When the circular floating ring is pulled to the right, or the swash plate is tilted in one direction, the pistons are forced to move to and fro within their cylinders as the cylinder barrel rotates.
This produces the pumping action.
For example:
- The lower piston moves inwards and discharges fluid through the lower port.
- As the cylinder barrel continues to rotate, the piston reaches the horizontal position and then starts moving outwards.
- During the outward movement, fluid is drawn into the cylinder through the upper port.
Thus, with the ring displaced to one side:
- Upper ports act as suction ports.
- Lower ports act as discharge ports.
The pump therefore delivers hydraulic oil in one direction.
3. Ring/Swash Plate Moved to the Opposite Side
If the circular ring is pushed to the left, or the swash plate is tilted in the opposite direction, the reciprocating movement of the pistons is reversed relative to the ports.
Consequently:
- The previous suction ports become discharge ports.
- The previous discharge ports become suction ports.
Thus, the direction of hydraulic oil flow is reversed.
This reversible flow enables the hydraulic rams of the steering gear to move in either direction, thereby turning the rudder to port or starboard.
Swash-Pump Operation – Summary
- The driving shaft rotates the cylinder barrel and pistons.
- An external trunnion shaft enables the swash plate to be moved or tilted about its axis.
- When the swash plate is in the vertical/neutral position, no pumping takes place.
- When the swash plate is tilted in one direction, the pistons reciprocate, causing one set of ports to act as suction ports and the ports on the opposite side of the centreline to act as discharge ports.
- When the swash plate is tilted in the opposite direction, the direction of fluid flow is reversed.
- The stroke length of the pistons, and hence the quantity of fluid delivered, depends on the angle of tilt of the swash plate. A greater angle of tilt produces a longer piston stroke and greater pump delivery.
In Summary
The Hele-Shaw pump provides:
- Zero delivery when the swash plate/floating ring is in the neutral position.
- Variable delivery depending on the angle of displacement or tilt.
- Reversible flow when the direction of displacement is reversed.
Hydraulic oil leakage along the ram is prevented by providing an effective ram sealing arrangement at the point where the ram passes through the cylinder cover or gland.
The arrangement generally consists of:
- Gland packing or sealing rings: Special seals are fitted around the ram to prevent hydraulic oil from escaping along the reciprocating surface.
- Multiple sealing elements: A combination of pressure seals, backup rings and scraper/wiper rings may be used to provide reliable sealing.
- Wiper or scraper ring: This removes dirt, moisture and other contaminants from the ram surface before it enters the cylinder, thereby protecting the main sealing elements.
- Drainage/leakage collection arrangement: The gland area may be provided with a leakage collection or drain arrangement so that any seal leakage is detected and prevented from spreading into the steering gear compartment.
The ram surface must also be kept smooth, clean and free from corrosion or scoring, since a damaged ram surface can rapidly destroy the seals and cause excessive oil leakage.
In heavy seas, a large external force acting on the rudder may cause sudden movement or vertical jumping of the rudder. Suitable arrangements are therefore provided to protect the steering gear, tiller and hydraulic rams from excessive shock loads.
1. Relief or safety valves
- When a heavy sea strikes the rudder, the external force can cause the hydraulic pressure in the steering system to rise sharply.
- Safety or relief valves are fitted to prevent excessive pressure from damaging the hydraulic system. If the pressure exceeds the preset value, the relief valve opens and allows hydraulic oil to bypass. This relieves the excessive pressure and permits controlled movement, thereby protecting the steering gear components.
2. Jumping clearance
- A specified vertical jumping clearance is maintained between the structural stops associated with the rudder and the ship's hull.
- This clearance is carefully designed to be less than the internal clearance between the tiller and the steering gear ram casing. Therefore, if the rudder moves vertically due to heavy seas, the external structural stop takes the load before the tiller or crosshead can strike and damage the steering gear components.
3. Jumping bars or stop pads
- Heavy-duty jumping bars or stop pads are fitted to the hull structure.
- If the rudder jumps upward, it contacts these solid structural stops first. The stops limit the vertical movement of the rudder and prevent the internal tiller or crosshead from striking the hydraulic rams or actuators, thereby avoiding serious mechanical damage.
4. Rudder carrier bearing
- A robust rudder carrier bearing supports the weight of the rudder assembly and limits excessive vertical or lateral movement.
- By reducing unwanted play, the carrier bearing helps reduce the severity of shock loading and impacts when the rudder is subjected to heavy sea forces.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (16 Marks)
General 🔥 Repeated 12x
With reference to Vacuum Sewage Systems:
(a) Sketch & Describe a Vacuum sewage system.
(b) State the advantage of Vacuum sewage system.
(c) State the different causes of dropping vacuum.
Appeared In: Aug 2025 Apr 2024 Mar 2020 Jan 2020 Oct 2019 Sep 2019 Aug 2019 Jun 2019 Mar 2019 Jan 2019 Oct 2018 Sep 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(b) Advantages of a Vacuum Sewage System:
- The vacuum sewage system uses 85–90% less water for flushing compared to conventional systems, requiring very little flushing water.
- Toilets can be positioned more flexibly, including below the level of the holding tank, which is not feasible with gravity-fed systems.
- The system uses smaller diameter piping, reducing material and space requirements.
- The reduced water usage contributes to overall water conservation, making the system environmentally friendly.
- If the pump is pumping foam instead of liquid, this will be evident due to severe vibration. Add water to the tank and try again. If adding water does not help, reduce the level of foam by pouring antifoam agent into the tank (1 cup per 2 cubic metres of foam and sewage).
- Check that shut-off valves are fully open and not clogged.
- If the direction of rotation of the pump is wrong, change wiring accordingly.
- Close the valves that isolate the collecting unit from the piping system and start the pump again. If vacuum now builds up, there must be a leak in the piping system.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q4 (16 Marks)
Refrigeration & Air Conditioning 🔥 Repeated 5x
With Respect to Container ship:
(a) Sketch and describe a ship's indirect refrigeration system arranged for cooling containers showed in stacks in the hold.
(b) State the advantages of the system described in (a) compared with containers with their own refrigeration self-contained units.
Appeared In: Aug 2025 Feb 2021 Jan 2020 Aug 2019 Jan 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- Eliminating the need for individual refrigeration units within each container significantly increases the ship's cargo capacity.
- A centralized system simplifies maintenance procedures. Instead of numerous individual units requiring servicing, the focus is on a single, larger plant, resulting in reduced maintenance costs and downtime.
- Centralized systems, with their optimized design and variable speed components, are typically more energy-efficient than a large number of independent units operating simultaneously.
- The centralized control and monitoring offer better overall temperature regulation, minimizing the risk of temperature fluctuations that can damage sensitive goods.
- A centralized system uses less gas as compared to a multitude of individual units, resulting in a more environmentally friendly operation.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q6 (16 Marks)
General 🔥 Repeated 12x
Reverse osmosis is the modern alternative for shipboard production of drinking water.
(a) Describe using simple diagrams if necessary, the principle of reverse osmosis.
(b) Sketch a line diagram showing a single pass system for producing fresh water from seawater and describe the system.
Appeared In: Jan 2018 Jul 2025 Jan 2023 Mar 2021 Oct 2019 Aug 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019 Nov 2018 Oct 2018 Jul 2018 Aug 2025
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Osmosis is the natural flow of solvent (water) from a dilute solution to a more concentrated one across a semi-permeable membrane, which stops the dissolved salts but allows water molecules to pass. In a sea water container the pure water would migrate into the sea water, diluting it and building up a hydrostatic head equal to the osmotic pressure of the sea water.
Reverse osmosis simply reverses this natural flow. A pressure greater than the osmotic pressure is applied to the concentrated side (sea water) by a high-pressure pump. This forces water molecules through the semi-permeable membrane in the opposite direction, i.e. out of the sea water and away from the salt, leaving fresh water on the low-pressure side. The applied pressure is typically 40-70 bar for sea water, well above the natural osmotic pressure of roughly 25-28 bar. The membrane passes water but retains the dissolved salts, minerals, bacteria and colloidal matter, so the permeate (product water) is either potable or can be polished. The concentrated brine is discharged overboard.
Components in series:
Sea water feed -> feed/sea water pump and strainer -> multi-media/dual media filter -> cartridge filter(s) -> high-pressure booster pump -> membrane pressure vessel (spiral wound RO membranes in series/parallel) -> two outlets: permeate (fresh water) to product/storage tank and brine/concentrate to a flow control valve and overboard. A dosing/metering pump adds anti-scalant and chlorine/bisulphite. A product meter and conductivity/TDS monitor on the permeate line.
Sea water is first strained and filtered through dual-media and cartridge filters to remove suspended solids, sand and organic matter that would foul or block the membranes. Anti-scalant is dosed to prevent carbonate and sulphate scale precipitating on the membrane surface. The filtered water is pressurised to 50-70 bar by the high-pressure pump and fed into the membrane pressure vessels.
In the pressure vessel the sea water is split by the spiral-wound semi-permeable membranes into two streams. The permeate, which passes through the membrane, flows to the centre collecting tube and out to the product tank; this is the drinking water. The concentrate (brine), which has not passed through the membrane, leaves the vessel and its flow is regulated by a back-pressure/concentrate control valve, which also sets the operating pressure and the recovery ratio. In a single-pass system the permeate quality is normally sufficient at moderate salinity; the conductivity cell monitors and diverts poor product to bilge or recirculates. Anti-scalant dosing, membrane cleaning and regular filter backwashing maintain output and protect the membranes.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q7 (16 Marks)
Auxiliary Machinery 🔥 Repeated 6x
With reference to Gear pumps used for lubricating oil transfer:
(a) Sketch and describe a gear type pump indicating the flow of fluid.
(b) State the materials that gear type pump components may be manufactured from.
(c) Specify THREE applications that are suitable for the employment of gear type pumps.
Appeared In: Aug 2025 Jul 2025 Oct 2019 Aug 2019 Jul 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(a) Gear Type Pump
A gear pump is a positive displacement rotary pump. It commonly has two meshing spur gears inside a close-fitting casing. One gear is driven by the shaft and the other is an idler gear.
Operation
As the gears rotate, the teeth unmesh at the inlet side. This creates a low-pressure area, so lubricating oil enters the pump casing.
The oil is trapped in the spaces between the gear teeth and casing. It is carried around the outside of the gears from inlet to outlet.
At the outlet side, the gear teeth mesh again. This reduces the space available and forces the oil out through the discharge port.
Oil does not pass through the centre between the gears because the meshing teeth form a seal. Since a fixed volume is delivered each revolution, the gear pump is a positive displacement pump. A relief valve is therefore required to prevent excessive pressure if the discharge is blocked.
(b) Materials for Gear Pump Components
- Casing/body: Cast iron, cast steel, bronze, or aluminium alloy for small pumps.
- Gears: Hardened steel, alloy steel, stainless steel, bronze, or cast iron.
- Shafts: Carbon steel, alloy steel, or stainless steel.
- Bearings/bushes: Bronze, white metal, phosphor bronze, or ball/roller bearings.
- Seals: Mechanical seal, gland packing, nitrile/Viton oil seals.
- Relief valve parts: Steel or stainless steel spring and valve components.
For lubricating oil pumps, cast iron casing with hardened steel gears and steel shafts is common.
(c) Suitable Applications of Gear Pumps
- Lubricating oil transfer and circulation
Gear pumps are suitable because lubricating oil is clean, viscous, and has good lubricating properties. The pump gives steady positive flow.
- Fuel oil transfer and booster service
They are used for diesel oil and heavy fuel oil transfer because they handle viscous liquids well and can produce moderate to high pressure.
- Hydraulic oil systems
Gear pumps are used in hydraulic power packs and control systems because they give positive delivery and compact construction.
Other suitable uses include:
- Sludge oil transfer
- Bilge oily water transfer, where liquid is not too contaminated
- Boiler fuel oil supply
- Steering gear auxiliary hydraulic systems
- Cargo oil stripping for suitable viscous liquids
Gear pumps are not suitable for liquids containing hard abrasive solids because close clearances between gears and casing can wear quickly.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q8 (16 Marks)
Cargo & Tankers 🔥 Repeated 5x
With reference to Flue gas inert gas system:
(a) Sketch a line diagram showing a typical 'Inert Gas System' used for inerting the cargo tanks of oil tankers; Describe the system after labeling the important component parts.
(b) State what oxygen content you would expect in the flue gases if good combustion is achieved.
Appeared In: Jan 2020 Oct 2019 Sep 2019 Aug 2019 Aug 2025
Q9 (16 Marks)
Boilers & Steam 🔥 Repeated 4x
With reference to auxiliary boiler safety valves:
(a) Describe, with the aid of a sketch, the safety valves for an auxiliary boiler.
(b) Identify, with reasons, the parts that require particularly close attention during overhaul;
(c) Describe how the safety valves are reset after an overhaul.
Appeared In: Aug 2025 Oct 2019 Aug 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Overhauling and Setting of Boiler Safety Valves
Boiler safety valves are critical protective devices designed to automatically release excess steam pressure and prevent boiler overpressure. Most auxiliary boilers are fitted with full-lift or pop-type double spring safety valves, which open rapidly and fully once the set pressure is reached, ensuring effective pressure relief.
A typical boiler safety valve consists of the following main components:
- Valve and Seat: Usually made of high-grade materials such as stainless steel or Monel metal to resist erosion (wire drawing) caused by high-velocity steam.
- Compression Springs: Helical springs that hold the valve tightly closed against steam pressure until the set pressure is reached.
- Valve Lip / Shroud (Waste Steam Piston): A specially designed projection that increases the effective area when the valve begins to lift, producing a rapid “pop” action and ensuring full opening.
- Spindle and Guides: Maintain alignment and ensure smooth vertical movement of the valve.
- Waste Steam Pipe: A large-diameter pipe that safely discharges steam to the atmosphere.
- Easing Gear: A mechanical arrangement that allows manual lifting of the valve for testing or emergency purposes.
- Drain Arrangement: Prevents accumulation of condensate in the valve body, which could otherwise affect operation.
- Isolation and Removal: Isolate the boiler, ensure zero pressure, and remove the safety valve carefully from its seating.
- Dismantling: Mark all parts for correct reassembly. Carefully dismantle the valve, including removal of springs, spindle, and valve disc.
- Cleaning: Clean all components thoroughly to remove deposits, scale, and corrosion products.
- Inspection of Components: Each component must be examined for wear, damage, or distortion (details given below).
- Repair and Refurbishment: Carry out necessary repairs such as lapping of valve and seat, replacement of worn parts, or renewal of springs if required.
- Reassembly: Reassemble the valve carefully, ensuring correct alignment and clearances. Avoid over-tightening or misalignment during assembly.
Parts Requiring Close Attention During Overhaul
- Valve and Seat Surfaces: These must be perfectly smooth and free from pitting, scale, or wire drawing. They should be lapped to a fine finish to ensure a steam-tight seal and prevent leakage or “simmering.”
- Springs: Check for cracks, corrosion, and loss of elasticity (permanent set). Defective springs will affect the lifting pressure and proper reseating of the valve.
- Spindle and Guides: Ensure the spindle is straight and moves freely. Guides should be clean and free from deposits, as any restriction may cause sticking or improper operation.
- Lip/Shroud Clearance: The clearance between the valve lip and seat ring is critical for correct “pop” action. Incorrect clearance may result in delayed opening or poor reseating.
- Drain Passage: Ensure that drain holes are clear. Blockage can allow condensate to accumulate, which may interfere with valve operation and cause corrosion.
After overhaul, safety valves must be reset and tested, usually in the presence of a classification society surveyor.
- Preparation: Ensure that the boiler pressure gauge is calibrated and accurate. One safety valve is temporarily gagged (held closed) while the other is being set.
- Raising Boiler Pressure: Gradually raise the boiler pressure up to the Maximum Allowable Working Pressure (MAWP).
- Adjustment of Set Pressure: Adjust the compression of the spring using the adjusting nut until the valve lifts (“pops”) at the required pressure.
- For boilers with two valves, typically one is set at the working pressure and the other slightly higher (e.g., about 3% above), as per class or manufacturer requirements.
- Verification of Operation: Allow the valve to lift and reseat several times to confirm consistent operation. Check the blowdown, which is the difference between opening and closing pressure, typically around 3–5% of the set pressure.
- Accumulation Test (if required): With the main steam stop valve closed and boiler firing at full capacity, verify that the pressure does not rise more than 10% above MAWP, ensuring adequate relieving capacity.
- Sealing and Locking: Once the correct setting is confirmed, fit locking arrangements such as split collars or distance pieces. Apply a lead seal to prevent unauthorized adjustment.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q4 (16 Marks)
Refrigeration & Air Conditioning 🔥 Repeated 5x
(a) Draw a block diagram for a fully automated accommodation air conditioning unit, labelling the component parts, and indicating the directions of air flow
(b) Explain why the unit includes means of dehumidification and humidification.
(c) A chart is used for ensuring that the accommodation conditions are within the so-called Comfort Zone: what useful information does the chart give?
Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jan 2026 Sep 2025 Jun 2024 Dec 2022
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The unit includes both dehumidification and humidification to maintain air within the "comfort zone".
Dehumidification
Air is dehumidified to prevent health issues and equipment damage. When warm, humid air is cooled, its relative humidity increases. If it reaches 100% saturation, moisture condenses. In an A-C unit, air is cooled below the target temperature (e.g., to 10°C) to make it supersaturated, causing excess moisture to precipitate out. This dry, cool air is then reheated to the desired temperature (e.g., 20°C). At this new temperature, the air's relative humidity will be at a comfortable level, typically around 50%. Without this process, inhaling highly humid, cold air could lead to respiratory issues. Additionally, moisture condensation on electronic equipment can cause damage.
Humidification
Humidification is necessary when the incoming air is too dry. Dry air can cause discomfort, skin irritation, and static electricity issues. The humidifier adds moisture back into the air, usually by spraying a fine mist of water, to raise the humidity to the desired level and bring the conditions back into the comfort zone.
The chart provides the following useful information:
- Dry Bulb Temperature: The actual air temperature, measured with a standard thermometer.
- Wet Bulb Temperature: The temperature of air measured with a thermometer covered by a water-soaked cloth, indicating evaporative cooling potential.
- Dew Point Temperature: The temperature at which air becomes saturated and condensation begins.
- Relative Humidity: The percentage of moisture in the air compared to the maximum moisture the air can hold at that temperature.
- Moisture Content: The amount of water vapor present in the air, expressed as a ratio (e.g., grams of moisture per kilogram of dry air).
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q8 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting 🔥 Repeated 7x
With reference to shaft alignment:
(a) Explain the meaning of fair curve or rational alignment;
(b) Shaft alignment is often verified using hydraulic jacks to obtain a simple graph. Sketch such a graph, indicating the following:
(i) Static load;
(ii) Hysteresis;
(iii) Influence number;
(c) Explain the limitations of checking shaft alignment solely by hydraulic jacking methods.
Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jan 2026 Sep 2025 Dec 2024 Jun 2024 Aug 2023 Dec 2022
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(a) Meaning of Fair Curve / Rational Alignment
Fair curve alignment refers to the method of shaft alignment where the bearings are not arranged in a single straight line, but are deliberately set with calculated vertical offsets so that the shaft follows a smooth curve.
Explanation:
- For small-diameter shafts, bearings can often be kept in a straight line without issues.
- For large-diameter or high-power shafts, straight-line alignment causes:
- Uneven bearing loading
- High bending stress in the shaft
- Excessive wear and vibration
- In modern ships, fair curve alignment is preferred because:
- Bearing heights are adjusted individually
- Shaft load is distributed uniformly
- Bending stresses are minimized, preventing fatigue and vibration
Advantages of Fair Curve Alignment:
- Uniform bearing load distribution, reducing localized stress.
- Lower shaft bending stress, enhancing structural integrity.
- Reduced vibration, ensuring smoother operation.
- Longer bearing life, lowering maintenance costs.
(b) Shaft Alignment Check Using Hydraulic Jacks
The hydraulic jacking method is commonly used to verify shaft alignment by measuring the bearing loads when the shaft is lifted and plotting a graph of jack load vs. vertical displacement.
Procedure:
- Place a hydraulic jack near the bearing to be checked.
- Fix a dial gauge to measure vertical movement of the shaft.
- Slowly lift and lower the shaft using the jack.
- Record jack load and shaft displacement readings.
- Plot a graph of load versus displacement.
Graph Indications:
- (i) Static Load
- The load acting on the bearing at zero lift.
- Represents the actual operational load on the bearing when the shaft is at rest.
- (ii) Hysteresis
- The difference between the lifting and lowering curves.
- Caused by:
- Friction between shaft and bearing
- Oil film resistance
- Elastic deformation of the bearing
- Hysteresis indicates energy loss and affects measurement accuracy.
- (iii) Influence Number
- Represents the change in load per unit vertical movement of a bearing (N/mm).
- Shows the effect of raising one bearing on the load of other bearings.
- Used in fair curve alignment calculations to adjust bearing heights accurately.
(c) Limitations of Hydraulic Jacking Method
- Measures Only Vertical Loads
- Does not accurately measure horizontal bearing reactions.
- Less effective for resiliently mounted reduction gears.
- Time-Consuming
- Requires many readings for multiple bearings.
- Labour-intensive and difficult in restricted engine room spaces.
- Accuracy Issues
- Misalignment of the jack or dial gauge introduces errors.
- Shaft centerline mismatch reduces precision.
- Can produce wide hysteresis, complicating interpretation.
- Requires Skilled Interpretation
- Jacking curves vary depending on bearing type.
- Only trained personnel can correctly analyze the results.
- Hysteresis Effects
- Friction and oil film can cause non-linear readings.
- Lack of a load cell amplifies measurement errors.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q9 (16 Marks)
Control & Instrumentation 🔥 Repeated 3x
(a) Define proportional control action.
(b) Sketch and describe a simple pneumatic proportional controller.
(c) State a suitable process where a proportional controller may be employed.
(d) State the disadvantage of proportional only action.
Appeared In: Sep 2025 Oct 2024 Dec 2022
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Proportional control action is the most basic form of modulating control. In this control mode, the correction signal (or output from the controller) is directly proportional to the deviation or error between the measured variable (controlled condition) and the desired set point. The larger the deviation, the stronger the corrective response by the controller.
Mathematically:
$$Output\:\alpha\:Error$$
A proportional controller is suitable for processes where small, continuous adjustments are required and the process dynamics are relatively stable. A common application is in temperature control systems, where proportional action can effectively maintain the temperature close to a desired set point with minimal oscillation. It can also be used in pressure regulation, level control, and flow control systems.
The main disadvantage of proportional-only control is the presence of an offset or steady-state error. Since the controller output is proportional to the error, a finite error is required to maintain a specific output. This means the system may not reach the exact set point but will stabilise at a point close to it, depending on the proportional gain. Therefore, proportional control alone cannot eliminate steady-state error.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q1 (16 Marks)
Steering & Deck Machinery 🔥 Repeated 6x
(a) Describe with the aid of sketches where necessary a vane type steering gear, showing how the weight of the rudder and stock are carried and the arrangement that allow for wear down. (6)
(b) State how the vanes described in (a) are secured and the method of sealing the edges. (5)
(c) State how, if necessary the steering gear is locked for rudder maintenance. (5)
Appeared In: Dec 2025 Oct 2025 Mar 2025 Sep 2023 Apr 2023 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- The rotor is fitted to the tapered rudder stock. The rudder stock carries the weight of the rudder, supported by a rudder carrier bearing.
- The stator is fixed to the ship’s structure, forming a rigid support.
- The fixed vanes are evenly spaced inside the stator bore, while the rotating vanes are equally spaced on the rotor.
- These vanes form two sets of pressure chambers in the annular space between the rotor and stator. Hydraulic fluid is supplied at pressure to one set of chambers, causing the rotor and rudder to rotate in the required direction based on the steering order from the wheelhouse.
- The weight of the rudder and rudder stock is carried by the rudder carrier bearing, which is mounted on steel chocks supported by thicker deck plating to ensure stability and handle the load.
- There is a vertical clearance between the stator flange and the anchor bracket to allow for rudder "jump" (vertical movement).
- Another clearance exists between the top of the anchor bracket and the stator flange to accommodate for rudder wear down or rudder drop over time. The total clearance provided is around 38 mm, allowing the system to absorb wear and vertical movement without affecting performance.
- The fixed and rotary vanes are made from modular cast iron and are secured to the rotor and stator using high-tensile steel dowel pins and cap screws to maintain strength and prevent detachment under stress. A key is fitted along the length of the rotary vanes to provide additional reinforcement and ensure the strength of the rotor.
- The sealing of the vanes is achieved using sealing strips made of cast iron. These strips are fitted into grooves along the edges of the vanes. The sealing strips are backed by elastically loaded synthetic rubber, which provides a tight seal by pressing against the faces of both the fixed and rotating vanes. This arrangement prevents hydraulic fluid leakage.
- Hydraulic Locking: This involves closing the manual isolating valves provided for each cylinder (in ram-type systems) or each vane chamber (in vane-type systems). This prevents hydraulic fluid flow, thus immobilizing the rudder.
- Mechanical Locking: Three methods are available:
- A spanner is fitted to the rudder stock head nut and secured to the ship's structure, directly preventing rudder movement.
- If provided, tow gigs are fitted between the crosshead and cylinder base, mechanically locking the steering mechanism
- (Assuming a braking system is integrated into the design) Engaging the brake will prevent any movement of the rudder.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q2 (16 Marks)
Refrigeration & Air Conditioning 🔥 Repeated 2x
(a) Draw a line diagram of an accommodation air conditioning plant labelling the principal items and showing the direction of air flow. (5)
(b) State how:
(i) Accommodation air temperature is controlled, (4)
(ii) Humidity is controlled within prescribed comfort limits, (3)
(iii) Such an installation can contribute to the efficiency of ship's main plant. (3)
Appeared In: Oct 2025 Feb 2025
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(i) Accommodation Air Temperature Control
The air temperature is controlled to a specific set point, typically around 24°C. A thermostat senses the temperature in the accommodation spaces. When the temperature rises above the set point, the thermostat signals a solenoid valve to open, allowing refrigerant to flow through the cooling coil. This cools the air passing over the coil. Conversely, when the temperature drops, the solenoid valve closes, stopping the cooling process.
The evaporator pressure is also a key factor. The system is designed so that the refrigerant's saturation pressure corresponds to the desired temperature. For example, if the desired temperature is 24°C, the system might be set to maintain an evaporator pressure of 4.5 bar, where the refrigerant's saturation temperature is 24°C. The thermostatic expansion valve (TEV) senses the superheat at the evaporator outlet and adjusts the refrigerant flow to maintain this pressure and thus the desired cooling temperature.
(ii) Humidity Control within Comfort Limits
Humidity is controlled using a humidistat, which measures the relative humidity (RH) of the air. The comfort zone for RH is generally between 30% and 50%.
- To reduce humidity (dehumidify): If the RH is too high, the air is overcooled below the set temperature (e.g., to 18°C). At this lower temperature, the air reaches its dew point, and excess moisture condenses out. This condensate is then drained away. The now cool, dry air is then passed through a reheater to bring its temperature back up to the set point of 24°C, which in turn lowers its RH to within the comfort zone.
- To increase humidity (humidify): If the RH is too low, the humidistat activates a humidifier. This device sprays a fine mist of water (often freshwater) into the air stream, increasing the air's moisture content until the desired RH is achieved.
(iii) Contribution to Ship's Main Plant Efficiency
A well-maintained accommodation air conditioning system can contribute to the ship's main plant efficiency in several ways:
- Reduced electrical load on the main generators: A more efficient air conditioning system requires less power to operate. This reduces the load on the ship's generators, which are often powered by auxiliary engines. A lower generator load means less fuel consumption for these engines.
- Heat Recovery: Some modern systems are designed to recover waste heat from the main plant's cooling systems. This recovered heat can be used for the reheater or other heating purposes on the ship, reducing the need for additional heating sources and thereby saving energy.
- Crew Comfort and Performance: A comfortable working and living environment helps maintain crew morale and performance. A well-rested and alert crew is less prone to making errors, which can prevent costly operational mistakes and improve overall plant efficiency and safety.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q4 (16 Marks)
Auxiliary Machinery 🔥 Repeated 8x
With reference to a tubular heat exchanger, state the various types used on board a ship and explain with sketches how the construction, flow pattern, baffles, differ from each other depending upon the medium in use. (16)
Appeared In: Dec 2025 Nov 2025 Oct 2025 Jun 2025 Feb 2025 Jul 2024 Aug 2023 Jun 2026
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Tubular heat exchangers and their construction variations
Types used on board ship
- Shell and tube heat exchangers (coolers) for sea-water cooling of lubricating oil (lube oil cooler), freshwater (FW cooler), jacket cooling water, fuel oil (fuel heater/cooler), and for steam condensers.
- Double-pipe (hairpin) heat exchangers, which are two concentric pipes.
- U-tube / multipass shell-and-tube exchangers, and floating-head (floating tube sheet) exchangers to allow for thermal expansion.
- Plate heat exchangers are technically not tubular but are used in some duties; the question concerns tubular ones, so the focus is shell-and-tube.
Construction, flow pattern and baffles depending on the medium
Shell-and-tube construction: a cylindrical shell (e.g. steel, zinc-protected or cupro-nickel lined for sea water), with a bundle of tubes fitted between two tube sheets (headers) and secured by tube expansion/glands, the whole enclosed by channel covers. One fluid flows through the tubes (tube side) and the other through the shell in the space around the tubes (shell side), transferring heat through the tube walls.
Flow pattern: for clean fluids (e.g. oil/fresh water) a number of passes is arranged - the tubes are grouped so the fluid passes back and forth to give multipass; the shell fluid is guided across the tube bundle by baffles. Counter-flow is preferred for efficiency (hot and cold enter opposite ends); where a counter-flow cannot conveniently be arranged, a "two-pass" tube-side with shell fluid cross-flow is used. For sea water (dirty, scale-forming) the sea water is normally put on the tube side so it can be cleaned by rodding out/backflushing and so the tube bundle can be withdrawn - and a spacer/no-differential expansion design (floating head) accommodates the large thermal expansion.
Baffles: transverse baffles (segmental baffles) are fitted in the shell to force the shell-side fluid to flow back and forth across the tube bundle, increasing turbulence, mixing and the heat transfer coefficient, and supporting the long tube bundle to prevent sagging/vibration. Baffle spacing and cut shape differ with the medium: for low-viscosity or clean fluids closer baffles and a larger cut promote turbulence; for viscous oils (which have poor heat transfer and high pressure drop) the baffles are spaced wider and have a reduced cut to limit the pressure drop while still sweeping the tubes. For sea water, fewer/wider baffles reduce pressure drop and erosion.
Depending on the medium:
- Oil/fuel (viscous, poor convection): oil on shell side over a large tube area with wide, partly-cut baffles, or oil on tube side with multipass; materials tolerant of heating.
- Fresh water: may be either side; six-pass or four-pass tube arrangement common.
- Sea water (corrosive, scale forming): on the tube side, so tubes cleaned and selected in cupro-nickel; spacious shell, floating (expansion) heads to allow differential expansion; baffles arranged to maintain good cross-flow without excessive pressure drop.
- Steam (steam condenser): steam on the shell side with the cooling water in tubes; the condensate drains; baffles shaped/nozzles arranged to sweep the tubes and direct the steam.
Distinguishing sketch features: shell and flanged cover with tube bundle and tube sheets, removable floating head, the pattern of baffles (segmental plates with holes), the pass partitions, and the inlet/outlet nozzles for tube-side and shell-side.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q6 (16 Marks)
Steering & Deck Machinery 🔥 Repeated 4x
With reference to hull cathodic protection systems of the impressed current type:
(a) Sketch and describe such a system (8)
(b) Explain how protection may be ensured for the rudder and propeller (4)
(c) State any precautions that should be taken when this type of system is installed. (4)
Appeared In: Oct 2025 Feb 2025 Oct 2023 Feb 2023
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
An Impressed Current Cathodic Protection (ICCP) system protects the underwater hull from corrosion by making the ship’s hull the cathode of an electrochemical cell. A rectifier supplies controlled DC current to inert anodes, while the hull receives the return current and is protected from corrosion. ICCP systems on ships use a DC source and inert anodes such as MMO/titanium, with automatic regulation based on hull potential measured by reference electrodes.
Working:
- AC supply is fed to a transformer-rectifier unit.
- The rectifier converts AC to low-voltage DC.
- The positive terminal is connected to inert anodes (usually titanium/MMO) fitted externally on the hull.
- The negative terminal is connected to the ship’s hull.
- Current flows from anodes → seawater → hull.
- The hull becomes cathodic, so corrosion of hull steel is prevented.
- Reference electrodes (silver/silver chloride / zinc type) measure hull potential.
- The automatic controller adjusts output current so hull potential remains within the protective range, avoiding under-protection or over-protection.
Main components
- Transformer/rectifier
- Automatic control panel
- Inert anodes
- Reference electrodes / potential sensors
- Hull bonding cables and monitoring arrangement
Rudder
- The rudder may be electrically insulated by bearings/pintles, so bonding is required.
- Protection is ensured by:
- flexible bonding straps / cables across rudder stock, carrier bearing or pintles
- sometimes supplementary sacrificial anodes on rudder
- This ensures the rudder remains electrically continuous with the hull and receives cathodic protection.
Propeller
- The propeller shaft is often electrically insulated from the hull by the oil film in stern tube and bearings.
- Therefore, ICCP current may not protect the propeller effectively.
- Protection is ensured by fitting a shaft earthing / shaft bonding device:
- slip ring on shaft
- silver/graphite brushes to hull earth
- This provides electrical continuity between shaft/propeller and hull, and also prevents bearing pitting due to shaft potential. A turning propeller is often insulated from the hull by the lubricating oil film, so a shaft earthing device with brushes and slip ring is used to avoid bearing damage and improve protection.
- Do not overprotect the hull: Excess current can damage paint coating and may cause hydrogen effects on high-strength steel.
- Maintain electrical continuity: Ensure proper bonding of rudder, shaft, stabilizers, thrusters, sea chests, etc.
- Inspect anodes and reference cells regularly: Keep them clean, undamaged, and properly insulated from hull structure where required.
- Check and calibrate control system: Reference electrodes and controller must be tested periodically for correct hull potential.
- Avoid stray current interference: Careful cable insulation and earthing arrangement to prevent corrosion of nearby fittings.
- During dry dock: Switch off ICCP before docking/undocking and inspect anodes, shields, and hull coating condition.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (16 Marks)
General 🔥 Repeated 6x
(a) Describe, with the aid of a sketch, an open loop system for reducing SOx emissions from engine exhaust gas, explaining how the system operates, its advantages and disadvantages. (6)
(b) Describe, with the aid of a sketch, a closed loop scrubber system for removing SOx from engine exhaust gas, explaining the operation of this unit and stating when it would be used. (10)
Appeared In: Nov 2025 Jun 2025 Jul 2024 Sep 2022 Jun 2026 Jan 2025 - 1
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- Exhaust gases enter via the bottom side of the scrubber tower
- Seawater is sprayed at the top of the scrubber through spraying nozzles
- This results in an equally divided spray pattern throughout the scrubber
- Sulphur particles in the exhaust gas attach to the water droplets under the right temperature and process conditions
- Cleaned exhaust gas leaves via the top of the scrubber tower
- The seawater leaves* via the bottom and is discharged overboard.
- pH, turbidity and PAH are continuously monitored in accordance with IMO regulations, MARPOL Annex VI resolution.
- Closed loop systems are primarily used for vessels that operate in ports and sailing areas where overboard discharge is prohibited.
- Exhaust gasses enter via the bottom side of the scrubber tower
- Fresh water is inserted at the top of the scrubber through spraying nozzles
- This results in an equally divided spray pattern throughout the scrubber
- Sulphur particles in the exhaust gas attach to the water droplets under the right temperature and process conditions
- Process water is led to the circulation tank
- NaOH is added to the process water to neutralise acidity
- Cleaned process water is pumped upwards again to the top
- Polluted water is drained and led through a separator
- Solids and oil are removed from the polluted water forming sludge
- Sludge is pumped to the sludge storage tank on the ship
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q4 (16 Marks)
Auxiliary Machinery 🔥 Repeated 8x
With reference to a tubular heat exchanger, state the various types used on board a ship and explain with sketches how the construction, flow pattern, baffles, differ from each other depending upon the medium in use. (16)
Appeared In: Dec 2025 Nov 2025 Oct 2025 Jun 2025 Feb 2025 Jul 2024 Aug 2023 Jun 2026
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Tubular heat exchangers and their construction variations
Types used on board ship
- Shell and tube heat exchangers (coolers) for sea-water cooling of lubricating oil (lube oil cooler), freshwater (FW cooler), jacket cooling water, fuel oil (fuel heater/cooler), and for steam condensers.
- Double-pipe (hairpin) heat exchangers, which are two concentric pipes.
- U-tube / multipass shell-and-tube exchangers, and floating-head (floating tube sheet) exchangers to allow for thermal expansion.
- Plate heat exchangers are technically not tubular but are used in some duties; the question concerns tubular ones, so the focus is shell-and-tube.
Construction, flow pattern and baffles depending on the medium
Shell-and-tube construction: a cylindrical shell (e.g. steel, zinc-protected or cupro-nickel lined for sea water), with a bundle of tubes fitted between two tube sheets (headers) and secured by tube expansion/glands, the whole enclosed by channel covers. One fluid flows through the tubes (tube side) and the other through the shell in the space around the tubes (shell side), transferring heat through the tube walls.
Flow pattern: for clean fluids (e.g. oil/fresh water) a number of passes is arranged - the tubes are grouped so the fluid passes back and forth to give multipass; the shell fluid is guided across the tube bundle by baffles. Counter-flow is preferred for efficiency (hot and cold enter opposite ends); where a counter-flow cannot conveniently be arranged, a "two-pass" tube-side with shell fluid cross-flow is used. For sea water (dirty, scale-forming) the sea water is normally put on the tube side so it can be cleaned by rodding out/backflushing and so the tube bundle can be withdrawn - and a spacer/no-differential expansion design (floating head) accommodates the large thermal expansion.
Baffles: transverse baffles (segmental baffles) are fitted in the shell to force the shell-side fluid to flow back and forth across the tube bundle, increasing turbulence, mixing and the heat transfer coefficient, and supporting the long tube bundle to prevent sagging/vibration. Baffle spacing and cut shape differ with the medium: for low-viscosity or clean fluids closer baffles and a larger cut promote turbulence; for viscous oils (which have poor heat transfer and high pressure drop) the baffles are spaced wider and have a reduced cut to limit the pressure drop while still sweeping the tubes. For sea water, fewer/wider baffles reduce pressure drop and erosion.
Depending on the medium:
- Oil/fuel (viscous, poor convection): oil on shell side over a large tube area with wide, partly-cut baffles, or oil on tube side with multipass; materials tolerant of heating.
- Fresh water: may be either side; six-pass or four-pass tube arrangement common.
- Sea water (corrosive, scale forming): on the tube side, so tubes cleaned and selected in cupro-nickel; spacious shell, floating (expansion) heads to allow differential expansion; baffles arranged to maintain good cross-flow without excessive pressure drop.
- Steam (steam condenser): steam on the shell side with the cooling water in tubes; the condensate drains; baffles shaped/nozzles arranged to sweep the tubes and direct the steam.
Distinguishing sketch features: shell and flanged cover with tube bundle and tube sheets, removable floating head, the pattern of baffles (segmental plates with holes), the pass partitions, and the inlet/outlet nozzles for tube-side and shell-side.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q6 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting 🔥 Repeated 6x
(a) Describe with the aid of a sketch, the main engine ancillary equipment for automatic monitoring and regulation of fuel viscosity. (6)
(b) Explain the operation of equipment described in (a) above. (5)
(c) Discuss the single fuel concept. (5)
Appeared In: Jun 2026 Dec 2025 Nov 2025 Jun 2025 Jul 2024 Apr 2023
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Viscotherm with Differential Pressure (DP) Transmitter:
- The viscotherm consists of a capillary tube connected to the discharge side of a gear pump driven by an electric motor.
- A DP transmitter measures the pressure difference in the capillary tube, which is directly proportional to the viscosity of the fuel oil.
- The fuel oil passes through a heater controlled by a steam valve. The valve adjusts the steam flow to maintain the desired fuel viscosity.
- A controller compares the measured viscosity from the DP transmitter to the set point and sends a signal to regulate the steam valve.
- As fuel flows through the viscotherm, the gear pump diverts a portion of the fuel through the capillary tube.
- The DP transmitter measures the pressure difference across the capillary tube.
- The DP transmitter sends the viscosity data to the controller.
- The controller compares the measured viscosity to the set point value.
- If the viscosity deviates from the desired level, the controller adjusts the steam valve to increase or decrease the steam flow to the fuel heater.
- Adjusting the steam flow changes the fuel temperature, directly impacting viscosity to maintain optimal levels.
- Modern two-stroke engines are equipped with fuel circulation systems that ensure the fuel at injectors is always maintained at the correct temperature and viscosity.
- Continuous circulation eliminates the need to switch between HFO and low-sulphur fuel oil (LSFO) under normal conditions.
Advantages:
- Significant savings are achieved as residual fuel is cheaper than distillate fuel.
- Reduces the complexities and risks associated with frequent fuel changeovers, such as thermal shock and injector clogging.
Where local regulations demand the use of VLSFO, changeovers may still be necessary. However, automated systems simplify this process.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q8 (16 Marks)
General 🔥 Repeated 3x
(a) Explain the Operational principle of a ship's stabiliser. (8)
(b) Describe with sketches Active and Passive types of stabilizers. (8)
Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jan 2026 Nov 2025
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
A ship's stabilizer generates hydrodynamic or gravitational forces that oppose and neutralize the rolling motion caused by waves and wind. As a wave passes, it creates an unbalanced buoyancy force that induces rolling. A stabilizer counteracts this by applying an equal and opposite torque, utilizing the forward speed of the vessel to create lifting forces or utilizing internal mass to shift the center of gravity. The system continuously detects rolling angles and velocities using sensors or gyroscopes
1. Passive Stabilizers
Passive systems use the natural hydrodynamic flow or movement of a contained mass without requiring external power or complex mechanical control systems
Bilge Keels: Fixed, fin-like projections extending along the lower turn of the ship's hull. When the ship rolls, the water is forced to flow around these keels, creating hydrodynamic drag that dampens the rolling motion.
Passive Anti-Roll Tanks: U-shaped tanks located on opposite sides of the ship partially filled with water. As the ship rolls, the water naturally sloshes from side to side. The tanks are designed with internal restrictions (nozzles/valves) to ensure the water shifts with a phase lag, creating a restoring moment that opposes the wave's rolling action.
2. Active Stabilizers
Active systems utilize dedicated power sources (hydraulics/motors) and automated control mechanisms (gyroscopes) to actively generate corrective forces in real-time.
- Active Fin Stabilizers: Aerofoil-shaped fins protruding from the ship's hull. When a gyro sensor detects a roll, a hydraulic system rapidly pivots the fins to change their angle of attack. The forward motion of the ship passing over the angled fins creates massive lift, forcing one side of the hull up and the other down to counteract the wave.
- Active Anti-Roll Tanks: Similar in structure to passive tanks, but they utilize reversible pumps or blowers to aggressively force the water from one side to the other, creating a faster, more controlled anti-rolling moment independent of the natural roll period.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q1 (16 Marks)
General 🔥 Repeated 3x
(a) Explain the Operational principle of a ship's stabiliser. (8)
(b) Describe with sketches Active and Passive types of stabilizers. (8)
Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jan 2026 Nov 2025
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
A ship's stabilizer generates hydrodynamic or gravitational forces that oppose and neutralize the rolling motion caused by waves and wind. As a wave passes, it creates an unbalanced buoyancy force that induces rolling. A stabilizer counteracts this by applying an equal and opposite torque, utilizing the forward speed of the vessel to create lifting forces or utilizing internal mass to shift the center of gravity. The system continuously detects rolling angles and velocities using sensors or gyroscopes
1. Passive Stabilizers
Passive systems use the natural hydrodynamic flow or movement of a contained mass without requiring external power or complex mechanical control systems
Bilge Keels: Fixed, fin-like projections extending along the lower turn of the ship's hull. When the ship rolls, the water is forced to flow around these keels, creating hydrodynamic drag that dampens the rolling motion.
Passive Anti-Roll Tanks: U-shaped tanks located on opposite sides of the ship partially filled with water. As the ship rolls, the water naturally sloshes from side to side. The tanks are designed with internal restrictions (nozzles/valves) to ensure the water shifts with a phase lag, creating a restoring moment that opposes the wave's rolling action.
2. Active Stabilizers
Active systems utilize dedicated power sources (hydraulics/motors) and automated control mechanisms (gyroscopes) to actively generate corrective forces in real-time.
- Active Fin Stabilizers: Aerofoil-shaped fins protruding from the ship's hull. When a gyro sensor detects a roll, a hydraulic system rapidly pivots the fins to change their angle of attack. The forward motion of the ship passing over the angled fins creates massive lift, forcing one side of the hull up and the other down to counteract the wave.
- Active Anti-Roll Tanks: Similar in structure to passive tanks, but they utilize reversible pumps or blowers to aggressively force the water from one side to the other, creating a faster, more controlled anti-rolling moment independent of the natural roll period.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (16 Marks)
Materials & Testing 🔥 Repeated 8x
With reference to Keyless Propeller:
(a) Sketch a section through a keyless sleeved propeller. (7)
(b) State the advantages of using a keyless sleeved propeller (3)
(c) State with reason, Which metal sleeve should be made for contact with the forged mild steel tail shaft? (3)
(d) State the material uses to bond the sleeve to the propeller and the general thickness of the bonding material. (3)
Appeared In: Jan 2026 Jun 2024 Dec 2023 Oct 2023 Mar 2019 Jan 2019 Sep 2018 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- Keyless design avoids stress concentration caused by keys and keyways.
- Stresses are evenly distributed across the internal surface of the propeller boss
- The absence of a keyway increases the friction available for torque transmission.
- The design prevents overstressing or permanent damage to the propeller hub during operation.
- The keyless arrangement simplifies the propeller and shaft interface, making it easier to manufacture and maintain.
- With a coefficient of friction of 0.28, it minimizes the likelihood of propeller slippage.
- Its expansion rates are similar to those of steel, reducing the risk of misalignment or loosening during temperature variations.
- Pearlitic cast iron exhibits excellent resistance to fretting, which is important for prolonged and reliable operation.
- High-strength epoxy Araldite filling is used to bond the sleeve to the propeller securely.
- The bonding material is applied with a thickness of approximately 1 mm, ensuring adequate adhesion and durability.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q4 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting 🔥 Repeated 7x
With reference to shaft alignment:
(a) Explain the meaning of fair curve or rational alignment. (8)
(b) Shaft alignment is often verified using hydraulic jacks to obtain a simple graph. Sketch such a graph, indicating the following: (8)
(i) Static load;
(ii) Hysteresis;
(iii) Influence number;
Explain the limitations of checking shaft alignment solely by hydraulic jacking methods.
Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jan 2026 Sep 2025 Dec 2024 Jun 2024 Aug 2023 Dec 2022
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(a) Meaning of Fair Curve / Rational Alignment
Fair curve alignment refers to the method of shaft alignment where the bearings are not arranged in a single straight line, but are deliberately set with calculated vertical offsets so that the shaft follows a smooth curve.
Explanation:
- For small-diameter shafts, bearings can often be kept in a straight line without issues.
- For large-diameter or high-power shafts, straight-line alignment causes:
- Uneven bearing loading
- High bending stress in the shaft
- Excessive wear and vibration
- In modern ships, fair curve alignment is preferred because:
- Bearing heights are adjusted individually
- Shaft load is distributed uniformly
- Bending stresses are minimized, preventing fatigue and vibration
Advantages of Fair Curve Alignment:
- Uniform bearing load distribution, reducing localized stress.
- Lower shaft bending stress, enhancing structural integrity.
- Reduced vibration, ensuring smoother operation.
- Longer bearing life, lowering maintenance costs.
(b) Shaft Alignment Check Using Hydraulic Jacks
The hydraulic jacking method is commonly used to verify shaft alignment by measuring the bearing loads when the shaft is lifted and plotting a graph of jack load vs. vertical displacement.
Procedure:
- Place a hydraulic jack near the bearing to be checked.
- Fix a dial gauge to measure vertical movement of the shaft.
- Slowly lift and lower the shaft using the jack.
- Record jack load and shaft displacement readings.
- Plot a graph of load versus displacement.
Graph Indications:
- (i) Static Load
- The load acting on the bearing at zero lift.
- Represents the actual operational load on the bearing when the shaft is at rest.
- (ii) Hysteresis
- The difference between the lifting and lowering curves.
- Caused by:
- Friction between shaft and bearing
- Oil film resistance
- Elastic deformation of the bearing
- Hysteresis indicates energy loss and affects measurement accuracy.
- (iii) Influence Number
- Represents the change in load per unit vertical movement of a bearing (N/mm).
- Shows the effect of raising one bearing on the load of other bearings.
- Used in fair curve alignment calculations to adjust bearing heights accurately.
(c) Limitations of Hydraulic Jacking Method
- Measures Only Vertical Loads
- Does not accurately measure horizontal bearing reactions.
- Less effective for resiliently mounted reduction gears.
- Time-Consuming
- Requires many readings for multiple bearings.
- Labour-intensive and difficult in restricted engine room spaces.
- Accuracy Issues
- Misalignment of the jack or dial gauge introduces errors.
- Shaft centerline mismatch reduces precision.
- Can produce wide hysteresis, complicating interpretation.
- Requires Skilled Interpretation
- Jacking curves vary depending on bearing type.
- Only trained personnel can correctly analyze the results.
- Hysteresis Effects
- Friction and oil film can cause non-linear readings.
- Lack of a load cell amplifies measurement errors.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q5 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting 🔥 Repeated 5x
With respect to Energy efficient running of ships.
(a) Sketch and explain the optimization of propeller hull interface flow devices and improvement of propulsion efficiency. (8)
(b) sketch and explain the optimization of Auxiliary machinery using VFDs. (8)
Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jan 2026 Jun 2024 Nov 2023 Jul 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Energy-Efficient Running of Ships
The propulsion efficiency of a ship does not depend only on the propeller design. The flow of water approaching and leaving the propeller is equally important. Unfavourable inflow, uneven velocity distribution, vortex formation and rotational energy in the propeller slipstream result in energy losses, even when the propeller itself is well designed.
To reduce these hydrodynamic losses, Energy Saving Devices (ESDs) are fitted around the propeller–hull interface. These devices guide, straighten or deflect the water flow so that the propeller can convert more of the available engine power into useful thrust.
ESDs are particularly useful for existing ships, where replacing the complete propulsion system may not be technically or economically practical. Depending on the type of device and the ship's operating profile, they can provide a measurable improvement in propulsion efficiency and reduction in fuel consumption.
Common devices include:
1. Propeller Nozzle
A propeller nozzle is an annular hydrodynamic structure fitted around the propeller. It guides and directs the water flow through the propeller and improves the inflow conditions.
The shape and position of the nozzle help convert a greater portion of the propeller-generated impulse into useful axial thrust.
The benefit is particularly significant at low ship speeds and high propeller loading, where an open propeller is comparatively less efficient.
Advantages:
- Increased thrust at low speed and heavy load.
- Improved propeller efficiency.
- Useful during manoeuvring and operation against currents.
- Particularly suitable for tugs, dredgers and workboats.
- Provides better handling and working capability in laden conditions.
2. Guiding Fins / Stators
Guiding fins, also called stators, are generally fitted ahead of the propeller. They modify the incoming water flow by aligning and redistributing it, reducing swirl and making the velocity distribution over the propeller disc more uniform.
As a result, water reaches the propeller blades at more favourable angles of attack, improving the hydrodynamic performance of the propeller.
Advantages:
- More uniform water inflow.
- More even loading of propeller blades.
- Better utilisation of available shaft power.
- Reduced local blade overloading.
- Reduced vibration and pressure pulses.
- Reduced possibility of cavitation.
- Lower fuel consumption.
- Reduced stress and wear on the propeller, shaft line and bearings.
3. Propeller Boss Cap Fins (PBCF)
Behind a conventional propeller hub, a concentrated rotating flow called a hub vortex is normally formed. This vortex contains kinetic energy that does not contribute to useful propulsion and is therefore lost as vortex energy and turbulence in the propeller wake.
The hub vortex may also cause:
- Additional energy losses.
- Increased turbulence in the wake.
- Pressure pulses and vibration.
- Adverse interaction with the rudder and other stern components.
Propeller Boss Cap Fins (PBCF) are fitted to the propeller boss cap to reduce the strength of the hub vortex. By recovering part of the rotational energy and improving the flow leaving the propeller, they can increase propulsion efficiency and reduce energy losses.
Variable Frequency Drives (VFDs) are used to control the speed of electric motors driving auxiliary machinery such as centrifugal pumps, fans, blowers and compressors.
In conventional systems, an electric motor often runs at a constant speed, while the required flow or pressure is controlled using valves, dampers or bypass arrangements. This wastes energy because the motor continues to operate at full speed even when the actual demand is low.
With a VFD, the frequency and voltage supplied to the motor are varied according to the required load. Therefore, the motor speed can be adjusted to match the actual demand of the auxiliary machinery.
Working Principle
AC supply → VFD → Variable-frequency/variable-speed motor → Auxiliary machinery
The VFD changes the frequency supplied to the motor:
Frequency ↓ → Motor speed ↓ → Flow ↓ → Power consumption ↓
When demand increases:
Frequency ↑ → Motor speed ↑ → Flow ↑ → Power consumption ↑
For centrifugal pumps and fans, the affinity laws show that:
- Flow ∝ Speed
- Pressure/Head ∝ Speed²
- Power ∝ Speed³
Therefore, even a small reduction in motor speed can produce a large reduction in power consumption.
Applications on Ships
VFDs can be used for:
- Sea-water and fresh-water cooling pumps.
- Boiler feed-water and circulation pumps.
- Ventilation and engine-room fans.
- Air-conditioning and chilled-water pumps.
- Fuel and oil circulation systems, where applicable.
- Other variable-load auxiliary machinery.
Advantages of VFDs
- Reduced electrical power consumption by matching motor speed to actual demand.
- Reduced fuel consumption, because less electrical power is generated by the ship's generators.
- Better control of flow and pressure without excessive throttling or bypassing.
- Reduced mechanical wear due to smooth starting and stopping.
- Reduced starting current and mechanical shock.
- Improved operating efficiency during part-load conditions.
- Reduced running hours/load on diesel generators, helping optimise generator operation.
- Overall improvement in the ship's energy efficiency and operating cost.
Example
Consider a cooling-water pump operating at full speed when only 70% flow is required. Instead of keeping the pump at full speed and throttling the discharge valve, the VFD reduces the motor speed to approximately the required level.
Because pump power varies approximately with the cube of speed, a reduction in speed can result in a significant reduction in electrical power consumption.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q7 (16 Marks)
Refrigeration & Air Conditioning 🔥 Repeated 5x
(a) Draw a block diagram for a fully automated accommodation air conditioning unit, labelling the component parts and indicating the directions of air flow. (8)
(b) Explain why the unit includes means of dehumidification and humidification. (4)
(c) A chart is used for ensuring that the accommodation conditions are within the so-called Comfort Zone: what useful information does the chart give? (4)
Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jan 2026 Sep 2025 Jun 2024 Dec 2022
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The unit includes both dehumidification and humidification to maintain air within the "comfort zone".
Dehumidification
Air is dehumidified to prevent health issues and equipment damage. When warm, humid air is cooled, its relative humidity increases. If it reaches 100% saturation, moisture condenses. In an A-C unit, air is cooled below the target temperature (e.g., to 10°C) to make it supersaturated, causing excess moisture to precipitate out. This dry, cool air is then reheated to the desired temperature (e.g., 20°C). At this new temperature, the air's relative humidity will be at a comfortable level, typically around 50%. Without this process, inhaling highly humid, cold air could lead to respiratory issues. Additionally, moisture condensation on electronic equipment can cause damage.
Humidification
Humidification is necessary when the incoming air is too dry. Dry air can cause discomfort, skin irritation, and static electricity issues. The humidifier adds moisture back into the air, usually by spraying a fine mist of water, to raise the humidity to the desired level and bring the conditions back into the comfort zone.
The chart provides the following useful information:
- Dry Bulb Temperature: The actual air temperature, measured with a standard thermometer.
- Wet Bulb Temperature: The temperature of air measured with a thermometer covered by a water-soaked cloth, indicating evaporative cooling potential.
- Dew Point Temperature: The temperature at which air becomes saturated and condensation begins.
- Relative Humidity: The percentage of moisture in the air compared to the maximum moisture the air can hold at that temperature.
- Moisture Content: The amount of water vapor present in the air, expressed as a ratio (e.g., grams of moisture per kilogram of dry air).
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q8 (16 Marks)
Steering & Deck Machinery 🔥 Repeated 2x
Sketch and describe a stockless anchor illustrating the method or device used to attach it to the chain cable. When the anchor and cable are ranged during the ships underwater survey what parts require special attention and what defects are likely to be discovered (16)
Appeared In: Jan 2026 Jun 2024
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
Q1 (16 Marks)
Refrigeration & Air Conditioning
(a) Sketch and explain a fully automated air conditioning system for accommodation spaces, annotating the relevant temperatures and relative humidity's throughout the system. (12)
(b) Describe how bacteria are prevented from multiplying to a harmful level in an air conditioning system. (4)
Appeared In: Feb 2026
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- Eliminate spray
- Keep insulation dry
- Ensure drains dept clear
- Inspect change and clean filters regularly
- Wash/clean danger areas with super chlorinated solution of 50ppm
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q2 (16 Marks)
Auxiliary Machinery 🔥 Repeated 6x
(a) Sketch and describe a high pressure cut-out in a refrigeration system. (6)
(b) The refrigeration compressor has stopped due to operation of the h. p. cut-out. Explain –
(i) The possible causes.
(ii) How these causes would be found and possible remedies. (6)
(c) What steps are taken if the compressor "short-cycle" on low pressure cut-out? (4)
Appeared In: Jul 2026 Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2024 Jul 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- Dirty condenser
- Overcharge of refrigerant
- Condenser coolant failure
- Clogged filter drier
- Malfunctioning expansion valve
- Faulty pressure switch
(ii)
- Dirty condenser - Visual inspection of condenser, clean the condenser
- Overcharge of refrigerant - check the refrigerant level in sight glass, reduce the refrigerant charge.
- Condenser coolant failure - check in/out pressures, clean the condenser.
- Clogged filter drier - visual inspection of drier, change the drier
- Malfunctioning expansion valve - inspect expansion valve, repair or replace the valve
- Faulty pressure switch - inspect the switch, repair or replace the pressure switch
- To provide sufficient suction pressure control difference according to the system loading and frequency of room inspection
- Refrigerant charges should be adequate, the system should be without leaks. The suction line filter is to be kept clean with no obstruction in suction line.
- The leaky solenoid valve is to be replaced. The evaporator coil is to be defrosted regularly and ensure the inner surface is clean.
- Piston rings, cylinder liner, discharge valve, by-pass valve and safety valve are to be maintained in good condition. Compressor capacity is to be selected according to the system requirement and nature of loading.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q8 (16 Marks)
Control & Instrumentation 🔥 Repeated 4x
With reference to Boiler feed regulation:
(a) Describe, with the aid of sketches, the operation of a boiler feed water regulator controlled by at least two other parameters besides water level in the drum. (6)
(b) Give reasons for the inclusion of the other elements besides water level in controlling feed flow. (6)
(c) Deduce the possible effects on the system when the drain valve in the constant leg in the level transmitter starts to leak. (4)
Appeared In: Feb 2024 Oct 2022 Jul 2026 Feb 2026
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The three elements (parameters) used are:
- Steam flow rate
- Feed water flow rate
- Water level in the drum
Each parameter transmits a signal proportional to its measured value.
- Steam flow and feed flow signals pass through individual square-root converters and are compared in a relay.
- The relay sends a signal to the controller only when steam flow and feed flow are in a 1:1 ratio.
- Once this condition is met, the controller compares the drum level signal (from a float level transmitter) with the setpoint.
- Based on the deviation, the controller sends an air signal to the feed water control valve, which opens or closes to maintain the desired water level.
As steam demand normalises, the saturation temperature rises, and bubble formation ceases, causing the water level to fall—known as the "shrinkage effect." Including steam flow and water flow, elements help counteract these effects, ensuring an accurate reflection of the true water level and allowing the feed water control system to respond appropriately.
The Proportional-Integral (P+I) controller misinterprets this as a higher water level and reduces the feed water flow by closing the feed control valve. This incorrect response leads to instability within the system and results in erratic water level indications.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q9 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting 🔥 Repeated 3x
(a) Sketch and describe a Pilgrim Nut for securing a propeller to the screw shaft. (8)
(b) Describe how this device is used to loosen the propeller on the shaft when removal or inspection becomes necessary. (5)
(c) Give reasons why this method is considered to be superior to all other methods. (3)
Appeared In: Jul 2026 Feb 2026 Feb 2024
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The Pilgrim Nut is a hydraulic device used for mounting and removing a propeller from the tapered tail shaft. It provides an accurate, safe and controlled method of pushing the propeller onto the shaft without hammering.
Construction and Working:
- The propeller is mounted on a tapered tail shaft and secured by a Pilgrim Nut.
- The Pilgrim Nut contains an internal nitrile rubber tube (hydraulic bladder).
- When hydraulic oil is pumped into the rubber tube, it expands and pushes a steel loading ring against the propeller hub.
- This hydraulic force pushes the propeller uniformly onto the taper, producing the required interference fit.
- A dial indicator (clock gauge) is fitted to measure the actual movement (push-up) of the propeller hub relative to the shaft.
- The loading ring should not move outward by more than one-third of its width from the flush position; otherwise, the nitrile rubber tube may rupture.
- Before mounting:
- The shaft taper and propeller bore are thoroughly cleaned and degreased to obtain predictable friction.
- (Exception: Cast steel propellers are lightly wiped with an oil-soaked rag as recommended by the manufacturer.)
- Blue marking (Prussian blue) is applied on the shaft taper to check proper contact between the shaft and propeller bore.
- The temperatures of both the shaft and propeller hub are recorded because they affect the required hydraulic pressure. The manufacturer's push-up table/graph (push-up curve) is used to determine the correct final push-up pressure.
- The propeller is pushed up successively in approximately 25 mm stages, with hydraulic pressure applied gradually while continuously monitoring:
- Hydraulic pressure
- Propeller movement using the dial indicator
- Once the required push-up distance is achieved, the Pilgrim Nut is finally tightened using a tommy bar.
- The assembly is then secured by a locking plate and locking bolts to prevent loosening during service.
The Pilgrim Nut can also be used as a hydraulic withdrawal tool by reversing its position.
Procedure:
- Remove the locking plate and bolts, then loosen and unscrew the Pilgrim Nut.
- Reverse the Pilgrim Nut so that the loading ring faces the withdrawal plate.
- Fit the withdrawal plate in front of the nut and secure it using studs, as shown in the sketch.
- Connect the hydraulic pump to the Pilgrim Nut.
- Apply hydraulic pressure.
- The expanding nitrile rubber tube pushes the loading ring against the withdrawal plate, producing an equal and opposite force that pulls the propeller hub off the shaft taper.
- As the taper grip breaks, the propeller moves away from the shaft and can be safely removed.
Safety Precautions:
- Support the propeller using chain blocks, lifting tackles or suitable lifting gear before releasing it.
- Place wooden blocks between the Pilgrim Nut and the propeller, leaving only a gap slightly greater than the push-up distance. This prevents violent movement when the taper suddenly releases.
The Pilgrim Nut method is considered superior to conventional propeller mounting methods because:
- Accurate and controlled push-up is achieved using hydraulic pressure and dial gauge measurements, ensuring the correct interference fit.
- No hammering or heavy mechanical force is required, eliminating damage to the propeller hub, shaft taper and bearings.
- Quick, safe and easily reversible for both installation and removal, reducing maintenance time and minimizing the risk of accidents.
- Uniform hydraulic loading ensures even distribution of forces, reducing stress concentrations.
- The manufacturer's push-up curve/graph allows precise control by considering shaft and hub temperature, resulting in consistent and reliable mounting.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q2 (16 Marks)
Refrigeration & Air Conditioning
With reference to Air conditioning systems onboard for accommodation spaces:
(a) Sketch and explain a fully automated air conditioning system, annotating the relevant temperatures and relative humidity throughout the system. (12)
(b) Explain how bacteria are prevented from growing in an air conditioning system to a dangerous degree. (4)
Appeared In: Mar 2026
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(a)
(b)
The bacteria flourish in stagnant water or sludge or where wet matrix material may become encrusted with scale, dirt or organic matter such as dead insects. Main danger areas are inlet arrangement, filters, cooler units, humidifiers and plenum insulation. The risk of dangerous bacteria forming can be minimised by he following steps below:
- Eliminate spray
- Keep insulation dry
- Ensure drains dept clear
- Inspect change and clean filters regularly
- Wash/clean danger areas with super chlorinated solution of 50ppm
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (16 Marks)
General 🔥 Repeated 4x
(a) Describe the key phases and microstructures present in the iron-carbon equilibrium diagram and explain their significance in the heat treatment of steel. (8)
(b) How do the different regions of the iron carbon diagram influence the mechanical properties of steel, such as hardness, toughness, and ductility? Provide examples of how specific compositions and heat treatments can achieve desired properties. (8)
Appeared In: Apr 2026 Mar 2026 Apr 2025 Aug 2024
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Iron–Carbon Equilibrium Diagram
The iron–carbon (Fe–C) equilibrium diagram shows the phases and microstructures that form in iron–carbon alloys at different carbon contents and temperatures. Understanding this diagram is essential for selecting and controlling the heat treatment of steel.
1. Important Regions and Microstructures
Type | Carbon Content | Main Characteristics |
Hypoeutectoid steels | 0.02–0.8% C | Ferrite + pearlite; generally good ductility and toughness |
Eutectoid steel | ≈ 0.8% C | Mainly pearlite; good balance between hardness and ductility |
Hypereutectoid steels | 0.8–2.14% C | Pearlite + cementite; higher hardness and strength |
Hypoeutectic cast irons | 2.14–4.3% C | Pearlite + transformed ledeburite |
Eutectic cast iron | ≈ 4.3% C | Ledeburite |
Hypereutectic cast irons | 4.3–6.67% C | Ledeburite + primary cementite |
2. Important Phases
Ferrite (α-iron):
- Soft and relatively weak.
- Has very low carbon solubility.
- Provides good ductility and toughness.
Austenite (γ-iron):
- Exists at higher temperatures.
- Can dissolve considerably more carbon than ferrite.
- It is the starting phase for important heat treatments such as quenching and normalising.
Cementite (Fe₃C):
- Iron carbide containing approximately 6.67% carbon.
- Very hard and brittle.
- Increases hardness and wear resistance, but reduces ductility and toughness.
Pearlite:
- A layered mixture of ferrite and cementite.
- Forms when austenite undergoes eutectoid transformation.
- Provides a useful combination of strength, hardness and ductility.
Martensite:
- A very hard, metastable structure formed when austenite is rapidly quenched.
- It provides very high hardness and strength but is relatively brittle.
3. Critical Points of the Fe–C Diagram
Eutectoid Point
The eutectoid point is approximately:
At this temperature, austenite transforms completely into pearlite during slow cooling:
Austenite → Ferrite + Cementite = Pearlite
This is one of the most important reference points for steel heat treatment.
Eutectic Point
The eutectic point is approximately:
At this point, liquid alloy solidifies directly into:
Liquid → Austenite + Cementite
This point is particularly important in the study and manufacture of cast irons.
Peritectic Point
The peritectic point occurs at approximately:
At this point:
Liquid + Delta Ferrite → Austenite
4. Significance in Heat Treatment
The Fe–C diagram is essential for determining the appropriate heating and cooling temperatures for different heat treatments.
- Annealing: The steel is heated to the appropriate temperature and then cooled slowly. This allows the microstructure to approach equilibrium, reducing residual stresses and increasing ductility and toughness.
- Normalising: The steel is heated into the austenite region and then cooled in air. It produces a finer microstructure than annealing and generally improves strength and toughness.
- Quenching: The steel is heated to form austenite and then cooled rapidly. Rapid cooling prevents normal carbon diffusion and transforms austenite into martensite, producing very high hardness and strength.
- Tempering: Tempering is carried out after quenching. The steel is reheated to a suitable temperature and then cooled. It reduces the brittleness and internal stresses of martensite while improving toughness and ductility.
- Carburising: Carburising enriches the surface layer with carbon. The carburised surface can then be quenched to form a hard martensitic case, while the lower-carbon core remains relatively tough and ductile.
The carbon content and resulting microstructure have a major influence on the mechanical properties of steel. As carbon content increases, hardness and strength generally increase, while ductility and toughness generally decrease.
1. Hypoeutectoid Steel – 0.02–0.8% C
Hypoeutectoid steels contain ferrite + pearlite.
- Ferrite provides ductility and toughness.
- Pearlite provides increased strength and hardness.
- As carbon content increases within this range, the amount of pearlite increases, resulting in higher strength and hardness.
Example:
A low-carbon steel with approximately 0.2% C, when normalised, produces a ferrite–pearlite structure with good strength, ductility and toughness. Such steels are suitable where good formability and toughness are required.
2. Eutectoid Steel – Approximately 0.77–0.8% C
At approximately 0.77–0.8% carbon, the steel transforms into mainly pearlite during slow cooling.
Pearlite provides a good balance of:
- Hardness
- Strength
- Ductility
If eutectoid steel is quenched, it forms martensite and becomes very hard and strong. However, it also becomes more brittle.
After quenching, tempering is normally carried out to reduce brittleness and improve toughness.
3. Hypereutectoid Steel – 0.8–2.14% C
Hypereutectoid steels contain pearlite + cementite.
The additional cementite increases:
- Hardness
- Strength
- Wear resistance
However, excessive cementite makes the steel more brittle and reduces ductility and toughness.
Example:
A steel containing approximately 1.0% C, when suitably heat treated, can develop high hardness and wear resistance, making it suitable for components such as tools, cutting components and wear-resistant parts.
4. Effect of Quenching and Tempering
A high-carbon or medium-carbon steel can be heated into the austenite region and then quenched.
Austenite → Martensite
This produces:
- Very high hardness.
- High strength.
- Good wear resistance.
However, untempered martensite is brittle and contains high internal stresses.
Therefore, tempering after quenching is used to:
- Reduce brittleness.
- Relieve internal stresses.
- Increase toughness and ductility.
- Retain an appropriate level of hardness.
The tempering temperature can be selected according to the required balance between hardness and toughness.
5. Carburising – Hard Surface with Tough Core
For a low-carbon steel, carburising can be used to increase the carbon content at the surface.
After carburising and quenching:
- The surface becomes high-carbon martensite and therefore very hard and wear-resistant.
- The core remains relatively low in carbon and therefore retains good toughness and ductility.
This is useful for components requiring a hard, wear-resistant surface together with a tough core, such as gears and similar machine components.
ALTERNATE ANSWER:
Different Phases
α-ferrite
Existing at low temperatures and low carbon content, α-ferrite is a solid solution of carbon in BCC Fe. This phase is stable at room temperature. In the graph, it can be seen as a sliver on the left edge with the Y-axis on the left side and A2 on the right. This phase is magnetic below 768°C.
It has a maximum carbon content of 0.022 %, and it will transform to γ-austenite at 912°C, as shown in the graph.
γ-austenite
This phase is a solid solution of carbon in FCC Fe with a maximum solubility of 2.14% C. On further heating, it converts into BCC δ-ferrite at 1395°C. γ-austenite is unstable at temperatures below the eutectic temperature (727°C) unless cooled rapidly. This phase is non-magnetic.
δ-ferrite
This phase has a similar structure to α-ferrite but exists only at high temperatures. The phase can be spotted at the top left corner on the graph. It has a melting point of 1538°C.
Fe3C or cementite
Cementite is a metastable phase of this alloy with a fixed composition of Fe3C. It decomposes extremely slowly at room temperature into iron and carbon (graphite).
This decomposition time is long, and it will take much longer than the service life of the application at room temperature. Some other factors (high temperatures and the addition of certain alloying elements, for instance) can affect this decomposition as they promote graphite formation.
Cementite is hard and brittle, which makes it suitable for strengthening steels. Its mechanical properties are a function of its microstructure, which depends upon how it is mixed with ferrite.
Fe-C liquid solution
Marked on the diagram as ‘L’, it can be seen in the upper region on the diagram. As the name suggests, it is a liquid solution of carbon in iron. As we know that δ-ferrite melts at 1538°C, it is evident that the melting temperature of iron decreases with increasing carbon content.
Significance in the Heat Treatment of Steel
- Austenitizing Foundation: Heat treatments (like annealing, normalizing, and hardening) begin by heating steel into the stable γ-austenite region. The diagram defines the exact minimum temperature (A3 or A1 critical lines) required to dissolve carbon and homogenize the microstructure.
- Controlling Phase Transformations: By tracking carbon content and crossing critical boundary lines, metallurgists predict whether slow cooling will yield soft ferrite-pearlite structures (via annealing) or if rapid quenching will trap carbon atoms to form ultra-hard martensite (the non-equilibrium body-centered tetragonal structure essential for hardening).
- Tailoring Mechanical Properties: The relative proportions of soft ferrite, hard cementite layers (pearlite spacing), and interstitial phases dictate the ultimate balance of tensile strength, hardness, and ductility
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q7 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting
With reference to a keyless propeller designed for hydraulic (wet) fit and withdrawal:
(a) Describe, with the aid of a sketch, how the propeller is fitted to the tail shaft; (10)
(b) State two advantages compared to a dry fit. (3)
(c) Explain how the thrust is transmitted without the use of a key and keyway. (3)
Appeared In: Mar 2026
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- simple construction
- No key slot and consequently no concentration of stresses at the edge of key slot unlike the ordinary keyed propeller
- Uniform distribution of stresses over the internal surface of the propeller boss.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q8 (16 Marks)
Materials & Testing
(a) Describe, with the aid of a Strain versus Time diagram, how a creep test is carried out to determine the strain rate of the material under test. (8)
(b) Explain EACH of the stages sketched in the diagram in part (a). (8)
Appeared In: Mar 2026
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
Q1 (16 Marks)
General 🔥 Repeated 3x
With Reference to Ship Stabilisers usually used in passenger ships:
(a) Explain the Operational principle of a ship's stabiliser. (8)
(b) Describe with sketches Active and Passive types of stabilizers. (8)
Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jan 2026 Nov 2025
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
A ship's stabilizer generates hydrodynamic or gravitational forces that oppose and neutralize the rolling motion caused by waves and wind. As a wave passes, it creates an unbalanced buoyancy force that induces rolling. A stabilizer counteracts this by applying an equal and opposite torque, utilizing the forward speed of the vessel to create lifting forces or utilizing internal mass to shift the center of gravity. The system continuously detects rolling angles and velocities using sensors or gyroscopes
1. Passive Stabilizers
Passive systems use the natural hydrodynamic flow or movement of a contained mass without requiring external power or complex mechanical control systems
Bilge Keels: Fixed, fin-like projections extending along the lower turn of the ship's hull. When the ship rolls, the water is forced to flow around these keels, creating hydrodynamic drag that dampens the rolling motion.
Passive Anti-Roll Tanks: U-shaped tanks located on opposite sides of the ship partially filled with water. As the ship rolls, the water naturally sloshes from side to side. The tanks are designed with internal restrictions (nozzles/valves) to ensure the water shifts with a phase lag, creating a restoring moment that opposes the wave's rolling action.
2. Active Stabilizers
Active systems utilize dedicated power sources (hydraulics/motors) and automated control mechanisms (gyroscopes) to actively generate corrective forces in real-time.
- Active Fin Stabilizers: Aerofoil-shaped fins protruding from the ship's hull. When a gyro sensor detects a roll, a hydraulic system rapidly pivots the fins to change their angle of attack. The forward motion of the ship passing over the angled fins creates massive lift, forcing one side of the hull up and the other down to counteract the wave.
- Active Anti-Roll Tanks: Similar in structure to passive tanks, but they utilize reversible pumps or blowers to aggressively force the water from one side to the other, creating a faster, more controlled anti-rolling moment independent of the natural roll period.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (16 Marks)
General 🔥 Repeated 4x
(a) Describe the key phases and microstructures in the iron-carbon equilibrium diagram and explain their significance in the heat treatment of steel. (8)
(b) How do the different regions of the iron-carbon diagram influence the mechanical properties of steel, such as hardness, toughness, and ductility? Provide examples of how specific compositions and heat treatments can achieve desired properties. (8)
Appeared In: Apr 2026 Mar 2026 Apr 2025 Aug 2024
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Iron–Carbon Equilibrium Diagram
The iron–carbon (Fe–C) equilibrium diagram shows the phases and microstructures that form in iron–carbon alloys at different carbon contents and temperatures. Understanding this diagram is essential for selecting and controlling the heat treatment of steel.
1. Important Regions and Microstructures
Type | Carbon Content | Main Characteristics |
Hypoeutectoid steels | 0.02–0.8% C | Ferrite + pearlite; generally good ductility and toughness |
Eutectoid steel | ≈ 0.8% C | Mainly pearlite; good balance between hardness and ductility |
Hypereutectoid steels | 0.8–2.14% C | Pearlite + cementite; higher hardness and strength |
Hypoeutectic cast irons | 2.14–4.3% C | Pearlite + transformed ledeburite |
Eutectic cast iron | ≈ 4.3% C | Ledeburite |
Hypereutectic cast irons | 4.3–6.67% C | Ledeburite + primary cementite |
2. Important Phases
Ferrite (α-iron):
- Soft and relatively weak.
- Has very low carbon solubility.
- Provides good ductility and toughness.
Austenite (γ-iron):
- Exists at higher temperatures.
- Can dissolve considerably more carbon than ferrite.
- It is the starting phase for important heat treatments such as quenching and normalising.
Cementite (Fe₃C):
- Iron carbide containing approximately 6.67% carbon.
- Very hard and brittle.
- Increases hardness and wear resistance, but reduces ductility and toughness.
Pearlite:
- A layered mixture of ferrite and cementite.
- Forms when austenite undergoes eutectoid transformation.
- Provides a useful combination of strength, hardness and ductility.
Martensite:
- A very hard, metastable structure formed when austenite is rapidly quenched.
- It provides very high hardness and strength but is relatively brittle.
3. Critical Points of the Fe–C Diagram
Eutectoid Point
The eutectoid point is approximately:
At this temperature, austenite transforms completely into pearlite during slow cooling:
Austenite → Ferrite + Cementite = Pearlite
This is one of the most important reference points for steel heat treatment.
Eutectic Point
The eutectic point is approximately:
At this point, liquid alloy solidifies directly into:
Liquid → Austenite + Cementite
This point is particularly important in the study and manufacture of cast irons.
Peritectic Point
The peritectic point occurs at approximately:
At this point:
Liquid + Delta Ferrite → Austenite
4. Significance in Heat Treatment
The Fe–C diagram is essential for determining the appropriate heating and cooling temperatures for different heat treatments.
- Annealing: The steel is heated to the appropriate temperature and then cooled slowly. This allows the microstructure to approach equilibrium, reducing residual stresses and increasing ductility and toughness.
- Normalising: The steel is heated into the austenite region and then cooled in air. It produces a finer microstructure than annealing and generally improves strength and toughness.
- Quenching: The steel is heated to form austenite and then cooled rapidly. Rapid cooling prevents normal carbon diffusion and transforms austenite into martensite, producing very high hardness and strength.
- Tempering: Tempering is carried out after quenching. The steel is reheated to a suitable temperature and then cooled. It reduces the brittleness and internal stresses of martensite while improving toughness and ductility.
- Carburising: Carburising enriches the surface layer with carbon. The carburised surface can then be quenched to form a hard martensitic case, while the lower-carbon core remains relatively tough and ductile.
The carbon content and resulting microstructure have a major influence on the mechanical properties of steel. As carbon content increases, hardness and strength generally increase, while ductility and toughness generally decrease.
1. Hypoeutectoid Steel – 0.02–0.8% C
Hypoeutectoid steels contain ferrite + pearlite.
- Ferrite provides ductility and toughness.
- Pearlite provides increased strength and hardness.
- As carbon content increases within this range, the amount of pearlite increases, resulting in higher strength and hardness.
Example:
A low-carbon steel with approximately 0.2% C, when normalised, produces a ferrite–pearlite structure with good strength, ductility and toughness. Such steels are suitable where good formability and toughness are required.
2. Eutectoid Steel – Approximately 0.77–0.8% C
At approximately 0.77–0.8% carbon, the steel transforms into mainly pearlite during slow cooling.
Pearlite provides a good balance of:
- Hardness
- Strength
- Ductility
If eutectoid steel is quenched, it forms martensite and becomes very hard and strong. However, it also becomes more brittle.
After quenching, tempering is normally carried out to reduce brittleness and improve toughness.
3. Hypereutectoid Steel – 0.8–2.14% C
Hypereutectoid steels contain pearlite + cementite.
The additional cementite increases:
- Hardness
- Strength
- Wear resistance
However, excessive cementite makes the steel more brittle and reduces ductility and toughness.
Example:
A steel containing approximately 1.0% C, when suitably heat treated, can develop high hardness and wear resistance, making it suitable for components such as tools, cutting components and wear-resistant parts.
4. Effect of Quenching and Tempering
A high-carbon or medium-carbon steel can be heated into the austenite region and then quenched.
Austenite → Martensite
This produces:
- Very high hardness.
- High strength.
- Good wear resistance.
However, untempered martensite is brittle and contains high internal stresses.
Therefore, tempering after quenching is used to:
- Reduce brittleness.
- Relieve internal stresses.
- Increase toughness and ductility.
- Retain an appropriate level of hardness.
The tempering temperature can be selected according to the required balance between hardness and toughness.
5. Carburising – Hard Surface with Tough Core
For a low-carbon steel, carburising can be used to increase the carbon content at the surface.
After carburising and quenching:
- The surface becomes high-carbon martensite and therefore very hard and wear-resistant.
- The core remains relatively low in carbon and therefore retains good toughness and ductility.
This is useful for components requiring a hard, wear-resistant surface together with a tough core, such as gears and similar machine components.
ALTERNATE ANSWER:
Different Phases
α-ferrite
Existing at low temperatures and low carbon content, α-ferrite is a solid solution of carbon in BCC Fe. This phase is stable at room temperature. In the graph, it can be seen as a sliver on the left edge with the Y-axis on the left side and A2 on the right. This phase is magnetic below 768°C.
It has a maximum carbon content of 0.022 %, and it will transform to γ-austenite at 912°C, as shown in the graph.
γ-austenite
This phase is a solid solution of carbon in FCC Fe with a maximum solubility of 2.14% C. On further heating, it converts into BCC δ-ferrite at 1395°C. γ-austenite is unstable at temperatures below the eutectic temperature (727°C) unless cooled rapidly. This phase is non-magnetic.
δ-ferrite
This phase has a similar structure to α-ferrite but exists only at high temperatures. The phase can be spotted at the top left corner on the graph. It has a melting point of 1538°C.
Fe3C or cementite
Cementite is a metastable phase of this alloy with a fixed composition of Fe3C. It decomposes extremely slowly at room temperature into iron and carbon (graphite).
This decomposition time is long, and it will take much longer than the service life of the application at room temperature. Some other factors (high temperatures and the addition of certain alloying elements, for instance) can affect this decomposition as they promote graphite formation.
Cementite is hard and brittle, which makes it suitable for strengthening steels. Its mechanical properties are a function of its microstructure, which depends upon how it is mixed with ferrite.
Fe-C liquid solution
Marked on the diagram as ‘L’, it can be seen in the upper region on the diagram. As the name suggests, it is a liquid solution of carbon in iron. As we know that δ-ferrite melts at 1538°C, it is evident that the melting temperature of iron decreases with increasing carbon content.
Significance in the Heat Treatment of Steel
- Austenitizing Foundation: Heat treatments (like annealing, normalizing, and hardening) begin by heating steel into the stable γ-austenite region. The diagram defines the exact minimum temperature (A3 or A1 critical lines) required to dissolve carbon and homogenize the microstructure.
- Controlling Phase Transformations: By tracking carbon content and crossing critical boundary lines, metallurgists predict whether slow cooling will yield soft ferrite-pearlite structures (via annealing) or if rapid quenching will trap carbon atoms to form ultra-hard martensite (the non-equilibrium body-centered tetragonal structure essential for hardening).
- Tailoring Mechanical Properties: The relative proportions of soft ferrite, hard cementite layers (pearlite spacing), and interstitial phases dictate the ultimate balance of tensile strength, hardness, and ductility
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q4 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting 🔥 Repeated 7x
With reference to shaft alignment:
(a) Explain the meaning of fair curve or rational alignment. (6)
(b) Shaft alignment is often verified using hydraulic jacks to obtain a simple graph. Sketch such a graph, indicating the following: (6)
(i) Static load;
(ii) Hysterests;
(iii) Influence number;
(c) Explain the limitations of checking shaft alignment solely by hydraulic jacking methods. (4)
Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jan 2026 Sep 2025 Dec 2024 Jun 2024 Aug 2023 Dec 2022
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(a) Meaning of Fair Curve / Rational Alignment
Fair curve alignment refers to the method of shaft alignment where the bearings are not arranged in a single straight line, but are deliberately set with calculated vertical offsets so that the shaft follows a smooth curve.
Explanation:
- For small-diameter shafts, bearings can often be kept in a straight line without issues.
- For large-diameter or high-power shafts, straight-line alignment causes:
- Uneven bearing loading
- High bending stress in the shaft
- Excessive wear and vibration
- In modern ships, fair curve alignment is preferred because:
- Bearing heights are adjusted individually
- Shaft load is distributed uniformly
- Bending stresses are minimized, preventing fatigue and vibration
Advantages of Fair Curve Alignment:
- Uniform bearing load distribution, reducing localized stress.
- Lower shaft bending stress, enhancing structural integrity.
- Reduced vibration, ensuring smoother operation.
- Longer bearing life, lowering maintenance costs.
(b) Shaft Alignment Check Using Hydraulic Jacks
The hydraulic jacking method is commonly used to verify shaft alignment by measuring the bearing loads when the shaft is lifted and plotting a graph of jack load vs. vertical displacement.
Procedure:
- Place a hydraulic jack near the bearing to be checked.
- Fix a dial gauge to measure vertical movement of the shaft.
- Slowly lift and lower the shaft using the jack.
- Record jack load and shaft displacement readings.
- Plot a graph of load versus displacement.
Graph Indications:
- (i) Static Load
- The load acting on the bearing at zero lift.
- Represents the actual operational load on the bearing when the shaft is at rest.
- (ii) Hysteresis
- The difference between the lifting and lowering curves.
- Caused by:
- Friction between shaft and bearing
- Oil film resistance
- Elastic deformation of the bearing
- Hysteresis indicates energy loss and affects measurement accuracy.
- (iii) Influence Number
- Represents the change in load per unit vertical movement of a bearing (N/mm).
- Shows the effect of raising one bearing on the load of other bearings.
- Used in fair curve alignment calculations to adjust bearing heights accurately.
(c) Limitations of Hydraulic Jacking Method
- Measures Only Vertical Loads
- Does not accurately measure horizontal bearing reactions.
- Less effective for resiliently mounted reduction gears.
- Time-Consuming
- Requires many readings for multiple bearings.
- Labour-intensive and difficult in restricted engine room spaces.
- Accuracy Issues
- Misalignment of the jack or dial gauge introduces errors.
- Shaft centerline mismatch reduces precision.
- Can produce wide hysteresis, complicating interpretation.
- Requires Skilled Interpretation
- Jacking curves vary depending on bearing type.
- Only trained personnel can correctly analyze the results.
- Hysteresis Effects
- Friction and oil film can cause non-linear readings.
- Lack of a load cell amplifies measurement errors.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q5 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting 🔥 Repeated 5x
With respect to Energy efficient running of ships.
(a) Sketch and explain the optimization of propeller hull interface flow devices and improvement of propulsion efficiency. (8)
(b) Sketch and explain the optimization of Auxiliary machinery using VFDs. (8)
Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jan 2026 Jun 2024 Nov 2023 Jul 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Energy-Efficient Running of Ships
The propulsion efficiency of a ship does not depend only on the propeller design. The flow of water approaching and leaving the propeller is equally important. Unfavourable inflow, uneven velocity distribution, vortex formation and rotational energy in the propeller slipstream result in energy losses, even when the propeller itself is well designed.
To reduce these hydrodynamic losses, Energy Saving Devices (ESDs) are fitted around the propeller–hull interface. These devices guide, straighten or deflect the water flow so that the propeller can convert more of the available engine power into useful thrust.
ESDs are particularly useful for existing ships, where replacing the complete propulsion system may not be technically or economically practical. Depending on the type of device and the ship's operating profile, they can provide a measurable improvement in propulsion efficiency and reduction in fuel consumption.
Common devices include:
1. Propeller Nozzle
A propeller nozzle is an annular hydrodynamic structure fitted around the propeller. It guides and directs the water flow through the propeller and improves the inflow conditions.
The shape and position of the nozzle help convert a greater portion of the propeller-generated impulse into useful axial thrust.
The benefit is particularly significant at low ship speeds and high propeller loading, where an open propeller is comparatively less efficient.
Advantages:
- Increased thrust at low speed and heavy load.
- Improved propeller efficiency.
- Useful during manoeuvring and operation against currents.
- Particularly suitable for tugs, dredgers and workboats.
- Provides better handling and working capability in laden conditions.
2. Guiding Fins / Stators
Guiding fins, also called stators, are generally fitted ahead of the propeller. They modify the incoming water flow by aligning and redistributing it, reducing swirl and making the velocity distribution over the propeller disc more uniform.
As a result, water reaches the propeller blades at more favourable angles of attack, improving the hydrodynamic performance of the propeller.
Advantages:
- More uniform water inflow.
- More even loading of propeller blades.
- Better utilisation of available shaft power.
- Reduced local blade overloading.
- Reduced vibration and pressure pulses.
- Reduced possibility of cavitation.
- Lower fuel consumption.
- Reduced stress and wear on the propeller, shaft line and bearings.
3. Propeller Boss Cap Fins (PBCF)
Behind a conventional propeller hub, a concentrated rotating flow called a hub vortex is normally formed. This vortex contains kinetic energy that does not contribute to useful propulsion and is therefore lost as vortex energy and turbulence in the propeller wake.
The hub vortex may also cause:
- Additional energy losses.
- Increased turbulence in the wake.
- Pressure pulses and vibration.
- Adverse interaction with the rudder and other stern components.
Propeller Boss Cap Fins (PBCF) are fitted to the propeller boss cap to reduce the strength of the hub vortex. By recovering part of the rotational energy and improving the flow leaving the propeller, they can increase propulsion efficiency and reduce energy losses.
Variable Frequency Drives (VFDs) are used to control the speed of electric motors driving auxiliary machinery such as centrifugal pumps, fans, blowers and compressors.
In conventional systems, an electric motor often runs at a constant speed, while the required flow or pressure is controlled using valves, dampers or bypass arrangements. This wastes energy because the motor continues to operate at full speed even when the actual demand is low.
With a VFD, the frequency and voltage supplied to the motor are varied according to the required load. Therefore, the motor speed can be adjusted to match the actual demand of the auxiliary machinery.
Working Principle
AC supply → VFD → Variable-frequency/variable-speed motor → Auxiliary machinery
The VFD changes the frequency supplied to the motor:
Frequency ↓ → Motor speed ↓ → Flow ↓ → Power consumption ↓
When demand increases:
Frequency ↑ → Motor speed ↑ → Flow ↑ → Power consumption ↑
For centrifugal pumps and fans, the affinity laws show that:
- Flow ∝ Speed
- Pressure/Head ∝ Speed²
- Power ∝ Speed³
Therefore, even a small reduction in motor speed can produce a large reduction in power consumption.
Applications on Ships
VFDs can be used for:
- Sea-water and fresh-water cooling pumps.
- Boiler feed-water and circulation pumps.
- Ventilation and engine-room fans.
- Air-conditioning and chilled-water pumps.
- Fuel and oil circulation systems, where applicable.
- Other variable-load auxiliary machinery.
Advantages of VFDs
- Reduced electrical power consumption by matching motor speed to actual demand.
- Reduced fuel consumption, because less electrical power is generated by the ship's generators.
- Better control of flow and pressure without excessive throttling or bypassing.
- Reduced mechanical wear due to smooth starting and stopping.
- Reduced starting current and mechanical shock.
- Improved operating efficiency during part-load conditions.
- Reduced running hours/load on diesel generators, helping optimise generator operation.
- Overall improvement in the ship's energy efficiency and operating cost.
Example
Consider a cooling-water pump operating at full speed when only 70% flow is required. Instead of keeping the pump at full speed and throttling the discharge valve, the VFD reduces the motor speed to approximately the required level.
Because pump power varies approximately with the cube of speed, a reduction in speed can result in a significant reduction in electrical power consumption.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q7 (16 Marks)
Refrigeration & Air Conditioning 🔥 Repeated 5x
(a) Draw a block diagram for a fully automated accommodation air conditioning unit, labelling the component parts and indicating the directions of air flow. (8)
(b) Explain why the unit includes means of dehumidification and humidification. (4)
(c) A chart is used for ensuring that the accommodation conditions are within the so-called Comfort Zone: what useful information does the chart give? (4)
Appeared In: Apr 2026 Jan 2026 Sep 2025 Jun 2024 Dec 2022
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The unit includes both dehumidification and humidification to maintain air within the "comfort zone".
Dehumidification
Air is dehumidified to prevent health issues and equipment damage. When warm, humid air is cooled, its relative humidity increases. If it reaches 100% saturation, moisture condenses. In an A-C unit, air is cooled below the target temperature (e.g., to 10°C) to make it supersaturated, causing excess moisture to precipitate out. This dry, cool air is then reheated to the desired temperature (e.g., 20°C). At this new temperature, the air's relative humidity will be at a comfortable level, typically around 50%. Without this process, inhaling highly humid, cold air could lead to respiratory issues. Additionally, moisture condensation on electronic equipment can cause damage.
Humidification
Humidification is necessary when the incoming air is too dry. Dry air can cause discomfort, skin irritation, and static electricity issues. The humidifier adds moisture back into the air, usually by spraying a fine mist of water, to raise the humidity to the desired level and bring the conditions back into the comfort zone.
The chart provides the following useful information:
- Dry Bulb Temperature: The actual air temperature, measured with a standard thermometer.
- Wet Bulb Temperature: The temperature of air measured with a thermometer covered by a water-soaked cloth, indicating evaporative cooling potential.
- Dew Point Temperature: The temperature at which air becomes saturated and condensation begins.
- Relative Humidity: The percentage of moisture in the air compared to the maximum moisture the air can hold at that temperature.
- Moisture Content: The amount of water vapor present in the air, expressed as a ratio (e.g., grams of moisture per kilogram of dry air).
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (16 Marks)
Auxiliary Machinery 🔥 Repeated 8x
With reference to a tubular heat exchanger, state the various types used on board a ship and explain with sketches how the construction, flow pattern, baffles, differ from each other depending upon the medium in use. (16)
Appeared In: Dec 2025 Nov 2025 Oct 2025 Jun 2025 Feb 2025 Jul 2024 Aug 2023 Jun 2026
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Tubular heat exchangers and their construction variations
Types used on board ship
- Shell and tube heat exchangers (coolers) for sea-water cooling of lubricating oil (lube oil cooler), freshwater (FW cooler), jacket cooling water, fuel oil (fuel heater/cooler), and for steam condensers.
- Double-pipe (hairpin) heat exchangers, which are two concentric pipes.
- U-tube / multipass shell-and-tube exchangers, and floating-head (floating tube sheet) exchangers to allow for thermal expansion.
- Plate heat exchangers are technically not tubular but are used in some duties; the question concerns tubular ones, so the focus is shell-and-tube.
Construction, flow pattern and baffles depending on the medium
Shell-and-tube construction: a cylindrical shell (e.g. steel, zinc-protected or cupro-nickel lined for sea water), with a bundle of tubes fitted between two tube sheets (headers) and secured by tube expansion/glands, the whole enclosed by channel covers. One fluid flows through the tubes (tube side) and the other through the shell in the space around the tubes (shell side), transferring heat through the tube walls.
Flow pattern: for clean fluids (e.g. oil/fresh water) a number of passes is arranged - the tubes are grouped so the fluid passes back and forth to give multipass; the shell fluid is guided across the tube bundle by baffles. Counter-flow is preferred for efficiency (hot and cold enter opposite ends); where a counter-flow cannot conveniently be arranged, a "two-pass" tube-side with shell fluid cross-flow is used. For sea water (dirty, scale-forming) the sea water is normally put on the tube side so it can be cleaned by rodding out/backflushing and so the tube bundle can be withdrawn - and a spacer/no-differential expansion design (floating head) accommodates the large thermal expansion.
Baffles: transverse baffles (segmental baffles) are fitted in the shell to force the shell-side fluid to flow back and forth across the tube bundle, increasing turbulence, mixing and the heat transfer coefficient, and supporting the long tube bundle to prevent sagging/vibration. Baffle spacing and cut shape differ with the medium: for low-viscosity or clean fluids closer baffles and a larger cut promote turbulence; for viscous oils (which have poor heat transfer and high pressure drop) the baffles are spaced wider and have a reduced cut to limit the pressure drop while still sweeping the tubes. For sea water, fewer/wider baffles reduce pressure drop and erosion.
Depending on the medium:
- Oil/fuel (viscous, poor convection): oil on shell side over a large tube area with wide, partly-cut baffles, or oil on tube side with multipass; materials tolerant of heating.
- Fresh water: may be either side; six-pass or four-pass tube arrangement common.
- Sea water (corrosive, scale forming): on the tube side, so tubes cleaned and selected in cupro-nickel; spacious shell, floating (expansion) heads to allow differential expansion; baffles arranged to maintain good cross-flow without excessive pressure drop.
- Steam (steam condenser): steam on the shell side with the cooling water in tubes; the condensate drains; baffles shaped/nozzles arranged to sweep the tubes and direct the steam.
Distinguishing sketch features: shell and flanged cover with tube bundle and tube sheets, removable floating head, the pattern of baffles (segmental plates with holes), the pass partitions, and the inlet/outlet nozzles for tube-side and shell-side.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q5 (16 Marks)
Steering & Deck Machinery 🔥 Repeated 6x
(a) Describe with the aid of sketches where necessary a vane type steering gear showing how the weight of the rudder and stock are carried and the arrangement that allow for wear down. (6)
(b) State how the vanes described in (a) are secured and the method of sealing the edges. (5)
(c) State how, if necessary, the steering gear is locked for rudder maintenance. (5)
Appeared In: Dec 2025 Oct 2025 Mar 2025 Sep 2023 Apr 2023 Feb 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- The rotor is fitted to the tapered rudder stock. The rudder stock carries the weight of the rudder, supported by a rudder carrier bearing.
- The stator is fixed to the ship’s structure, forming a rigid support.
- The fixed vanes are evenly spaced inside the stator bore, while the rotating vanes are equally spaced on the rotor.
- These vanes form two sets of pressure chambers in the annular space between the rotor and stator. Hydraulic fluid is supplied at pressure to one set of chambers, causing the rotor and rudder to rotate in the required direction based on the steering order from the wheelhouse.
- The weight of the rudder and rudder stock is carried by the rudder carrier bearing, which is mounted on steel chocks supported by thicker deck plating to ensure stability and handle the load.
- There is a vertical clearance between the stator flange and the anchor bracket to allow for rudder "jump" (vertical movement).
- Another clearance exists between the top of the anchor bracket and the stator flange to accommodate for rudder wear down or rudder drop over time. The total clearance provided is around 38 mm, allowing the system to absorb wear and vertical movement without affecting performance.
- The fixed and rotary vanes are made from modular cast iron and are secured to the rotor and stator using high-tensile steel dowel pins and cap screws to maintain strength and prevent detachment under stress. A key is fitted along the length of the rotary vanes to provide additional reinforcement and ensure the strength of the rotor.
- The sealing of the vanes is achieved using sealing strips made of cast iron. These strips are fitted into grooves along the edges of the vanes. The sealing strips are backed by elastically loaded synthetic rubber, which provides a tight seal by pressing against the faces of both the fixed and rotating vanes. This arrangement prevents hydraulic fluid leakage.
- Hydraulic Locking: This involves closing the manual isolating valves provided for each cylinder (in ram-type systems) or each vane chamber (in vane-type systems). This prevents hydraulic fluid flow, thus immobilizing the rudder.
- Mechanical Locking: Three methods are available:
- A spanner is fitted to the rudder stock head nut and secured to the ship's structure, directly preventing rudder movement.
- If provided, tow gigs are fitted between the crosshead and cylinder base, mechanically locking the steering mechanism
- (Assuming a braking system is integrated into the design) Engaging the brake will prevent any movement of the rudder.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q6 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting 🔥 Repeated 6x
(a) Describe with the aid of a sketch, the main engine ancillary equipment for automatic monitoring and regulation of fuel viscosity. (6)
(b) Explain the operation of equipment described in (a). (5)
(c) Discuss the single fuel concept. (5)
Appeared In: Jun 2026 Dec 2025 Nov 2025 Jun 2025 Jul 2024 Apr 2023
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Viscotherm with Differential Pressure (DP) Transmitter:
- The viscotherm consists of a capillary tube connected to the discharge side of a gear pump driven by an electric motor.
- A DP transmitter measures the pressure difference in the capillary tube, which is directly proportional to the viscosity of the fuel oil.
- The fuel oil passes through a heater controlled by a steam valve. The valve adjusts the steam flow to maintain the desired fuel viscosity.
- A controller compares the measured viscosity from the DP transmitter to the set point and sends a signal to regulate the steam valve.
- As fuel flows through the viscotherm, the gear pump diverts a portion of the fuel through the capillary tube.
- The DP transmitter measures the pressure difference across the capillary tube.
- The DP transmitter sends the viscosity data to the controller.
- The controller compares the measured viscosity to the set point value.
- If the viscosity deviates from the desired level, the controller adjusts the steam valve to increase or decrease the steam flow to the fuel heater.
- Adjusting the steam flow changes the fuel temperature, directly impacting viscosity to maintain optimal levels.
- Modern two-stroke engines are equipped with fuel circulation systems that ensure the fuel at injectors is always maintained at the correct temperature and viscosity.
- Continuous circulation eliminates the need to switch between HFO and low-sulphur fuel oil (LSFO) under normal conditions.
Advantages:
- Significant savings are achieved as residual fuel is cheaper than distillate fuel.
- Reduces the complexities and risks associated with frequent fuel changeovers, such as thermal shock and injector clogging.
Where local regulations demand the use of VLSFO, changeovers may still be necessary. However, automated systems simplify this process.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (16 Marks)
Cargo & Tankers 🔥 Repeated 4x
With reference to the carriage and pumping of liquefied gas cargo:
(a) Sketch a suitable pumping system labelling the component parts. (6)
(b) State;
(i) Why submerged hydraulically driven pumps are not used
(ii) How overheating of pump drive shaft bearings is avoided. (5)
(c) State, how the risk of fire and explosion in cargo tanks is obviated both in the loaded and discharged condition. (5)
Appeared In: Jan 2025 - 1 Sep 2023 Feb 2023 Jan 2017
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
(ii) Overheating of the pump drive shaft bearings is prevented by using the shaft housing (which also acts as a cargo riser) to cool and lubricate the bearings.
- Continuous boil-off gas reliquefaction
- Relief valves to release excess pressure
- Inert gas blanketing of the cargo hold; and
- If cargo hold is considered as secondary barrier, then if primary barrier/ cargo tank leaks then the flammable gas should not get oxygen to from an explosive mixture. So cargo hold is inverted.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q6 (16 Marks)
Control & Instrumentation 🔥 Repeated 4x
Explain the working principle of differential Pressure Transmitter with the help of diagram and describe the following parts with their usages.
(a) Zero and span calibration
(b) Negative feedback bellow
(c) Microamplifier functions
(d) Zero elevation concepts. (16)
Appeared In: Jul 2026 Feb 2024 Jan 2023 Jan 2025 - 1
Q7 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting 🔥 Repeated 2x
Sketch a transmission shaft coupling which enables the propeller shaft to be withdrawn
(a) describe the coupling and the method fitting and dismantling (8)
(b) state how the grip of the coupling can be checked when fitted (4)
(c) State what safety precaution should be taken when dismantling the coupling. (4)
Appeared In: Jan 2025 - 1 Nov 2022
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The thin inner sleeve has a bore slightly larger than the shaft diameter and its outer surface is tapered to match the taper on the bore of the outer sleeve. The nut and sealing ring close the annular space at the end of the sleeves. When the coupling is in position, the outer sleeve is hydraulically driven on the tapered inner sleeve. At the same time, oil is injected between the contact surfaces to separate them and thus overcome the friction between them. Oil for the operation is supplied by hand pumps, two for the forced lubrication and another hand or power pump for the riving oil pressure. When the outer sleeve has driven onto a predetermined position, the forced lubrication pressure is released and drained. Oil pressure is maintained in the hydraulic space until the oil between the sleeves drain and normal friction is restored. After disconnection hoses, plugs are fitted and rust prevention is applied to protect exposed seating. A sealing strip is brought to a set pressure in the hydraulic space. Then with the shafts supported, oil is forced into the sleeves. The outer sleeve slides off the inner at a rate controlled by the release of the hydraulic oil pressure.
When it is required to remove the propeller, the process is equally simple and even quicker with the injection of oil between the surfaces obviating the need for any form of heating or mechanical withdrawn equipment. Precautions are necessary to prevent the propeller from jumping at release.
(ii) The grip of the coupling is checked by measuring the diameter of the outer sleeve before and after tightening. The diameter increase should agree with the figure stamped on the sleeve.
(iii) To disconnect the coupling, oil pressure is brought to a set pressure in the hydraulic space. Then with the shafts supported, oil is forced between the sleeves. The outer sleeve slid off the inner at a rate controlled by the release of the hydraulic oil pressure. Care must be taken to release the hydraulic pressure very very slowly to avoid and prevent the propeller from jumping at the release of the hydraulic pressure. When it is required to remove the propeller, the process is equally simple and even quicker with the injection of oil between the surfaces obviating the need for any form of heating or mechanical withdrawal equipment. Precautions are necessary to prevent the propeller from jumping at release.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q8 (16 Marks)
General 🔥 Repeated 2x
(a) Describe, with the aid of a sketch, an open loop system for reducing SOx emissions from the exhaust gas, explaining how the system operates whilst the vessel is in open waters. (8)
(b) Describe, with the aid of a sketch, a closed loop system for reducing SOx emissions from the engine exhaust gas, explaining the operation of this unit and stating when it would be used. (8)
Appeared In: Jun 2026 Jan 2025 - 1
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
An open-loop scrubber system uses seawater to remove SOx from the engine exhaust gas. The system mainly uses the natural alkalinity of seawater, so no additional chemicals are normally required.
Operation
- Exhaust gas enters the bottom of the scrubber tower.
- Seawater is pumped into the top of the scrubber and sprayed through several stages of spray nozzles.
- The nozzles produce an evenly distributed spray pattern throughout the scrubber.
- As the exhaust gas passes through the water spray, the sulphur oxides (SOx) are absorbed by the water droplets under the required temperature and process conditions.
- SOx reacts with water and forms sulphuric acid.
- The natural alkalinity of seawater neutralises the acid, thereby removing SOx from the exhaust gas.
- The cleaned exhaust gas leaves through the top of the scrubber tower.
- The used seawater/wash water flows to the bottom of the scrubber and is discharged overboard.
- The wash water is treated and continuously monitored at the inlet and outlet to ensure that it meets the required discharge criteria.
- pH, turbidity and PAH (Polycyclic Aromatic Hydrocarbons) are continuously monitored in accordance with IMO/MARPOL Annex VI requirements and MEPC.184(59).
- When operated in compliance with the applicable discharge requirements, the treated wash water can be discharged to sea.
The open-loop scrubber reduces the SOx emissions from the exhaust gas to an equivalent level corresponding to 0.1% sulphur content in fuel. It is particularly suitable for vessels operating mainly in open waters, where compliant overboard discharge is permitted.
Example: LINEA MESSINA had an open-loop scrubber system installed and was the first vessel reported to operate commercially with a scrubber system. This enabled the vessel to meet the 0.1% sulphur emission requirement in EU ports and provided preparation for the 0.1% Emission Control Area (ECA) limit introduced in 2015.
Simple Sketch
Detailed Sketch:
A closed-loop scrubber system circulates the same scrubbing water continuously within the system. Fresh water and sodium hydroxide (NaOH/caustic soda) are added to maintain the required pH and SOx removal efficiency.
It is mainly used when a vessel is operating in ports, coastal areas or other areas where overboard discharge of scrubber wash water is prohibited or must be avoided.
Operation
- Exhaust gas enters through the bottom of the scrubber tower.
- Scrubbing water is pumped from the wet sump, through a cooler, to the top of the scrubber.
- The water is sprayed into the exhaust gas through spray nozzles.
- Water is also supplied to the middle section of the scrubber to further improve SOx removal efficiency.
- The scrubbing water passes through the packing bed and is collected at the bottom.
- The water absorbs SOx, heat and other components from the exhaust gas.
- The pH of the circulating scrubbing water is automatically monitored and controlled by alkali dosing.
- Caustic soda (NaOH) is automatically added to neutralise the acidity and maintain the required process pH and SOx removal efficiency.
- The cleaned process water is pumped back to the top of the scrubber and recirculated.
- Only a small quantity of bleed-off is continuously extracted from the circulating water to remove accumulated impurities.
- The bleed-off contains traces of oil and combustion products, and its pH is typically close to neutral.
- The bleed-off is sent to an emulsion-breaking water treatment unit/separator.
- Solids and oil are separated from the polluted water and form sludge.
- The sludge is pumped to the vessel's sludge storage tank.
- Clean effluent from the treatment unit may be discharged overboard when permitted, or transferred to an effluent holding tank when overboard discharge is to be avoided.
- The effluent quality is monitored before discharge.
- A bleed-off buffer tank may be provided before the treatment unit. This gives operational flexibility and allows the scrubber to continue operating even when the treatment unit is temporarily out of operation.
Wärtsilä Closed-Loop System
In the Wärtsilä closed-loop system, the wash water is continuously circulated within the scrubber. Only a small bleed-off is removed from the loop, while fresh water and alkali are added.
The SOx reduction efficiency can be approximately 97.15%, corresponding to reducing the fuel sulphur content from 3.5% to 0.1%.
Fresh-water consumption is case-dependent, but an estimated value of approximately 0.2 m³/MWh may be used. Fresh water is required to compensate for:
- Scrubbing-water evaporation losses.
- Extracted bleed-off.
- Periodic rinsing of the droplet separator at the top of the scrubber.
The fresh-water supply can be connected to the scrubbing-water wet sump or pump module.
The main components of the alkali feed system are:
- Alkali pump.
- Alkali feed control system.
- Alkali storage tank.
Caustic soda consumption by weight is approximately 6–15% of the diesel engine fuel-oil consumption, depending on the fuel sulphur content and the required cleaning efficiency.
Important Points
- Open-loop: Uses seawater, relies on its natural alkalinity, and the treated wash water is normally discharged overboard when permitted. It is mainly suited to open-water operation.
- Closed-loop: Uses fresh water + NaOH/caustic soda, continuously recirculates the scrubbing water, and removes a small bleed-off for treatment. It is used where overboard discharge is prohibited or needs to be avoided.
- Both systems remove SOx from the engine exhaust so that the resulting emissions are equivalent to operation on fuel with approximately 0.1% sulphur content.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (16 Marks)
General 🔥 Repeated 6x
(a) Describe, with the aid of a sketch, an open loop system for reducing SOx emissions from engine exhaust gas, explaining how the system operates whilst the vessel is in open waters. (8)
(b) Describe, with the aid of a sketch, a closed loop scrubber system for removing SOx from engine exhaust gas, explaining the operation of this unit and stating when it would be used. (8)
Appeared In: Nov 2025 Jun 2025 Jul 2024 Sep 2022 Jun 2026 Jan 2025 - 1
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
An open-loop scrubber system uses seawater to remove SOx from the engine exhaust gas. The system mainly uses the natural alkalinity of seawater, so no additional chemicals are normally required.
Operation
- Exhaust gas enters the bottom of the scrubber tower.
- Seawater is pumped into the top of the scrubber and sprayed through several stages of spray nozzles.
- The nozzles produce an evenly distributed spray pattern throughout the scrubber.
- As the exhaust gas passes through the water spray, the sulphur oxides (SOx) are absorbed by the water droplets under the required temperature and process conditions.
- SOx reacts with water and forms sulphuric acid.
- The natural alkalinity of seawater neutralises the acid, thereby removing SOx from the exhaust gas.
- The cleaned exhaust gas leaves through the top of the scrubber tower.
- The used seawater/wash water flows to the bottom of the scrubber and is discharged overboard.
- The wash water is treated and continuously monitored at the inlet and outlet to ensure that it meets the required discharge criteria.
- pH, turbidity and PAH (Polycyclic Aromatic Hydrocarbons) are continuously monitored in accordance with IMO/MARPOL Annex VI requirements and MEPC.184(59).
- When operated in compliance with the applicable discharge requirements, the treated wash water can be discharged to sea.
The open-loop scrubber reduces the SOx emissions from the exhaust gas to an equivalent level corresponding to 0.1% sulphur content in fuel. It is particularly suitable for vessels operating mainly in open waters, where compliant overboard discharge is permitted.
Example: LINEA MESSINA had an open-loop scrubber system installed and was the first vessel reported to operate commercially with a scrubber system. This enabled the vessel to meet the 0.1% sulphur emission requirement in EU ports and provided preparation for the 0.1% Emission Control Area (ECA) limit introduced in 2015.
Simple Sketch
Detailed Sketch:
A closed-loop scrubber system circulates the same scrubbing water continuously within the system. Fresh water and sodium hydroxide (NaOH/caustic soda) are added to maintain the required pH and SOx removal efficiency.
It is mainly used when a vessel is operating in ports, coastal areas or other areas where overboard discharge of scrubber wash water is prohibited or must be avoided.
Operation
- Exhaust gas enters through the bottom of the scrubber tower.
- Scrubbing water is pumped from the wet sump, through a cooler, to the top of the scrubber.
- The water is sprayed into the exhaust gas through spray nozzles.
- Water is also supplied to the middle section of the scrubber to further improve SOx removal efficiency.
- The scrubbing water passes through the packing bed and is collected at the bottom.
- The water absorbs SOx, heat and other components from the exhaust gas.
- The pH of the circulating scrubbing water is automatically monitored and controlled by alkali dosing.
- Caustic soda (NaOH) is automatically added to neutralise the acidity and maintain the required process pH and SOx removal efficiency.
- The cleaned process water is pumped back to the top of the scrubber and recirculated.
- Only a small quantity of bleed-off is continuously extracted from the circulating water to remove accumulated impurities.
- The bleed-off contains traces of oil and combustion products, and its pH is typically close to neutral.
- The bleed-off is sent to an emulsion-breaking water treatment unit/separator.
- Solids and oil are separated from the polluted water and form sludge.
- The sludge is pumped to the vessel's sludge storage tank.
- Clean effluent from the treatment unit may be discharged overboard when permitted, or transferred to an effluent holding tank when overboard discharge is to be avoided.
- The effluent quality is monitored before discharge.
- A bleed-off buffer tank may be provided before the treatment unit. This gives operational flexibility and allows the scrubber to continue operating even when the treatment unit is temporarily out of operation.
Wärtsilä Closed-Loop System
In the Wärtsilä closed-loop system, the wash water is continuously circulated within the scrubber. Only a small bleed-off is removed from the loop, while fresh water and alkali are added.
The SOx reduction efficiency can be approximately 97.15%, corresponding to reducing the fuel sulphur content from 3.5% to 0.1%.
Fresh-water consumption is case-dependent, but an estimated value of approximately 0.2 m³/MWh may be used. Fresh water is required to compensate for:
- Scrubbing-water evaporation losses.
- Extracted bleed-off.
- Periodic rinsing of the droplet separator at the top of the scrubber.
The fresh-water supply can be connected to the scrubbing-water wet sump or pump module.
The main components of the alkali feed system are:
- Alkali pump.
- Alkali feed control system.
- Alkali storage tank.
Caustic soda consumption by weight is approximately 6–15% of the diesel engine fuel-oil consumption, depending on the fuel sulphur content and the required cleaning efficiency.
Important Points
- Open-loop: Uses seawater, relies on its natural alkalinity, and the treated wash water is normally discharged overboard when permitted. It is mainly suited to open-water operation.
- Closed-loop: Uses fresh water + NaOH/caustic soda, continuously recirculates the scrubbing water, and removes a small bleed-off for treatment. It is used where overboard discharge is prohibited or needs to be avoided.
- Both systems remove SOx from the engine exhaust so that the resulting emissions are equivalent to operation on fuel with approximately 0.1% sulphur content.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q4 (16 Marks)
Auxiliary Machinery 🔥 Repeated 8x
With reference to tubular heat exchangers, state the various types of such heat exchangers used onboard a ship. Explain with sketches how the construction, flow pattern, baffles, differ from each other depending upon the medium in use. (16)
Appeared In: Dec 2025 Nov 2025 Oct 2025 Jun 2025 Feb 2025 Jul 2024 Aug 2023 Jun 2026
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Tubular heat exchangers and their construction variations
Types used on board ship
- Shell and tube heat exchangers (coolers) for sea-water cooling of lubricating oil (lube oil cooler), freshwater (FW cooler), jacket cooling water, fuel oil (fuel heater/cooler), and for steam condensers.
- Double-pipe (hairpin) heat exchangers, which are two concentric pipes.
- U-tube / multipass shell-and-tube exchangers, and floating-head (floating tube sheet) exchangers to allow for thermal expansion.
- Plate heat exchangers are technically not tubular but are used in some duties; the question concerns tubular ones, so the focus is shell-and-tube.
Construction, flow pattern and baffles depending on the medium
Shell-and-tube construction: a cylindrical shell (e.g. steel, zinc-protected or cupro-nickel lined for sea water), with a bundle of tubes fitted between two tube sheets (headers) and secured by tube expansion/glands, the whole enclosed by channel covers. One fluid flows through the tubes (tube side) and the other through the shell in the space around the tubes (shell side), transferring heat through the tube walls.
Flow pattern: for clean fluids (e.g. oil/fresh water) a number of passes is arranged - the tubes are grouped so the fluid passes back and forth to give multipass; the shell fluid is guided across the tube bundle by baffles. Counter-flow is preferred for efficiency (hot and cold enter opposite ends); where a counter-flow cannot conveniently be arranged, a "two-pass" tube-side with shell fluid cross-flow is used. For sea water (dirty, scale-forming) the sea water is normally put on the tube side so it can be cleaned by rodding out/backflushing and so the tube bundle can be withdrawn - and a spacer/no-differential expansion design (floating head) accommodates the large thermal expansion.
Baffles: transverse baffles (segmental baffles) are fitted in the shell to force the shell-side fluid to flow back and forth across the tube bundle, increasing turbulence, mixing and the heat transfer coefficient, and supporting the long tube bundle to prevent sagging/vibration. Baffle spacing and cut shape differ with the medium: for low-viscosity or clean fluids closer baffles and a larger cut promote turbulence; for viscous oils (which have poor heat transfer and high pressure drop) the baffles are spaced wider and have a reduced cut to limit the pressure drop while still sweeping the tubes. For sea water, fewer/wider baffles reduce pressure drop and erosion.
Depending on the medium:
- Oil/fuel (viscous, poor convection): oil on shell side over a large tube area with wide, partly-cut baffles, or oil on tube side with multipass; materials tolerant of heating.
- Fresh water: may be either side; six-pass or four-pass tube arrangement common.
- Sea water (corrosive, scale forming): on the tube side, so tubes cleaned and selected in cupro-nickel; spacious shell, floating (expansion) heads to allow differential expansion; baffles arranged to maintain good cross-flow without excessive pressure drop.
- Steam (steam condenser): steam on the shell side with the cooling water in tubes; the condensate drains; baffles shaped/nozzles arranged to sweep the tubes and direct the steam.
Distinguishing sketch features: shell and flanged cover with tube bundle and tube sheets, removable floating head, the pattern of baffles (segmental plates with holes), the pass partitions, and the inlet/outlet nozzles for tube-side and shell-side.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q6 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting 🔥 Repeated 6x
(a) Describe with the aid of a sketch, the main engine ancillary equipment for automatic monitoring and regulation of fuel viscosity. (8)
(b) Explain the operation of equipment described in (a). (4)
(c) Discuss the single fuel concept. (4)
Appeared In: Jun 2026 Dec 2025 Nov 2025 Jun 2025 Jul 2024 Apr 2023
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Viscotherm with Differential Pressure (DP) Transmitter:
- The viscotherm consists of a capillary tube connected to the discharge side of a gear pump driven by an electric motor.
- A DP transmitter measures the pressure difference in the capillary tube, which is directly proportional to the viscosity of the fuel oil.
- The fuel oil passes through a heater controlled by a steam valve. The valve adjusts the steam flow to maintain the desired fuel viscosity.
- A controller compares the measured viscosity from the DP transmitter to the set point and sends a signal to regulate the steam valve.
- As fuel flows through the viscotherm, the gear pump diverts a portion of the fuel through the capillary tube.
- The DP transmitter measures the pressure difference across the capillary tube.
- The DP transmitter sends the viscosity data to the controller.
- The controller compares the measured viscosity to the set point value.
- If the viscosity deviates from the desired level, the controller adjusts the steam valve to increase or decrease the steam flow to the fuel heater.
- Adjusting the steam flow changes the fuel temperature, directly impacting viscosity to maintain optimal levels.
- Modern two-stroke engines are equipped with fuel circulation systems that ensure the fuel at injectors is always maintained at the correct temperature and viscosity.
- Continuous circulation eliminates the need to switch between HFO and low-sulphur fuel oil (LSFO) under normal conditions.
Advantages:
- Significant savings are achieved as residual fuel is cheaper than distillate fuel.
- Reduces the complexities and risks associated with frequent fuel changeovers, such as thermal shock and injector clogging.
Where local regulations demand the use of VLSFO, changeovers may still be necessary. However, automated systems simplify this process.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q8 (16 Marks)
Auxiliary Machinery 🔥 Repeated 4x
(a) Sketch a line diagram showing the layout components of a hydraulic system with a variable delivery, pressure compensated pump and accumulator, suitable for the operation of deck machinery. (8)
(b) Describe the operation of the system sketched in (a). (8)
Appeared In: Jun 2026 Jun 2025 Jul 2024 Jun 2023
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
When the pumping capacity exceeds load requirements, the system pressure increases above a set value, at which point the pressure compensator acts to take the pump off stroke. A relief valve is fitted in case of malfunction of the compensator.
Fluid flow to the load may be controlled by a variety of methods one of which is the simple three position valve shown.
This system suits an installation containing several high demand units such as deck winch hydraulics
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q1 (16 Marks)
Control & Instrumentation 🔥 Repeated 4x
Explain the working principle of differential Pressure Transmitter with the help of diagram and explain the following parts with their usages. (16)
(a) Zero and span calibration
(b) Negative feedback bellow
(d) Pilot amplifier functions
(d) Zero Elevation Concept
Appeared In: Jul 2026 Feb 2024 Jan 2023 Jan 2025 - 1
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
A Differential Pressure Transmitter measures the difference in pressure between two points and converts it into a pneumatic or electrical output signal. The working principle involves the use of a sensing element (e.g., a diaphragm or bellows) that deforms proportionally to the applied pressure difference. This deformation is converted into a measurable signal, which can then be processed and transmitted to control systems or indicators.
- The system comprises two pressure chambers, high-pressure (H) and low-pressure (L), separated by a diaphragm.
- Pressure from two points (H and L) is applied to either side of a flexible diaphragm or bellows within a sealed process chamber. The difference in pressure (ΔP = H - L) causes the diaphragm/bellows to deflect proportionally.
- This deflection is precisely measured by a mechanism, often incorporating a capacitive sensor or LVDT (Linear Variable Differential Transformer).
- The displacement of the diaphragm/bellows is converted into an electrical signal (e.g., 4-20 mA). This often involves a Wheatstone bridge configuration if using a strain gauge or a similar technique based on the chosen sensor.
- This electrical signal is then amplified by a pilot amplifier (see section (c)) and transmitted as the output signal.
As defined in the provided text, zero calibration adjusts the output to correspond to zero differential pressure (H = L). Span calibration adjusts the output range to accurately reflect the full differential pressure range the transmitter is designed to measure. Adjustment screws on the transmitter casing allow for these calibrations, often requiring specialized tools and procedures to ensure accuracy.
A negative feedback bellows is used in some differential pressure transmitters to improve accuracy and stability. It works by counteracting the deflection of the main sensing element. A portion of the output signal is used to generate a counter pressure within this feedback bellows, effectively reducing the deflection from the main sensing element and thus increasing the linearity and stability of the instrument. This reduces the sensitivity to small pressure changes but improves overall accuracy and reduces hysteresis.
The pilot amplifier is essential for converting the weak signal generated by the displacement sensing mechanism into a usable output signal. It amplifies the signal and converts it from a pneumatic signal (in some older designs) or a low-level electrical signal into a standardized 4-20 mA or 0-10 V signal for transmission to a control system. It might use a transducer like a strain gauge to perform this conversion.
When measuring liquid level using a differential pressure transmitter, the transmitter may not be installed precisely at the zero level of the tank. The "zero elevation" concept accounts for this difference in height. The hydrostatic pressure difference due to the elevation difference between the transmitter and the true zero level must be compensated in the output signal calculations. This ensures the accurate measurement of the liquid level even when the transmitter is not located at the tank's bottom. This compensation can involve either adding or subtracting a pressure offset from the raw differential pressure measurement, depending on the transmitter's configuration.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q2 (16 Marks)
Auxiliary Machinery 🔥 Repeated 6x
(a) Sketch and describe a high pressure cut-out in a refrigeration system. (6)
(b) The refrigeration compressor has stopped due to operation of the h. p. cut-out. Explain:
(i) The possible causes. (3)
(ii) How these causes would be found and possible remedies. (3)
(c) What steps are taken if the compressor "short-cycle" on low pressure cut-out? (4)
Appeared In: Jul 2026 Feb 2026 Jul 2025 Feb 2024 Jul 2019 Apr 2019
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- Dirty condenser
- Overcharge of refrigerant
- Condenser coolant failure
- Clogged filter drier
- Malfunctioning expansion valve
- Faulty pressure switch
(ii)
- Dirty condenser - Visual inspection of condenser, clean the condenser
- Overcharge of refrigerant - check the refrigerant level in sight glass, reduce the refrigerant charge.
- Condenser coolant failure - check in/out pressures, clean the condenser.
- Clogged filter drier - visual inspection of drier, change the drier
- Malfunctioning expansion valve - inspect expansion valve, repair or replace the valve
- Faulty pressure switch - inspect the switch, repair or replace the pressure switch
- To provide sufficient suction pressure control difference according to the system loading and frequency of room inspection
- Refrigerant charges should be adequate, the system should be without leaks. The suction line filter is to be kept clean with no obstruction in suction line.
- The leaky solenoid valve is to be replaced. The evaporator coil is to be defrosted regularly and ensure the inner surface is clean.
- Piston rings, cylinder liner, discharge valve, by-pass valve and safety valve are to be maintained in good condition. Compressor capacity is to be selected according to the system requirement and nature of loading.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q6 (16 Marks)
Control & Instrumentation 🔥 Repeated 4x
(a) Sketch and describe a valve suitable for reducing air pressure and maintaining the reduced pressure within close limits. (8)
(b) Describe the processes through which air from the starting air receivers should be treated before it is used in a pneumatic control system. (8)
Appeared In: Jul 2026 Sep 2024 Nov 2023 Mar 2023
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Operation:
- The valve operates based on the balance of forces acting upon it:
- Downward Force: P1 × A, where P1 is the inlet pressure and A is the diaphragm area.
- Upward Force: (P1−P2) × a+f, where P2 is the outlet pressure, a is the valve area, and f is the spring force.
At equilibrium:
- P1×A = (P1−P2) × a+f
- If P1, A, and a are constant, P2 is directly proportional to the spring force f.
- The discharge pressure P2 can be adjusted by rotating the adjustment screw, which changes the spring force f.
Hence, if supply pressure is kept constant, the discharge pressure can be reduced or increased by rotating the adjustment screw.
process:
- The high-pressure air from the main air receiver is passed through a pressure-reducing valve, lowering the pressure to a range of 7–8 bar suitable for pneumatic systems.
- The air is passed through a filter to remove oil and water carried over from the compressor. This step eliminates contaminants that could affect system performance.
- The filtered air is sent through a dryer containing materials like silica gel or activated alumina to remove residual moisture. Dry air prevents corrosion and freezing in control lines.
- Regular drainage of accumulated water, oil, and condensate is necessary to maintain the air quality and prevent blockages in the system.
Now the air is clean & dry enough to be suitable for use in pneumatic control systems.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q8 (16 Marks)
Control & Instrumentation 🔥 Repeated 4x
With reference to feed regulation:
(a) Describe, with the aid of sketches, the operation of a boiler feed water regulator controlled by at least two other parameters besides water level in the drum. (8)
(b) Give reasons for the inclusion of the other elements besides water level in controlling feed flow (4)
(c) Deduce the possible effects on the system when the drain valve in the constant leg in the level transmitter starts to leak. (4)
Appeared In: Feb 2024 Oct 2022 Jul 2026 Feb 2026
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The three elements (parameters) used are:
- Steam flow rate
- Feed water flow rate
- Water level in the drum
Each parameter transmits a signal proportional to its measured value.
- Steam flow and feed flow signals pass through individual square-root converters and are compared in a relay.
- The relay sends a signal to the controller only when steam flow and feed flow are in a 1:1 ratio.
- Once this condition is met, the controller compares the drum level signal (from a float level transmitter) with the setpoint.
- Based on the deviation, the controller sends an air signal to the feed water control valve, which opens or closes to maintain the desired water level.
As steam demand normalises, the saturation temperature rises, and bubble formation ceases, causing the water level to fall—known as the "shrinkage effect." Including steam flow and water flow, elements help counteract these effects, ensuring an accurate reflection of the true water level and allowing the feed water control system to respond appropriately.
The Proportional-Integral (P+I) controller misinterprets this as a higher water level and reduces the feed water flow by closing the feed control valve. This incorrect response leads to instability within the system and results in erratic water level indications.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q9 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting 🔥 Repeated 3x
(a) Sketch and describe a Pilgrim Nut for securing a propeller to the screw shaft. (8)
(b) Describe how this device is used to loosen the propeller on the shaft when removal or inspection becomes necessary (4)
(c) Give reasons why this method is considered to be superior to all other methods. (4)
Appeared In: Jul 2026 Feb 2026 Feb 2024
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The Pilgrim Nut is a hydraulic device used for mounting and removing a propeller from the tapered tail shaft. It provides an accurate, safe and controlled method of pushing the propeller onto the shaft without hammering.
Construction and Working:
- The propeller is mounted on a tapered tail shaft and secured by a Pilgrim Nut.
- The Pilgrim Nut contains an internal nitrile rubber tube (hydraulic bladder).
- When hydraulic oil is pumped into the rubber tube, it expands and pushes a steel loading ring against the propeller hub.
- This hydraulic force pushes the propeller uniformly onto the taper, producing the required interference fit.
- A dial indicator (clock gauge) is fitted to measure the actual movement (push-up) of the propeller hub relative to the shaft.
- The loading ring should not move outward by more than one-third of its width from the flush position; otherwise, the nitrile rubber tube may rupture.
- Before mounting:
- The shaft taper and propeller bore are thoroughly cleaned and degreased to obtain predictable friction.
- (Exception: Cast steel propellers are lightly wiped with an oil-soaked rag as recommended by the manufacturer.)
- Blue marking (Prussian blue) is applied on the shaft taper to check proper contact between the shaft and propeller bore.
- The temperatures of both the shaft and propeller hub are recorded because they affect the required hydraulic pressure. The manufacturer's push-up table/graph (push-up curve) is used to determine the correct final push-up pressure.
- The propeller is pushed up successively in approximately 25 mm stages, with hydraulic pressure applied gradually while continuously monitoring:
- Hydraulic pressure
- Propeller movement using the dial indicator
- Once the required push-up distance is achieved, the Pilgrim Nut is finally tightened using a tommy bar.
- The assembly is then secured by a locking plate and locking bolts to prevent loosening during service.
The Pilgrim Nut can also be used as a hydraulic withdrawal tool by reversing its position.
Procedure:
- Remove the locking plate and bolts, then loosen and unscrew the Pilgrim Nut.
- Reverse the Pilgrim Nut so that the loading ring faces the withdrawal plate.
- Fit the withdrawal plate in front of the nut and secure it using studs, as shown in the sketch.
- Connect the hydraulic pump to the Pilgrim Nut.
- Apply hydraulic pressure.
- The expanding nitrile rubber tube pushes the loading ring against the withdrawal plate, producing an equal and opposite force that pulls the propeller hub off the shaft taper.
- As the taper grip breaks, the propeller moves away from the shaft and can be safely removed.
Safety Precautions:
- Support the propeller using chain blocks, lifting tackles or suitable lifting gear before releasing it.
- Place wooden blocks between the Pilgrim Nut and the propeller, leaving only a gap slightly greater than the push-up distance. This prevents violent movement when the taper suddenly releases.
The Pilgrim Nut method is considered superior to conventional propeller mounting methods because:
- Accurate and controlled push-up is achieved using hydraulic pressure and dial gauge measurements, ensuring the correct interference fit.
- No hammering or heavy mechanical force is required, eliminating damage to the propeller hub, shaft taper and bearings.
- Quick, safe and easily reversible for both installation and removal, reducing maintenance time and minimizing the risk of accidents.
- Uniform hydraulic loading ensures even distribution of forces, reducing stress concentrations.
- The manufacturer's push-up curve/graph allows precise control by considering shaft and hub temperature, resulting in consistent and reliable mounting.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q1 (16 Marks)
Auxiliary Machinery 🔥 Repeated 2x
With reference to centrifugal pumps and pumping systems:
(a) Under what conditions, a centrifugal pump require a priming device for pump to operate normally? (6)
(b) Draw a neat graph and explain the performance curves of a centrifugal pump. (10)
Appeared In: Aug 2026 Mar 2024
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
A centrifugal pump requires priming when the pump casing and suction line are not completely filled with liquid before starting, particularly when:
- The pump is installed above the liquid level, i.e. under a suction-lift arrangement.
- The pump and/or suction pipe contains air or vapour after the pump has been stopped, drained, opened for maintenance, or has lost its prime.
- The pump is started for the first time after installation.
- Air has entered through the suction side due to leakage, a defective foot valve, or an improperly filled suction line.
Reason for priming
A centrifugal pump cannot normally pump air effectively. If the impeller rotates with air in the casing, it produces only a small pressure difference, which is generally insufficient to draw the liquid up through the suction pipe. Therefore, the pump casing and suction line must first be filled with liquid and the air removed.
Priming may be carried out by:
- Filling the pump casing and suction line manually.
- Using a foot valve to retain liquid in the suction line.
- Using an external priming device, such as a vacuum pump or ejector.
Once the casing and suction line are filled with liquid, the rotating impeller can produce the required pressure difference and the pump will operate normally.
The performance curves of a centrifugal pump show the relationship between the pump capacity and its operating characteristics. These curves are normally obtained by testing the pump with water at a constant rotational speed.
The horizontal axis represents the capacity or flow rate, (Q). Depending on the graph, the vertical axes represent head, efficiency and brake horsepower (power).
The main performance curves are as follows:
1. Head–Capacity Curve ((H-Q))
The head produced by the pump decreases as the flow rate increases.
- At zero flow, the pump develops its maximum or shut-off head.
- As the discharge or capacity increases, the head gradually decreases.
- At high flow rates, the head falls rapidly.
This is the characteristic downward-sloping pump head curve.
2. Efficiency–Capacity Curve ((\eta-Q))
The efficiency curve shows how effectively the pump converts the mechanical energy supplied to the shaft into useful hydraulic energy.
- At zero flow, the efficiency is zero.
- As the flow increases, the efficiency rises.
- It reaches a maximum value known as the Best Efficiency Point (BEP).
- Beyond the BEP, the efficiency decreases again as the flow increases further.
Thus, the efficiency curve is approximately bell-shaped or parabolic.
The pump should preferably be operated at or close to the BEP, as this gives maximum efficiency and generally results in lower vibration, noise and mechanical wear.
3. Brake Horsepower–Capacity Curve ((BHP-Q))
The brake horsepower curve shows the power required to drive the pump at different flow rates.
- The power requirement generally increases as the capacity increases.
- Therefore, the driving motor must be selected with sufficient capacity to meet the maximum expected power requirement.
Best Efficiency Point (BEP)
As shown in the graph, the BEP is the point at which the pump operates at maximum efficiency. It corresponds to a particular combination of flow rate, head and power requirement.
For satisfactory and economical operation, the pump should normally be selected so that its normal operating point is as close as practicable to the BEP.
System Operating or Duty Point
A centrifugal pump does not operate independently of the piping system. The actual operating condition depends on the system head, which consists of:
- Static head, and
- Frictional and other flow losses in the piping system.
When the system head curve is superimposed on the pump head-capacity curve, the point of intersection is called the:
- Operating Point, or
- Duty Point.
At this point, the head developed by the pump is exactly equal to the head required by the system.
Ideally, the pumping system should be designed so that the normal duty point lies at or near the pump's Best Efficiency Point (BEP).
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q3 (16 Marks)
Propulsion & Shafting 🔥 Repeated 11x
With regards to main transmission shaft flange coupling arrangements:
(a) Sketch a hollow type coupling bolt and the hydraulic head/nut and loading rod which are used to fit it. (8)
(b) Describe how the bolt is fitted. (4)
(c) State the advantage of the hollow coupling bolt as compared to the traditional type of coupling bolt. (4)
Appeared In: Aug 2026 Jul 2025 Apr 2024 Mar 2024 Jun 2023 Feb 2021 Jan 2021 Mar 2020 Jun 2019 Jul 2018 Jan 2018
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
- A bolt with a diameter slightly larger than the flange coupling bore diameter (D + 0.00025D) is selected.
- A push rod (loading rod) is inserted into the hollow coupling bolt, and a hydraulic head is attached.
- Hydraulic oil pressure of approximately 30,000 N/m² is applied, causing the bolt to stretch (approximately 0.021mm) and temporarily reduce its diameter by 0.00025D. This allows easy insertion of the bolt into the flange bore.
- The bolt is placed inside the bore by hand, and the nut is tightened and nipped up using a spanner.
- The hydraulic pressure is then released, allowing the bolt to expand and create a secure interference fit within the bore. This generates a tensile stress of approximately 15.5 tons/m², ensuring a firm grip.
- After fitting, the hydraulic assembly (items A, B, and C) is removed, and a protective plastic cap is placed over the bolt head.
- The hollow bolt design allows precise control of the bolt load, ensuring optimal tightening and load distribution.
- Diametrical re-expansion after hydraulic pressure release ensures a strong interference fit of the shank within the flange bore, reducing the risk of loosening.
- Hollow coupling bolts are easier to remove for inspection and maintenance, significantly reducing dismantling and fitting time.
- Unlike traditional bolts, hollow coupling bolts minimize wear on the bore, eliminating the need for frequent re-machining.
- Replacement of hollow coupling bolts is less frequent, reducing operational downtime and maintenance costs.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q4 (16 Marks)
Steering & Deck Machinery 🔥 Repeated 3x
With reference to electrohydraulic steering gear systems with four rams:
(a) With the aid of a sketch describe the working principle of hydraulic pump. (8)
(b) Explain the method adopted to prevent hydraulic oil leakage along the rams (4)
(c) Discuss the methods adopted to prevent damage to the steering gear due to jumping of rudder in heavy seas. (4)
Appeared In: Aug 2026 Jul 2025 Mar 2024
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
The Hele-Shaw pump, commonly used in electrohydraulic steering gear systems, is a variable-displacement, reversible axial-piston pump. Its delivery and direction of flow are controlled by changing the position or angle of the circular floating ring/swash plate.
Working Principle
The pump consists of a rotating cylinder barrel containing a number of pistons, the outer ends of which are connected through slippers to a circular floating ring or swash-plate arrangement. The cylinder barrel rotates with the driving shaft, while the ports are arranged through a central valve arrangement.
1. Neutral Position – No Pumping
When the circular ring accommodating the slippers is concentric with the central valve arrangement, the pistons do not have any relative reciprocating motion inside their cylinders.
Therefore:
- No change in cylinder volume takes place.
- No oil is sucked into the cylinders.
- No oil is discharged.
- Although the pump and cylinder barrel continue to rotate, no fluid is delivered.
This is the neutral or zero-delivery position.
Similarly, in the swash-plate type arrangement, when the swash plate is in the vertical or neutral position, no pumping takes place.
2. Ring/Swash Plate Moved to One Side
When the circular floating ring is pulled to the right, or the swash plate is tilted in one direction, the pistons are forced to move to and fro within their cylinders as the cylinder barrel rotates.
This produces the pumping action.
For example:
- The lower piston moves inwards and discharges fluid through the lower port.
- As the cylinder barrel continues to rotate, the piston reaches the horizontal position and then starts moving outwards.
- During the outward movement, fluid is drawn into the cylinder through the upper port.
Thus, with the ring displaced to one side:
- Upper ports act as suction ports.
- Lower ports act as discharge ports.
The pump therefore delivers hydraulic oil in one direction.
3. Ring/Swash Plate Moved to the Opposite Side
If the circular ring is pushed to the left, or the swash plate is tilted in the opposite direction, the reciprocating movement of the pistons is reversed relative to the ports.
Consequently:
- The previous suction ports become discharge ports.
- The previous discharge ports become suction ports.
Thus, the direction of hydraulic oil flow is reversed.
This reversible flow enables the hydraulic rams of the steering gear to move in either direction, thereby turning the rudder to port or starboard.
Swash-Pump Operation – Summary
- The driving shaft rotates the cylinder barrel and pistons.
- An external trunnion shaft enables the swash plate to be moved or tilted about its axis.
- When the swash plate is in the vertical/neutral position, no pumping takes place.
- When the swash plate is tilted in one direction, the pistons reciprocate, causing one set of ports to act as suction ports and the ports on the opposite side of the centreline to act as discharge ports.
- When the swash plate is tilted in the opposite direction, the direction of fluid flow is reversed.
- The stroke length of the pistons, and hence the quantity of fluid delivered, depends on the angle of tilt of the swash plate. A greater angle of tilt produces a longer piston stroke and greater pump delivery.
In Summary
The Hele-Shaw pump provides:
- Zero delivery when the swash plate/floating ring is in the neutral position.
- Variable delivery depending on the angle of displacement or tilt.
- Reversible flow when the direction of displacement is reversed.
Hydraulic oil leakage along the ram is prevented by providing an effective ram sealing arrangement at the point where the ram passes through the cylinder cover or gland.
The arrangement generally consists of:
- Gland packing or sealing rings: Special seals are fitted around the ram to prevent hydraulic oil from escaping along the reciprocating surface.
- Multiple sealing elements: A combination of pressure seals, backup rings and scraper/wiper rings may be used to provide reliable sealing.
- Wiper or scraper ring: This removes dirt, moisture and other contaminants from the ram surface before it enters the cylinder, thereby protecting the main sealing elements.
- Drainage/leakage collection arrangement: The gland area may be provided with a leakage collection or drain arrangement so that any seal leakage is detected and prevented from spreading into the steering gear compartment.
The ram surface must also be kept smooth, clean and free from corrosion or scoring, since a damaged ram surface can rapidly destroy the seals and cause excessive oil leakage.
In heavy seas, a large external force acting on the rudder may cause sudden movement or vertical jumping of the rudder. Suitable arrangements are therefore provided to protect the steering gear, tiller and hydraulic rams from excessive shock loads.
1. Relief or safety valves
- When a heavy sea strikes the rudder, the external force can cause the hydraulic pressure in the steering system to rise sharply.
- Safety or relief valves are fitted to prevent excessive pressure from damaging the hydraulic system. If the pressure exceeds the preset value, the relief valve opens and allows hydraulic oil to bypass. This relieves the excessive pressure and permits controlled movement, thereby protecting the steering gear components.
2. Jumping clearance
- A specified vertical jumping clearance is maintained between the structural stops associated with the rudder and the ship's hull.
- This clearance is carefully designed to be less than the internal clearance between the tiller and the steering gear ram casing. Therefore, if the rudder moves vertically due to heavy seas, the external structural stop takes the load before the tiller or crosshead can strike and damage the steering gear components.
3. Jumping bars or stop pads
- Heavy-duty jumping bars or stop pads are fitted to the hull structure.
- If the rudder jumps upward, it contacts these solid structural stops first. The stops limit the vertical movement of the rudder and prevent the internal tiller or crosshead from striking the hydraulic rams or actuators, thereby avoiding serious mechanical damage.
4. Rudder carrier bearing
- A robust rudder carrier bearing supports the weight of the rudder assembly and limits excessive vertical or lateral movement.
- By reducing unwanted play, the carrier bearing helps reduce the severity of shock loading and impacts when the rudder is subjected to heavy sea forces.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q7 (16 Marks)
Fire Protection & Safety 🔥 Repeated 3x
With reference to Automatic sprinkler systems for firefighting purposes:
(a) Explain, with the aid of a Heat Release versus Time diagram, the difference between fire control and fire suppression. (6)
(b) State the limitations of using glass bulbs to activate sprinkler heads and suggest, with reasons, an alternative mechanism. (4)
(c) The safety devices incorporated in the system. (3)
(d) The parameters governing the volume of the pressure tank. (3)
Appeared In: Aug 2026 Dec 2023 Sep 2022
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Fire suppression can be defined as quickly lowering the heat release rate of a fire and preventing its regrowth using sufficient application of water through flames to the seat of the fire.
Key Differences in Performance
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model
Q8 (16 Marks)
Refrigeration & Air Conditioning 🔥 Repeated 2x
Explain vapor compression refrigeration cycle on T-S and PH diagram and explain the purpose of EACH of the following: (16)
(a) Expansion valve
(b) Room thermostat
(c) High pressure cut out.
(d) Equalizing line.
Appeared In: Aug 2026 Mar 2024
Show Verified Text Answer Hide Verified Text Answer
▼
✓ Text Solution (Verified Exam Model Answer)
Suggest improvements / alternative answer
Vapor Compression Refrigeration Cycle
The vapour compression refrigeration cycle consists of four main processes:
- Compression – 1 → 2
- Condensation – 2 → 3
- Expansion – 3 → 4
- Evaporation – 4 → 1
1. T-S Diagram
- 1 → 2: Compression: Refrigerant vapour from the evaporator is compressed in the compressor. Ideally, compression is isentropic, so entropy remains constant.
- 2 → 3: Condensation: High-pressure, high-temperature vapour passes through the condenser and rejects heat to the surroundings. The refrigerant changes from vapour to liquid.
- 3 → 4: Expansion: High-pressure liquid passes through the expansion valve. Pressure and temperature drop suddenly. The process is approximately constant enthalpy (isenthalpic).
- 4 → 1: Evaporation: The low-pressure refrigerant absorbs heat from the refrigerated space and evaporates, producing the cooling effect.
2. P-H Diagram
- 1 → 2: Pressure and enthalpy increase during compression.
- 2 → 3: Pressure remains approximately constant while heat is rejected and the refrigerant condenses.
- 3 → 4: Pressure drops through the expansion valve, while enthalpy remains approximately constant.
- 4 → 1: Pressure remains approximately constant while the refrigerant absorbs heat and evaporates.
The expansion valve:
- Reduces the pressure of the liquid refrigerant from condenser pressure to evaporator pressure.
- Causes a corresponding drop in refrigerant temperature.
- Meters the correct quantity of refrigerant entering the evaporator.
- Produces a mixture of liquid and vapour at the evaporator inlet.
- The expansion process is approximately isenthalpic, i.e. h₃ = h₄.
Purpose: To provide the required pressure reduction and control the refrigerant flow into the evaporator.
The room thermostat controls the temperature of the refrigerated space.
- It senses the room/cold-space temperature.
- When the temperature rises above the set value, it starts or keeps the compressor running.
- When the required temperature is reached, it stops the compressor or signals the control system to stop it.
- It therefore prevents excessive cooling and maintains the required room temperature.
Purpose: To automatically maintain the refrigerated space at the desired temperature.
The high-pressure cut-out is a safety device fitted on the high-pressure side of the refrigeration system.
- It senses the discharge/condenser pressure.
- If the pressure rises above the preset safe limit, it stops the compressor.
- It protects the compressor, condenser and other components from excessive pressure.
- Causes of high pressure may include poor condenser cooling, dirty condenser, inadequate cooling-water/air flow, overcharging or non-condensable gases.
- The fault should be investigated and rectified before restarting the system.
Purpose: To protect the refrigeration plant against dangerously high discharge pressure.
The equalizing line is normally associated with a thermostatic expansion valve (TXV).
- It connects the evaporator outlet/suction line to the pressure-sensing side of the TXV.
- It allows the TXV to sense the actual evaporator outlet pressure.
- This pressure is used together with the sensing-bulb temperature to control the refrigerant flow and maintain the required superheat.
- It is particularly important where there is a significant pressure drop between the evaporator outlet and the TXV sensing point.
Purpose: To transmit the actual evaporator pressure to the TXV so that the valve can correctly control refrigerant flow and maintain proper superheat.
📐
Verified Examination Diagram / Sketch
Exam Model